Roads & Transport Authority 1048/2 ط:عورﺷﻣﻟا 2020 وﺑﺳﻛا ضرﻌﻣﻟ قرطﻟا ﺔﻛﺑﺷ رﯾوطﺗ

ROADS & TRANSPORT AUTHORITY
1048/2 ‫ ط‬:‫اﻟﻣﺷروع‬
2020 ‫ﺗطوﯾر ﺷﺑﻛﺔ اﻟطرق ﻟﻣﻌرض اﻛﺳﺑو‬
PROJECT: R1048/2
IMPROVEMENTS OF EXPO 2020 ROADS NETWORK
TENDER DOCUMENTS
VOLUME 2 – Part III
DUBAI MUNICIPALITY DRAINAGE

AND IRRIGATION SPECIFICATIONS
EMPLOYER:
Roads & Transport Authority

Roads Department
P.O. Box 118899
Dubai – U.A.E.
RTA May 2017

R1048: Improvements of EXPO 2020 Roads Network
Sewerage and Drainage Specifications Volume 2 Part III
PROJECT R1048/2:
IMPROVEMENTS OF EXPO 2020
ROADS NETWORK
GENERAL INDEX
Volume 1 - Tenderer & Contract Conditions
Volume 2 – Part I - General Specifications
Volume 2 – Part II A - Particular Specifications
Volume 2 – Part II B - Particular Specifications
Volume 2 – Part II C - Particular Specifications
Volume 2 – Part III - Dubai Sewerage and Drainage Master Plan

Standard Specifications
Volume 2 – Part IV - Appendix to Dubai Sewerage and Drainage

Master Plan Standard Specifications
Volume 3 - Bill of Quantities
Volume 4 - Tender and Contract Drawings
Volume 5 - Soil Investigation Report
May 2017 Tender Documents Page i

PROJECT R1048:
ROADS NETWORK
DUBAI SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE
SPECIFICATIONS
Volume 2 – PART III
CONTENTS
Page
1.0 GENERAL 1/1
1.1 GENERAL INFORMATION 1/1

1.1.1 Preamble 1/1
1.1.2 Abbreviations 1/1
1.1.3 Datum 1/2
1.1.4 Right of Way 1/2
1.1.5 Geotechnical Information 1/3
1.1.6 Interpretation of Drawings 1/3
1.1.7 Responsibility of Contractor 1/3
1.1.8 Governing Standards 1/3
1.1.9 Groundwater Levels in Dubai 1/3
1.1.10 Pollution of Khor Dubai or Arabian Gulf 1/3
1.2 SITE OFFICE FOR ENGINEER’S REPRESENTATIVE 1/4

1.2.1 General 1/4
1.2.2 Specific Requirements 1/9
1.2.3 Location of Contract Offices and Other Contract Facilities 1/10
1.2.4 Service Authorities 1/10
1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1/11

1.3.1 Materials 1/11
1.3.2 Setting-Out the Work 1/11
1.3.3 Notice of Operations 1/12
1.3.4 Traffic Safety and Control 1/12
1.3.5 Access to Private Land 1/13
1.3.6 Roads and Site to be Kept Clean 1/13
1.3.7 Compensation for Damage to Property 1/13
1.3.8 Existing Services 1/13
1.3.9 Continuous Working 1/14
1.3.10 Temporary Staging for Structures 1/14
1.3.11 Water Supply 1/15
1.3.12 Filling in Holes and Trenches 1/15
1.3.13 Protection of Works from Weather 1/15
May 2017 Tender Documents Page ii

1.3.14 Keeping the Works Free from Water 1/15

1.3.15 Sign Boards 1/15
1.3.16 Templates 1/16
1.3.17 Assistance to the Engineer 1/16
1.3.18 Surveying Equipment 1/17
1.3.18.1 Expendable Materials 1/19
1.3.19 Laboratory (See Appendix, Part 3 of 3) 1/19
1.3.19.1 General 1/19
1.3.20 Minimum Test Requirements 1/20
1.3.21 Sources of Materials 1/23
1.3.22 Programming the Progress of the Works 1/23
1.3.23 Progress Reports 1/24
1.3.24 Progress Photographs 1/24
1.3.25 Flows in Pipelines and at Pumping Stations 1/26
1.3.26 Suppression of Noise 1/26
1.3.27 Closing of Roads 1/26
1.3.28 NOC from Relevant Authorities 1/27
2.0 EARTHWORKS
2.1 CLEARING & GRUBBING 2/1
2.2 REMOVAL OF STRUCTURES AND OBSTRUCTIONS 2/1

2.2.1 General 2/1
2.2.2 Removal of Pipes 2/2
2.3 STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION 2/2

2.3.1 General 2/2
2.3.2 Pre-Construction and Land Drainage Records 2/3
2.3.3 Setting Out 2/4
2.3.4 Topsoil and Surfacing Materials 2/4
2.3.5 Land Drains 2/4
2.3.6 Hand Excavation 2/4
2.3.7 Support to Excavations 2/4
2.3.8 Dewatering 2/5
2.3.9 Formation 2/7
2.3.10 Excavation at or Near Roads 2/8
2.3.11 Excavation for Structures 2/9
2.3.12 Excavation for Pipelines 2/10
2.3.13 Excavation for Cable/Ducts 2/10
2.3.14 Excavated Material 2/11
2.3.15 Replacement of Unsuitable Material 2/11
2.3.16 Disposal of Material 2/12
2.3.17 Cofferdams 2/12
2.4 BACKFILLING EXCAVATIONS 2/13

2.4.1 General 2/13
2.4.2 Selected Backfill 2/13
2.4.3 Special Backfill 2/14
2.4.4 Filter Material 2/15
2.4.5 Structural and Non-Structural Filling 2/15
2.4.6 Backfilling of Trenches for Cables/Ducts 2/15
May 2017 Tender Documents Page iii

2.5 PROTECTION OF EXISTING SERVICES AND REINSTATEMENT 2/16

2.5.1 General 2/16
2.5.2 Reinstatement of Unpaved Land 2/17
2.5.3 Reinstatement within Road Corridors 2/17
2.5.4 Reinstatement of Other Surfaced Areas 2/18
2.5.5 Excavation and Reinstatement in Developed Reservations 2/18
3.0 CONCRETE WORKS
3.1 GENERAL 3/1
3.2 MATERIALS 3/1

3.2.1 Cement 3/1
3.2.1.1 General 3/1
3.2.1.2 Ordinary Portland Cement 3/2
3.2.1.3 Sulphate Resisting Cement 3/2
3.2.1.4 Moderate Sulphate Resisting Cement 3/3
3.2.2 Fine Aggregate for Concrete and Mortar 3/3
3.2.3 Coarse Aggregate for Concrete 3/5
3.2.4 Combined Aggregate 3/7
3.2.5 Water 3/7
3.2.5.1 General 3/7
3.2.5.2 Specific Requirements 3/7
3.2.6 Admixtures 3/8
3.2.7 Concrete Mix Specification 3/9
3.2.8 Cement Mortar and Grout 3/10
3.3 MIXING AND TESTING 3/10

3.3.1 Samples of Aggregates 3/10
3.3.2 Trial Mixes for Concrete 3/10
3.3.3 Water/Cement Ratio 3/11
3.3.4 Measurement of Ingredients 3/11
3.3.5 Mixing Concrete 3/12
3.3.6 Re-Mixing Concrete 3/12
3.3.7 Concrete Testing 3/12
3.3.7.1 General 3/14
3.3.7.2 Preliminary Testing 3/14
3.3.7.3 Works Testing 3/15
3.3.7.4 Workability Testing 3/15
3.3.8 Frequency of Testing Aggregate and Concrete 3/15
3.4 TRANSPORTING AND PLACING CONCRETE 3/16

3.4.1 General Requirements 3/16
3.4.2 Placing Concrete in Hot Weather 3/17
3.4.3 Placing Concrete in Water (Tremie Concrete) 3/18
3.4.4 Blinding Concrete 3/18
3.5 COMPACTING CONCRETE 3/18

3.5.1 Tamping 3/18
3.5.2 Vibrating 3/18
May 2017 Tender Documents Page iv

3.6 CURING OF CONCRETE 3/19
3.7 JOINTS IN CONCRETE 3/19

3.7.1 Intervals During Concreting 3/19
3.7.2 Construction Joints 3/20
3.7.3 Jointing Fresh to Set Concrete 3/20
3.7.4 Expansion Joints 3/20
3.7.5 Expansion Joint Filler 3/20
3.7.6 Expansion Joint Sealing Compound 3/21
3.7.7 Waterstop Across Joints in Concrete Structures 3/21
3.8 INSPECTION OF CONCRETE 3/22
3.9 FAULTY CONCRETE WORK 3/22
3.10 REPAIRS TO CONCRETE 3/22
3.11 SUPERVISION OF CONCRETE WORK 3/22
3.12 FINISHING OF CONCRETE 3/23
3.13 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF FORMWORK 3/23

3.13.1 General 3/23
3.13.2 Spacing Blocks and Temporary Construction Ties 3/23
3.13.3 Slab Forms 3/24
3.13.4 Type of Formwork 3/24
3.13.4.1 Exposed Concrete Faces for Bridges 3/24
3.13.4.2 Sawn Formwork 3/24
3.13.5 Preparation of Formwork for Concreting 3/24
3.13.6 Approval of Formwork for Concreting 3/25
3.13.7 Removal of Formwork 3/25
3.13.8 Concrete Below Ground 3/25
3.14 READY MIXED CONCRETE 3/26

3.14.1 Compliance with Specification 3/26
3.14.2 Documentation 3/27
3.15 REINFORCEMENT STEEL 3/27

3.15.1 General 3/27
3.15.2 Materials Specifications 3/27
3.15.3 Construction of Reinforcement 3/28
3.15.3.1 Placing Reinforcement 3/29
3.15.3.2 Maintaining Reinforcement in Position 3/29
3.15.3.3 Approval of Reinforcement Before Concreting 3/29
3.16 PRECAST CONCRETE KERBS, EDGINGS & QUADRANTS 3/30
3.17 IN-SITU CONCRETE EDGING 3/31
4.0 PIPES, PIPEWORK, MANHOLES AND CHAMBERS
May 2017 Tender Documents Page v

4.1 PIPE MATERIALS 4/1

4.1.1 Pipe Classifications and Pressure Ratings 4/1
4.1.2 Joint Requirements and Limitations 4/1
4.1.2.1 Flexible Joints 4/1
4.1.2.2 Flanged Joints 4/2
4.1.2.3 Flange Adaptors 4/2
4.1.2.4 Bolted Couplings 4/3
4.1.2.5 Nuts and Bolts 4/3
4.1.2.6 Shipping and Handling 4/3
4.1.3 Asbestos Cement Pipes and Fittings 4/3
4.1.4 unplasticised Polyvinyl Chloride Pipes and Fittings (uPVC) 4/4
4.1.5 uPVC Pipes for Land Drains 4/4
4.1.6 Glass Reinforced Plastic Pipes and Fittings (GRP) 4/5
4.1.6.1 General 4/5
4.1.6.2 GRP Pipes and Fittings for Pumping Stations and Valve Chambers 4/8
4.1.6.3 Factory Testing 4/9
4.1.6.4 Installation 4/9
4.1.7 Polyethylene Pipes (HDPE or HPPE) 4/9
4.1.7.1 General 4/9
4.1.7.2 Wall Thickness 4/10
4.2 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF PIPES 4/11

4.2.1 General 4/11
4.2.2 Glass Reinforced Plastic Pipes (GRP) 4/12
4.2.3 Thermoplastic Pipes 4/12
4.3 GRANULAR MATERIAL FOR PIPE BEDDING 4/13

4.3.1 Stone for Land Drains 4/13
4.3.2 Compaction Fraction Test 4/14
4.4 CONVENTIONAL (OPEN TRENCH) PIPELINE CONSTRUCTION 4/14

4.4.1 General 4/14
4.4.2 Nominal Trench Widths 4/14
4.4.2.1 Pipelines in Wide Trenches 4/14
4.4.3 Pipelaying and Jointing 4/15
4.4.4 Pipelines in Concrete Cradles and Surrounds 4/17
4.4.5 Pipelines on Granular Beds 4/18
4.4.6 Placing Surrounds to Pipelines 4/18
4.4.6.1 Group A Pipe Materials 4/19
4.4.6.2 Group B Pipe Materials 4/19
4.4.6.3 Compaction of Pipe Surrounds 4/19
4.4.6.4 Pipelines Below Permanent Groundwater Level 4/19
4.4.7 Backfilling of Trenches - Pipelines/Structures 4/19
4.4.8 Deflection Measurements on Group B Pipelines 4/20
4.4.8.1 General 4/20
4.4.8.2 Deflection Measurements - GRP Pipes 4/20
4.4.8.3 Deflection Measurements - uPVC and other Plastic Pipes 4/21
4.4.9 Stanks to Pipelines in Granular Bedding 4/21
4.4.10 Thrust and Anchor Blocks to Pressure Pipelines 4/22
4.4.11 Pipes Protruding from Structures, Concrete Surrounds and Anchor Blocks 4/22
4.4.11.1 Group A Pipe Materials 4/23
4.4.11.2 Group B Pipe Materials 4/23
May 2017 Tender Documents Page vi

4.4.12 Protection of Pipelines and Pipeline Component 4/24

4.4.12.1 Pipelines 4/24
4.4.12.2 Pipeline Components 4/24
4.4.13 Indicator Posts to Pressure Mains 4/25
4.4.14 Enclosing Granular or Stone Surround with Geotextile Filter Fabric 4/25
4.4.15 Underground Services Warning Tapes 4/26
4.5 PIPEWORK WITHIN STRUCTURES 4/27
4.6 MANHOLES, CHAMBERS, AND SPECIAL STRUCTURES 4/28

4.6.1 General 4/28
4.6.2 Construction of Manholes, Chambers, and Special Structures 4/28
4.6.2.1 Road Gullies 4/29
4.6.3 Access Covers, Frames, and Grates 4/30
4.6.3.1 General 4/30
4.6.3.2 Access Covers and Frames 4/30
4.6.3.3 Reinforced Plastic Sealing Plates to Access Covers 4/31
4.6.3.4 Road Gully Gratings and Frames 4/32
4.7 DUBAI MUNICIPALITY STANDARDS FOR COVERS AND GRATINGS 4/33

4.7.1 Approved List of Suppliers 4/35
5.0 BRICKWORK AND BLOCKWORK
5.1 MATERIALS 5/1

5.1.1 Concrete Bricks and Blocks 5/1
5.1.2 Bricks 5/1
5.1.3 Sand for Mortar 5/1
5.1.4 Lime for Mortar 5/1
5.2 CONSTRUCTION 5/2

5.2.1 General 5/2
5.2.2 Engineering Brickwork 5/2
5.2.3 Blockwork 5/2
5.2.4 Cement Mortar 5/3
5.2.5 Cement Lime Mortar 5/3
5.2.6 Cement Mortar Rendering 5/3
6.0 INSPECTION AND TESTING OF PIPELINES AND STRUCTURES
6.1 CLEANING AND INSPECTION OF PIPELINES 6/1
6.2 TESTING OF PIPELINES 6/1

6.2.1 General 6/1
6.2.2 Testing of Non-Pressure Pipelines 6/2
6.2.3 Testing of Pressure Pipelines 6/4
6.3 TESTING OF VALVES 6/6
6.4 TESTING OF RENOVATED AND REPLACED PIPELINES 6/6

6.5 TESTING OF WATER RETAINING STRUCTURES 6/6
7.0 Not Used
May 2017 Tender Documents Page vii

8.0 Not Used
9.0 CORROSION PROTECTION AND ODOR CONTROL
9.1 MATERIALS 9/1

9.1.1 Corrosive Environments 9/1
9.1.2 Paint 9/1
9.1.3 Impervious Tanking Membrane 9/1
9.1.4 PVC Sheet Lining Material 9/2
9.1.5 Reinforced Plastic Liners 9/2
9.1.6 In-Situ Laminations 9/3
9.1.7 Epoxy Mortar 9/4
9.1.8 Bituminous Emulsions 9/5
9.1.9 Water Proof Paper 9/5
9.1.10 Protective Materials for Wrapping Pipeline Components Suppliers 9/5
9.1.11 Approved Paint Suppliers 9/6
9.2 INSTALLATION - PROTECTIVE COATINGS AND LINERS TO CONCRETE 9/6

9.2.1 General 9/6
9.2.2 Protective Coatings/PVC Liners 9/6
9.2.3 Reinforced Plastic Liners 9/9
9.2.4 Cutting and Sealing of Reinforced Liners 9/9
9.3 ODOR CONTROL FACILITIES 9/9

9.3.1 General 9/9
9.3.2 Soil Moisture and pH Probes 9/9
9.3.3 Activated Carbon Odor Control Filter 9/10
9.3.4 Natural Soil Odor Control Filter 9/10
9.3.4.1 Materials 9/10
9.3.4.2 Installation 9/10
9.3.4.3 Monitoring 9/11
9.3.4.4 Maintenance 9/11
9.3.4.5 Acceptance Test 9/11
10.0 BUILDING SPECIFICATIONS
10.1 CONCRETE 10/1

10.1.1 Tolerance 10/1
10.1.2 Concrete Finish 10/1
10.1.3 Construction Bays 10/1
10.1.4 Small Precast Items 10/1
10.1.5 Cast-in Fixings 10/1
10.1.6 Timber Cast-in Fixings 10/1
10.2 BRICKWORK AND BLOCKWORK 10/2

10.2.1 Damp-Proof Course 10/2
10.2.2 Wall Ties 10/2
10.2.3 Door and Window Frame Ties 10/2
10.2.4 Mastic 10/2
10.2.5 Brickwork and Blockwork 10/2
10.2.6 Cement Mortar 10/2
May 2017 Tender Documents Page viii

10.2.7 Pointing 10/3

10.2.8 Hollow Walls 10/3
10.3 ROOFING 10/3

10.3.1 Roof Screed 10/3
10.3.2 Roof Primer 10/3
10.3.3 Waterproofing Membrane 10/3
10.3.4 Roof Insulation 10/3
10.3.5 Roof Surface 10/3
10.3.6 Roof Decking 10/4
10.3.7 Fascia Cladding 10/4
10.4 JOINERY 10/4

10.4.1 Timber-General 10/4
10.4.2 Timber Sizes 10/4
10.4.3 Hardwood 10/4
10.4.4 Timber Fixing Accessories 10/5
10.4.5 Timber Preservative 10/5
10.4.6 Ironmongery 10/5
10.4.7 Workmanship 10/5
10.4.8 Storage 10/6
10.4.9 Door Frames 10/6
10.4.10 Doors 10/6
10.5 METAL WORK 10/6

10.5.1 Aluminium 10/6
10.5.2 Aluminium Louvers 10/6
10.5.3 Aluminium Windows 10/6
10.6 PLUMBING 10/7

10.6.1 Copper Tubes 10/7
10.6.2 Copper Fittings, Waste Pipes, Ball Valves, etc. 10/7
10.6.3 uPVC Pressure Pipes and Fittings 10/7
10.6.5 Pipework 10/7
10.6.6 Copper Tube Fixing 10/7
10.6.7 Waste Pipes 10/7
10.6.8 Sleeves 10/7
10.6.9 Testing 10/8
10.6.10 Storage Tanks 10/8
10.7 PLASTERWORK & OTHER WALL, FLOOR & CEILING FINISHES 10/8
10.7.1 Cement 10/8
10.7.2 Lime 10/8
10.7.3 Sand 10/8
10.7.4 Gypsum Plasters 10/8
10.7.5 Plaster Trims 10/8
10.7.6 Metal Lathing 10/8
10.7.7 Plasticisers 10/8
10.7.8 Bonding Agents 10/9
10.7.9 Storage 10/9
May 2017 Tender Documents Page ix

10.7.10 Floor Tiles 10/9

10.7.11 Wall Tiles (Internal) 10/9
10.7.12 Wall Tiles (External) 10/9
10.7.13 Tile Adhesive 10/10
10.7.14 Tile Grout 10/10
10.7.15 Expansion Joints 10/10
10.7.16 Backgrounds 10/10
10.7.17 Dissimilar Materials 10/11
10.7.18 Hacking 10/11
10.7.19 Dubbing Out 10/11
10.7.20 Splatterdash or Stipple Coat 10/11
10.7.21 Internal Finishes-General 10/11
10.7.22 Internal Render 10/11
10.7.23 Stucco 10/11
10.7.24 External Render 10/12
10.8 GLAZING 10/12

10.8.1 Glass 10/12
10.8.2 Bedding Compound 10/12
10.9 PAINTING AND DECORATING 10/13

10.9.1 Painting-General 10/13
10.9.2 Exterior Stain 10/13
10.9.4 Stopping to Plaster 10/13
10.9.5 Steel Priming 10/13
10.9.6 Oil-Based Paint 10/13
10.9.7 Internal Finish to Walls 10/14
11.0 Not Used
12.0 SAFETY PROCEDURES
12.1 GENERAL 12/1
12.2 FAMILIARISATION WITH SAFETY PROBLEMS 12/1
12.3 SAFETY OFFICER 12/1
12.4 SAFE WORKING CONDITIONS AT THE SITE 12/2
12.5 SAFETY EQUIPMENT 12/2
12.6 SAFETY PROCEDURES 12/3

12.6.1 General 12/3
12.6.2 Atmosphere Monitoring 12/4
12.6.3 Atmosphere Ventilation 12/5
12.6.4 Safety Harness 12/5
12.6.5 Emergency Breathing Apparatus 12/5
12.6.6 Active Confirmed Space Entry 12/5
12.6.7 Washing Facilities 12/5
May 2017 Tender Documents Page x

12.6.8 Communication 12/5

12.6.9 Lighting 12/6
12.7 TRAFFIC CONTROL 12/6
13.0 Not Used
14.0 Not Used
15.0 Not Used
16.0 MICRO TUNNELING AND PIPE JACKING
16.1 GENERAL 16/1

16.1.1 List of Approved Specialist Firms/Sub-Contractors 16/3
16.2 SURVEY CONTROL 16/3

16.2.1 General 16/3
16.2.2 Survey References 16/3
16.2.3 Structural Survey 16/3
16.2.4 Site Investigations 16/4
16.3 GEOTECHNICAL INSTRUMENTATION 16/4

16.3.1 Settlement Points 16/5
16.3.2 Settlement Anchors 16/6
16.3.3 Inclinometers (If required) 16/6
16.3.4 Groundwater Observation Wells 16/6
16.3.5 Optical Surveys 16/6
16.4 DEWATERING 16/6

16.4.1 Submittals 16/7
16.5 SITE INVESTIGATION 16/7
16.6 QUALITY CONTROL 16/7
16.7 EQUIPMENT 16/8
16.8 EXECUTION 16/8
16.9 TESTING 16/9
16.10 SAFETY 16/9
17.0 GENERAL, ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION
17.1 ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL PLANT TO BE SUPPLIED 17/1
May 2017 Tender Documents Page xi

17.2 DRAWINGS AND INFORMATION REQUIRED FOR ELECTRICAL AND

MECHANICAL PLANT 17/1
17.2.1 At the start of the Contract 17/1
17.2.2 As Built Record Drawing 17/2
17.2.3 Prior to Delivery of the Plant 17/3
17.2.4 Prior to the Issue of the Taking-Over Certificate 17/3
17.2.5 During the Maintenance Period 17/5
17.3 WORKMANSHIP AND DESIGN OF PLANT 17/5
17.4 LUBRICATION OF PLANT 17/6
17.5 INITIAL CHARGES OF OILS AND OTHER CONSUMABLES 17/6
17.6 SPARES 17/6
17.7 TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS 17/7
17.8 DELIVERY OF SPARES, TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS 17/7
17.9 PROTECTION AND PACKING FOR SHIPMENT/STORAGE 17/7
17.10 AUTOMATIC CONTROL OF PLANT 17/8
17.11 INSTRUCTIONS AND TRAINING OF EMPLOYER’S STAFF 17/8
17.12 MAINTENANCE OF PLANT 17/9
17.13 RETURN TO SITE 17/9
17.14 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 17/9

17.14.1 Introduction 17/9
17.14.2 General Requirements and Contents 17/10
17.15 WORKS TESTING AND INSPECTION OF MANUFACTURED ITEMS 17/13
17.16 TESTING AND CERTIFICATION OF MOTORS 17/15
17.17 SITE TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL PLANT 17/15
17.18 PLANT SUPPLIERS FOR THIS CONTRACT 17/19
17.19 CLIMATE 17/20
17.20 ELECTRICAL SUPPLY 17/21
17.21 DERATING DUE TO THE CLIMATIC CONDITIONS 17/21
17.22 TROPICALISATION 17/21

17.22.1 General 17/21
17.22.2 Metals 17/21
17.22.3 Screws,Nuts, Springs, Pivots etc 17/22
17.22.4 Wood 17/22
May 2017 Tender Documents Page xii

17.22.5 Electrical Insulating Materials 17/22
17.23 WORK IN DANGEROUS AREAS 17/22
17.24 CLASSIFICATION OF HAZARDOUS AREAS 17/23
17.25 HEALTH AND SAFETY AT WORK, ETC. ACT 1974 17/23
17.26 PROGRESS REPORTS 17/23
17.27 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND STANDARDS 17/23
17.28 ADAPTATION OF EQUIPMENT 17/23
17.29 GUARANTEE 17/24
17.30 CO-ORDINATION 17/24
17.31 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTS 17/24
17.32 SITE RELIABILITY TRIALS 17/26
18.0 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION
18.1 H.V AND LV FACTORY BUILT ASSEMBLIES (F.B.A’S) 18/1

18.1.1 Construction 18/1
18.1.2 Earthing Bar 18/2
18.1.3 Terminals 18/2
18.1.4 Busbars 18/2
18.1.5 Anti-Condensation Heaters 18/2
18.1.6 Indicating Lamps 18/3
18.1.7 Indicating Instruments 18/3
18.1.8 Motor Starter Isolation 18/3
18.1.9 Control Circuit Protection 18/3
18.1.10 Rotor Resistances 18/3
18.1.11 Socket Outlets 18/3
18.1.12 Metering 18/4
18.1.13 Labeling 18/4
18.1.14 Spares 18/4
18.1.15 Future Equipment 18/4
18.1.16 Standby Generator Connection 18/4
18.1.17 Weatherproof Switchboards 18/5
18.1.18 Panel Wiring 18/5
18.1.19 Thermal Overland Relays 18/6
18.2 CIRCUIT BREAKERS 18/6

18.2.1 H.V. Circuit Breakers 18/6
18.2.2 Air Break Circuit Breakers 18/6
18.2.3 General 18/6
18.3 EARTH LEAKAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND SWITCH DISCONNECTORS 18/8
May 2017 Tender Documents Page xiii

18.4 FUSE - SWITCHES AND FUSE - SWITCH DISCONNECTORS 18/8
18.5 FUSES 18/8
18.6 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS 18/9
18.7 INSTRUMENT VOLTAGE TRANSOFRMERS 18/9
18.8 ISOLATING TRANSFORMERS 18/9
18.9 SELECTOR SWITCHES 18/9
18.10 EARTHING 18/9
18.11 AC MOTORS 18/9
18.12 MOTOR STARTERS 18/11

18.12.1 General 18/11
18.12.2 L.V. Starters 18/11
18.12.3 H.V. Starters 18/14
18.12.4 Slip Ring Rotor Resistance Motor Starters 18/14
18.12.4.1 General 18/14
18.12.4.2 Floor Standing Units 18/14
18.12.4.3 Panel Top Units 18/15
18.12.4.4 Integrel Panel Units 18/15
18.13 MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (M.C.C.B’S) 18/15
18.14 PUMP CONTROLS 18/16
18.15 TELEMETRY SYSTEM 18/16
18.16 BATTERY UNITS 18/17
18.17 TRANSFORMERS 18/18

18.17.1 Standards 18/18
18.17.2 Windings 18/18
18.17.3 Construction 18/18
18.17.4 Fittings 18/19
18.18 INSTRUMENTS, INDICATORS AND TRANSMITTERS 18/20

18.18.1 General 18/20
18.18.2 Instrument Ranges 18/21
18.18.3 Field Mounted Instruments 18/21
18.18.4 Panel Mounted Instruments 18/22
18.18.5 Indicators 18/22
18.18.6 Digital Indicators 18/22
18.18.7 Integrators 18/22
18.18.8 Chart Recorders 18/22
18.18.9 Transmitters 18/23
18.19 FLOW MEASURING EQUIPMENT 18/24
May 2017 Tender Documents Page xiv

18.19.1 Electro Magnetic Flow Meters 18/24

18.19.2 Ultrasonic In-line Flow Meter 18/25
18.19.3 Ultrasonic Open Channel Flow Measuring Equipment 18/26
18.19.4 Installation of Ultrasonic Sensors 18/26
18.20 LEVEL MEASURING & CONTROL EQUIPMENT 18/26

18.20.1 Ultrasonic Level Measuring Equipment 18/26
18.20.2 Pressure Level Measuring Equipment 18/27
18.20.3 Float Level Control Equipment 18/28
18.21 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF LIGHTING AND SMALL POWER INSTALLATIONS 18/28

18.21.1 Small Power Installations 18/28
18.21.2 Lighting Installations 18/29
18.21.3 Emergency Lights 18/30
18.22 PORTABLE PLANT 18/31
18.23 WIRING & CABLING ACCESSORIES 18/31

18.23.1 Wiring 18/31
18.23.2 Distribution Boards 18/31
18.23.3 Socket Outlets 18/32
18.23.4 Switches 18/33
18.23.5 Lighting Fittings 18/33
18.24 CABLES 18/34
18.24.1 General 18/34

18.24.2 PLYSW & PVC Oversheath Cables 18/35
18.24.3 PVC SWA PVC Cables 18/36
18.24.4 XLPE PVC SWA PVC Cables 18/36
18.24.5 PVC Insulated Cables 18/36
18.24.6 PVC MICC Cables 18/36
18.25 CABLING METHODS 18/37

18.25.1 General 18/37
18.25.2 Conduit System and Associated Cables 18/40
18.25.3 Flexible Conduit 18/41
18.25.4 Cable Trunking and Associated Cables 18/42
18.25.5 Cable Tray 18/42
18.26 EARTHING 18/42
18.27 ELECTRIC ACTUATORS 18/44
18.28 PLC’s AND MICROPROCESSOR EQUIPMENT 18/47
19.0 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION
19.1 FINISH 19/1
19.2 MATERIALS 19/1
May 2017 Tender Documents Page xv

19.3 VALVES 19/1

19.3.1 General 19/1
19.3.2 Non-Return Valves 19/2
19.3.3 Gate Valves for Sewage and Related Fluids 19/3
19.3.4 Air Valves 19/3
19.3.5 Flush Valves 19/5
19.3.6 Flap Valves 19/5
19.4 PUMPS 19/6
19.4.1 General Requirements 19/6

19.4.2 Submersible Pumps 19/7
.
19.5 PRESSURE AND COMPOUND GAUGE FOR SEWAGE & SLUDGE 19/8
19.6 CENTRIFUGAL FANS (AIR BLOWERS) 19/9
19.7 SUPPORTS AND FIXINGS 19/10
19.8 SETTING OF MACHINERY 19/10
19.9 SUPPORT OF PIPEWORK AND VALVES 19/11
19.10 PENSTOCKS 19/11

19.10.1 General 19/11
19.10.2 Austenitic Ni Resist Iron Penstocks 19/12
19.10.3 Stainless Steel Penstock 19/13
19.10.4 Plastic Penstock 19/13
19.10.5 Actuators 19/14
19.11 LIFTING EQUIPMENT 19/14

19.11.1 Electrically Operated Traversing Cranes 19/14
19.11.2 Manually Operated Lifting Equipment 19/15
19.11.3 Lifting Frames 19/16
19.11.4 Lifting Davits 19/16
20.0 MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL
20.1 METAL AND PLASTIC MATERIALS 20/1

20.1.1 Aluminium Alloy 20/1
20.1.2 Steel 20/1
20.1.3 Stainless Steel 20/1
20.1.4 Reinforced Thermosetting Plastic 20/1
20.2 METAL AND PLASTIC PREFABRICATED ITEMS 20/6

20.2.1 Ladders and Safety Hoops 20/6
20.2.2 Underground Hydrants and Covers 20/6
20.2.3 Open Mesh and Chequer Plate Flooring 20/7
20.2.4 Galvanised Steel Guardrailing 20/7
20.2.5 Aluminium Guardrailing 20/7
20.3 ODOUR CONTROL EQUIPMENT 20/7

20.3.1 Design Parameters 20/7
May 2017 Tender Documents Page xvi

20.3.2 Description and Arrangement of Plant 20/8

20.3.2.1 General 20/8
20.3.2.2 Filter Media Housing 20/8
20.3.2.3 Filter Media 20/9
20.3.2.4 Extract Fans 20/9
20.3.2.5 Differential Pressure Switch 20/9
20.3.2.6 H2S Monitor 20/9
20.3.2.7 Ductwork 20/10
20.3.2.8 Filters 20/10
20.3.2.9 Flexible Joints 20/10
20.4 VENTILATION 20/11

20.4.1 General 20/11
20.4.2 Extract Fans 20/11
20.4.3 Wet Well Ventilation 20/11
20.4.4 Dry Well Ventilation 20/11
20.4.5 Motor Room Ventilation 20/12
20.4.6 Fans 20/12
20.4.7 Fan Motos 20/12
20.4.8 Ducting 20/12
20.5 AIR CONDITIONING 20/13

20.5.1 Wall Mounted Air Conditioning Units 20/13
20.5.2 Centralised Air Conditioning Systems 20/13
20.5.3 Split Unit Air Conditioners 20/14
20.6 STANDBY DIESEL GENERATION PLANT 20/15

20.6.1 Application 20/15
20.6.2 General Description of the Plant 20/15
20.6.3 Engine – General 20/16
20.6.4 Engine – Lubrication 20/16
20.6.5 Engine – Fuel System 20/17
20.6.6 Engine – Cooling 20/17
20.6.7 Engine – Exhaust System 20/18
20.6.8 Engine – Speed Control 20/18
20.6.9 Engine – Starting 20/19
20.6.10 Engine – Panel 20/20
20.6.11 Engine – Safety Devices 20/20
20.6.12 Engine – Wiring 20/20
20.6.13 Alternator Output 20/21
20.6.14 Alternator Construction 20/21
20.6.15 Alternator – Terminals 20/21
20.6.16 Alternator – Insulation 20/21
20.6.17 Alternator – Heaters 20/21
20.6.18 Alternator – Waveform, Regulation and Radio Frequency Interference 20/22
20.6.19 Control Panel – Construction 20/22
20.6.20 Contro Panel – Front Panel 20/22
20.6.21 Control Panel – Alarm Annunciator 20/23
20.6.22 Control Panels – General 20/23
20.6.23 Bulk Fuel Tanks 20/24
20.6.24 Fuel Transfer Pumps 20/25
20.6.25 Fuel System 20/25
May 2017 Tender Documents Page xvii

20.6.26 Enclosure 20/25
20.7 FIRE ALARM & EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM 20/26

20.7.1 General 20/26
20.7.2 Manual Fire Alarm Call Point 20/26
20.7.3 Optical Smoke Detector 20/27
20.7.4 Detector Base 20/27
20.7.5 Fire Alarm Panel 20/27
20.7.6 Fire Extinguishing Equipment 20/28
20.8 ACCESSORIES 20/29
20.9 GAS DETECTORS 20/30

20.9.1 General 20/30
20.9.2 Portable Gas Detector 20/31
20.10 SURGE 20/31
May 2017 Tender Documents Page xviii

Drainage and Irrigation Specifications Volume 2 Part III
21. IRRIGATION / AUTOMATIC IRRIGATION SYSTEM
21.1 SUBMITTALS
21.1.1 Materials and Equipment Schedule
21.1.2 No Objection Certificates
21.1.3 Shop Drawings and verification of Dimensions
21.1.4 Manufacturers Certifications
21.1.5 Recommendations of the Manufacturers
21.1.6 Spare Parts
21.1.7 Installations and Testing
21.1.8 Program / Progress Reports
21.1.9 Manufacturer’s Literature
21.1.10 Circuit Diagram
21.1.11 As Built Drawings and Operation & Maintenance Manual
21.1.13 Silence of Specification
21.1.14 System Explanations
21.1.15 Layout of Work
21.1.16 Clean Up
21.1.17 Warranty
21.1.18 Product Storage and Handling
21.1.19 Operation & Maintenance of the System
21.2 IRRIGATION SYSTEM, MATERIALS

21.2.1 Pipes and Fittings
21.2.1.1 uPVC Pipe and Fittings
21.2.1.2 HDPE Pipe and Fittings
21.2.1.3 Steel Pipe and Fittings
21.2.1.4 Threaded Steel Pipes & Fittings (For 3’ and Below)
21.2.1.5 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings
21.2.1.6 Asbestos Cement Pipes
21.2.1.7 GRP Pipes and Fittings
21.2.1.8 Dust Cap
21.2.1.9 Staple Stake
21.2.2 Valves
21.2.2.1 Solenoid Valves
21.2.2.2 Check Valve
21.2.2.3 Gate Valve
21.2.2.4 Air Valve
21.2.2.5 Electrically Actuated Butterfly Valve
21.2.2.6 Pressure Reducing, Pressure Sustaining & Check Valve
21.2.2.7 Pressure Release Valve
21.2.3 Valve Boxes
21.2.4 Water Meters & Strainer
21.2.4.1 Basket Strainer (NOT APPLICABLE)
21.2.4.2 Bronze Strainer (NOT APPLICABLE)
21.2.4.3 Water Meter
21.2.5 Drip Tubes, Emitters (NOT APPLICABLE)
21.2.5.1 Pressure Compensating Emitters
21.2.5.2 Pressure Compensating Dripperline
21.2.5.3 Subsurface Drip System for Grass Areas
21.2.6 Pressure Compensating Bubblers (NOT APPLICABLE)
21.2.7 Pup-Up Sprayers (NOT APPLICABLE)
21.2.8 Rotor Pop Up Sprinklers (NOT APPLICABLE)
21.2.9 Pumps (NOT APPLICABLE)
21.2.9.1. Main Irrigation Pumps (variable speed)
21.2.9.2. Fire Pumps
21.2.9.3. Sump Pump
21.2.10 Lagoons (NOT APPLICABLE)
21.2.11 Filters (NOT APPLICABLE)
21.2.12 Pressure Gauges (NOT APPLICABLE)
21.2.13 Underground Warning Tape
21.2.14 Electrical Equipment
May 2017 Page i
21.2.14.1 Electrical Wire for Solenoid Valves and Satellites

21.2.14.2 Wire Connectors
21.2.14.3 Electric Pressure Switches
21.2.14.4 Flow Sensing and Control System
21.2.15 System Controlling Equipment
21.2.15.1 Electrical Control Panel
21.2.15.2 Irrigation Controllers
21.2.15.3 Filter Controller
21.2.16 Exhaust Fan (NOT APPLICABLE)
21.2.17 Valve Chamber Covers
21.2.18 Filtration Chamber
21.2.19 Chamber Identification Plate
21.2.20 Electrical Control Panel
21.2.21 Filtration Chamber Lighting
21.2.22 Fertilizer Injection Unit (NOT APPLICABLE)
21.2.23 Ducting
21.3 IRRIGATION SYSTEM, EXECUTION

21.3.1 Excavation and Back-filling
21.3.2 PVC Pipe InstallationS
21.3.3 Drip Line Pipe (NOT APPLICABLE)
21.3.4 Valves
21.3.5 Irrigation Equipment
21.3.6 Irrigation Control Equipment (NOT APLLICABLE)
21.3.7 Testing
21.3.7.1 Pipeline Pressure Test
21.3.7.2 Painting
21.3.8 Road Crossings
21.3.9 Thrust Blocks
21.3.10 Electrical Codes
21.3.11 Electrical Tests
21.3.12 Electrical Installations
21.3.13 Control Panel Installations
21.3.14 Satellite Controller Installations
21.4 AUTOMATIC IRRIGATION SYSTEM, COMMISSIONING (NOT applicable)

21.4.1 Flushing
21.4.2 Fieldwork
21.4.3 Irrigation Control System
21.4.4 Operation and Maintenance Manual
21.4.5 As-Built Drawings
21.5 IRRIGATION SYSTEM, CIVIL WORKS

21.5.1 Earthwork and Excavation
21.5.2 Concrete
21.5.2.1 General
21.5.2.2 Materials
21.5.3 Concrete Mixing
21.5.4 Concrete Testing
21.5.5 Transportation
21.5.6 Casting of the Concrete
21.5.7 Concrete Compaction
21.5.8 Curing of the Concrete
21.5.9 Movement and Construction Joints
21.5.10 Defective Concrete Works
21.5.11 Form Work and Supports
21.6 SWEET SOIL FILLING, CONTOURING AND PLANTATION (NOT APPLICABLE)

21.6.1 Sweet Soil Filling
21.6.2 Contouring
21.6.3 Gravel
21.6.4 Geotextile Filter Fabric
May 2017 Page ii
21.6.5 Modification to Existing Chambers
21.7 ANCILLARY WORKS

21.7.1 Paving Description
21.7.2 Paving Blocks
21.7.3 Overall Requirements for Paving Blocks
21.7.4 Block Laying Requirements
21.7.5 Kerbs Description
21.7.6 Materials and manufacture of Kerbs
21.7.7 Geotextile Filter Fabric
May 2017 Page iii

PROJECT R1048:
ROADS NETWORK
DUBAI SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE
SPECIFICATIONS
Volume 2 – PART III
PREFACE
All drainage and sewerage to be performed under this contract shall follow the specifications
given in Volume 2 – Part III and IV – Dubai Sewerage and Drainage Master Plan Standatd
specification. For all other works the contractor shall refer to the applicable specifications as
given in Volume 2 Part I and II.
Clause 1.2 of Dubai Sewerage and Drainage Master Plan Specifications shall not be applicable
to this Contract. The Contractor is referred to the requirements given in the General
Specifications with regard to the Site Office for the Engineer.
May 2017 Tender Documents Page xix

SECTION 1: -GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL INFORMATION
1.1.1 Preamble
These Specifications shall be read in conjunction with the other documents

of the Tender and Contract Documents and Drawings. The Contractor shall
comply with all the provisions contained within these Documents. The
Contractor shall take note of the Appendices contained in Part 3 of 3 of
these Specifications. Where items in Part 1 of 3 of the Specifications are
also covered in the Appendices the requirements of the Appendices shall
take precedence.
Any clause in these Specifications which relates to work or materials not

required by the Contract shall be deemed not to apply.
In order to avoid needless repetition of such phrases as "to the Engineer"

and "by the Engineer" or "the Engineer's Representative" throughout these
Specifications it shall be understood that when an order, instruction,
decision, exercise of judgment or other similar act is indicated, such order,
instruction, decision, exercise of judgment or other similar action will be
issued, given, made or referred to the Engineer or the Engineer's
Representative.
1.1.2 Abbreviations
In this Contract the following abbreviations have the meanings hereby

assigned to them:
"AASHTO" means the specification issued by the American Association of

State Highway and Transportation Officials.
"ACI" means the specification issued by the American Concrete Institute.
"ASA" means the specification issued by the American Standard

Association.
"ASTM" means the specification by the American Society for Testing and
Materials.
"ANSI" means American National Standards Institute.
"BS" means the specification issued by the British Standards Institution.
"BS. EN" means European Standards adopted as a British Standard.
"CP" means the Code of Practice issued by the BS.
"ISO" means International Standards Organisation.

"mm" means millimetre.
"cm" means centimetre.

"sq. cm, or cm2" means square centimetre.
May 2017 Tender Documents Page 1/1

"lin. m" means linear metre.
"sq. m, or m2" means square metre.
"cu. m, or m3" means cubic metre.
"km" means kilometre.
"kg" means kilogrammes.
"t" means tonne.
"gal" means U.S. gallon.
"ml" means millilitre.
"l" means litre.
"U S G" means U.S. gauge.
"No." means Number.
Where no units are quoted for a figure the relevant "System International"
(SI) unit should be assumed.
1.1.3 Datum
The levels shown on the Drawings are referred to a series of bench-marks,

located throughout the area of the project, and whose positions and values
are shown on the Drawings. In the event of any such bench-mark having
become obliterated, the Contractor shall make his own arrangements to
ensure that the Works are
Constructed to the levels shown on the Drawings or as amended by the

Engineer, and if it is found necessary to cover or destroy any of such
indicated bench-marks the Contractor shall transfer the level of such bench-
marks to other approved fixed points, which shall then be surveyed and
marked on the Drawings. The survey station details obtained by the
Contractor from the Survey Section shall be at Contractor’s cost.
1.1.4 Right of Way
The Contractor shall make all the necessary arrangements for any land
required for working areas outside the right of way, including payment when
necessary, and the Employer does not accept any liability in connection with
such land. This includes land for compounds, temporary roads, detours,
diversions and stock piling materials.

1.1.5 Geotechnical Information
Any soils and materials test results and information provided for the
Contractor with the Contract Documents at Tender stage are for his
information only. The Contractor shall be deemed to have studied this
information during the preparation of his Tender and to have carried out any
further tests as he may consider necessary. No claims for additional
payment will be considered from the Contractor on the grounds that the
information is insufficient, incorrect, or misleading.
Copies of all geotechnical tests performed by the Contractor shall be

submitted to Dubai Central Laboratory for review.
1.1.6 Interpretation of Drawings
The Employer and the Engineer accept no responsibility for any omissions
from or for correctness of the representation of existing features on the
Drawings.
1.1.7 Responsibility of Contractor
Where the approval of the Engineer is required under these Specifications

such approval shall not relieve the Contractor of his duties, responsibilities or
liabilities under the Contract.
1.1.8 Governing Standards
For all materials where no governing standard is quoted in the Specification

then a suitable national standard approved by the Engineer (BS, BS EN,
AASHTO or ANSI/ASTM) shall be used.
The most recent edition of any standard shall always be adopted unless
otherwise stated in the Specification or directed by the Engineer.
The equivalence between AASHTO and ANSI/ASTM will only be accepted

when directed by the Engineer. The Engineer may consider other national
standards (BS, BS EN, AASHTO, ANSI/ASTM) in place of those stated in
the Specifications.
1.1.9 Groundwater Levels in Dubai
The Contractor will be deemed to have carried out his own investigations at
the time of Tender to ascertain for himself the nature of the soil conditions
and in particular the groundwater levels that will be encountered.
Method statements for dealing with groundwater shall be submitted within

three weeks of the signing of the Contract.
1.1.10 Pollution of Khor Dubai or Arabian Gulf
The Contractor shall ensure that no extraneous matter, rubbish or polluting

liquid is deposited or discharged to the Khor Dubai (Creek) or to the
foreshore or sea of the Arabian Gulf.

1.2 SITE OFFICE FOR ENGINEER'S REPRESENTATIVE

Contractor shall follow Volume 2 Part 1 - General Specifications (Appendix
B) for Schedule of Engineer's Offices and Equipment.
1.2.1 General
The Contractor shall provide, maintain and keep clean temporary site offices
with all associated equipment and services for the exclusive use of the
Engineer's Representative and his staff, from commencement until
completion of the whole of the Works.
The temporary site offices shall be as-new prefabricated portable unit/s or

alternatively of some other form of weatherproof design and construction to
the approval of the Engineer. The building shall be erected on suitable solid
foundation.
The offices shall have full partitions and room sizes shall be as shown in the
Schedule of Offices. All rooms shall have individual entrance doors.
Corridor and entrance areas shall be additional to the office sizes.
The offices shall be air-conditioned with the exception of the Toilet, Shower
and Kitchen areas.
All rooms shall have glazed windows complete with fly screens and venetian
sun blinds.
Adequate fitted hardware, electrical switches, sockets, lighting, plumbing

fittings, sanitary ware and fittings and fixtures, etc., shall be provided as
necessary for the different areas.
The electrical installation shall provide for simultaneous use of all electrical
appliances.
The electrical supply shall be 220-250 volts, 50 Hz. The Contractor may
either arrange for a temporary power supply to the offices or alternatively
provide and maintain adequate diesel generator sets. All electricity bills shall
be paid by the Contractor.
The Contractor may either arrange for a temporary mains water supply or
alternatively provide tankered water supply. All water bills shall be paid by
the Contractor.
A minimum of two telephone lines with extensions shall be provided for the
offices along with a third line for an independent telefax facility as shown in
the Schedule of Fittings and the Contractor shall pay all installation and
rental charges, and call charges, if any, for UAE calls only.
Covered car parking areas of approved construction for ten (10) cars shall
be provided adjacent to the offices.

The Contractor shall submit any necessary drawings and calculations for the
construction of the offices for the Engineer's approval before commencing
construction and shall be responsible for ensuring that the offices are
structurally sound. The Engineer may request alterations at this stage. The
drawings shall be approved in writing by the Engineer before
installation/construction shall commence.
The offices shall be completed and all the equipment provided by the end of
the Mobilisation Period.
Throughout the duration of the Contract, the Contractor shall ensure an

uninterrupted supply of gas, water and electricity to the offices.
The Contractor shall provide all items listed in the following Schedule of
Offices and Schedule of Fittings. The Contractor shall obtain the Engineer’s
approval for all furniture and equipment proposed.
Table 1-1 Schedule of Offices
Room No. Description Size No.
1 Resident Engineer 6m x 4m 1
2 Conference Room 8m x 4m 1
3 Assistant Resident Engineer / 4m x 4m 10
Civil Engineer / Landscape
Engineer / Materials Engineer /
Safety Engineer / Electro
Mechanical Engineer / Quantity
Surveyor/ Senior Quantity
Surveyor/ Senior structural
Engineer/ Structural Engineer
4 Materials Inspector 8m x 4m 1
5 Land Surveyor 8m x 4m 1
6 Inspectors Civil /Landscape 6m x 4m 2
7 Typist / Clerk / Filing 6m x 4m 1
8 Toilet 4m x 2m 4
9 Shower 2m x 2m 1
10 Kitchen / Store 4m x 2m 1
11 Store 4m x 2m 1
12 RTA Liaison Engineer 4m x 4m 1
13 Structural Inspectors 8m x 4m 1

Table 1-2. Schedule of Fittings
Room No. and Quantity

Item Description Uni 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
t
a. Executive desk with two No. 1 - - - - - - - - - - 1

locking drawers &
revolving chair
b. Conference table to No. - 1 - - - - - - - - - -
accommodate 12 people
with revolving chairs
c. Desk with two locking - - - 10 - - - - - - - - -
drawers, side table and
revolving chair
d. Desk with two locking No. - - - 3 3 4 - - - - - - 3
drawers and revolving
chair
e. Visitor's chair - steel No. 2 - 20 3 3 4 2 - - 1 - 2 3
frame
f. Typist desk and No. - - - - - - 1 - - - - -
revolving chair
g. Side table for drawings No. 1 - 10 3 3 2 - - - - - - 3
h. Samples cupboard No. - - 1 - - - - - - - - -
i. Four drawers steel filing No. 1 - 10 1 1 3 2 - - - - 1 3
cabinet
j. Shelving and pin boards AS REQUIRED ON SITE
k. In/Out Tray No. AS REQUIRED ON SITE
l. Waste paper basket No. AS REQUIRED ON SITE
m. Telephone hand set No. 1 1 10 1 1 2 1 - - - - 1 1
(6 land lines + 3 Mobile
(excluding Sim Card
Charges for phone)
n. Portable dry powder fire No. - - - - - - 1 - - 1 1 -
extinguisher
p. Maximum-minimum No. 1 - 1 - - - - - - - - -
thermometer
q. Refrigerator 10 cubic No. - - - - - - - - - 1 - -
feet
r. Water filter No. - - - - - - - - - 1 - -
s. Sink Unit No. - - - - - - - - - 1 - -
t. Electric Kettle No. - - - - - - - - - 1 - -
u. Photocopier with paper No. - - - - - - 1 - - - - -
sorter.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Schedule of Fittings (Cont’d….)

Item Description Unit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
v. P.C: No. 1* - 6* - 3 2 - - - - - 1 2
Processor: Quad core
Xecon Proc ES410, 2.33
GHz, 2x6MB L2 Cache
Front Side Bus (FSB) 1333
MHz,
O/S: Windows 7, RAM: 46B,
DDR2 ECC SDRAM
Memory 667 MHz (4
DIMMS). Hard Disk: 2-806B
SATA 3.0 Gb/s, 7200 RPM
NCQ Hard Drivers with 8
MB DataDurst Cache.
Video: 256MB Pcle x 16
nVidia NVS 290, Dual
Monitor DVI capable (via
cable). Optical Drive:
16xDVD+/-RW DL. Sound:
Integrated HD Audio
MS Keyboard, Mouse and
Mouse Pad, 17” LCD
Monitor, latest PC Microsoft
office software with licences.
Microstation software and
license. Latest Primarera
software and latest license.
Arc GIS version 10.1 (or
approved)
w. P.C. No. - - 4* 1* - - 1* - - - -- -
Processor: Intel Core 2 Duo
E8400/3.0 GHz, 6M. Front
Side Bus (FSB): 1333 MHz
O/S: Windows 7. RAM: 46B,
Non-ECC, 800 MHz DDRz2
(4 DIMH). Hard Disk: 806B
SATA 3.0 6b/s and 8 MB
DataBrust Cache. Video:
Integrated Intel 6MA 4500
w/DVI adaptor cord.
Network Interface: Intel
8256/LM Gigabit. Optical
drive: 16xDVD=/- RW DL
SATA. Sound: Integrated.
MS Keyboard, Mouse and
Mouse Pad, 17” LCD
Monitor, Latest Microsoft
office software with licenses
x. A4 Laser printer 8PPM No. - - - - - - 1 - - - - -
(or equivalent) networked
y. A4 Colour printer networked - - 1 - - - - - - - - -
z A3 Colour printer networked 1 - - - - - - - - - - -

Schedule of Fittings (Cont’d….)

Item Description Unit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 11 12 13
0
aa. High definition Digital - - - 1 - - - - - - - -
camera with zooming &
printing of dates facilities
(min 10 mega pixels)
ab. Refreshments and other AS REQUIRED ON SITE
consumables including
stationery, photocopy
paper etc.
ac. Site Office cleaning & AS REQUIRED ON SITE
Maintenance
ad. Laser Facsimile machine No. - - - - - - 1 - - - - -
with separate phone line
ae. A4 High resolution colour No - - - - - - 1 - - - - -
Scanner.
af. Installing Software No. 1 - 2 - - - - - - - - -

Primavera
ag. Installing Micro Station No. - - 1 - 1 - - - - - - -
Software
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 11 12 13
0
* with email / internet connections. Computer shall be provided with Web Facilities for on-line
submission of test requests and on-line receiving of test reports.
1.2.2 Specific Requirements
1. The Contractor shall be responsible for making all arrangements and

payments in respects of any land required for the site of the building.
2. The Contractor shall be responsible for the security of the building and its
contents at all times and shall employ watchmen for this purpose.
3. The Contractor shall supply the Consultant's staff with all safety clothing
and equipment that shall be necessary for site working such as safety
helmets, reflective waistcoats, etc.
4. The building shall be well constructed, burglar proof, mosquito proof and
weather proof and shall have sufficient doors and glass covered windows
for proper light and ventilation. Floors shall be covered with suitable,
approved flooring.
5. The Contractor shall retain on site for the exclusive use of the Engineer
all codes and standards referred to in the Specification.

6. The building and services shall be available, fully maintained, until 3

month after the issue of the Taking Over Certificate for the whole of the
Works.
7. Following the completion of the whole of the Works, the Contractor shall
remove the offices from the Site and reinstate the area to a natural
condition or as directed by the Engineer.
8. The building and all equipment, materials, fittings, etc., shall become the
property of the Contractor after the completion of the Works.
1.2.3 Location of Contract Offices and Other Contract Facilities
Within seven days of the date of the Letter of Acceptance issued by the
Employer the Contractor shall submit a plan or plans showing his proposed
locations for and details of:
Offices for the Engineer or Engineer's Representatives.
The Contractor's Site Offices.
The Contractor's Stores, Plant and Maintenance Yard, Concrete Batching

and Materials Stockpiling Facilities.
Principal routes for heavy plant and lorries.
Areas for the temporary storage and permanent dumping of excavated

material.
The Offices of the Contractor's Project Manager will normally be adjacent to

or close to those of the Engineer for ease of communication.
The plan(s) shall be submitted to the Engineer in six (6) copies for approval.
Any reasonable changes or modifications suggested by the Engineer shall
be incorporated. All locations shall be subject to the approval of the
Employer.
Departures from the approved details shall not be permitted unless written
consent is obtained from the Engineer.
1.2.4 Service Authorities
Arrangements for mains water supply, mains electricity supply and

telephone connections shall be made through:-
Dubai Electricity and Water Authority

Water Division
Dubai Electricity and Water Authority

Electricity Division
Etisalat Emirates Telecommunications Corporation (Dubai)

DU

The Service Authorities shall be deemed to also include Departments and/or

Sections of Roads and Transport Authority/Dubai Municipality and any other
public or private authority responsible for services.
1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.3.1 Materials
Materials delivered to the Site for the purpose of the Works, shall be
accompanied by a "Certificate of Guarantee" signed by the authorised
representative of the manufacturer, which will legally bind the manufacturer
to the product delivered.
Such Certification shall state that the materials specifications and test results
are in compliance with the specified requirement of the pertinent
designations of the most recent edition of ASTM, BS or any other approved
equivalent National Standard unless otherwise directed.
Falsification of such Certificates, Materials, Specifications or Test Results

shall be just cause for the rejection of the materials.
1.3.2 Setting-Out the Work
The Contractor shall stake-out the work as to lines and grade in accordance
with the Drawings and secure the approval of the Engineer's Representative
before constructing the work. The Engineer's Representative will, if he
deems it necessary revise the lines or grades and will require the Contractor
to adjust and to stake-out accordingly. The Contractor shall give the
Engineer's Representative not less than 24 hours notice of his intention to
set out or give levels for any parts of the Works, in order that arrangements
may be made for checking. The Contractor shall be responsible for
obtaining any setting-out data he may require from Dubai Municipality
Survey Section. The Contractor shall also be responsible for obtaining
Dubai Municipality Survey Section’s approval on right-of-way. Any costs
incurred in this shall be borne by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall, as a requirement of the Contract and without extra

charge, provide all necessary instruments, appliances, surveyor personnel
and labour, and any other material or staging, which the Engineer's
Representative may require for checking the setting out or for any relevant
work to be done. Any marks made by the Engineer's Representative or
Contractor shall be carefully preserved and, if destroyed, shall be replaced
by the Contractor at his own expense and to the approval of the Engineer.
Work shall be suspended for the time necessary for checking the lines and
levels on any part of the work, and shall proceed only after approval of
measurements.
In the case of any variation from the approved works, the Contractor shall
give the Engineer three copies of cross-sections and profiles of the graphical
record or notes and computations of his stake-out as required by the
Engineer. At his option he may submit cross-mark on one copy with his
approval of the proposed lines of the work or his revisions thereof and return
it to the Contractor. The Contractor shall resubmit for approval any cross-
sections the Engineer may amend.

1.3.3 Notice of Operations
The Contractor shall, when required, supply in writing full information

regarding the localities in which the materials are being obtained and in
which the work is being prepared.
No permanent work shall be carried out without the consent in writing of the
Engineer's Representative. Full and complete notice, in writing, shall be
given 24 hours in advance of the time of the operation in order to make such
arrangements as deemed necessary for inspection.
1.3.4 Traffic Safety and Control
1. The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain such traffic signs, lamps
barriers and traffic control signals as may be necessitated by the
construction of the Works in accordance with Roads & Transport
Authority (RTA) and Dubai Traffic Police requirements. The Contractor
shall submit proposals for dealing with such situations to the Engineer,
RTA and Dubai Traffic Police for consent. Compliance with this Clause
shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his other obligations and
liabilities under the Contract.
2. The Contractor shall, after consultation with any statutory or other

authority concerned, submit to the Engineer for his approval a
programme based on such consultation showing the scheme of traffic
management he proposes for carrying out the Works before
commencing any work which affects the use of the public highway rights
of way or parking areas and thereafter furnish such further details and
information as necessitated by the Works or as the Engineer may
require.
3. The Contractor shall not commence any work which affects the public
highway until all traffic safety measures necessitated by the work are
fully operational.
4. The traffic diversion and signs, lamps, barriers and traffic control signals
shall be in accordance with the requirements of RTA (also refer to
Clause 11.5).
5. Traffic signs shall comply with the requirements of RTA. The flashing
rate for flashing lamps shall be within the range 120-150 flashes per
minute. The minimum luminous intensity of the lamps shall be 0.5
candela for steady lamps, 1.0 candela for ripple lamps at their peak, and
1.5 candela for flashing lamps at their peak.
6. The Contractor shall keep clean and legible at all times all traffic signs,
lamps, barriers and traffic control signals and he shall position,
re-position, cover or remove them as necessitated by the progress of the
Works.
7. Where road diversions roads are approved these must be maintained at

frequencies to suit the traffic volume using them. A good running surface
must be maintained and must at all times be free from ruts and potholes.

1.3.5 Access to Private Land
The Contractor shall give three weeks notice to the owner/occupier before
entering private lands and the Contractor shall not enter on to those lands
until given permission by the Engineer.
1.3.6 Roads and Site to be Kept Clean
The Contractor shall take great care and all reasonable precautions to
ensure that roads and thoroughfares used by him either for the construction
of the Works or for the transport of plant, labour and materials are kept clean
during of such construction or transport and in the event of their requiring
cleaning in the opinion of the Engineer the Contractor shall take all
necessary and immediate steps to clean them.
On completion of dewatering the Contractor shall immediately dismantle and

remove from the Site disused discharge pipes and dewatering points.
Each individual site of work must be clean during the work and must be
thoroughly cleaned up on completion.
1.3.7 Compensation for Damage to Property
The Contractor shall reinstate all properties whether public or private

affected by the Works, Temporary Works, constructional plant, labour
materials or transport to a condition at least equal to that existing before his
first entry on to them.
If in the opinion of the Engineer the Contractor shall have failed to take
reasonable and prompt action to discharge his obligations in the matter of
site clearance or reinstatements, the Engineer will inform the Contractor in
writing of his opinion in which circumstances the Employer reserves the right
to carry out the reinstatement himself or to arrange for it to be carried out by
others or to make payments to the owners and occupiers in respect of such
matters for which the Contractor is responsible. All such costs incurred and
payments made will be deducted from any monies due or which shall
become due from the Employer to the Contractor.
1.3.8 Existing Services
Drains, pipes, cables and similar existing services encountered in the course
of the Works shall be guarded from injury or damage by the Contractor at his
own cost so that they may continue to function uninterruptedly to the
satisfaction of the owners thereof and the Contractor shall not store
materials or otherwise occupy any part of the site in any manner likely to
hinder the operations of such owners.
1. The Contractor shall protect and support, during the progress of the
Works, all pipe mains, cable wires and other apparatus which might be
endangered by his operations. The approximate positions and
alignments of known services are indicated on the Drawings, but no
guarantee of exact location can be given, and the Contractor must
communicate with the authorities and/or proprietors concerned to locate

them exactly, and he shall then prepare shop drawings 1/500 scale for
each Utility as directed by the Engineer. When approaching each
indicated position, the Contractor shall search, by safe methods which
will not endanger the service, to determine its precise position.
2. The Contractor shall make his own arrangement with the owners of the
services and with other persons interested, for any diversions, temporary
stoppages and reinstatements, and he shall allow in his programme for
all such arrangements.
3. If any underground service is encountered unexpectedly, excavation

shall cease, and the Engineer's Representative shall be notified
immediately. Emergency work, as necessary, should be put in hand
without delay and without prejudice to the indemnity of the Employer.
4. The Contractor shall give notice, in writing, to the Engineer and to the
appropriate service company of all damages to existing services caused
by him or by any Sub-Contractor in the course of the Works. He shall be
held responsible for any such damage and shall immediately have such
damage made good at his own expense and shall relieve the Employer
of all claims in respect of any loss or interruption involved.
5. If in the opinion of the Engineer, it is necessary or expedient that any

pipe, drain, ditch, cable or overhead wire (including supports) should be
broken out, stopped up, diverted, taken down, or altered, the cost of
doing so shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Such work shall be
executed only on the written instruction of the Engineer.
6. All existing sewers, culverts, water courses and drains of every kind and
condition that have been altered, extended or otherwise interfered with
either directly or indirectly by the work, or that may by leakage, silting,
stopping of free flow or otherwise interfere with or delay the execution of
the work, shall be made good, cleaned, placed in working order,
supported, maintained, and protected and the Contractor shall provide
everything necessary for efficiently dealing with, protecting, pumping or
removing, as the case may be, all water, sewage, or spoil there from.
1.3.9 Continuous Working
If in the opinion of the Engineer it is necessary for the safety of the Works or
for any other reason, the Contractor shall, when so ordered, carry out the
Works, or any portion thereof continuously by day and night. The
Contractor will be reimbursed the agreed extra costs, provided the necessity
for the order is not a result of the Contractor's negligence.
1.3.10 Temporary Staging for Structures
Temporary staging shall be provided by the Contractor to enable the

construction operations to be performed in the required sequence. The
staging shall be properly designed and constructed for the loads, which it will
be required to support, and complete details of the arrangements proposed
shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.

Such approval, however, will not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility
for the adequacy of the staging. The cost of such staging is to be included in
the tendered rates and prices entered in the Bills of Quantities.
1.3.11 Water Supply
The Contractor shall carry out an investigation prior to submitting his Tender
as to the availability of water for the purpose of the Works and shall consult
and arrange with the appropriate authorities and consider all legal aspects.
The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the supply of sufficient water
of the specified quality at all times throughout the Contract, and the costs
shall be deemed to be covered in the Contract rates and prices.
1.3.12 Filling in Holes and Trenches
The Contractor, immediately on completion of any part of the work, shall, at

his own expense, fill up all holes and trenches which have been made or
dug by him and are not part of the Works. Holes, cavities, trenches or
depressions shall be backfilled with suitable materials and compacted to the
grade required or as directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall clear
away all rubbish and materials that is no longer required for the execution of
the work, whether his own or any other party to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
1.3.13 Protection of Works from Weather
The Contractor, at his own expense, shall protect all works and materials
from injury by weather. All damage caused by adverse weather conditions,
whether by flooding or intense heat or any other weather conditions, shall be
rectified by the Contractor at his own expense. Abnormal weather conditions
shall not be considered any reason for a claim by the Contractor for
compensation for damage.
1.3.14 Keeping the Works Free from Water
The Contractor shall at his own expense keep the works at all times well
drained and excavations whether above or below the normal water level of
the water table free from storm or percolating water which may accumulate
on the Site and which may interfere with progress of construction or has or is
likely to have deleterious effect on the work in progress or the use thereof,
by provision of temporary open drains and sub-soil drains, diversion of
ditches and other surface water channel or by pumping or other means as
required.
1.3.15 Sign Boards
The Contractor shall provide and erect signboards as detailed in the BOQ, at
the Site and at the Offices of the Engineer and the Contractor. Normally
signboards will be required on all major road approaches to the Site.
The layout and lettering size and location of all signboards and their sitting
shall be subject to the approval of Roads & Transport Authority.
The signboards shall give, in English and Arabic, the name of the Project
and the names, Post Office Box numbers and contact telephone numbers of

the Employer, the Engineer and the Contractor. The boards shall be of
dimensions as shown on the drawings and shall be of durable construction
capable of withstanding the effects of the climate for at least the period of
the construction and the Defects Liability Period. The boards shall be
mounted on substantial frames.
The signboards shall be periodically cleaned, remain legible and be

maintained in a structurally safe condition throughout the period of
construction and Defects Liability Period. Upon issue of the Defects Liability
Certificate they shall be removed from the Site within two weeks.
1.3.16 Templates
When necessary the Contractor shall provide at his expense sufficient and
approved templates for the purpose of controlling the finished shape of
certain work. The templates will be in accordance with the Specifications and
Drawings where such are provided.
All templates must be approved and shall be maintained in good order to

provide the section required for the entire works. Templates may be checked
from time to time and any deficiencies noted shall be rectified immediately.
The Contractor shall also supply straight edges and lines when required to
control the work.
1.3.17 Assistance to the Engineer
1. The Contractor shall provide and maintain for the use of the Engineer
such surveying and engineering instruments as the Engineer may
require for his duties as detailed in (Clause 1.3.18). The Contractor shall
provide the Engineer with all necessary assistance in checking the
setting out of the Works and interpreting any information used by the
Contractor for this purpose including the sole use of a minimum of three
(3) chainmen.
2. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with all assistance, equipment
and material required to document and record progress of the Works.
3. The Contractor shall provide all assistance, equipment and material

required by the Engineer for all the measurement of the Works for
monthly valuation and for the final certificate payment.
4. The Contractor shall be responsible for all follow up and co-ordination

with all the service departments. (Electricity, Water, Drainage, Street
Lighting, Telephone, Horticultural, etc.).
5. The Contractor shall provide all unskilled labour and necessary tools as
directed by the Engineer.
6. If at any time before the commencement or during the progress of the
work it appears to the Contractor that for the proper execution of a
specified part of the Works, shop drawings are necessary, these
drawings shall be established by the Contractor and submitted to the
Engineers' Representative for approval. The Engineer's Representative
shall have authority to order at any time and the Contractor shall agree to

provide any number of shop drawings which, in the opinion of the

Engineer's Representative are necessary for the proper execution of a
specified work. The Contractor shall not proceed with the above
mentioned work until these shop drawings are approved by the
Engineer's Representative. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any
extra compensation or extension of time for the preparation of the above
mentioned drawings.
These details shall be dimensioned in the metric system and shall

describe accurately the method of fabrication, applied finish and sizes of
all members and fixings and shall indicate methods of marking of
components for site erection.
7. The Engineer shall furnish the Contractor transparencies and AutoCad

ver.12 diskettes of the original drawings to be corrected as the Works
proceed. The Contractor shall correct where required, prepare and
supply the Engineer’s Representative the updated transparencies and
diskettes for his approval. The diskette copies shall be in Microstation
DGN format of a standard and detail acceptable to the Dubai Municipality
Drainage and Irrigation Department.
Such record Drawings produced by the Contractor shall include but not
be limited to the following information:
Offsets from permanent references such as road edge, road centreline,

kerbline, building line, etc., at suitable intervals as directed by the
Engineer, for all services encountered during the Works and during trial
trenches including description of offsets..
- Level profiles for all sewerage, drainage, rising mains.
- House connection layout and details to be completed as separate

drawings and included on main sewer layout drawings.
8. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any extra payment or extension of

time for the preparation of the above mentioned record drawings.
The Contractor shall at the commencement of works, provide the

Engineer's Representative for his full and exclusive use sufficient
number of water, soil, concrete, asphalt, and room thermometers as
required by the Engineer.
1.3.18 Surveying Equipment
The equipment required on Site under this Contract shall be to the

Engineer's approval and is as follows:

Table 1-3. Schedule of Equipment
ITEM DESCRIPTION NO.
a. Wild TC1610 Total Station and Tripod. 1

b. Wild NAK Universal Automatic Level with tripod 2
(or approved equal).
c. Sectional leveling staves with leveling bubble, 5m long. 2
d. Ranging rods, painted, 2.5m long. 6
e. 30m steel measuring tape graduated in meters and mm, 2
Rabon Permaline or approval equal.
f. 30m long non-metallic measuring tape graduated in meters 2
and mm, Rabon Permaline or approved similar.
g. 5m steel pocket tape graduated in mm Stanley or approved 6
equal.
h. Universal straight edge 3m with edge gauge. 1
I. Aluminum spirit level 1m long with four plumb and two level 1
tubes.
j. Safety helmets, reflective jackets and other safety as required
equipments as required.
k. Rolling Straight Edge when required.
l. One copy of all standards referred to in the Specifications.
m. Target reflection with 3km range. 2
n. Plumbing pole to target and reflector. 1
o. Tripod and Tribarch. 3
p. Weather proof rubber-cased torches. 2
q. Surveying umbrellas, level books etc. as required
r. Digital thermometer for asphalt and concrete 2
s. Manhole lifting keys for
i) heavy duty covers 1
ii) medium duty covers 1
iii) light duty covers 1
t. Other miscellaneous equipment and tools necessary for the
carrying out of the Engineer's duties.

1.3.18.1 Expendable Materials
The Contractor shall provide adequate supplies of expendable materials

such as stationary, pencils, inks, drawing paper, pens, pegs, brushes, paint
and other similar items required for the satisfactory completion of survey and
as required by the Engineer's Representative.
1.3.19 Laboratory
1.3.19.1 General
1. Testing of materials and completed work shall be carried-out in

accordance with DM Administrative Order No. 160/2000.
2. All transportation of personnel and materials together with the provision

of all assistance to laboratory testing shall be borne by the Contractor.
For this purpose an approved long wheel base 4WD vehicle shall be
maintained for this specific use by the Contractor to be at the sole and
full time disposal of the Engineer. The role of this vehicle will include
the delivery and uplifting of all material for the laboratory including test
results. Contractor's technician shall not participate in the testing.
Notice of tests shall be given to the Dubai Municipality at least one day
prior to the proposed testing.
3. Dubai Municipality shall charge the Contractor for all testing and
re-testing. Also Dubai Municipality shall, at the discretion of the
Engineer, have the right to charge for additional material testing where
this additional testing is, in the view of the Engineer, caused by
negligence or insufficient testing prior to submission of materials on the
part of the Contractor. All charges for testing and/or re-testing will be at
Dubai Municipality standard rates current at the time of testing/re-
testing.
4. The testing of the Works by the Dubai Municipality does not absolves
the Contractor of his responsibility for the quality control of
workmanship and materials.
5. The Engineer and the Contractor's authorised representative shall be

permitted to witness any testing carried out by the DM Dubai Central
Laboratory Department (DCL).
6. DM Dubai Central Laboratory Department (DCL) will not be held liable

for the interpretation and correctness of test data. This will also be the
responsibility of the Engineer and the Contractor respectively.
7. All sampling for such tests shall be carried out by the Consultant's
Inspectors and labelled as per the relevant standard sampling
requirements (as listed in Clause 1.3.20).
8. Copies of the tests carried out by independent laboratories shall be

forwarded to the Dubai Central Laboratory.

1.3.20 Minimum Test Requirements

The following is the schedule of minimum requirements governing tests of
materials which shall be carried out during the execution of the Works.
Should the Engineer's Representative deem it necessary to increase or
reduce the number of the following mentioned tests, he shall issue his
written instructions to the Contractor as and when required, following due
consultation with the Employer.
Table 1-4. Minimum Test Requirements of Materials
Materials Frequency Relevant Standard
Water for One test for each source and as BS EN 1008
concrete directed by the Engineer
thereafter.
Portland One bag of cement for quality BS EN 196
Cement testing shall be taken from each ASTM C150
1700 bags or fraction thereof for
each source or manufacturer.
The Engineer may in lieu of this
accept a testing certificate.
Coarse One sample for quality testing BS EN 933-1& 2
Aggregate shall be taken from each ASTM C142, C123,
for Concrete designated source. After C 88, C127, C117,
approval one sample shall be
C535, DMS 8 …etc
taken for quality testing from
3
1000 m when the material is in
use. On each sample 2 sets of
the required tests should be
carried except sieve analysis
which shall be 3 in number.
Fine As for Coarse Aggregate above BS EN 933-1&2
Aggregate ASTM C142, C123,
for Concrete C 88, C128, C117,
C535, C 131,D 2419
DMS 8 …etc
Bituminous One sample of each type of ASTM D 5,D 92,D 113
Materials material shall be taken for each D 2042,D 1754,D 2170
source or delivery from the D88,D402,D2026,D244
manufactures. Subsequent …etc
testing shall be as directed by the
Engineer but not less than one
sample for each 500 drums
(55gal) or equivalent.
Aggregates One sample for quality testing BS EN 933-1, ASTM
for shall be taken from each C 136,C 128,C 127
Bituminous designated source. After C 88,C 131,DMS 7
Mixture approval one sample shall be
BS 1377
taken for quality testing from
each 1000m³ when material is in
use.
Mineral Filler One sample for quality testing ASTM D 242,D 546


For from each 50 tonnes or fraction
Bituminous thereof.
Mixtures
Bituminous 1) One sample of each days ASTM D 3549,D 1559
Mixtures production or each 300 tonnes DMS-9,DMS-10…..etc
laid or part thereof whichever
is greater, shall be taken for
quality testing. The sample
should be taken from the
paving machine after
approximately half of any one
load has been laid or from the
plant.
2) Three samples of cores in ASTM D 979,D 2726
sets of two (2) shall be taken
for each 300 linear meters of
traffic lane or 2000m² or parts
thereof for each completed
layer of pavement for
thickness and compacted
density testing.
Subgrade A quality testing procedure
and/or (laboratory) for each subgrade
Embankment material or embankment material
shall be carried out for each
1500m³ of material as follow:-
1) Granular Gradation BS 1377
2) Atterberg Limits Liquid and BS 1377
Plastic Limits, Linear
Shrinkage
3) Dry density moisture content BS 1377
relationship test with
compaction curve to optimum
moisture content and max. dry
density.
4) C.B.R. at 95% of Modified Bs 1377
Proctor density.
After laying and Compaction a
quality testing procedure on each
1000m² or part thereof should be
carried out as follows:-
5) Field density BS 1377
6) Moisture content if directed by BS 1377
the Engineer the following
tests may also be carried out
on the material as laid on site
7) Field C.B.R. with a speedy ASTM D 4429


estimate for moisture content
and dry unit weight
Sub-Bases A quality testing procedure ASTM D 75
and (laboratory) for each sub-base or
Aggregate granular road-base material shall
Road-Bases be carried out for each source
but not exceeeding1000m³ of
material as follows:-
1) For every completed layer one BS 1377
field density shall be
determined on each 500m².
2) Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit And BS 1377 P2
Linear Shrinkage.
3) Organic Content BS 1377 P3
4) Elongation and Flakiness BS 812
index
Water Absorption ASTM C 127,128
5) Max dry density(proctor) BS 1377 P4
6- C.B.R. at max. dry density. BS 1377 P4
After laying and compaction the

following testing procedure shall
be followed for every 1000m² of
each layer:-
7) Field Density (2 no.) BS 1377 P9
Reinforcing Reinforcement steel shall be
Steel supplied to site with a
manufactures’ test certificate for
each load. Where directed testing
on any sample of reinforcement
for the following types may be
required:-
1) Steel fabric reinforcement BS 4483
BS 4449
2 Mild steel and high yield (hot
rolled) bars.
3) Cold worked steel bars. BS 4482
4) Chemical Analysis of Steel foASTM Relevant Standard
Concrete One set of at least 6 cubes (or 4 BS 1881
cylinders) shall be obtained from
each 75m³ or fraction thereof
placed in each day or class of
concrete.
BS EN 12350
Slump test and compaction factor


test shall be carried out at the
actual placing of concrete as
directed by the engineer.
BS 1881
Preparation of concrete ASTM C 192
specimens & curing of
specimens.
ASTM C 1084
Minimum cement content of
hardened concrete as directed by
the Engineer.
Precast Flexural/Transverse strength and BS EN 12390
Concrete water absorption for each BS EN 1339
supplier of precast kerbs and
slabs (2 no. samples).
Subsequently on approval of a
source or supplier 2 samples will
be tested every 2000 linear metre
for kerbs and every 2000 m² for
slab tiles.
1.3.21 Sources of Materials
The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the Approval of the local
Authorities for the sources of materials and he shall have no right to claim for
any compensation if he is to pay for the material at its source.
1.3.22 Programming the Progress of the Works
A detailed computer-based programme using critical path methods shall be

produced by the Contractor as set out in the Conditions of Contract. This
shall include full details of resources and rates of progress. The Engineer
may require the Contractor to modify the programme on occasions during
the course of the Contract. The Contractor shall work to the latest approved
programme at all times.
In planning his programme the Contractor shall allow reasonable time for the
Engineer to confirm setting out details as the Works proceed in accordance
with the programme.
The Contractor shall indicate on his programme whether the work is to be

carried out during normal site hours or whether overtime or a shift system is
necessary to execute the Works.
The Contractor shall present a weekly summary to the Engineer detailing

personnel, plant materials and equipment orders and shipping movements of
same.
Before the close of Site on each working day the Contractor shall submit a
brief programme for the following working day stating in which area of the

site work will be carried out and the location of plant and labour. The format
of the programme shall be agreed with the Engineer. The Contractor shall
also submit for the Engineer’s approval a daily record of manpower and
plant resources.
1.3.23 Progress Reports
The Contractor shall be required to submit to the Engineer weekly and

monthly progress reports on the first day of the week following and the first
day of the month following respectively.
Weekly Report
The report shall include: the meteorological data; Contractor's plant and
labour returns; a brief summary of work completed.
Monthly Report
The report shall include: a description of the month's work; details of any
problems relating to the Works; quantities; records of test results; charts
illustrating progress in terms of work done against programmed work and the
financial status of the Contract including value of works completed, certified
and monies received; progress photographs.
1.3.24 Progress Photographs
The Contractor shall arrange to take monthly record photographs of the

Works in progress. These photographs shall cover such extent of the Works
as the Engineer shall direct. The days upon which the photographs are to
be taken shall be decided by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall provide the Engineer on the last day of each month one
set of progress photographs, with dates imprinted on it, which shall comprise
the following:
- One colour negative of each photograph for an anticipated maximum of

fifty exposures per month.
- Ten colour prints (294 x 210 mm) of each of a maximum of twenty of the
negatives as selected by the Engineer.
The prints are to be processed by an approved professional and shall be in

colour on heavy weight paper with matt finish. The photographs shall have
computer produced descriptions incorporated thereon. Each photograph
shall be provided with an approved clear plastic cover for binding.
The copyright of all photographs shall be vested in the Employer and the
negatives and prints shall be delivered to the Engineer within 4 days of
exposure.

1.3.25 Flows in Pipelines and at Pumping Stations
During the execution of the Works the Contractor shall maintain flows in
pipelines and at pumping stations or alternatively provide adequate means
of diverting the flows or overpumping of the flows to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
The Contractor should note that the Employer may decide to carry out
overpumping utilising his own plant and resources and the Contractor shall
make due allowance for the necessary coordination with the Employer with
respect to the Contract programme. Such arrangements will not relieve the
Contractor of his obligations for the maintenance of flows and the safety of
the Works, personnel and the general public.
No claim for delay or additional work arising from this requirement will be
considered by the Employer.
1.3.26 Suppression of Noise
The Contractor shall make every reasonable endeavour both by means of

temporary works and by the use of appropriate plant or silencing devices to
ensure that the level of noise resulting from the execution of the Works does
not constitute a nuisance.
1.3.27 Closing of Roads
The Contractor shall give four weeks notice in writing to the Engineer of his
intention to commence work on any public road (which shall include un-
made rights-of-way).
The closure of public roads will not be permitted without the written
permission of the Roads & Transport Authority - Roads Department, the
Dubai Traffic Police and the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit five (5)
copies of his proposals for diverting traffic indicating positions of all signs,
cones, lights and anything else which may be necessary. The Contractor
shall comply with any Specification for traffic diversion, including surfacing
requirements, safety and control laid down by the Authorities in Dubai and
shall be responsible for continuous maintenance.
A period of up to 30 days may be required by the RTA to process permits

authorising the cutting of existing carriageways.
In the event of such permission being refused the Contractor shall have no
claim for any additional payment.
No work will be permitted on a public road verge, central reservation or

garden without the SIGNED approval of the respective Authorities copies of
which must be submitted to the Engineer before work commences.
The Contractor’s work shall be so arranged that use of the roads affected by
the work shall be restored to the public with the minimum of delay. Laying of
the pipelines, backfilling, testing of the pipeline, temporary reinstatement and
clearance of the Site shall follow closely behind excavation and the Engineer
may limit the length of excavation when necessary.

1.3.28 NOC from Relevant Authorities
Not withstanding the requirements of clause 48 of "Conditions of Contract for

Works of Civil Engineering Construction, (Part 1 - General Conditions)" it
shall be the Contractor's responsibility to obtain all required No Objection
Certificates (NOC) from the relevant Authorities and submit them to the
Engineer prior to the Engineer issuing a Taking Over Certificate.

2.1 CLEARING & GRUBBING
Unless otherwise specified, the areas designated for clearing and grubbing
shall be cleared of all trees, stumps, bushes, roots, rubbish, debris, and
other objectionable matters.
Before removal of any trees or shrubs the Contractor shall obtain written
consent from Dubai Municipality Horticultural Section at least two weeks in
advance of the planned removal. The Engineer's approval of any removal of
trees and undergrowth must be obtained before commencement of work.
Trees and plants designated for preservation shall be protected from injury
or damage which could result from the Contractor's operations including
dewatering. The form of protection for vegetation within the site shall be of a
type and standard approved by the Dubai Municipality Horticultural Section.
The Contractor shall avoid, as far as practicable, injury to shrubbery, vines,

plants, grasses and other vegetation growing outside of the clearing limits.
The dragging, piling and burning of debris, the piling of materials of various
kinds and the performing of other work which may be injurious to vegetation
shall, in so far as practicable, be confined to areas which have no vegetation
or which will be disturbed by excavation.
For the full width to be cleared, all objectionable materials and any other
obstructions shall be grubbed from areas to be excavated, to the satisfaction
of the Engineer.
The topsoil should be scarified to a depth of at least 15 centimetres and

investigated if any unsuitable materials exists. The unsuitable materials, if
any, shall be removed to the depth required by the Engineer's
Representative and replaced by approved suitable material.
Cavities left below subgrade elevation by the removal of stumps or roots

shall be carefully backfilled and the backfill material compacted to the
Engineer's satisfaction.
All tree trunks, stumps, bush, limbs, roots, vegetation, and other debris
removed in clearing and grubbing shall be either burned or removed to
approved location outside the right-of-way or otherwise disposed of so as to
leave the roadway and adjacent areas free from unsightly debris. Burning
shall be done at such time and in such manner as to prevent any damage to
areas adjoining the right-of-way.
2.2 REMOVAL OF STRUCTURES AND OBSTRUCTIONS
2.2.1 General
Removal of structures and obstructions shall consist of the removal, wholly

or in part, and satisfactory disposal of all structures and obstructions within
the right-of-way which have not been designated to remain. Salvaging
designated materials shall be included.
Prior to starting the removal of structures and obstructions, the Contractor

shall carry out a thorough survey of structures, fences, trees, etc., that are to

be removed. The Engineer shall be fully informed of the results of this

survey and the amount and extent of the planned removal and the plan shall
then be agreed by the Engineer.
Indications on the Drawings that existing structures, pavements sidewalks,

curbs, gutters and other existing improvements are to become an integral
part of the planned improvements shall be considered to mean that such
designated improvements are to remain even though not specifically noted
to remain.
Existing highways, improvements, facilities, adjacent property and services

designated for preservation shall be protected from injury or damage which
could result from the Contractor's operations.
The Contractor shall raze, remove and dispose of all structures and
obstructions as required including, but not limited to, the following: buildings,
sheds, walls, slabs, foundations, inlets, catch basins, culverts, headwalls,
trash racks, irrigation structures, standpipes, manholes, valves, ditch lining,
pipelines, tanks, pool lining, posts, poles, columns, signs, fences, gates,
planters, curbs, gutters, sidewalks, driveways, trees, stumps, shrubs and
plants.
Holes, cavities, trenches or depressions left by the removal of structures or

obstructions shall be backfilled with suitable materials and compacted to the
grade required or as directed by the Engineer.
2.2.2 Removal of Pipes
Where required, the Contractor shall be responsible, prior to removal of

pipes, for the disconnection of all services and clearance from the DM/RTA
and all Service Authorities.
All pipes to be removed and either salvaged or relaid shall be carefully

removed and every precaution taken to avoid breaking or damaging the
pipe. The pipes shall be stored when necessary so that there will be no loss
or damage before relaying. The Contractor will be required to replace
sections lost from storage or damage by negligence or by the use of
improper methods in their removal.
2.3 STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION
2.3.1 General
Structural excavation shall consist of the excavation and removal of all

materials necessary for the construction of structures, pipelines and
cables/ducts, including foundations and substructures, in accordance with
the details shown on the Drawings and these Specifications and/or as
directed.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer a sufficient time in advance of the
beginning of excavation to allow pre-construction measurements and
records to be made of the undisturbed ground (refer to Clause 2.3.2). The
required excavation shall then be performed in reasonably close conformity

to the lines, grades and cross sections established or shown on the

Drawings.
The sides of excavation may be sloped as required by soil conditions to

stabilize the sides for safe working conditions. Such excavation shall be
limited to the amount considered necessary for safety.
The Contractor shall take all necessary steps by means of shoring,

timbering, or otherwise (also refer to Clause 2.3.7) to avoid slips and falls of
the sides of the excavation but if any should occur the Contractor shall
remove at his own expense all such fallen or disturbed material from the
excavation and shall replace with backfilling as described elsewhere.
The Engineer may direct the Contractor to protect his excavation with
timbering where, in his opinion, such timbering is necessary to ensure the
safety of the workmen, adjoining structures and work generally. Any action
taken by the Engineer in this regard will in no way relieve the Contractor of
any responsibility or liability under the Contract.
Where a firm bearing material is not encountered at the elevation

established for bearing, due to soft, spongy or otherwise unstable soil, all
such unsuitable material shall be removed to the extent directed (see Clause
2.3.15).
No back throwing shall be allowed and all materials must be brought to the
surface and placed clear of the trench side.
The Contractor shall keep the trench excavation free from water at all times.
The Engineer reserves the right to direct the Contractor as to the lengths of
trench or portions of bulk excavations which shall remain open at any one
time.
The use of explosives for any purpose whatsoever during the Contract is
prohibited.
2.3.2 Pre-Construction and Land Drainage Records
Before an excavation is started:-
(1) Ground levels shall be agreed at suitable intervals with the Engineer's
Representative.
(2) Surface materials and conditions will be recorded in collaboration with

the Engineer's Representative and where appropriate the owners or
occupiers of the land.
(3) The Contractor shall take photographs to illustrate existing damage or

conditions which may prove contentious at the time of reinstatement.
This information shall be neatly presented in bound volumes and submitted

to the Engineer. To this shall be added details of any existing natural or
piped subsoil drainage or other underground features as work proceeds.

Trial excavations may be ordered by hand or other methods to reveal

sub-surface conditions of any kind. The Contractor shall submit a written
report or sketch drawings of data so obtained and the excavations shall not
be backfilled without approval.
2.3.3 Setting Out
Before any structural excavation is commenced the Contractor shall define

the centre line or other agreed reference line of the Works and erect the
necessary profiles throughout their full length if so required by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all verifications from the
Dubai Municipality Survey Section and the Contractor shall bear all
associated costs.
2.3.4 Topsoil and Surfacing Materials
Before commencing excavations or filling to an area, topsoil and other

surfacing materials shall be stripped and stored separately from the subsoil
(refer to Clause 2.1). Subsequent spreading of topsoil shall be as directed
on site.
2.3.5 Land Drains
Where pipelines are to be laid in agricultural land the surface and subsoil
drainage shall be maintained whether natural or artificial. Before
commencing work the Contractor shall ascertain from the owner or occupier
of the land the location of any existing land drains or mole drains.
2.3.6 Hand Excavation
Where instructed or necessary for reasons of limited access or any other

reason, excavation shall be carried out by hand at no additional cost.
2.3.7 Support to Excavations
The sides and/or the bottom of excavations in excess of 1.2 metres shall be
adequately supported.
The Contractor shall provide the necessary support for excavations and shall
submit to the Engineer his proposals for the supporting of excavations by
trench sheeting or other approved means at least seven days prior to the
commencement of any excavation works. His proposals shall take into
account the nature of the ground to be excavated, the level of the water
table at the site and the proximity of buildings and roads.
If in the opinion of the Engineer the support proposed for the excavations by
the Contractor is insufficient then the Engineer will order the provision of
stronger support than that provided by the Contractor and in this event the
Contractor shall adopt the methods so ordered by the Engineer and shall
have no claim against the Employer for any costs incurred in adopting the
additional measures.

Trench supports shall be so arranged to permit withdrawal during the placing

of the pipe bedding and backfilling so as to prevent voids.
The Contractor shall not remove temporary works supporting the

excavations until in the opinion of the Engineer the permanent work is
sufficiently advanced to permit such removal which shall be executed under
the personal supervision of a competent foreman.
All temporary works supporting the excavation shall be removed during

backfilling unless previous approval has been obtained from the Engineer.
Where temporary supports have been used in the excavation any such
supports left in because it is impracticable to remove them shall be left in at
the expense of the Contractor.
Should temporary supports need to be left in any excavation carried out in

open cut owing to the Engineer deciding that their permanent installation is
necessary for the stability of an adjacent structure or service the Contractor
shall be reimbursed in accordance with the provisions of the Contract.
Any advice, permission, approval or instruction given by the Engineer

relative to such support or the removal thereof shall not relieve the
Contractor from his responsibilities or liabilities under the Contract.
Timbering steel sheeting strutting and sheet piling for the support of
excavations where provided shall be fixed in accordance with BS 6031.
Battered sides to trenches or other excavations will only be permitted if they

can be constructed within the limits of the site, without damage or
interference to existing services, properties or structures, without undue
interference with pedestrians and traffic and to slopes which are sufficiently
flat to ensure stability of the ground.
2.3.8 Dewatering
A high water table is expected and the Contractor must do all necessary
measures to ensure proper dry conditions are maintained at all times during
construction. The Contractor shall provide and maintain ample means and
devices (including spare units kept ready for immediate use in case of
breakdowns) with which to intercept and/or remove promptly and dispose
properly of all water entering trenches and other excavations. Such
excavations shall be kept dry until the structures, pipes, and appurtenances
to be built therein have been completed. In addition precautions shall be
taken to prevent floatation of partially built structures, completed structures
to be filled on commissioning of the Works and pipelines awaiting backfilling.
Dewatering methods proposed in the Contractor’s method statements may

include temporary drains, intercepting ditches, cut-off drains, sub-drains,
sumps, wells, pumps, well-points or other dewatering equipment and shall
include all other things necessary to keep water out of the excavations or to
lower groundwater around structures liable to floatation.
All necessary precautions shall be taken to prevent any adjacent ground
from being adversely affected by loss of fines through any dewatering
process.

Method statements shall include proposals for disposal of the water arising
from dewatering systems.
All water pumped or drained from the work shall be disposed of in a suitable
manner without undue interference with other work, damage to pavements,
other surfaces, or property. Suitable temporary pipes, flumes, or channels
shall be provided for water that may flow along or across the site of the work.
No such water is to be disposed of into the existing sewer systems of the
town or otherwise without prior written approval of the Dubai Municipality
Drainage and Irrigation Department.
If permission is given to use new or existing pipes or culverts which are not
part of the live sewerage system, they shall be thoroughly cleaned of all silt
and any resulting damage made good after use.
When the Contractor proposes to make use of existing dewatering pipelines,

ducts, etc., he shall satisfy himself as to their condition prior to his use of
them. If any of these items is found to be in an unsatisfactory condition then,
before use, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer who may give
instructions for the item to be replaced or repaired. Time taken to carry out
such work will not be considered as delay to the Contractor's operations.
During use the Contractor shall be responsible for the condition of the
pipeline, duct, etc., and any defect or failure shall be made good at the
Contractor's expense. Any delay to the Contractor's works caused by such
defect or failure shall be deemed as the Contractor's responsibility.
After use by the Contractor such pipeline, duct, etc., shall be handed back to
the Municipality in a condition not less than that at the commencement of
use. Any repairs or replacement required shall be at the Contractor's
expense.
It cannot be guaranteed that permission will be given to use existing ducts

and pipelines.
All temporary works for control of water shall be sited clear of the Works,
except where temporary sub-drains under the Works are approved in which
case the pipes shall be laid with a 75 mm surround of gravel, and the top
surface of the surround shall be covered with tarred felt cloth or other
approved material.
Unless otherwise directed all temporary drains and sub-drains shall be finally
sealed with concrete at approved intervals and all temporary ditches, sumps,
wells, etc., shall be refilled and reinstated as specified elsewhere.
In the exceptional event that lagoons for the storage of groundwater are
permitted, they must be suitably protected with fencing and attended by day
and night to prevent access by the general public and will not be sited
adjacent to buildings. Approved means of preventing the formation of
mosquito larvae on the surface of the lagoons will be employed.
All necessary precautions shall be taken to prevent any groundwater from
entering mains to be used for the conveyance of potable water.
A. Temporary Underdrains

Temporary underdrains, if used, shall be laid in trenches, beneath the grade

of the structure. Trenches shall be of suitable dimensions to provide room for
the chosen size of underdrain and its surrounding gravel.
Underdrains, if used, shall be laid at an approved distance below the bottom

of the normal excavation and with open joints wrapped in geotextile, and
entirely surrounded by graded gravel, or crushed stone to prevent the
admission of sand or other soil into the underdrains. The distance between
the bottom of the pipe or structure and the top of the bell of the underdrain
pipe shall be at least 8 cm. unless otherwise permitted. The space between
the underdrain and the pipe or structure shall be filled with screened gravel
or crushed stone which shall be rammed if necessary and left with a surface
suitable for laying the pipe or building the structure.
B. Wellpoint Drainage System
Where the nature of the Works necessitates, the Contractor shall dewater
the excavations by means of an efficient wellpoint drainage system which
will drain the soil and prevent saturated soil from flowing into the excavation.
The wellpoints shall be designed especially for this type of service. The
pumping unit shall be designed for use with the wellpoints, and shall be
capable of maintaining a high vacuum and of handling large volumes of air
and water at the same time.
If required by the nature of the Works, the installation of the wellpoints,

pumps, surge tanks, settlement tanks, geotextile and other such
requirements shall be done under the supervision of the competent
representative of the manufacturer. The Contractor shall do all special work
such as surrounding the wellpoints with sand or gravel or other work which is
necessary for the wellpoint system to operate for the successful dewatering
of the excavations.
Material to be used in the wellpoint system is to be corrosion resistant where

possible.
2.3.9 Formation
Damage to the formation shall be prevented by bottoming-up with hand

excavation immediately before placing concrete or pipelaying. Any damaged
formation shall be excavated and refilled with concrete or selected material
as instructed.
The formation of excavations for pipelines shall be dry, even and free of
stones and other protrusions.
No permanent works of any kind shall be constructed on an excavated

surface until the formation has been approved by the Engineer’s
Representative.
2.3.10 Excavation at or Near Roads
A. Safety

When excavating at or near roads, to protect persons from injury and to

avoid interference with traffic, adequate barricades, construction signs,
torches, guards, flashing lights, etc., as required by the Engineer shall be
provided and maintained during the progress of the construction work (refer
to Appendix 1 for Road Diversions and Road Signs). All materials, stockpiles
and equipment shall be placed in such a way that no obstruction or
interference to traffic is made and that these are enclosed by fences or
barricades and protected by lights.
All excavations shall be protected on all sides by an approved temporary

yellow plastic safety fencing, barricades and lights. The yellow plastic safety
fencing shall be manufactured of durable HDP polymer with Ultra Violet
stabilizers. The safety fencing shall be a minimum of 1.0 metre high.
B. Description
The Contractor shall make excavations in such a manner and to such
minimum widths as will give adequate room for building the structures or
laying and jointing the piping; shall furnish and place all sheeting, bracing,
and supports; shall carry out all cofferdamming, pumping, and draining, and
shall render the bottom of the excavations firm and dry and acceptable in all
respects.
In no case, except with the approval of the Engineer, shall the earth be
plowed, scraped, or dug by machinery so near to the finished subgrade as to
result in the disturbance of material below said subgrade, the last of the
material to be excavated shall be removed by hand immediately before the
placing of the pipe, masonry, or other structure.
C. Extent of Open Excavation

The extent of open excavation at any one time will be controlled by the
conditions, but shall always be confined to the limits prescribed by the
Engineer.
D. Separation of Surface Materials

The Contractor shall remove only as much of any existing pavement as is
necessary for the work. The Engineer may require that the pavement be cut
with pneumatic tools, cold planer, milling machine or the like without extra
compensation to the Contractor, when in the opinion of the Engineer it is
necessary to prevent damage to the remaining road surface. Where
pavement is removed in large pieces, it shall be disposed of before
proceeding with the excavation.
From areas within which excavations are to be made, loam and topsoil shall
be carefully removed and separately stored to be used again as directed, or
if the Contractor prefers not to separate surface materials, he shall furnish,
as directed, loam and topsoil at least equal in quantity and quality to that
excavated at no cost to the Works.
E. Sheeting and Bracing

In addition to the general requirements of Clause 2.3.7 the Contractor shall
furnish, put in place, and maintain such sheeting, bracing, etc., as may be
necessary to support the sides of the excavation and to prevent any
movement of earth from beneath the adjacent road surface which could in
any way diminish the width of the excavation to less than that necessary for

proper construction, or could otherwise injure or delay the work, or endanger

adjacent road and structures. If the Engineer is of the opinion that at any
point sufficient proper supports have not been provided, he may order
additional supports placed at the Contractor's expense.
For any excavations in or adjacent to roads all trenches must be supported

by an approved method to ensure no settlement of roads either during
construction, when withdrawing supports or thereafter.
F. Bridging Trenches
The Contractor shall, at his own expense, provide suitable and safe bridges
and other crossings where required for the accommodation of travel, and to
provide access to private property during construction, and shall remove
said structures thereafter.
G. Road Signs
All existing road signs, street name plates and the like affected by the Works
are to be carefully taken down and stored. Signs to be re-erected shall be
cleaned, provided with new fixings where necessary and the posts
re-painted as required. Redundant signs shall be transported to the stores
or depots of relevant Authorities. Any sign, street name plate or the like
damaged by the Contractor during his operation shall be repaired or
replaced at the Contractor's cost.
2.3.11 Excavation for Structures
Where concrete is to be placed on an excavated surface other than rock,

special care shall be taken not to disturb the bottom of the excavation. When
the nature or condition of the bearing material upon which concrete is to be
placed is determined to be such that the use of heavy excavating equipment
will reduce the stability of the soil, the final half meter of excavation to grade
shall be performed either by means of light equipment or by hand labour
methods.
Should the Contractor excavate to a depth greater than that required for the
construction of the foundations or pile caps, such excavation shall be filled
with Class C concrete at his own expense. Should the material forming the
bottom of any excavation, while acceptable at the time of excavation,
become puddled soft or loose during the progress of the Works, the
Contractor shall at his own expense, remove all such softened or loosened
material and replace with Class C concrete as directed by the Engineer's
Representative.
Where rock, in either ledge or boulder formation or other unyielding material,

is encountered in one portion of structural excavation for a box culvert and
yielding material (with bearing capacity less than 1000 kN/m2-determined by
appropriate tests) is encountered in an adjacent area of the structural
excavation for the same box culvert, such unyielding material shall be
removed for a minimum depth of half meter below grade and replaced with
special backfill.

Where such unyielding material is encountered in excavation other than for

box culverts or where an entire excavation for a box culvert bears on such
materials, the rock or other unyielding material shall be cleared of all loose
fragments and cut to a firm surface as directed.
The placing of concrete shall follow as closely as practicable the structural

excavation.
2.3.12 Excavation for Pipelines
Trenches for pipes shall be excavated to a sufficient depth and width to

enable the pipe and any specified or agreed joint, bedding, hauncing and
surrounding to be accommodated. Trenches shall be of width as specified
and as shown on the drawing.
Where rock, in either ledge or boulder formation or other unyielding material

is encountered, such unyielding material shall be removed for a minimum
depth of half meter below grade and replaced with special backfill (see
Clause 2.4.3).
2.3.13 Excavation for Cables/Ducts
The Contractor in carrying out excavation for cables/ducts shall, where

required, erect and maintain an approved type of temporary yellow plastic
safety fencing (refer to Clause 2.3.10) around any work and shall provide
fenced access ways across the trenches.
The bottom of the trench shall be accurately graded. Care shall be taken not
to excavate below the depths indicated. Where rock is encountered, the
rock shall be excavated to the required depth. Uneven surfaces of the
bottom of trench shall be excavated 150 mm deeper. Such depth in rock
shall be backfilled with approved fill material and compacted as specified
and/or as directed by the Engineer.
Whenever unsuitable soil is encountered, which in the opinion of the

Engineer is to be removed, it shall be removed to the depth required and the
trench backfilled to the proper grade with approved fill material and
compacted.
The width and depth of the trenches for electrical and telephone
cables/ducts shall be as specified in the relative drawings or as ordered by
the Engineer. Banks may be sloped or widened to facilitate placement of
cables, but not the extent that will cause interference with other utilities and
structures. No battering of trenches shall be allowed under existing
carriageways, unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer.
2.3.14 Excavated Material
All excavated material will remain the property of the Employer unless
designated as surplus to the Contract requirements in which case it will be
removed from site immediately. The Contractor shall dispose of such surplus
material as per Clause 2.3.16.
All excavated material shall be deposited so that it will cause as little

damage and inconvenience as possible.

Excavated material for use as backfill shall be as approved. Different

classes of material shall be handled and deposited separately.
The excavated material, if found unsuitable as backfill, shall be removed

from site and shall be replaced with suitable imported backfill to the approval
of the Engineer.
Unsuitable material shall include the following:
- Peat, organic soil and other similar materials.

- Materials from swamps, marshes and bogs.
- Materials susceptible to spontaneous combustion.
- Stumps, roots and perishable material.
- Excessively wet materials.
- All materials producing bearing capacity lower than the assumed design
value.
- Clays of liquid limit exceeding 40% (BS 1377:Part 2:1990:Clause 4.5)
and/or plasticity index exceeding 6 . (BS 1377:Part 2:1990:Clause 5.4)
- Material with >20% fines passing through 0.063mm sieve.

- Soaked CBR < 15%
- Rock size > 63mm
All surplus and unsuitable excavated material and rubble shall be

transported to the approved tip.
Where (natural) subsoil drainage depends on the relative positions of

pervious or impervious strata, special care shall be taken to separate those
materials and replace them in their natural positions.
2.3.15 Replacement of Unsuitable Material
Where exceptionally poor ground conditions and unsuitable materials are

encountered at the limits (formation level) shown for structural excavation,
the Contractor shall, at the direction of the Engineer, excavate down to firm
ground or 300 mm below formation, whichever is less. The extra excavation
shall be backfilled with either Class C concrete or special backfill in
accordance with Clause 2.4.3.
2.3.16 Disposal of Material

The Contractor shall seek approval for all the proposed disposal sites from
the RTA/DM before work commences and disposal at such sites shall be at
no extra cost to the Employer.
No excavated material shall be wasted without written permission from the

Engineer, and when such material is to be wasted, it shall be hauled to the
approved tip or as otherwise directed by the Engineer. Excavated materials
wasted by the Contractor without written permission of the Engineer shall be
replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.

The Contractor shall adhere rigidly to the requirements of RTA/DM Circulars

on the temporary storage and disposal of excavation material. These include
but are not limited to :-
- All material shall be stockpiled at an approved location and surrounded

with approved barricades. The Contractor shall also display his name
and contact telephone number.
- Certain separate areas will be designated for the disposal of hard debris
such as building rubble, broken concrete, kerbing, road pavement and
the like. The Contractor shall use only these designated areas and shall
keep these disposal areas neat and tidy at all times.
2.3.17 Cofferdams
Suitable and practically watertight cofferdams shall be used wherever

waterbearing strata are encountered above the elevation of the bottom of the
excavation.
The Contractor shall, on request, submit detailed drawings for approval

showing his proposed method of cofferdam construction and other pertinent
features not shown in detail on the Drawings. No construction shall be
started until such Drawings are approved, however, such approval shall not
relieve the Contractor of any responsibility for the successful completion of
the construction.
No timber or bracing which will extend into the concrete shall be left in
cofferdams or cribs.
Any pumping from the interior of any foundation enclosure shall be done in
such a manner as to preclude the possibility of any portion of the concrete
material being carried away. No pumping will be permitted during the placing
of concrete or for a period of at least 12 hours thereafter, unless it is done
from a suitable sump separated from the concrete work by a watertight wall.
Pumping to remove water from a sealed cofferdam shall not begin until the
seal has set sufficiently to withstand the hydrostatic pressure.
Cofferdams or cribs, including all sheeting and bracing, shall be removed by
the Contractor after the completion of the substructure. This removal work
shall be carried out in such a manner as not to disturb or mar the concrete.

2.4 BACKFILLING EXCAVATIONS
2.4.1 General
Backfilling around structures and in pipe trenches shall be carried out as

detailed below except where otherwise designated/directed.
The Contractor shall backfill all excavations in an expeditious manner to

minimize disruption to the general public.
Backfilling of trenches other than in roads and paved/ tiled areas shall
normally be carried out using selected excavated materials similar to the in-
situ materials in which the trench or structure is being constructed.
Special backfill shall be used for backfilling trenches in roads, paved/tiled

areas, and where designated or directed.
Where the excavation is near an existing structure liable to subsidence,

where part of the Works may later be constructed over or near it or in
emergencies the Contractor may be instructed to backfill with concrete.
2.4.2 Selected Backfill
Material for backfilling may be selected from any part of the site and
methods of selection may include sieving to remove large particles or
methods of hand or machine sorting together with soil classification and soil
property testing.
Backfilling with selected material shall be carried out as defined below.
Cohesive Soils
Cohesive soils shall be placed in layers not greater than 150 mm thick
(compacted thickness) and compacted such that throughout each layer
placed in-situ the dry density is not less than 95% of the maximum dry
density of the soil.
If site trials show that the specified compaction can be achieved with layers
greater than 150 mm compacted thickness approval may be given to backfill
in layers of greater thickness, but not exceeding 250 mm, providing the plant
utilised is that used for the trials.
The placement moisture of the soil shall be within the range 2% above to 2%
below the optimum moisture content of the soil.
Granular Soils
Granular soils shall be placed in layers not greater than 150 mm thick
(compacted thickness) and compacted such that throughout each layer
placed the dry density is not less than 95% of the maximum dry density as
determined by BS 1377: 1990: Part 4: cl 3.5 or 3.6 on the same soil at the
same moisture content.

If site trials show that the specified compaction can be achieved with layers
greater than 150 mm compacted thickness approval may be given to backfill
in layers of greater thickness, but not exceeding 250 mm, providing the plant
utilised is that used for the trials.
Unless otherwise directed the moisture content shall be maintained and if

necessary adjusted by approved means to fall within the range 1.5% above
to 1.5% below the optimum moisture content.
For free draining granular soils that have no clearly defined optimum
moisture content, compaction shall be carried out to achieve a relative
density of not less than 95%. During compaction the soil shall be made as
wet as practicable.
Testing of Backfill
Tests to determine the optimum dry density of the backfill material shall be
carried out as directed using BS 1377: 1990: Part 4: cl 3.5 or 3.6, the
frequency depending on consistency of material and test results.
Unless directed otherwise on site testing for density and moisture content of
in-situ soils shall be at the minimum rate of :-
(1) One test per backfill layer for each structure.
(2) One test per backfill layer for every 30 linear metres of pipeline trench
backfill laid in one operation.
Backfill for a Replacement Land Drain
Where a land drain passes through an excavation the backfill shall first be
taken up to form a bed for replacement pipes. The severed drains shall then
be exposed at each side of the trench to allow for connection and laying of a
new drain across the excavation. This new drain shall be of similar pipes of
the same diameter as those in the existing drain. Before any further
backfilling is done the Contractor shall notify the owner or occupier to enable
him to inspect the reinstated land drain. The replacement drain shall be
surrounded with pipe bedding to a minimum thickness 150 mm before
further backfilling.
2.4.3 Special Backfill
The material used for special backfill shall be obtained from designated and
approved sources.
Special backfill complying with the properties of Aggregate Roadbase

Material specified in Clause 3/8 of Appendix 4, Part 3 of 3 of the
Specifications shall be placed as fill or backfill in the areas required and in
reasonably close conformity to the lines, grades and dimensions shown on
the Drawings. Special care shall be taken to keep rocks away from
structures.
The materials shall be placed in layers of not more than 20 centimetres in

depth before compaction, and each layer shall be compacted by means of

mechanical or pneumatic tamping devices or other suitable equipment to

density of at least 95 percent of the maximum dry density as determined in
accordance with BS 1377: 1990: Part 4: cl 3.5 or 3.6.
Water shall be added to the material, by prewetting or by applying uniformly

to each layer, when required for compaction, but only of sufficient quantity to
ensure proper compaction.
The layers of material placed around structures shall be placed on opposite

sides to approximately the same elevation at the same time.
Special care shall be taken in placing and compacting material under

haunches of all pipe to prevent moving or raising the pipe from its bedding.
Material shall not be placed against any concrete abutment, wing wall,
retaining wall, box culvert or similar structure until the concrete has been in
place at least 14 days, unless otherwise authorised.
2.4.4 Filter Material
When required, filter material shall be placed in backfilling structures in

accordance with the details shown on the Drawings. Filter material shall
conform to the specified requirements for Fine Aggregate.
2.4.5 Structural and Non-Structural Filling
Structural filling is required within road corridors and/or wherever a structure

is to be supported on the fill and where settlement is required to be minimal.
Non-Structural filling will normally be carried out to embankments and other
fill areas. Embankments shall normally be overfilled and subsequently
trimmed to the required profiles.
Structural Filling
Structural filling shall be carried out using approved well graded natural
sands and gravel or special backfill in accordance with Clause 2.4.3.
Non-Structural Filling
The material and the procedure for Non-Structural filling shall be same as
outlined in Clause 2.4.2.
2.4.6 Backfilling of Trenches for Cables/Ducts
After the cables/ducts have been laid, the trench refilling shall commence
with approved fill in compacted layers not exceeding 200 mm thick, each
layer being well compacted by hand with iron rammers weighing not less
than 5 kg, until the trench has been filled to a height of 300 mm above the
top of the cable/duct.
The remainder of the trench shall then be refilled in compacted layers not
exceeding 200 mm in thickness, each layer being well compacted with
power rammers, vibrating plate compactors or other mechanical means of a
type to be approved until the ground is thoroughly consolidated up to the

required level for surface reinstatement. Each layer should be not less than
95% of its maximum dry density. Should the quantity of the excavated
materials be not sufficient, due to unsuitability or otherwise, for the process
of backfill and fill, the Contractor shall obtain the quantity required of such
backfill and fill from approved borrow pits and transport same to the site of
work at his own expense.
Trenches shall not be backfilled until all required tests are performed and
until the Engineer has verified that the cables, etc., have been installed in
accordance with the Specifications and Drawings.
Lumps and clods shall be broken up before use. Materials shall not be
dropped from a height and where directed water shall be added to assist in
adequate consolidation.
Where cover to cables/ducts is less than 400 mm, or where ordered by the
Engineer, protection in the form of concrete encasing shall be provided
according to an approved drawing or as ordered by the Engineer.
2.5 PROTECTION OF EXISTING SERVICES AND REINSTATEMENT
2.5.1 General
Where new pipes, mains, cables/ducts, etc., are to be laid alongside, over or
under the existing, the Contractor shall take care to interfere as little as
possible with the existing services and connections thereto and any damage
shall be repaired by the Contractor to the approval of the appropriate
Authority or by appropriate Authority at the cost of the Contractor.
The Contractor shall make all arrangements for protecting existing services
and for temporarily diverting them to maintain the services without
interruption.
Existing services, pipes, mains, ducts, etc., exposed in trenches for new
work shall be protected in accordance with the requirements of the relevant
Authority before trenches are refilled.
The Contractor shall lay cables, fittings, specials, etc., under hedges, fences,
walls, etc., as necessary.
Where hedges are damaged or destroyed the whole shall be restored and
reinstated with shrubs of the same kind as the hedge, planted in due season
in an approved manner and fenced on each side with post and rail stock
proof fences finished on top with one strand of galvanised barbed wire, or
otherwise protected as required by the owners or occupiers and the
Engineer.
Where fences or walls are damaged or destroyed the whole shall be
restored and reinstated with like materials to the satisfaction of the owners or
occupiers and the Engineer.
The Contractor shall ensure that no trees are damaged or permanently

removed in carrying out the Contract except where directed due to the
presence of permanent works.

2.5.2 Reinstatement of Unpaved Land
In general the reinstatement of stripped areas of unpaved land shall restore

the ground to a condition not inferior to that which existed before the site
was occupied.
The compacted backfill shall be taken up to a level which allows for

settlement. In arable, grassed and similar areas the surface to be topsoiled
shall then be loosened to a depth of 200 mm and topsoil replaced on it to the
specified depth without compaction using approved topsoil of comparable
quality to make up any deficiency.
Areas where grass is to be sown shall be worked to a fine tilth, levelled,

graded and rolled with a light roller. The seed shall be sown evenly at the
specified rate of application in the proper season and in suitable weather
conditions, and the areas again rolled. Restoration and re-seeding of any
areas where the new grass is inadequate shall be carried out as instructed.
As an alternative to seeding the 'dibbing in' at 200 mm centres of 'Bugunda'

or similar tropical grass tufts may be required.
The grass shall be well watered four times a day and the Contractor will be
required to keep the grass cut short until the Defects Liability Certificate has
been issued.
2.5.3 Reinstatement within Road Corridors
Trenches and other excavations within road corridors may be opened in four
types of ground:-
(1) in paved carriageways

(2) in footpaths and other paved areas (other than carriageways)
(3) in grassed verges and planted areas
(4) in unmade ground which does not fall into any of the above three
categories.
In addition there are four classes of carriageway construction as follow:-
(1) Estate roads: single carriageway

(2) Main access : single/dual carriageway
(3) Primary distributors
(4) Main arterials/highways, etc.
All reinstatement works falling into the above categories/classes shall be

carried out either in compliance with the current Local Order and any
subsequent revision thereof issued by Roads & Transport Authority or in
compliance with the details shown on the Contract Drawings, whichever is
the greater in either construction depth or asphalt thickness.
2.5.4 Reinstatement of Other Surfaced Areas
Surfaced areas not in road corridors shall be reinstated using materials

similar to and not inferior to those existing prior to commencement of the
Works.

2.5.5 Excavation and Reinstatement in Developed Reservations
The Dubai Municipality Horticulture Section will remove any trees, bushes
and plants from developed reservations that they wish to preserve prior to
the commencement of work by the Contractor. The Contractor must allow in
his rates for the removal and disposal of any remaining trees, bushes and
plants necessary for the execution of the Works and to keep sweet soil
separate in accordance with the current Local Order.
The reinstatement of the developed reservation shall be in accordance with

Clause 2.5.3.

SECTION 3:- CONCRETE WORKS
3.1 GENERAL
The prevailing standard for all concrete work shall be BS 8110 and such
amendments as shall be approved by the Engineer in accordance with the
CIRIA Guide to Concrete Construction in the Gulf Region.
Concrete work shall consist of furnishing all materials and constructing

structures of the forms, shapes and dimensions shown on the Drawings or
as directed, using Portland Cement concrete, in accordance with the details
shown on the Drawings and these Specifications.
Portland Cement concrete shall consist of a mixture of Portland Cement, fine

aggregate, coarse aggregate, water and additives when required. The
mixture shall be proportioned, mixed, placed and cured in accordance with
the requirements of BS 8110: Part 1. Where an additional clause conflicts or
is inconsistent with the requirements of BS 8110 the additional clause shall
always prevail. The concrete mixes shall be designed mixes for special or
ordinary concrete as defined in BS 8110, the design requirements of which
are laid down in this Specification.
3.2 MATERIALS
3.2.1 Cement
The complete range of chemical tests, test methods & specifications for
cement are as shown the following table:
Test Method Specifications

Chem Analysis (XRF) of SRC
BS-4027 or ASTM C 150 C3A = 3.5% max
type V
Chem Analysis (XRF) of OPC
BS EN 196: P 2: 2005
BS EN 197 or ASTM C 150 C3A = 4-13% max
type I
Chem Analysis (XRF) of
C3A = 4-8% max
MSRPC ASTM C150 type II
Chem Analysis (XRF) of
BS EN 196 P: 2 0.6% max
Cement (Na2O + 0.658K2O)
Chloride content of cement BS EN 196 P: 2 0.1% max
3.2.1.1 General
Only Sulphate Resisting Cement as specified in Clause 3.2.1.3 shall be used

unless otherwise directed.
Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer all cements shall comply with
the following requirements:

- The acid soluble alkali level measured as Na 2 O + 0.658 K 2 O shall not

exceed 0.6% by weight determined by the test method described in BS
EN196-2.
- The specific surface (fineness) shall not be greater than 375 m2/Kg and
not less than 280 m2/Kg when tested as described in BS EN196-6.
The cement shall be of approved manufacture and shall be delivered in bags

with seals unbroken, or delivered in bulk in approved containers which shall
bear the manufacturer’s name, cement type and the date of manufacture.
Test certificates from the manufacturers or suppliers shall be submitted for
each consignment and shall indicate the results of the tests for compressive
strength, setting time, soundness and fineness carried out in accordance
with the requirements of the relevant BS or ASTM standards. Further tests
may be required by the Engineer after the cement is delivered and stored on
the site. The failure of any sample to satisfy the BS or ASTM requirements
shall entitle the Engineer to reject the entire consignment from which it was
taken.
Cement shall be stored immediately upon receipt at site in such a way to

keep it away from water and moisture at all times. The Contractor shall
provide a method statement for the storage of cement which shall be
approved and implemented before any cement is delivered to site.
Consignments shall be used in the order in which they were delivered. Any
consignment not used within 2 months from the date of manufacture will not
be allowed to be used in the Works.
No cement from any consignment shall be used in Permanent Works without
the approval of the Engineer. Cement which the Engineer considers to have
deteriorated in any way shall not be used and shall be removed from site
without delay.
One brand only of cement as approved by the Engineer shall be used
throughout the Works unless otherwise authorised by the Engineer in
writing. Differing types of brands shall not be mixed together for use in the
Works.
3.2.1.2 Ordinary Portland Cement
Ordinary portland cement (OPC) shall comply with BS EN 197-1:2000

class42.5N or ASTM C150 Type 1. The tricalcium aluminate content shall
lie within the range of 4% to 13%.
3.2.1.3 Sulphate Resisting Cement
Sulphate resisting cement (SRC) shall comply with BS 4027: 1996, Class
42.5 N or ASTM C150 Type V. The heat of hydration shall not exceed 290
KJ/Kg at 7 days when tested in accordance with BS 4550: Part 3: Section
3.8.

3.2.1.4 Moderate Sulphate Resisting Portland Cement
Moderate sulphate resisting cement (MSRPC) shall comply with ASTM C150
Type II but containing not less than 4% and not more than 8% proportion by
weight of tricalcium aluminate. In either case the cement shall not contain
more than 2.7% proportion by weight of sulphur trioxide.
3.2.2 Fine Aggregate for Concrete and Mortar
Fine aggregate for concrete shall consist of natural screened and washed
sand or crushed sand having hard and durable particles, or of other inert
materials with similar characteristics. It shall not contain harmful material
such as salts, clay lumps, tree roots, shale, iron pyrites, coal, mica, organic
matter or any deleterious matter which may attack the reinforcement, in such
a form or in sufficient quantity to affect adversely the strength and durability
of the concrete. If necessary, the aggregate shall be washed and sieved to
remove the deleterious substances. Beach sand shall not be permitted for
use in concrete mixes.
The fine aggregate shall comply in all respects with the requirements of BS
EN 12620 and shall also comply with Dubai Municipality Administrative
Order No. 143/91. In addition to the above, fine aggregate for concrete shall
meet the requirements in Table 3-1.

Table 3-1. Limits for Properties of Fine Aggregates for Concrete
Type Test Method Permissible Limits
1Magnesium Sulphate ASTM C88 Max. 12%

. Soundness
(5 Cycles)
2Clay Lumps and Friable ASTM C142 Max. 1% by weight

. Particles
3Organic Impurities ASTM C40 Lighter than

. standard
4Material Finer than ASTM C117 Max. 3%
. 0.075 mm
5Acid Soluble Chlorides in BS 812: Part 117

. Fine Aggregate (Cl)
For reinforced concrete
made with:
SRPC Max. 0.03%
OPC & MSRPC Max. 0.03%
For mass concrete made

with:
SRPC Max. 0.03%
OPC & MSRPC Max. 0.03%
For prestressed concrete

and Max. 0.03%
heat-cured reinforced
concrete
6Acid Soluble Sulphates BS EN 1744-1:98 Max. 0.3% by weight

. (SO 3 ) of fine aggregate
7Water Absorption ASTM C128 Max. 2.3%

.
8Specific Gravity (apparent) ASTM C128 Min. 2.65
.
9Sand Equivalent (when ASTM D2419 Min. 75
. aggregate other than
natural sand is approved)
Fine aggregate of fine grading (BS EN 12620) shall not be used. Fine
aggregate shall conform to one of the gradings given in Table 3-2 (reproduced
from BS EN 933-1)

Table 3-2. Grading of Fine Aggregate for Concrete
BS Percentage by Weight Passing BS Sieve

Test Sieve
(mm) Coarse Medium
10 100 100
5 100 100
2.36 60 - 100 65 - 100
1.18 30 - 90 45 - 100
0.60 15 - 54 25 - 80
0.30 5 - 40 5 - 48
0.15 0 - 15 0 - 15
3.2.3 Coarse Aggregate for Concrete
Coarse aggregate for concrete shall consist of natural gravel, crushed

gravel, or crushed stone, free from coating of clay or other deleterious
substances. It shall not contain harmful materials such as salts, iron pyrites,
coal, mica, laminated materials, tree roots, shale, or any materials which
may attack the reinforcement, in such a form or in sufficient quantity to affect
adversely the strength and durability of the concrete. If necessary, coarse
aggregate shall be washed to remove deleterious substances.
The coarse aggregate shall comply in all respect with the requirements of
BS EN 12620. The coarse aggregate shall also fulfill the requirements in
Table 3-3.

Table 3-3. Limits for Properties of Coarse Aggregate for Concrete
Type Permissible
Test Method
Limits
1. Flakiness Index BS 812: Part Max. 25
105.1
2. Elongation Index BS 812: Part Max. 25
105.2
3. Ten Percent Fines Value or BS 812: Part 111 Min. 100KN
Impact Value BS 812: Part 112 Max. 30%
4. Los Angeles Abrasion ASTM Max. 30%
C131/C535
5. Shell Content BS EN 933-7 Max. 10% by
weight
6. Magnesium Sulphate ASTM C88 Max. 12%
Soundness (5 Cycles)
7. Clay Lumps and Friable ASTM C142 Max. 1% by
Particles weight
8. Material Finer than 0.075 ASTM C117 Max. 1%
mm
9. Acid Soluble Chlorides (Cl) BS 812: Part 117
For reinforced concrete

made
with :
SRPC Max. 0.01%
OPC & MSRC Max. 0.02%
For mass concrete made

with:
SRC Max. 0.02%
OPC & MSRC Max. 0.04%
For prestressed concrete

and
heat-cured reinforced Max. 0.01%
concrete
10. Acid Soluble Sulphates BS EN 1744- Max. 0.3% by

(SO 3 ) 1:1998 weight of
coarse
Aggregate
11. Water Absorption ASTM C127 Max. 2.0%
12. Specific Gravity (apparent) ASTM C127 Min. 2.65
13. Drying Shrinkage BS 812: Part 120 Max. 0.05%
14. Partially Crushed Faces DMS 8: 2001 Limit 100% with
at least one
crushed face
The coarse aggregate shall conform to the gradings given in Table 3-4 in
accordance with the nominal size of aggregate specified (reproduced from
BS 882).

Table 3-4. Grading of Single Size for Coarse Aggregate
Sieve Percentage by Weight Passing BS Sieve

Size for Nominal Sizes
(mm) 40 mm 20 mm 14 mm 10 mm
50 100 - - -
37.5 85 - 100 100 - -
20.0 0 - 25 85 - 100 100 -
14.0 - - 85 – 100 100
10.0 0-5 0 - 25 0 – 50 85 - 100
5.0 - 0-5 0 – 10 0 - 25
2.36 - - - 0-5
3.2.4 Combined Aggregate
Approved coarse aggregate and fine aggregate in each batch of concrete

shall be combined in proportions as specified in BS EN 12620 and as
approved by the Engineer. However, in no case shall materials passing the
0.075 mm sieve exceed three (3) percent by weight of the combined
aggregate.
The combined concrete aggregate gradation used in the work shall be as

specified, except when otherwise approved or directed by the Engineer.
Changes from one gradation to another shall not be made during the
progress of the work unless approved by the Engineer.
Naturally occuring sand/gravel mixtures (all in aggregates) shall not be used

unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
3.2.5 Water
3.2.5.1 General
Water for washing aggregate and for mixing or curing of concrete shall be
fresh, clean and substantially free from oil, acids, alkali, sewage, deleterious
mineral or organic matter. Water shall comply in all respects with BS 3148. It
shall not contain impurities in sufficient amounts to cause discoloration of the
concrete.
All sources of water for use with cement shall be approved by the Engineer.
Sources of water shall be maintained at such depth and the water shall be
withdrawn in such a manner as to exclude silt, mud, grass and other foreign
matter. If at any time during construction the water from an approved source
becomes unsatisfactory, the Contractor will be required to provide
satisfactory water from some other source.
3.2.5.2 Specific Requirements
Water for washing aggregate and for mixing or curing of concrete shall be
tested in accordance with BS and ASTM standards and shall meet the
following requirements:

Table 3-5. Chemical Limitations for Mixing Water
Maximum
Parameter Concentratio Test Method
n Limit
1. Chlorides as C1 250 mg/l ASTM D512
2. Sulphates as SO 3 350 mg/l ASTM D516
3. Alkali carbonates and
bicarbonates 500 mg/l ASTM D513
4. Total dissolved ions,
including 1, 2 & 3 above 2,000 mg/l BS 1377: Part 3
5. pH Min. 7/max. 9 ASTM D1293
The temperature of water for concrete should not be less than 5°C nor more
than 25°C. Water may be cooled to not less than 5°C by the gradual addition
of chilled water or ice but on mixing, no ice particles should be present in the
mix. Alternatively, flaked ice may be used. The ice to be used should be
crushed and should be the product of frozen water which complies with the
above requirements.
3.2.6 Admixtures
Unless agreed by the Engineer neither admixtures nor cements containing

additives shall be used.
Where the use of admixture had been agreed by the Engineer, they shall
conform to the requirements of Type A, Type D, Type F or Type G as
specified in ASTM C494 and shall be used in strict accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions. The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for
the use of any approved admixtures.
Samples of proposed admixtures shall, if required, be submitted to an

approved testing authority by the Contractor in order to ascertain its
suitability for use in the Works.
Approved methods and equipment shall be used for dispensing and

incorporating the admixture into the concrete. The dispensing unit shall be
designed so that the discharge of the admixture is visible.
The cost of such admixtures shall be included in the cost of concrete and no
extra payment shall be made if they are used. The proportions of cement,
fine aggregate and water shall be determined by the Contractor before
concreting commences and submitted together with such test results as may
be required to the Engineer for approval and the Contractor shall not
commence concreting before such approval is given nor shall he alter or
vary in any way the proportion of mix unless he submits fresh test results
and mix proportions to the Engineer for approval.
The approval by the Engineer of such mix designs does not in any way
absolve the Contractor of any of the requirements of the Specifications.

3.2.7 Concrete Mix Specification
The classes of concrete and their respective minimum cement content,

consistencies and the minimum required compressive strengths shall be as
shown:
Table 3-6. Concrete Classification and Mixes
Class of Comp. Slump Min.Ceme Max. Free

Concrete Strength (mm) nt Content Water/Ceme
(N/mm2) (kg/m3) nt Ratio
7 28
days days
A (30/20/SRC) 20 30 25 - 75 310 0.55
B (25/20/SRC) 16 25 25 - 75 275 0.60
C 10 15 25 - 10 250 0.65
(15/20/SRC) 0
The chloride and sulphate levels in the concrete mix shall comply with the
requirements of Table 3-7.
Table 3-7. Maximum Limits of Chloride & Sulphate in Concrete Mix
Chlorides as Sulphate as
Type of Concrete C1* SO 3 *
(According to (According to
BS 1881:Part BS 1881:Part
124)AMD 1:98 124)AMD 6:02
a. For reinforced concrete
if made with OPC/MSRPC 0.30% 3.70%
if made with SRPC 0.06% 3.70%
b. For mass concrete
if made with OPC/MSRPC 0.60% 3.70%
if made with SRPC 0.12% 3.70%
c. For prestressed concrete and 0.10% 3.70%
heat-cured reinforced
concrete
*Maximum limits of chloride and sulphate content as a percentage by weight
of cement in the mix.
The OPC and MSRPC cements can also contain chlorides, the relevant
standard BS EN 196-21 allows up to 0.1% C1. Therefore any chloride
content present in the cement has to be taken into account while computing
total C1 in the mix. In case the cement contains the maximum limit of 0.1%
Cl, then the aggregates, water and admixtures used for prestressed
concrete or heat-cured reinforced concrete should be absolutely free of
chlorides.

3.2.8 Cement Mortar and Grout
Unless otherwise specified, mortars and grouts shall be composed of

Ordinary Portland Cement (satisfying Clause 3.2.1) and sand (satisfying
Clause 3.2.2) in the following proportions:-
NOMINAL PROPORTIONS
Quality Portland Cement Sand
G1 1 1
G2 1 2
G3 1 3
The amount of water (satisfying Clause 3.2.5) added shall just be sufficient
to make the mortar or grout workable consistent with its purpose.
3.3 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
3.3.1 Samples of Aggregates
Before any material from a particular source is used, the Contractor shall
obtain representative samples of fine and coarse aggregates and carry out
the necessary tests and analyses to show that the samples comply with the
Specification. During the progress of the Works, the grading and chemical
characteristics may be checked at frequent intervals. Sampling of
aggregates shall be carried out in accordance with BS 812: Part 101 and
Part 102.
The results of these tests shall be submitted to the Engineer and his
approval shall be obtained before any of the material is used in the Works.
Part of each sample will be required for concrete trial mixes and part shall be
retained for comparison with subsequent deliveries.
No deliveries in bulk are to be commenced until such samples are approved

by the Engineer as complying with this Specification.
3.3.2 Trial Mixes for Concrete
Following the Engineer's approval of the materials for each class of

concrete, the Contractor shall prepare trial mix of each grade of concrete in
the presence of the Engineer's Representative. Each trial mix shall comprise
not less than 1/3 of a cubic metre of concrete and shall be mixed in an
approved type of concrete mixer similar to that which the Contractor propose
to employ on the Works. The quantities of all ingredients of trial mix including
water shall be carefully determined by weight according to the approved mix
design. Each trial mix shall show no tendency to segregate when handled
and compacted by the methods by which the Contractor proposes to handle
and compact the grade of concrete in the Works and it shall be capable of
adequate compaction by such methods. Trial mixes shall be prepared at
least 35 days prior to commencement of concreting.
Preliminary laboratory tests shall be carried out to determine the mixes to

satisfy the specification with the approved materials.

Trial mixes shall be tested to determine the following properties of mixes

proposed for initial field tests:
a) Bleeding in accordance with ASTM C232: 2007 (non-vibrating) shall

not exceed 0.5%.
b) Drying shrinkage in accordance with BS 1881 Part 5.
c) Air content shall be in accordance with BS EN 12350 P 7:2000.
d) Splitting Tensile Strength shall be in accordance to ASTM C496:1996
e) Flexural Strength of Concrete Prism shall be in accordance with BS EN
12390-5.
d) Free water/cement ratio.
e) Workability BS EN 12350-2:2000
f) Chloride permeability shall be less than 2,000 coulombs, when tested
in accordance with ASTM C-1202: 2007.
g) Fresh and hardened concrete densities BS EN 12350-6 & 12350-
7:2000 respectively.
h) Compressive strength BS EN 12390-3:2002
i) Depth of Water Penetration Test BS EN 12390 Part 8 : 2000
(Maximum 10 mm at 28 days)
(Maximum 15 mm at 7 days).
j) The Initial Surface Absorption Test as per BS 1881: P-208: 1996.
Maximum permissible limit for ISAT is 0.2ml/m²/sec.
k) Water absorption of hardened concrete as per BS 1881-122:1983 and
the maximum permissible limit shall be 2.0%
If the values obtained are unacceptable, the mixes shall be re-designed.
All concrete mix design shall be verified in DCL.
3.3.3 Water/Cement Ratio
The quantity of water to be added to the cement and aggregates during

mixing shall be just sufficient to produce a workable mix to enable it to be
well compacted and worked into corners of formwork and around
reinforcement. All mixes shall be designed in respect of the proportioning of
water so that the Slump Test as carried out according to BS 1881: Part 102
shall be in accordance with the requirements laid out in Clause 3.2.7.
Measurement of water on the Site shall take into account the moisture
present in the aggregates, and Slump Tests shall be taken frequently to
ensure that variations in the moisture content of the aggregate are fully
taken into account in determining the amount of water to be added.

3.3.4 Measurement of Ingredients
The aggregates for the concrete shall be measured by weight but

measurement by volume may be allowed in special circumstances with the
approval of the Engineer.
When the aggregates are to be measured by weight the weight batching

machines shall be of a type approved by the Engineer's Representative.
They shall be kept clean and in good condition and adjustment. At intervals
as the Engineer's Representative may require, the Contractor shall check
the accuracy of each weight-batching machine.
When the aggregates are to be measured by volume, the proportions of fine

and coarse aggregates shall be measured in well constructed gauge boxes,
of dimensions approved by the Engineer's Representative to guarantee that
whole multiples of such gauge boxes will ensure the use of one more whole
bags or containers of cement and the capacity of the concrete mixer shall be
such as to ensure that no splitting of cement bags or containers is required.
Gauge boxes shall be properly filled and struck off level, addition of fine
aggregates to allow for bulking due to moisture content being made as
required.
An efficient water measuring device shall be fitted to each concrete mixer.
Any cement container shall be such as to contain an accurately weighed

amount of cement.
3.3.5 Mixing Concrete
The concrete shall be mixed in a power driven machine of the batch type, no
hand mixing being allowed. The mixer shall be large enough to admit the
use of 1 cement bag or container or whole multiples of bags or containers at
a time. The mixing shall continue until there is a thorough distribution of the
materials and the mass is uniform in consistency and colour. The period of
mixing, judged from the time that all the ingredients including water are in
the mixing drum shall be as ordered by the Engineer's Representative but
shall not be less than 2 minutes or 20 revolutions of the drum whichever is
the longer. Should there be for any reason a stoppage of greater than 30
minutes, the drum or other containers of the mixer shall be thoroughly
washed and cleaned before mixing is resumed. On completion of the mixing
the concrete shall be discharged onto clean boards or into clean barrows.
The method of discharge from the mixer shall be such as to cause no
segregation whether partial or otherwise of the concrete materials.
3.3.6 Re-Mixing Concrete
Concrete which has commenced to set shall not be remixed either with or
without additional water and in no case shall such concrete be used in the
Works.

3.3.7 Concrete Testing
1. Sampling Cubes
A sample of concrete shall be taken at random on eight separate occasions

during the first five days of using a mix at least one sample being taken each
day. The standard deviation shall be calculated from at least 40 individual
cube results each representing separate batches of similar concrete
produced by the same plant under the same supervision. The current
margin for the plant shall be thus established as 1.64 times the standard
deviation.
Thereafter one sample shall be taken at random for each class of concrete
in accordance with Clause 4/31 of the Specification.
In addition to the above requirements, at least one sample shall be taken

from each individual structural unit, or part of a unit, when the latter is the
product of a single pour.
From each sample three cubes shall be made for testing at 28 days and
three for testing at 7 days for control purposes.
These samples shall be taken from every 100 batches, but at least once a
week during concreting operations, and shall coincide with sample taken for
test cubes.
The frequency of sampling may be required to be varied if directed by the

Engineer.
The procedures shall be repeated when materials or design mixes are

changed.
2. Cube Strength Results
The results will be acceptable if:
a) The average strength determined at the age of 28 days from a sample of

three or more cube test results exceed the specified CCS by 0.5 times of
the current margin.
b) No individual result of the sample is less than (Specified CCS minus 3
N/mm2)
c) Number of individual results in the sample below specified CCS is not
more than one.
If the any above criteria are not satisfied, the unit represented by the
sample is questionable and the following actions may be instructed as
appropriate:
a) Cutting and testing cores from place concrete

b) Non-destructive testing of placed concrete
c) Load-testing –relevant to structural units

d) Cutting-out and replacing defective concrete
If the range of individual cube strengths made from the same sample
exceed 15% of the mean, then the method of making, curing and testing
cubes shall be checked. In the event of a sample having a range
exceeding 20%, the result shall be unacceptable and the Engineer may
order any of following actions:
a) Changing the mix

b) Improving quality control
c) Cutting and testing cores from place concrete
d) Non-destructive testing of placed concrete.
In the event cutting and testing of cores are required, the Contractors
shall cut cores from approved locations and test them to BS.
3.3.7.1 General
The compression tests shall be performed on cubes 150 x 150 x 150 mm as

described in BS EN 12390-3:2002. Sampling, making test cubes and curing
of cubes shall be in accordance with BS EN 12350-1 and 12390-1,
respectively.
The following methods of testing shall apply to standard concrete cubes.
3.3.7.2 Preliminary Testing
After the materials have been approved and at least 10 days before any
concrete is poured, the Contractor shall make preliminary sets of test cubes.
Each set of test cubes shall comprise of three cubes made from a single
sample of concrete taken from the point of final discharge of the wet
concrete. Each cube shall be made under the Engineer's Representative
supervision. Six cubes shall be made to test three at 7 days and three at 28
days after manufacture. Preliminary test cubes shall be made and tested for
all grades of concrete and for all proposed variations of quality, quantity or
origin of the aggregates and cement.
Should either the test cube crushed at 7 days or that crushed at 28 days fall
below the specified requirements and the failure is confirmed by the testing
of the third cube, the Contractor shall, on the Engineer's Representative's
instructions alter the mix design and/or the source of aggregates, cement or
water and/or the method of mixing including alteration of the type of mixer.
The compressive strength of the concrete cube at 7 days shall be equal to or
more than two thirds the required compressive strength at 28 days.

3.3.7.3 Works Testing
During the course of the construction of the Works, the Contractor shall
make test cubes as required by the Engineer's Representative. One set of
six cubes will normally be taken from each individual concrete member, e.g.
culvert invert, Irish crossings, but additional cubes shall be taken as directed
by the Engineer's Representative. Three cubes will be tested at 7 days and
three cubes at 28 days as the Engineer's Representative directs. Where the
strength of the concrete is shown to be below that specified, the Contractor
shall remove and replace at his own expense all concrete from the
concerned pour. The Engineer may require the Contractor to cut out
defective concrete from the Works at his own expense even though test
cubes made from that concrete have not failed.
3.3.7.4 Workability Testing
The Contractor shall carry out slump test in accordance with BS 1881: Part
102 and/or compacting factor test in accordance with BS EN 12350-4 at
such frequency as the Engineer's Representative considers necessary to
ensure that the workability and consistency of the concrete is maintained in
accordance with the specified mix or accepted mix design and the trial mix.
But in any case workability tests shall be carried out at least once every two
hours during which concrete is being mixed.
3.3.8 Frequency of Testing Aggregate and Concrete
During the mixing and casting of concrete the frequency of testing for control
purposes shall be as indicated in Table 3-8 or as directed by the Engineer's
Representative. No direct payment is made for testing. The price of this work
is to be included in the bid prices of concrete.
Table 3-8. Required Frequency of Testing Aggregates & Concrete
Type of Test Frequency
Grading of Fine and Coarse Once for each source prior to

Aggregate; Flakiness and approval and once prior to casting of
Elongation Index; Aggregate each lift for any major concrete
Crushing Value structure or as directed by the
Engineer.
Concrete Cube One set (Min. 6 Cubes) from each

mixer for each individual pour or
every 2 hours for large pours or as
Compacting Factor Test As directed by the Engineer.
Depth of Water Penetration As directed by the Engineer
Test
The Initial Surface Water As directed by the Engineer

Absorption Test
Slump Test Once every hour from each mixer or

as directed by the Engineer.

Mix Design Once for each source of aggregate or

every combination of sources or as
Table 3-8. Required Frequency of Testing Aggregates & Concrete (Cont’d…)
Min. Test Frequency rate requirements for the following Materials
a. Cement as per BS EN 196

b. Steel
1 Deformed S. Bar (Tensile & Bend-Rebend) as per BS
4449:2005
2 Strand as per BS 5896:1980 if needed
c. Concrete Please add the following Tests:-
1 Air Content-as per BS EN 12350-7:2000
2 Flexural Prism as per BS EN 12390-5
3 ISAT as per BS1881-p-208
4 Bleeding as per ASTM C232
5 Kerbs as per BS 7263
6 Water Absorption of Hardened Conc. As per BS1881 P122
7 Splitting Tensile of Conc. Cylinder-as per ASTM C-496
3.4 TRANSPORTING AND PLACING CONCRETE
3.4.1 General Requirements
Concrete shall be taken from the place of mixing to the place of depositing
by approved methods which will prevent the segregation or loss of the
ingredients and which are sufficiently rapid to ensure that the concrete does
not commence to set before it is compacted in position. The concrete shall
be deposited as near as possible to its final position in the Works and shall
not be allowed to flow into position. Deposition of the concrete through
chutes shall not be permitted and neither shall the concrete be dropped
freely from a height exceeding 2.0 m. Pumping concrete through delivery
pipes may be permitted but only with the prior approval of the Engineer's
Representative.
No concrete shall be placed in a foundation until the extent of excavation

and the character of bearing material have been approved and no concrete
shall be placed in any structure until the placement of reinforcing steel and
the adequacy of the forms and falsework have been approved.
The concrete shall be placed in its final positions as soon as possible after it
has been mixed, and in any case before the initial set has taken place. The
Contractor shall ensure that concrete which has already been placed in
position and commenced to set is not disturbed by the placing or compaction
of further concrete nearby. All concrete shall be carefully worked around and
between reinforcement and all other embedded fittings without such

reinforcement or fittings being disturbed. Concrete is to be worked well up

against whatever surface it joints.
No concrete shall be mixed or placed when the light is insufficient, unless an
adequate and approved artificial lighting system is operated and such night
work is approved by the Engineer.
3.4.2 Placing Concrete in Hot Weather
Concrete shall only be placed where the general requirements in regard to

ambient and mix temperatures laid down in the CIRIA Guide to Concrete
Construction in the Gulf Region are met. The parameters laid down therein
shall only be exceeded with the prior written consent of the Engineer.
Concrete shall not be placed when the shade air temperature exceeds
40° C or during periods of windblown dust or rain.
The temperature of batched concrete at time of placing shall not exceed

32°C unless otherwise specified.
Measures shall be taken to provide cool concrete and cool concreting

conditions in order to reduce workability loss, premature drying of concrete
and the development of high temperatures and temperature gradients in
placed concrete.
Proposed measures must be described in method statements and may

include:-
(a) Painting white or silver all storage vessels, hoppers, pipes, walls or
roofs which contain or convey aggregates, cement or mixing water.
(b) Dampening the forms.
(c) Reducing the concrete temperature to the lowest practical level by
procedures such as:-
- Shading the aggregate.
- Cooling the mixing water before use.
- Screening the mixing plant and transporting vehicles from wind,
rain and sun.
(d) Erecting wind breaks and sunshades at the concrete placing location.
(e) Reducing the time between the placing of the concrete and the start of
curing to the minimum possible.
(f) Minimizing evaporation (particularly during the first few hours
subsequent to placing the concrete) by suitable means such as applying
moisture by fog spraying.
These measures are in addition to those specified for the curing of concrete.
In contracts which small structures spread over a large site, such as

sewerage contracts, where transportation times could be large, dry mixing of
concrete with addition of water immediately prior to placing may be
proposed. Method statements for such a proposal must describe methods
for accurate batching of water.

3.4.3 Placing Concrete in Water (Tremie Concrete)
Tremie concrete shall be deposited in water only if specified on the

Drawings and/or directed by the Engineer and under the Engineer's
supervision. Concrete to be deposited in water shall have the cement
content increased by 25% at the Contractor's expense. Concrete shall be
carefully placed in a compact mass in the space in which it is to remain by
means of a tremie bottom dump bucket or other approved method that does
not permit the concrete to fall through the water without adequate protection.
The concrete shall not be disturbed after being deposited. No concrete shall
be placed in flowing water and forms which are not reasonably watertight
shall not be used for holding concrete deposited under water.
3.4.4 Blinding Concrete
Prior to placing any concrete on natural surfaces a blinding layer of Class C

concrete shall be laid to a minimum of 75 mm thickness. This blinding shall
be suitably curved prior to subsequent concrete placement. The blinding
shall be clean and free from any dust or impurities prior to subsequent
concrete placement.
3.5 COMPACTING CONCRETE
3.5.1 Tamping
All concrete shall be thoroughly compacted to the maximum with approved

rammers without any segregation in its final position before it commences to
set. Care shall be taken to ensure that the use of spade type rammers does
not cause segregation of the aggregates and water. Initial compaction of
slabs shall be with approved rammers and compaction by a screed board
shall be limited to that required for the final shape and finish. During the
placing and compaction of reinforced concrete, a competent steel mixer
shall be in attendance to adjust and correct if necessary the position of the
reinforcement.
3.5.2 Vibrating
Concrete shall be compacted by vibrating with an approved vibrator. The

vibrators shall not be attached to any reinforcement or embedded fitting and
where vibrators of the immersion type are used, care shall be taken to
ensure that they do not come into contact with the reinforcement or
embedded fittings. Freshly placed concrete shall not be vibrated in a manner
likely to cause damage to concrete in other parts of the Works which has
already taken its initial set. Concrete shall not be vibrated in such a manner
and to such an extent as to cause segregation of the constituent materials. If
shutter type vibrators are used they shall be augumented by immersion type
vibrators if the thickness of the concrete member is more than 15
centimetres.

3.6 CURING OF CONCRETE
All concrete shall be protected from the harmful effects of sunshine, drying
winds, rain, flowing water, or other adverse effect. For at least 7 days after
placing, the concrete shall be prevented from drying out by being sprayed
with fresh clean water and covered with hessian, clean sand or other
approved material which shall be kept wet.
Whenever approved by the Engineer, membrane curing of concrete with an

approved liquid may be used as an alternative to curing with water except
that membrane curing liquid shall not be applied to surfaces of concrete from
which the shuttering has been struck, until the concrete has been inspected
and approved by the Engineer's Representative.
The concrete curing compound shall comply with the following requirements:
1) Only products which have been proved to be effective through extensive

use shall be proposed and manufacturers’ literature shall include recent
test certificates illustrating effective quality control and high curing
efficiencies.
2) All materials shall be supplied in the containers marked by the

manufacturer with his name, date of manufacture, shelf life, pot life and
instructions for handling and application.
3) The liquid shall contain a white or silver colour pigment in sufficient

quantity to give a uniform colour when applied to the concrete surface.
4) The liquid shall be of such chemical composition and consistency that it

can be applied by an approved mechanical sprayer in fine spray to
produce an even, uniform, impervious, continuous film within one hour
of application which will not crack, peel or disintegrate within three
weeks of application.
The compound shall not be poisonous, odorous or explosive and shall

not react chemically with cement.
5) Curing compounds shall not be applied to surfaces to which further

concrete or a surface finish is subsequently to be bonded unless the
approval of the Engineer is obtained to the use of a water soluble type.
The Contractor shall ensure that all concrete is adequately protected against
inclement weather until properly set and shall if necessary provide additional
protection to that specified above.
3.7 JOINTS IN CONCRETE
3.7.1 Intervals during Concreting
The timetable for the depositing of concrete between construction joints

should be so arranged that no face of concrete shall be left for more than 20
minutes before fresh concrete is deposited against it. Pauses for meals,
servicing of machines, changes of shift, etc., and the distribution of concrete
among the positions where work may be proceeding simultaneously must be

carefully organized to ensure that the above mentioned interval shall not be
exceeded.
3.7.2 Construction Joints
Construction joints shall be as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the

Engineer's Representative. If the Contractor wishes to make additional
construction joints he shall obtain the prior approval of the Engineer's
Representative. Such approval may include the provision and placing of
additional reinforcement at the Contractor's expense.
Construction joints shall be formed by inserting temporary vertical

stopping-off boards to form tongue and groove joint with the concrete placed
subsequently except if separately detailed on the Drawings. Unless
otherwise shown on the Drawings construction joints shall be located as
near as possible to the position of minimum shear and tensile stress in the
concrete.
3.7.3 Jointing Fresh to Set Concrete
At a construction joint, the face of the previously placed concrete shall be

cleaned of any skin or latance or loose material by brushing with a wire
brush or other approved method and washing with clean water. Insecurely
held aggregate shall be removed. Excess water shall be removed and the
surface while still wet shall be covered with 1:2 cement mortar which must
be vigorously stippled into the surface by means of a suitable stiff brush, the
depositing of the fresh concrete following closely.
3.7.4 Expansion Joints
Expansion joints shall be constructed at positions shown on the Drawings or

as directed by the Engineer and shall be formed according to the instruction
and dimensions shown on the Drawings.
Filled expansion joints shall be provided at every 6 m or as shown in the

drawings and/or directed by the Engineer for the kerb and concrete backing.
Any excavated surface for the concrete bedding should be watered and
compacted to a minimum 95% of optimum density.
3.7.5 Expansion Joint Filler
Expansion joint filler shall be composed of approved durable non-extruding

fibrous material suitably impregnated to prevent deterioration. Sheet bitumen
fillers will not be accepted. Preformed strips of expansion joint filler shall be
of such a nature as not to be permanently deformed or broken by twisting,
bending or other normal handling on site. Samples shall be submitted for
approval before ordering. The vertical expansion joints in kerbs and parapets
shall be formed with approved vertical seal. Such vertical seal shall adhere
to the vertical face sealed and shall not flow under maximum local sun
temperature nor shall it be sticky to the touch.
1) Expansion joints for pre-cast up-stand kerbs shall be at 6 m.

2) For flush kerbs cast in-situ, at 2 m max.

3) For pre-cast slabs, every 4 m min.
3.7.6 Expansion Joint Sealing Compound
The sealing compound shall be of an approved polysulphide compound,

non-pouring grade for vertical application and pouring grade for horizontal
application, as specified in Clause 9.2.1.2 (1) or it may be a rubber-bitumen
compound.
The rubber-bitumen compound shall be a flexible weather resistant seal,

slump resistant unaffected by permanent immersion in water, or by alkalis or
sulphates. The material shall have a minimum storage life of 12 months in
original containers stored in cool dry conditions and a density of 1.30 kg/litre.
The sealing compound shall adhere firmly to the concrete in all weather
conditions. The sealing compound shall not flow either along or down the
joint during hot weather. The sealing compound shall be durable and shall
not weather beyond the forming of a thin surface skin.
Samples shall be submitted for approval before ordering. Vertical sealer

shall be used with an approved priming compound. Application of the sealing
compound shall be strictly in accordance with the Manufacturer's
instructions.
3.7.7 Waterstop Across Joints in Concrete Structures
Seepage of water through any joints in a water retaining or water excluding

concrete structure shall be prevented by the use of PVC Waterstop or other
material as directed and approved by the Engineer. They shall be placed
centrally as a water barrier across the designated joint in in-situ concrete
structures and cast centrally into the edges of adjacent concrete
components.
Waterstop shall be used at all Expansion and Contraction Joints in concrete

structures below water table. For a Construction Joint, requirement of a
waterstop shall be indicated in the drawing. The Engineer may also require
the Contractor to provide waterstop at any additional Construction Joint
approved at his request.
Waterstop shall be extruded from high grade grey PVC Compound. Flat
Dumbell plain web waterstop shall be used for a Construction Joint while for
an Expansion Joint or a Contraction Joint, a centre bulb waterstop shall be
used. The width of the waterstop shall depend upon the concrete thickness,
the aggregate size and the position of reinforcement. In general, the
following shall be taken as a guide to select the width, w, of a waterstop:-
w < t, but w > (6a+j)
where, t = concrete thickness

a = largest aggregate size
j = width of Expansion Joint
The following Technical Data shall apply :

Hardness : 42 - 52 BS Softness degrees at 25° C.
Tensile strength : 13.8 N/mm2 minimum at 25° C.
Elongation at break : 285 % minimum at 25° C.
3.8 INSPECTION OF CONCRETE
The Contractor shall not proceed with the surface finish or making good of
concrete surfaces until he has received the Engineer's Representative's
permission to do so and he shall not apply cement slurry or mortar or any
other coating to the concrete surfaces from which the shuttering has been
struck until the concrete has been inspected and approved by the Engineer's
Representative.
3.9 FAULTY CONCRETE WORK
The Contractor shall on the written instruction of the Engineer's

Representative remove and reconstruct any such portion of the work which
in the opinion of the Engineer's Representative is unsatisfactory as regards
quality of concrete, incorrect dimension of the cast portion, badly placed or
insufficient reinforcement, honeycombing or other such cause as shall
render the construction not up to the standard required and which in the
opinion of the Engineer may affect the strength or durability of the
construction.
3.10 REPAIRS TO CONCRETE
The method of repairing and replacing defective concrete which the

Contractor proposes to adopt shall be submitted to the Engineer's
Representative for prior approval and the repair shall be carried out in such
manner as the Engineer may direct or approve.
3.11 SUPERVISION OF CONCRETE WORK
Throughout the progress of the concrete work the Contractor shall employ
and provide such supervision as is necessary to ensure
(a) the day to day control of the quality of the concrete and
(b) the mixing, transporting, placing, compacting, curing and protection of

the concrete, and
(c) the carrying out of all testing as specified herein and any further testing
which the Engineer's Representative may require, and
(d) the conducting of investigations as the Engineer's Representative may

require, and
(e) the preparation of reports and the keeping of such records as the
Engineer's Representative may require.
3.12 FINISHING OF CONCRETE

All concrete surfaces (except top faces of culvert decks) not requiring
shuttering shall be trowelled to a smooth dense surface with the minimum of
cement and fine particles being brought to the surface and shall be free from
irregularities. Top faces of culvert decks shall be carefully screeded and
tamped to the required shape and to a dense surface with the minimum
amount of cement and fine particles being brought to the surface and should
be free from irregularities greater than 3 mm in height or depth.
Shuttered surfaces of concrete which will always be in contact with the

ground may be cast against sawn timber. All other exposed shuttered
surfaces including precast concrete shall be cast against steel, plywood or
planed timber formwork and shall be carefully rubbed down with
carborundum to remove all imperfections and irregularities. Surfaces which
are honeycombed, porous or irregular and which in the opinion of the
Engineer's Representative do not comply with the Specification shall be cut
out and replaced with sound concrete as directed by the Engineer's
Representative. The cost of all normal surface finishes and making good
shall be deemed to be included in the tendered rate for the concrete.
3.13 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF FORMWORK
3.13.1 General
Formwork shall in every respect be adapted to the structure and the required
surface finish of the concrete. It shall include all temporary moulds for
forming the concrete to the required shape and finish and for the support of
such moulds. It shall be fixed in perfect alignment and securely ledged and
braced so as to be able to withstand, without displacement deflection or
movement of any kind, the weight of the construction and the movement of
persons materials and plant. Joints shall be close enough to prevent the
leakage of liquid and fine materials from the concrete.
The Engineer's Representative may at any time require the prior submission
for approval of the Contractor's proposals for design and construction of
formwork including supports. The formwork shall be constructed so as to
permit its removal without damage to the concrete.
3.13.2 Spacing Blocks and Temporary Construction Ties
Internal spacing blocks and construction ties shall be avoided as far as, in
the Engineer's Representative opinion, possible and practicable. Where it is
intended that the spacing blocks or construction ties shall be removed
whether before or after the concrete has set, the making good of the
concrete shall be subject to the Engineer's Representative's approval. The
removal of the blocks or ties must not jeopardise the stability of the
construction. If, with the approval of the Engineer's Representative, the
spacing blocks and construction ties are allowed to remain in the concrete
then they shall be of such material and of such quality that they do not
prejudice the strength of the work. Concrete spacing blocks shall be made of
concrete at least equal in quality to the main concrete. Metal ties shall be
positioned such that they do not come into contact with any of the
reinforcement or fittings and no part of the tie shall be permanently
embedded in the concrete nearer than 5 cm to the exterior surface of the
concrete.

All holes shall be filled with 1:2 cement mortar.
3.13.3 Slab Forms
Where timber is used for the soffits of slabs, the boards shall be placed and
laid perfectly true with close joints to prevent the percolation of liquid or fines
from the concrete. Tongue and groove planks shall be used if specified. All
requisite bearer and struts shall be adjusted in position and placed where
necessary on bearers as specified in the case of beam forms.
3.13.4 Type of Formwork
3.13.4.1 Exposed Concrete Faces for Bridges
All concrete faces shall be left as struck with a fair face, true to line finish.
In order to have the finish as it will be formed, approved by the Engineer,

test pieces of 1 sq.m vertical panel 25 cm thick shall be cast. After approval
they shall be retained in position until the concrete works have been
completed then they shall be demolished and removed from the Works.
After careful inspection, all superfluous fines and similar projections shall be
carefully removed. No render or other applied finish shall be used to obtain a
fair face to the concrete. All concrete faces to be exposed in the finished
works shall be adequately protected against damage and surface staining
during the execution of the Works.
3.13.4.2 Sawn Formwork
Shall be used for all culverts.
3.13.5 Preparation of Formwork for Concreting
Immediately before the concrete is deposited, the formwork shall be

thoroughly cleaned out and freed from sawdust, shavings, wire cuttings,
dust, sand, clay and all other deleterious and extraneous materials.
Temporary openings shall be provided in the formwork to facilitate this work.
The inside surfaces of the formwork shall, immediately prior to final erection,
be coated with mould oil. The mould oil shall be of approved type and shall
be applied uniformly and the quantities used shall be the minimum
consistent with its purposes. The Contractor shall ensure that all steel
reinforcement and adjoining concrete surfaces are kept free of mould oil.
All formwork and reinforcement shall be clean and free from standing water
immediately before placing concrete.

3.13.6 Approval of Formwork before Concreting
The Contractor shall in all cases request the approval of the formwork by the
Engineer's Representative in sufficient time to allow an inspection to be
made and shall not commence concreting until such approval is obtained.
The period between the Contractor's request for approval and his intention
to commence concreting shall be not less than one clear normal working day
and the Engineer's Representative may require a longer period if, in his
opinion, the formwork is of such complexity as to require it.
Such approval shall not absolve the Contractor of his responsibilities under
the Contract.
3.13.7 Removal of Formwork
All formworks shall be struck without jarring the concrete or subjecting the
same to sudden shock.
Before striking any formwork, the Contractor shall satisfy himself that the
concrete is sufficiently hardened to bear its own load and any other loads
that may be placed on it.
No formwork is to be removed, if in the opinion of the Engineer's

Representative, the concrete has not set sufficiently. approval of the
Engineer's Representative shall not absolve the Contractor of his
responsibilities under the Contract.
Subject to the above and the concrete test cube results, the minimum
periods for the removal of formwork generally are as follows:
Sides of beams, walls and columns - 2 days

Soffits of beams and slabs (props left in)- 7 days
Removal of props (beams and slabs) - 14 days
Soffits of pre-cast beams - 7 days
(These times may be reduced only with the written approval of the Engineer)
In the case of the special types of formwork, striking times are to be

approved by the Engineer.
If a beam slab is required to support a construction load in excess of its

design load, the beam or slab is to be propped until the supported
construction has reached the age when the propping may be removed.
No supports for the shuttering may be left in the finished concrete without
the written permission of the Engineer.
3.13.8 Concrete below Ground
All concrete placed below ground level shall have a minimum protection to
its outside faces with a bituminous membrane as per Clause 9.2.1.2 of this
Specification.
3.14 READY MIXED CONCRETE

3.14.1 Compliance with Specification
The use of concrete delivered to the Site in a plastic condition and ready for
placing in its final position shall be permitted subject to the following
conditions:-
(a) The constituent materials and the concrete mix shall comply with the
requirements of this Specification.
(b) The concrete shall be produced in accordance with the standards laid
down in the current edition of the "Authorisation Scheme for Ready
Mixed Concrete", published by the British Ready Mixed Concrete
Association (B.R.M.C.A.), except that
(i) Para. 11.1 (i) of the above publication shall be replaced by item (d)
below.
(ii) Water shall be added to the mix under the control of the central
batching plant.
(iii) Dry batching with water added on site will not be permitted.
(c) The concrete shall be supplied by a depot approved by the Engineer

and RTA.
(d) The concrete shall be placed in its final position and left undisturbed
within 1-1/2 hours maximum of the time when the cement first comes
into contact with wetted aggregates, ie. the time when hydration of the
cement commences. If the temperature is less than 4°C or if the
temperature is above 21°C, this period shall be reduced to one hour.
(e) When truck mixed concrete is used, water shall be added under the
supervision, either at the Site or at the central batching plant as
agreed by the Engineer but in no circumstances shall water be
added in transit.
(f) Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, truck mixer units and their
mixing and discharge performance shall comply with the requirements
of BS 4251. Mixing shall continue for the number and rate of
revolutions recommended in accordance with Item 9 in appendix B of
BS 4251 or, in the absence of the manufacturer’s instructions, mixing
shall continue for not less than 100 revolutions at a rate of not less
than 7 revolutions per minute.
(g) The concrete supplier is required to certify that the C1 content in the
mix being delivered I within the limits specified in Clause 4/15.5. The
C1 and SO3 content shall be checked at frequent intervals.
Refer also to Clause 4/16.1 of Volume 2 – Part 1 of these Specifications

which shall apply. All ready mixed concrete shall comply with the
specifications and shall be verified by DM DCL.
3.14.2 Documentation

The Engineer shall receive copies of the delivery tickets for each batch of
concrete, and have access to a site record book maintained by the
Contractor in which the following information is recorded for each batch of
concrete delivered:-
(i) Delivery ticket number.

(ii) Slump of the concrete, testing on site immediately prior to placing.
(iii) Time when concrete is placed in position and left undisturbed.
(iv) Location that the concrete is placed.
(v) Works test cube reference.
3.15 REINFORCEMENT STEEL
3.15.1 General
This work shall consist of furnishing, fabricating and placing steel

reinforcement bars of the grade, type, quality, size, shape and quantity
designated, all in accordance with these Specifications and the details
shown on the Drawings.
The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing reinforcing steel in

sufficient quantity and of the proper sizes, lengths and shapes shown on the
Drawings for any given structure.
3.15.2 Material Specifications
All reinforcement bars shall be of a deformed type in accordance with BS

4449, except that plain bars may be used where specifically indicated on the
Drawings. Plain bars shall be in accordance with BS 4449.
All steel reinforcement shall conform to the requirements of the

Specifications for Deformed High Yield Steel Bars, Grade 460 Type 2,
unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or specified by the Engineer.
Mild steel where specified or called for shall be either deformed or plain bars
complying with ASTM A615 structural grade or BS 4449 or any equivalent
National Standard as directed and approved by the Engineer.
Tying wire shall be No.16 gauge soft annealed iron wire or No. 18 gauge
stainless steel wire or the equivalent AASHTO specification for tying wire.
Welded wire fabric shall be used as reinforcement for concrete where shown
on the Drawings and as directed. Welded wire fabric shall conform to the
requirements of AASHTO M55 or to BS 4483.
All reinforcement shall be protected against corrosion with a fusion-bonded

epoxy coating in accordance with the requirements of ASTM A775/A775M
and BS ISO 14656.
The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the Engineer’s approval to

the steel bars prior to coating commencing. Such approval will in no way
relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities under the Contract.

The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer a certificate of compliance for

each shipment of coated steel bars. The certificate of compliance shall state
that representative samples of the coated bars have been tested and that
the test results comply with the requirements of the Specifications.
The frequency of sampling and method of quality control shall be in

accordance with BS 4449. Refer also to Clause 4/8 in section 4 of Volume 2
Part 1 of these Specifications which shall apply.
3.15.3 Construction of Reinforcement
Steel reinforcing shall be stored on timber packing clear of the ground. The
steel bars shall be free from sharp deformations, rolled-in silvers, deep
recesses or surface faults/blemishes which could result in inefficient or
inadequate coating. When fixed in the work and immediately prior to
concreting, steel reinforcing shall be entirely free from loose mill scale, loose
rust, oil, grease, paint, mould oil, and all other deleterious and extraneous
material. All hooks, bends, etc., unless otherwise shown on the Drawings
shall be to BS 4466.
Before ordering reinforcing steel, the Contractor shall prepare bar bending
schedules at his own cost and submit them to the Engineer for his approval.
Bar schedules shall show the weight of each bar, the total weight of each bar
size and the total weight of bars, and bending diagrams for bars in
accordance with BS EN ISO 4066. The length of each bar shall be
calculated in accordance with BS EN ISO 4066 except that the minimum
internal bending radius shall be four times the bar diameter.
The Contractor shall also provide and submit to the Engineer for approval
any working drawings additional to the Contract Drawings which may be
found necessary for the production of bar bending schedules or for the
completion of the Works.
The Engineer’s approval of the Contractor’s working drawings and bar

bending schedules shall in no way relieve the Contractor of responsibility for
the correctness of such drawings or schedules.
Steel reinforcement shall be bent accurately to the shapes and dimensions

shown on the approved bar bending lists or drawings. Bars shall be bent
round mandrels of the requisite diameter.
Steel reinforcement shall be cut and bent in accordance with BS EN ISO

4066. Cutting or bending by the application of heat is not permitted.
Welding of reinforcement shall only be permitted when approved in writing
by the Engineer. If such approval is given then the workmanship shall be in
accordance with BS EN 1011-2:2001. The Contractor shall submit full
technical details of his proposed procedures prior to seeking approval.
Hot rolled high yield bars shall not be straightened or bent again, having
once been bent. If the Engineer gives approval to bend mild steel
reinforcement projecting from the concrete, the internal radius of bend shall
not be less than four times the nominal size of the bar.

Links, hoops, stirrups are generally to be bent round pins of the same
diameter as the bars they are to embrace. Where however, such bars are
less in diameter than twice the diameter of the link, the radius of the bend
shall be equal to the diameter of the link.
3.15.3.1 Placing Reinforcement
The number, size, form and position of all reinforcement shall, unless
otherwise directed or authorized by the Engineer, be strictly in accordance
with the Drawings. Nothing shall be allowed to interfere with the disposition
of the reinforcing bars. Bars generally must be of the required lengths.
Welding of the bars will not be permitted. Lapping of the bars other than the
lap splices shown on the Drawings should be avoided. The Engineer may
approve certain lappings under special conditions. All lappings should
comply strictly with the AASHTO specifications, namely Article 1.5.6. Clause
"c".
The steel reinforcement shall be firmly held in position by wire ties and
concrete blocks or other approved spacers designed to maintain the correct
clear cover of concrete over steel reinforcement. They shall be as small as
possible consistent with their purpose, and of a shape acceptable to the
Engineer. Minimum cover to reinforcement shall be 50 mm unless otherwise
detailed. The position of spacers and their method of use shall be approved
by the Engineer. The steel reinforcement shall be so connected as to form a
rigid cage.
All intersecting bars shall be bound together with No.16 gauge soft iron wire
with the ends of the wire turned into the main body of the concrete.
3.15.3.2 Maintaining Reinforcement in Position
Concrete distance blocks shall, unless otherwise directed, be used between

the reinforcement and the bottom and sides of the forms to ensure correct
placing and cover of the bars. The strength of such concrete distance blocks
shall be not less than that of the main concrete. The greatest care shall be
taken to prevent any displacement or bending of the members of the
reinforcement adjusted and temporarily fixed in position before
commencement of the concreting. Reinforcement temporarily left projecting
from the concrete at construction of other joints shall be adequately
protected against displacement both during concreting and afterwards and
shall not be bent out of position unless agreed by the Engineer's
Representative. During the concreting competent steel fixer shall be in
attendance to re-set any reinforcement inadvertently displaced.
3.15.3.3 Approval of Reinforcement before Concreting
The Contractor shall in all cases request the approval of the Steelwork by
the Engineer's Representative in sufficient time to allow an inspection to be
made and shall not commence concreting until such approval is obtained.
The period between the Contractor's request for approval and his intention to
commence concreting shall not be less than one clear normal working day
and the Engineer's Representative may require a longer period if, in his
opinion, the reinforcement is of such complexity as to require it.

Such approval shall not absolve the Contractor of his responsibilities under
the Contract.
3.16 PRECAST CONCRETE KERBS, EDGINGS & QUADRANTS
Precast concrete kerbs and edgings shall be hydraulically pressed and they
and precast concrete quadrants shall comply with the requirements of BS
EN 1339:2003 and to the dimensions and shapes shown on the Drawings
and/or as directed by the Engineer. They shall be Class B concrete with
sulphate resisting cement as indicated in Clause 3.2.7 of this Specification.
They shall be uniform in colour free from cracks, flaws or other defects with
well defined arises.
The kerbstones shall be 900 mm long or as directed by the Engineer's

Representative. Samples of kerbstones proposed to be used shall be
submitted to the Engineer for his approval prior to order or manufacture.
Kerbstones shall not be used before they have been inspected and
approved by the Engineer. They shall be fully cured when delivered to site
(28 days min.).
Kerbstones shall be laid on concrete Class C bedded on 1:3 sand cement

mortar as specified and/or as directed by the Engineer. All kerbstones shall
be well bedded and settled in place true to line and level with a suitable
wooden mould. Before kerbstones shall be approved it should be ensured
that their top surfaces are in a uniform plane and their front faces are in
correct alignment. Any kerbstones not satisfying these requirements or
having cracked or broken arises or faces shall be removed and replaced or
reset as instructed by the Engineer.
Joints between kerbstones shall be not less than 3 mm nor greater than 5
mm in width and shall be uniform from top to bottom. Joints shall be left
open.
Where precast kerbs of straight section are laid to form radii, joints should be
filled with non-shrinkage mortar, and expansion joints (using flexel or similar
joint filler) shall be provided at 3 m centres. For radii of 10 m or less
quadrants shall be used. Kerbs of a reduced size shall only be used for this
condition where approved by the Engineer.
Tolerance in top level of kerbstones and horizontal alignment shall be ± 3

mm.
All kerbstones shall be painted alternately black and white. The paint shall
be an approved concrete paint giving a nominal thickness 100 microns in
two applied coats.
Tranverse strength and Water Absorption shall be in accordance with BS EN

1339:2003.

3.17 IN-SITU CONCRETE EDGING
In-Situ concrete edge strips shall be to the cross section shown on the
drawings and the class of concrete made with sulphate resisting cement
indicated thereon in accordance with Clause 3.2 of this Specification.
The edge strip shall be formed in as long lengths as possible and the form
work shall be set on the top surface of the sub-base, set to produce the line
and level in accordance with the requirements of this Specification. Care
must be taken to ensure that the top surface is carefully finished to achieve
these requirements and to provide the control of the wearing course.
Expansion joints will be provided with an approved joint filler at maximum 3
m centres as shown on the drawing and/or as directed by the Engineer. The
kerb shall be protected against covering or splashing by bitumen or cement.

SECTION 4: -PIPES, PIPEWORK, MANHOLES AND CHAMBERS
4.1 PIPE MATERIALS
4.1.1 Pipe Classifications and Pressure Ratings
For structural purposes pipes shall be classified into two groups:-
Group A : Rigid pipes which do not depend on lateral support from the
bedding and trench sides for structural strength.
Pipe materials include:-
Concrete
Clayware
Asbestos Cement
Pitch Fibre
Grey Iron
Group B : Flexible pipes which depend on lateral support from the

bedding and trench sides for structural strength and to prevent distortion.
Pipe materials include :-
GRP (Glass Reinforced Plastic)

uPVC (unplasticised Polyvinyl Chloride)
HDPE (High Density Polyethylene)
PP (Polypropylene)
Pressure pipes shall be supplied to the following rated pressure

classifications:-
Asbestos Cement 18 bar

GRP 12 bar
uPVC 12 bar (12 bar rated uPVC pipes used to allow for
temperature derating).
4.1.2 Joint Requirements and Limitations
Unless pipes are detailed with rigid joints or are specified differently all
pipelines shall be jointed with approved mechanical, flexible joints with
elastomeric joint rings. The whole joint assembly shall be compatible with
the pipe construction and with the specified performance of the completed
pipeline.
4.1.2.1 Flexible Joints
Flexible joints shall be as a separate sleeve coupling and double spigot

assembly with two sealing rings.
Elastomeric joint sealing rings shall be manufactured to EN-681-1 from

ethylene propylene rubber (EPDM) and shall have a hardness measured in

International Rubber Hardness Degrees (IRHD) compatible with the pipe

material.
Deflection: The completed joint shall be capable of accepting the

following ranges of deformation when subjected to internal pressure without
losing its seal at the specified test pressure, without direct contact between
spigot and socket/coupling and without inducing stresses or strains in the
pipe material beyond the safe working limits.
Table 4-1: Minimum Allowable Angular Deflection for Flexible Joints
Angular Deflection
Pipe Material Pipe Diameter (mm)
(Degrees)
All materials up to 200 3
(except concrete Over 200 to 500 1.75
and clay pipes) Over 500 to 1350 1
Over 1350 0.5
Straight draw: Not less than 10 mm or the following proportions of the

length of the longest pipe/unit at any joint:
1% for polyethylene pipes
0.5% for polypropylene, polybutylene or ABS pipes.
0.3% for GRP and uPVC pipes
0.1% for asbestos cement pipes.
Shear: Pipe materials which are listed in structural Group A shall be loaded
to 10 times DN (mm) in newtons in accordance with BS EN-512. Pipe
materials which are listed in structural Group B shall be subjected to a load
of 17.5 N/mm of pipe diameter in accordance with ASTM D-4161.
If the approved standard for a pipe material does not include a shear test for
the jointing system, this test shall be carried out in accordance with test
procedure of another appropriate pipe material standard.
4.1.2.2 Flanged Joints
Flanged pipes shall incorporate an annular gasket at the Joints and these
gaskets shall be manufactured to BS EN 1514 from ethylene propylene
rubber (EPDM) 3.0 mm thick and shall be dimensioned to full face of the
pipe flange and to suit the flange drillings. The hardness of the rubber
(IRHD) shall be to the manufacturer's recommendations to suit the pipe
material but for pipe materials in Group A shall be in the range 66 to 75.
4.1.2.3 Flange Adaptors
The adaptors shall be manufactured from rolled steel or approved material

with an approved coating and be capable of withstanding the pressure tests
of the pipeline in which they are incorporated. The adaptors shall
accommodate a deflection at least 3o between adjacent pipes in any

direction and they shall be capable of accommodating a movement of 10

mm between the ends of pipes they connect.
The adaptors shall be protected as stated in Clause 4.4.12.2. The adaptors

shall be jointed as instructed by the manufacturer.
4.1.2.4 Bolted Couplings
Bolted couplings shall be flexible couplings and shall be capable of

withstanding the pressure tests of the pipeline in which they are installed.
They shall also be capable of accommodating the deflections and
movements specified for flange adaptors.
4.1.2.5 Nuts and Bolts
All bolts, nuts and washers shall be of stainless steel grade 320S17 to BS
EN 10088-1 or DIN 17440:1.4571 and shall remain unpainted. PTFE
washers shall be fitted beneath stainless steel washers for both bolthead
and nut.
4.1.2.6 Shipping and Handling
All elastomeric joint sealing rings and gaskets for flanged pipes shall be
supplied and transported in light proof packaging so as to prevent damage
due to ultra violet radiation. The Contractor shall provide suitable storage
facilities to prevent ultra violet exposure until use.
4.1.3 Asbestos Cement Pipes and Fittings
Asbestos cement pipes, joints and fittings shall be manufactured and tested
to ISO 160 or BS EN512 for all pipelines. Sulphate resisting cement with a
medium to low C3A content shall be used in the manufacture of asbestos
cement pipes, joints and fittings.
Asbestos cement pressure and gravity pipes and joints shall be Class 18
unless otherwise specified.
For gravity pipes the crushing strength shall be carried out on one percent of
the total number of pipes and joints. For pressure pipes the bursting test
shall be carried out on one percent of the number of pipes and fittings.
A jointing ring shall be provided at each end of the pipe this being rubber or
neoprene or a compound of both. Internal test pressure and the prevention
of infiltration of groundwater are to be the major design criteria of the joints.
The Engineer shall be given details of vacuum-type tests on the joints.
All bends and fittings required along the route of the pressure pipelines other
than those bends obtained by deflection of the pipe joints shall be of GRP
material. Bends and fittings shall be obtained from the same supplier as the
asbestos cement pipes and shall be compatible with the pipes and jointing
system used.

Clearly visible, legible, indelible manufacturer's stamps including designated

class of pipe and production date shall be provided on the external face of all
pipes.
For identification purposes, all asbestos cement pipes and fittings laid for
drainage application shall be externally coated with a black bituminous paint.
Potable water pipelines in asbestos cement are uncoated.
All relevant tools recommended by the manufacturer shall be provided by

the Contractor and he shall ensure that he has sufficient numbers of each
tool available in order that the work is never held up for the need of any such
tool.
The following mechanical tests shall be checked at DM DCL:
1. Crushing Test – BSEN 512 clause 4.5.4

2. Bending Test – BSEN 512 clause 4.5.4
The required limits for the above tests shall be as outlined in the standard or
advised by the Engineer.
4.1.4 Unplasticised Polyvinyl Chloride Pipes and Fittings (uPVC)
uPVC non-pressure pipes and fittings shall be manufactured and tested to

BS 4660 for pipes up to and including 160 mm diameter and BS 5481 for
pipes greater than 160 mm diameter; and to BS 3505 for pressure pipes.
The required limits for the tests shall be as outlined in the relevant standard
or advised by the Engineer.
uPVC pipes and fittings shall be installed in accordance with the

manufacturer's guidelines. Pipes shall be BS kite marked.
uPVC pipes shall be capable of withstanding ultraviolet degradation. A

rodent inhibitor shall be incorporated in the material of the pipe. Pipes shall
be manufactured with integral flexible rubber ring joints.
uPVC pipes for gravity pipelines shall have a standard dimension ratio, D:t
(diameter to thickness), of between 35 and 45.
The Contractor shall advise the manufacturer of the climatic and transporting
conditions at the site of the works and shall seek his advice on the storage of
uPVC materials on site. Subject to the Engineer's approval this advice shall
be followed at all times.
Any pipes exhibiting cracks, notches or deep scratches or other damage will
be condemned and shall not be incorporated into the permanent work under
any circumstances.
4.1.5 uPVC Pipes for Land Drains
Pipes for slotted land drains/slotted carrier drains shall be uPVC pipes. Prior
to perforation, the basic pipe shall be manufactured to BS 4660 and BS
5481, kite marked, and shall comply with the requirements of Clause 4.1.4 of
this specification relating to uPVC pipes for non-pressure application. The

slots shall be designed to give at least the minimum infiltration rates laid
down in BS 5911: Part 114. The final configuration of the slots shall be
subject to approval by the Engineer.
The slots shall be cleanly machine cut and be not less than 3 mm or greater
than 4 mm in width. The slots shall be in one 180° segment of the barrel in
one or more longitudinal rows, the slots in each row being spaced
equidistantly. Where more than one row of perforations are provided the
slots shall be staggered. No slots shall be nearer to the ends of the barrel
than the spacing between two adjacent slots. The spacing between slots in
any row may vary up to ± 20 mm.
The minimum cross-sectional area of the perforations, at the inside surface

of the pipe barrel, shall be 2700 mm2 per metre run of pipe but shall not
affect the structural integrity of the pipe. Care must be exercised to prevent
impact damage when placing stone surround and during backfilling
operations over the pipes.
4.1.6 Glass Reinforced Plastic Pipes and Fittings (GRP)
4.1.6.1 General
Pipe manufacturers must be members of, or affiliated with, a quality control

or certification authority relevant to the pipes or fittings proposed for
incorporation in the Works. ISO 9001 certification is required for pipe
manufacturers.
GRP pipe and fittings shall be manufactured in accordance with BS EN

14364:06. Resins shall comply with BS 3532 or ASTM D1763. GRP pipe
and fittings shall be at least adequate to achieve a minimum working life of
50 years under all applicable loading, environmental and installation
conditions. The pipes and fittings shall be designed to withstand up to 5%
long term deflection in their installed conditions.
GRP pipe and fittings shall be supplied with a rated pressure of 6 bar for
gravity pipes and shall be suitable for service temperatures up to 50oC.
GRP pipe and fittings shall be composite laminate consisting of a corrosion

resistant inner liner, a structural layer and an exterior layer as follows:
1. The resin-rich inner liner shall have a minimum thickness of 1.5 mm,
consisting of ‘C’ glass veil backed with chopped strand
‘ECR/ADVANTEX’ glass all impregnated with vinylester resin.
2. The structural layer shall be reinforced with ‘ECR/ADVANTEX’ glass

impregnated with isophthalic resin but a vinylester resin may be used
throughout . Silica sand may be included as a stiffener agent.
3. The exterior resin-rich layer shall have a minimum thickness of 1.0 mm
consisting of ‘C’ glass veil impregnated with isophthalic or vinylester
resin.
Silica sand aggregates as defined in BS EN 14364 shall contain no

impurities. Fillers as defined in BS EN 14364 shall not be used. The silica

sand content of the pipe material shall not exceed 50% in accordance with
the test type submitted for approval.
The resin shall be cured to reach a hardness not less than 90% of the resin
manufacturer's recommended hardness using a prescribed test.
A manufacturer's tolerance of ± 1.00% shall be allowed on the nominal

diameter of the pipe. The pipes shall be supplied in standard lengths of 3, 6
or 12 metres with a tolerance of ± 25.00 mm. The deviation from
straightness of the bore of the pipe shall not exceed 0.30% of the effective
length or 15.00 mm whichever is smaller and shall apply when measured on
site. Up to 10% of the pipes will be allowed in random lengths.
The ellipticity of any pipe when measured resting freely on the ground shall
not be more than 2% of the mean diameter at any point. No pipe known to
have undergone a deflection greater than 7% shall be incorporated into the
Works.
Stiffness shall be minimum 5000 N/m2 for all pipes but for pipes to be used
in pumping stations and valve chambers the stiffness shall be minimum
10,000 N/m2 and pipes for use in microtunnelling or similar jacking
operations the stiffness shall be minimum 50,000 N/m2 unless enclosed in
concrete.
The hoop flexural modulus shall be demonstrated by application of the

following equation:
Stiffness of the pipe = EI/D3
Where : E = bending modulus of pipe wall

circumferentially (in N/m2).
I = moment of inertia of pipe wall per

unit length (in m4/m)
D = nominal pipe diameter in metres
Calculations shall be provided to show that the proposed form of pipe

manufacture will give the specified physical properties identified in this
specification.
Pipes shall have a resistance to longitudinal tensile force per unit of

circumference as under:-
Nominal Diameter (mm) Initial Ultimate Resistance (N/mm)
up to 700 100
700 to 1,000 120
1,000 to 1,600 160
1,600 to 2,400 250
2,400 to 4,000 300

When subjected to a parallel plate loading test no evidence of crazing or

cracking shall be evident with a deflection of 10% and no structural failure
with a deflection of 20%.
Evidence from the manufacturer shall be provided of the satisfactory

completion of the "strain corrosion test" on a sample of pipe representative
of those to be supplied together with an assurance that such tests are
continuing. Testing shall be in accordance with BS EN 14364 or ASTM D-
3681. The appearance of blisters, delamination, wicking or any other
structural degradation of the test sample will constitute failure of the test
notwithstanding the wording of the standard test procedure.
The jointing system shall be an approved coupling system. Where the

system involves separate reinforced plastic couplings of sockets formed by a
lay-up process subsequent to pipe production, the resins used shall be clear
and non-pigmented to permit visual examination within the laminate.
Where GRP laminate is cut, exposed ends shall be sealed with a suitable
resin and approved prior to incorporation into the Works. Where such cutting
and sealing takes place at site the resins used and the methods of storage,
mixing, application and curing shall be strictly to the manufacturer's
recommendation. Before any such work takes place the manufacturer's
representative shall visit the site to demonstrate and give clear procedural
advice to the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer.
GRP pipe and fittings shall be as uniform as commercially practicable in

colour, opacity, density, and other physical properties.
GRP pipe and fittings shall be smooth and both the internal and external
surfaces shall be clean and free from delaminations, cracks, bubbles,
pinholes, pits, blisters, foreign inclusions and resin-starved areas that due to
their nature, degree or extent detrimentally affect the strength and
serviceability of the pipe.
Unless authorized by the Engineer, repair will not be permitted on any pipes
with defects as listed below and such pipes shall not be incorporated into the
works:-
(1) A scratch of greater depth than 0.30 mm.
(2) Cracks of any type on the inside of the pipe.
(3) Cracks on the outside, longer than 200 mm circumferentially or 6 mm

longitudinally.
(4) Delaminations.
(5) Damaged ends including bubbles, cracks, voids, exposed

reinforcement or extraneous matter.
(6) Internal protruding fibres.
(7) More than 25% of the external area with protrusions of any sort.

(8) Air voids and blisters exceeding 5 mm diameter or 1 mm in depth,

greater in area than 0.50% of internal or 1.00% of external surfaces.
(9) Pitting to more than 5% of the internal or 10% of the external surface
area and individual pits more than 1 mm diameter or 0.5 mm in depth.
(10) Wrinkles over than 3% of the surface area and individual wrinkles more
than 2 mm deep.
4.1.6.2 GRP Pipes and Fittings for Pumping Stations and Valve Chambers
The design of GRP pipe and fittings for pumping stations and valve
chambers shall incorporate all the requirements of these specifications
except for the following over-riding or supplemental stipulations.
GRP pipe and fittings inside pumping stations and chambers shall be
designed for use above ground with no thrust blocks and shall have
sufficient axial strength to resist end thrust, temperature and bending
stresses.
GRP pipe and fittings shall have a minimum pipe stiffness of 10,000
N/m2 and a minimum wall thickness of 10 mm.
The design working pressure for pipes and fittings shall be 10 bar and the
service temperature shall be 50°C. A minimum surge allowance of 40%
above the working pressure shall be included in the design of pipes and
fittings. Copies of the design calculations shall be submitted to the Engineer
for approval. The basis of design shall be checked by conducting 'type' tests
on representative sample(s) of manufactured materials, in accordance with
the requirements of BS EN 14364 or ASTM D-2992.
The wall of the pipes and fittings shall be made up of:
1. A resin-rich inner liner of 1.5 mm minimum thickness, consisting of ‘C’

glass veil, and 'ECR/ADVANTEX' glass and impregnated with
vinylester or epoxy resin.
2. The structural layer consisting of ‘ECR/ADVANTEX’ glass

reinforcements impregnated with vinylester or epoxy resin. Silica sand
shall not be used.
3. An exterior resin-rich layer of 1.0 mm minimum thickness, reinforced

with a ‘C’ glass veil and impregnated with vinylester or epoxy resin.
No dark pigments, sand or aggregate fillers shall be used for pipes and
fittings. Ultra Violet stabilizers shall be incorporated in the pipe and fitting
construction.
GRP pipe and fittings for pumping station and valve chamber pipework shall
have a suitably designed restrained joint capable of withstanding the design
operating pressure with no leaks and without the use of thrust blocks.

The acceptable jointing system shall be GRP flanges. GRP flanges shall be
machine filament wound using 'E' or 'ECR/ADVANTEX' glass fibre
reinforcements and vinylester or epoxy resin. Hand layed up flanges shall
not be permitted. Flanges shall be drilled to BS EN 1092 (metric units) type
PN 10.
4.1.6.3 Factory Testing
The following tests shall be carried out on manufactured GRP pipe and
fittings at the intervals specified. Test methods shall be in accordance with
BS EN 14364 or ASTM equivalent. Witnessing of factory testing by the
Engineer's Representative will be required prior to delivery of the material.
Copies of the Manufacturer's test reports shall be submitted to the Engineer
after each consignment of pipe or fittings delivered to the site.
All GRP standard pipe and pipe used for fitting fabrication shall be factory
pressure tested to 20 bar for pressure pipes and 12 bar for non-pressure
pipes.
The following tests shall be conducted on all GRP pipe and fittings:
Dimension measurements (Wall thickness, Diameter, Length)
- Visual inspection
- Barcol Hardness (Resin Cure)
Mechanical property testing shall be conducted on 1% of GRP pipe and

fittings produced.
Other tests for quality assurance shall be carried out on representative

sample(s) as required by BS EN 14364 or ASTM equivalent.
In addition to Factory Testing, the following mechanical properties shall be

GRP Pipes checked with Dubai Central Laboratory:
1. Initial Longitudinal Unit Tensile Strength by a Tensile Strip Test BS EN

14364 App.A
2. Initial Specific Stiffness Under Ring Deflection BS EN 14364 App. H
4.1.6.4 Installation
GRP pipe and fittings shall be installed in accordance with the

manufacturer's written instruction. A field representative of the manufacturer
shall be made available as and when required during the installation of the
GRP pipe and fittings. All flanges shall be tightened in accordance with the
Manufacturer's written instructions using a torque wrench.
4.1.7 Polyethylene Pipes (HDPE or HPPE)
4.1.7.1 General
Polyethylene (PE) pipe, either high density polyethylene (HDPE) or high
performance polyethylene (HPPE) pipe shall be manufactured to conform to
the requirements of CP 312 Part 1 and 3, and BS 6437 or DIN 8075. Where

pipes are used for renovation work, pipes shall be of short lengths or short
length conforming to the requirements of the method selected and the
available working space in the manholes or drive shafts. Longer lengths may
be used for new installation where conventional open trench methods of
construction are employed.
The base3 polymer shall be polyethylene with a derived density greater than
930 kg/m when determined in accordance with the method required by BS
3412. The base polymer shall be blended with additives that are necessary for
the manufacture, storage and use of PE pipes for sewer lines, including
antioxidants, carbon black and UV stabilizers.
The material in pipe form shall have a thermal stability of at least 15 minutes
when tested in accordance with the isothermal method for differential
thermal analysis.
The ovality of pipes up to and including nominal size 250 mm shall not
exceed 0.02 the nominal size (mm). The ovality of pipes greater than
nominal size 250 mm shall not exceed 0.035 the nominal size (mm).
The ends of the pipe shall be cut, cleanly and squarely, to within the
following tolerances:
Nominal Size (mm) Maximum Out of squareness
180 - 225 4 mm
250 - 315 5 mm
The calculated 24 hour and 50 year creep module shall be not less than the
values given below when tested in accordance with either the pipe ring in
tension or the three point bend method.
Property Minimum Mean Requirement
Short term flexural creep

modulus (24 hour) Es 350 MPa
Long term flexural creep

modulus (50 year) El 130 MPa
The jointing system for polyethylene pipes and fittings shall be in accordance
with the pipe manufacturer’s recommendations subject to approval by the
Engineer.
4.1.7.2 Wall Thickness
The polyethylene (HDPE or HPPE) pipe shall be Type 50 i.e. shall be

designed to sustain a maximum working stress of 50 bar at 20°C. The wall
thickness shall be based on a nominal pressure rating (PN) of 10 bar.
When manufactured in conformity with BS 6437, the wall thickness of HDPE

pipe shall be as follows:-

Table 4-2. Required Wall Thicknesses of HDPE Pipes
Nominal Mean outside Wall thickness (mm)

Size diameter (mm) Individual values Av.values
(mm)
min. max. min. max. max.
180 180.0 181.2 16.4 18.9 18.3
225 225.0 226.4 20.5 23.6 22.8
250 250.0 251.5 22.8 26.3 25.3
280 280.0 281.6 25.5 29.4 28.3
315 315.0 316.8 28.7 33.0 31.8
4.2 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF PIPES
4.2.1 General
Method Statements must be approved for the transportation, handling and

storage of pipes before any pipes are delivered to site.
All pipes shall be handled and stored in compliance with the manufacturer's
recommendations subject to the following limitations :-
Pipes shall be transported, handled and stored with such packing and in
such a manner that damage does not occur and that contact is avoided with
sharp edges which may cause damage. During transit, pipes and fittings
shall be well secured and adequately supported along their length.
At every point of loading or unloading, all pipes or castings must be handled

by approved lifting tackle unless specified elsewhere. Unloading by rolling
down planks or any other form of inclined ramp will not be allowed. Pipes
shall not be tipped or dropped.
Pliable straps, slings or rope shall be used to lift pipes, and steel cables or
chains will not be used without written permission.
Nesting of pipes for transportation will be permitted provided method

statements demonstrate that effective precautions will be taken to protect
inner surfaces from damage.
All pipes and fittings shall be thoroughly inspected on arrival at site after off-
loading and prior to installation for detection of any damages.
Damages to coatings, if any, shall be made good in an approved manner.

For other damages, proposals for repairs shall be submitted in writing for the
Engineer's approval. If in the Engineer's opinion the nature of any damage is
such that the condition of a pipe has been impaired and cannot be repaired,
the pipe concerned shall not be incorporated in the Works.
Suitably smooth and level storage areas shall be provided at or near the site
and made secure to prevent unauthorised access.
Pipes of different sizes and thickness shall be stocked separately.

4.2.2 Glass Reinforced Plastic Pipes (GRP)
When pipes are transported or stacked they shall be supported on cradles at

least 100 mm wide, conforming to the shape of the pipe placed at not more
than 3 metres centres. Pipes must on no account be stacked directly on the
ground but if individual pipes are placed on the ground prior to laying care
shall be taken to remove all rocks and any potentially damaging debris.
The number of layers in a stack shall not exceed the following:
Internal Diameter Maximum Number
of Pipe (mm) of Layers
Up to 500 5
500 to 700 3
The end pipes in each row shall be strapped to the battens. Pipes shall not
rest on their sockets.
4.2.3 Thermoplastic Pipes
Pipes and fittings of plastic materials smaller than 300 mm diameter may be
handled manually and those equal or larger than 300 mm diameter shall be
lifted using a single fabric or large diameter rope sling. There shall be
enough slack in the sling to keep the hook at least 600 mm over the pipe.
Use of wire rope chains and forklifts shall not be permitted.
Care shall be taken to prevent distortion of the pipes during transportation,

handling and storage. They shall be stacked either on bearing timbers on a
level surface staked to prevent movement, or in suitable racks. Not more
than two layers shall rest on the bottom layer, and for spigot and socket
pipes, sockets shall be at alternate ends so that no pressure comes on a
socket. Bearing timbers shall be spaced at not more than 1 metre and shall
be wide enough to prevent denting of the pipe wall. Sharp edges (e.g. of
metal) shall be avoided. Similar care shall be taken with pipes in transit.
Where shaped battens are used, they shall be at least 100 mm wide and not
more than 1.5 meters apart. The end pipes in each row shall be strapped to
the battens. The pipe shall not be stacked any higher than five (5) layers.
All thermoplastic pipes shall be shaded/protected from direct sunlight during

handling, transportation, storage and laying.
The Contractor shall ensure that thermoplastic pipes do not come into
contact with bituminous or other hydrocarbon based materials.
Determination of Ring Stiffness of Thermoplastic Pipes shall be tested at

Dubai Central Laboratory in accordance with BS EN ISO 9969:2007
(Mechanical Testing)

4.3 GRANULAR MATERIAL FOR PIPE BEDDING
Granular material for pipe bedding shall be free-draining, hard, clean,

chemically stable gravel or crushed stone to BS EN 12620 and shall be
graded in accordance with BS EN 12620 as shown in the following table:-
Table 4-3. Grading of Granular Material for Pipe Bedding
Test Sieve Percentage by Weight Passing Sieve

( mm) For Pipe For Pipe Diameters
Diameters upto 600 mm 400 mm and above
63 - -
37.5 - -
20 - 100
14 100 85 - 100
10 85 - 100 0 - 50
5 0 - 25 0 - 10
2.36 0- 5 -
Notes:
1) For pipes 400 mm to 600 mm diameter, either grading is acceptable.
2) Total acid soluble content of the material when tested in accordance

with BS1377 shall not exceed 0.3 percent by weight of sulphate
expressed as SO3 (sulphur trioxide).
3) The material shall have a Compaction Fraction value not exceeding

0.15.
4) For uPVC pipes only rounded aggregates will be permitted but for all
other pipe materials crushed aggregates may also be used.
4.3.1 Stone for Land Drains
Stone for land drains shall be nominal single size 20 mm in accordance with
the following table or the manufacturer’s recommendations if different, and
placed as shown on the drawings. The stone shall also comply with the
general requirements of Clause 4.3.
Table 4-4. Grading of Stone for Land Drains
Test Sieve Percentage by Weight Passing Sieve

(mm)
75 -
63 -
37.5 100
20 85-100
14 -
10 0 - 25
5 0- 5
2.36 -

4.3.2 Compaction Fraction Test
For testing pipe bedding material, a representative sample of about 40 kg

shall be heaped onto a clean surface and quartered to obtain approximately
10 kg. The moisture content of the sample should not differ materially from
that of the main body of material, at the time of use in the trench.
A 150 mm internal diameter open ended cylinder 250 mm high, shall be

placed on a firm flat surface and loosely filled, without tamping, from the 10
kg sample. Any surplus material shall be struck off level with the top of the
cylinder. The area around the filled cylinder shall be cleared of all surplus
material and the cylinder then lifted clear of its contents and placed
alongside the material.
Approximately one quarter of the material shall then be replaced into the
cylinder and compacted by tamping vigorously with a 40 mm diameter metal
rammer weighing about 1 kg until no further compaction can be obtained.
This operation shall then be repeated for each of the remaining quarters,
tamping the final surface as level as possible.
The distance from the top of the cylinder to the surface of final layer shall
then be measured and this value, divided by the height of the cylinder, shall
be taken as the Compaction Fraction.
4.4 CONVENTIONAL (OPEN TRENCH) PIPELINE CONSTRUCTION
4.4.1 General
This section applies to conventional open-trench pipe works. Non-

conventional pipeworks have been detailed in Sections 14 and 16.
4.4.2 Nominal Trench Widths
Nominal trench widths for single pipelines shall be defined as 1.50 times the
diameter plus 500 mm, subject to a minimum trench width of 750 mm.
Nominal trench widths for two or more pipes in the same trench (laid in
parallel with similar invert levels) shall be defined as the sum of the internal
diameters plus 450 mm between the pipes, plus 750 mm.
Any excavation from the bottom of the trench to 300 mm above the level of
the crown of the pipe which exceeds the nominal widths defined above shall
be filled with concrete or the specified bedding materials as directed on site.
A detailed method statement shall be submitted by the Contractor for

agreement by the Engineer to demonstrate an understanding of the correct
method of laying GRP and other pipes.
4.4.2.1 Pipelines in Wide Trenches
No wide unsupported trenches shall be permitted, in general, within the area

of the Works and therefore all trenches should conform to the minimum
trench widths stated above and shall be supported with the use of approved
trench sheeting or sheet piles. However in exceptional circumstances wide

trenches may be approved by the Engineer in which cases the following

shall apply:-
- Wide trenches shall be constructed to not less than the defined widths
for those categories of Group B flexible pipelines in granular bedding
defined below.
- Prior to commencing trench excavation in an area an assessment of the

Modulus of Deformation (E's) shall be made of the soils likely to be
encountered at springing level of the pipes. In non-cohesive soils,
approved static cone penetrometer tests shall be carried out prior to
excavation. In cohesive soils other approved methods shall be used to
determine E's. Alternatively, standard penetration tests may be required
by the Engineer prior to excavation to suite pipe manufacturer’s standard
method of deflection and trench widths. Tests shall be carried out at
intervals to be determined on site which in variable ground conditions
may be to every pipe length.
- If the value of E’s determined from the results of such tests is greater
than 2.5 MN/m2 then trench width is not critical. If less than 2.5 MN/m2
then trench widths shall be constructed to the widths defined in the
following table unless alternative means of increasing the passive
resistance of the trench sides are detailed or are proposed in method
statements where economic or environmental restrictions make wide
trenches undesirable.
Table 4-5. Wide Trench Widths for Non-Cohesive Soils
Static Cone Modulus of Wide TrenchWidths

Penetrometer2
Test Deformation
2
(mm)
(Kg/cm ) E's (MN/m )
8.5 - 7.7 2.50 - 2.25 2.5 * dia.
7.7 - 6.1 2.25 - 1.80 3.0 * dia.
6.1 - 3.1 1.80 - 0.90 4.0 * dia.
3.1 0.90 5.0 * dia.
Alternative solutions to wide trench conditions may be adopted including

increasing stiffness of the pipes used or encasing with concrete as agreed
by the Engineer.
4.4.3 Pipelaying and Jointing
Pipes and fittings shall be laid and jointed in accordance with all relevant
recommendations of the manufacturer. Any variations between the
manufacturer’s recommendations and this specification shall be highlighted
in the Contractor’s Method Statements and a ruling will be given with the
Engineer’s agreement.
Pipes and fittings shall be checked for soundness and be thoroughly cleaned
out immediately prior to laying and jointing.
The setting of the pipeline to the required levels and alignment shall be
carried out by approved procedure such as boning between sight rails or the
use of laser systems. Sight rails, if used, shall be at a suitable height

vertically above the line of pipes or immediately adjacent thereto, and there
shall, at no time, be less than three sight rails in position on each length of
pipelines under construction to any one gradient. Large diameter pipes,
1000 mm diameter or greater, shall be individually set to level and line by
instrument.
For pipelines laid in trenches and headings the permissible tolerances in line
and level unless otherwise specified shall be ± 3 mm in level and ± 12 mm
from centreline between manholes or access points. Also where a gravity
pipeline or sewer is shown as a straight line between manholes it will not be
accepted as having passed the final test unless a full circular light can be
sighted through the bore of the pipe for the length concerned.
For pipeline jointing systems incorporating flexible jointing rings pipes shall
be laid with a gap between the end of the spigot and the base of the socket,
or between spigots. This gap shall be not less than 6 mm or greater than
one third of the straight draw test dimension specified for the pipe joint or as
recommended by the pipe manufacturer, and it shall be achieved by
approved means, such as marking the outside of the pipe or using
removable metal or hardwood feelers.
The annular space between the pipe and the socket at a flexible joint shall
be sealed with an approved joint sealant to prevent the ingress of loose
material or concrete. Sealing shall be done on completion of a satisfactory
preliminary testing prior to concreting or backfilling, but not prior to the test.
For uPVC pipes solvent welded joints with parallel sockets shall not be
permitted unless made in the manufacturer's workshop.
Where flexible jointed pipes are laid to curves the angular displacement at
any joint as laid shall not exceed three quarters of the maximum
recommended by the manufacturer.
Flanged pipes shall incorporate an annular gasket at the joints. The gaskets
shall cover the full face of the flange and shall have holes cut in them
corresponding to the bolt holes in the flanges. However, in pipes fixed
vertically a plain ring covering the flange between the bolt circle and the bore
of the pipe may be used. Gaskets shall be manufactured as specified in
Clause 4.1.2.2.
When flanged joints are to be made the Contractor shall follow
manufacturer’s guidelines for the tightening of nuts and bolts.
The Contractor shall make sure that all joints are made strictly in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions.
Pressure pipelines shall be secured at all changes in direction by concrete

anchor blocks or other means of restraint approved in advance by the
Engineer.
After laying a length of pipeline but before preliminary testing (specified in

Section 6) is carried out, the pipeline shall be checked for level and gradient
on top of the pipes. If a pipe is not at the correct level, it shall be unjointed
and removed, the bed shall be adjusted and the pipe shall be relaid and
rechecked for line and level. After the joint has been made and the

preliminary testing completed the annular gap at a socket or collar outside

the flexible jointing ring shall be closed with fine grained clayey soil or cotton
waste to prevent the entry of granular material.
Pipelines shall be temporarily capped when pipe laying ceases to prevent

the ingress of foreign matter. The Contractor shall ensure that the pipes
remain clean and free from obstructions, and if required by the Engineer, the
pipelines shall be cleaned out using approved methods and equipment
which do not damage the internal lining of the pipes and manholes.
4.4.4 Pipelines in Concrete Cradles and Surrounds
Where pipes are to be laid with a concrete cradle or surround they shall be
supported initially above the trench bottom on concrete setting blocks. The
blocks shall either be laid accurately to level and covered with damp-proof
sheeting beneath the pipe barrel or shall be provided with two hardwood
wedges each to an approved pattern to enable the pipe level to be adjusted.
The blocks and wedges shall be of sufficient size and strength to prevent
settlement of the pipes during laying and at least two concrete blocks shall
be provided for each pipe.
Concrete cradles and surrounds shall be of Class A. The concrete shall be

poured on one side of the pipe until it can be worked under the pipe along its
full length to ensure that no voids develop. The concrete shall then be
brought up equally on both sides of the pipe until the required level is
reached.
The length of pipeline laid in any one operation before concreting the
pipeline shall be that which in the opinion of the Engineer permits accurate
laying of the pipeline and concreting in an efficient and proper manner.
Approved measures appropriate to the pipe material shall be provided to

prevent flotation or other movement during placement or curing of the
concrete.
Concrete cradles to pipes of all diameters and surrounds to pipes of one etre
diameter or less shall be poured in a single lift. Concrete surrounds to pipes
over one metre diameter shall normally be poured in two lifts, with a
horizontal joint not more than 100 mm below the crown of the pipe.
Concrete cradles and surrounds shall be interrupted over their full cross
sectional area at each pipe joint, by shaped expansion joint filler. The
thickness of filler shall be 18 mm for pipe diameter less than 450, 36 mm for
pipe diameter 450 to 1200 and 54 mm for pipe diameters greater than 1200.
In spigot and socket pipelines the joints in the bed shall be at the face of
each socket.
In all flexible joints the annulus of the pipe socket shall be sealed with an
approved sealant to prevent the concrete from entering the pipe joint.

When support to excavations is provided, building paper or an approved

material shall be placed against that support before concreting to facilititate
withdrawal of the support.
4.4.5 Pipelines on Granular Beds
Where granular beddings to pipelines are detailed the minimum thickness of

bedding material beneath the pipe shall be:-
150 mm (minimum 100 mm under sockets) for pipes not exceeding 300 mm
internal diameter.
200 mm (minimum 100 mm under sockets) for pipes exceeding 300 mm

internal diameter.
The time interval between placing bedding material on the trench formation
and commencing pipelaying shall be as short as is practicable.
The bedding material shall extend to the full width of the trench and shall be
compacted in layers not exceeding 200 mm. The bedding material shall be
carefully compacted using a plate vibrator or other approved equivalent
mechanical method. Sufficient passes of a plate vibrator or other approved
mechanical method are required to achieve positive deflection of flexible
pipes to ensure that final deflections are within the specified limits. Hand
tamping or punning will only be permitted where insufficient space is
available to allow the use of mechanical plant.
Recesses shall be formed in the bedding to accommodate pipe joints while

ensuring continuous even support along the pipe length. Bedding material
shall be prevented form entering pipe joints. After the joint has been made
bedding material shall be carefully placed and hand compacted beneath the
joint barrel to close any void left by the recess.
Where the formation of the trench is of silt or soft clay and is below the
natural water table a 75 mm blinding layer of sand shall be substituted for
the specified bedding material directly above formation and carefully
compacted if directed on site.
4.4.6 Placing Surrounds to Pipelines
In narrow trenches and where the Contractor's method of working involves

the use of trench sheets or other forms of trench support it is imperative that
the trench supports are carefully withdrawn to a point above the crown of the
pipe as the backfill material is placed to ensure that voids between surround
and trench side will be eliminated. Where the Contractor is instructed to
leave trench supports in place, the tops shall be burned or cut off.
4.4.6.1 Group A Pipe Materials
Except where concrete surrounds are specified or shown on the drawings,

either granular bedding material or approved selected excavated granular

material shall be introduced at both sides of the pipe and compacted until it
has been brought up to at least 150 mm above the crown of the pipe.
The methods of selecting excavated materials may include sieving either in
bulk or above the trench.
Wherever practicable the placing and compaction of the surround material

shall be carried out in sequence with the removal of the trench supports. In
particular trench sheets or boards shall be raised clear of each layer prior to
its compaction.
4.4.6.2 Group B Pipe Materials
Except where concrete surrounds are detailed Group B flexible pipelines

shall be laid with granular bedding and surround, as specified, to at least 300
mm above the crown of the pipe.
4.4.6.3 Compaction of Pipe Surrounds
The granular material shall be carefully laid and compacted at the sides of
pipes according to one of the following methods for alternative types of
compaction plant as agreed with or directed by the Engineer.
Table 4-6. Alternative Methods for Compaction of Pipe Surrounds
Surround Max. Layer Alternative Methods (Minimum

Material Thickness Number of Passes of Compaction)
(mm) Hand Vibrating 100kg
rammer plate power
rammer
Gravel 200 2 2 2
sand 150 3 4 4
The Contractor must demonstrate that alternative methods of compaction

will provide positive deflection of flexible pipes during installation.
4.4.6.4 Pipelines Below Permanent Groundwater Level
For Group A and B pipelines located beneath the permanent groundwater

level and for all slotted pipes any granular bedding material or approved
selected excavated granular material forming granular bedding and surround
shall be laid on and enclosed within a geotextile filter fabric membrane.
4.4.7 Backfilling of Trenches - Pipelines/Structures
After completion of placement and compaction of the surrounds to the

pipelines backfilling of trenches for pipelines shall proceed using selected
excavated materials in accordance with the specifications for earthworks.
The use of power rammers will not be permitted over any pipe until the depth
of fill above the crown of the pipe is at least 300 mm.
Services warning tapes shall be placed over the pipelines as specified in

Clause 4.4.15.

The backfill requirements for trenches around structures shall be the same
as that for pipeline except that compaction by mechanical means shall
commence from the formation level (to the specified densities).
4.4.8 Deflection Measurements on Group B Pipelines
4.4.8.1 General
All Group B pipelines will be subjected to in-situ deflection measurements.

Any section of pipe failing to meet the deflection criteria shall have its
surround material recompacted, such procedure being repeated until the
in-situ deflection is found to be satisfactory.
In the above paragraph deflection shall be considered as the maximum

difference between the measured in-situ diameter and the stated non-
deflected diameter on any axis divided by the non-deflected diameter.
For all pipes the horizontal and vertical deflections shall be measured at
each end at points 100 mm and 1.5 m away from the joint and at 3.0 m
intervals thereafter, or as directed by the Engineer. For pipe lengths of less
than 3.0 m these deflections shall be measured at each end at a point 100
mm away from the joint and at the mid-point.
For pipelines smaller than 600 mm diameter deflections shall be checked by

pulling through an approved cylindrical plug dimensioned to suit the
permissible minimum deflected diameter of the pipe.
Alternately, a deflectometer of a form that can be drawn through the pipeline

and be capable of measuring diametric dimensions both vertically and
horizontally may be used for deflection measurement of pipes of diameter
less than 600 mm. The deflectometer shall be calibrated for each diameter
regularly in the presence of the Engineer to maintain the accuracy of the
instrument. The device shall also provide a means of identifying where each
deflection measurement was taken along the length of a pipeline. This shall
be in the form of either a continuos printout or a visual display on a remote
monitor.
For pipes of 600 mm diameter and greater the device shall be in the form of
a telescopic spring loaded rod graduated for each diameter to show
percentage deflections.
The Contractor shall tabulate the results of the measurements and copies
shall be submitted to the Engineer immediately after each set of
measurements has been taken.
4.4.8.2 Deflection Measurements - GRP Pipes
The measurement shall be taken on at least three separate occasions:
1. After the pipe surround material has been placed and compacted to 300
mm above the pipe crown.

2. On completion of all backfill material up to final ground level but before

the dewatering is removed. This measurement shall be taken within one
day of completion of backfilling.
3. Immediately prior to the issue of a Certificate of Completion.
Pipes exhibiting any negative deflection in the vertical in (1) above and/or
pipes exhibiting a deflection in excess of 2% in (2) above or 4% in (3) above
shall be exposed and the surround replaced and recompacted. Should any
deflection exceed 7% that pipe shall be replaced. Any pipe removed for this
reason shall be taken from site and not incorporated in the permanent
works.
All pipes exposed for recompaction and pipes replaced for any reason shall
subsequently be subject to the three deflection checks listed above.
Deflection checks shall also be carried out on adjacent pipes for 50 m either
side of the recompacted or removed pipes.
4.4.8.3 Deflection Measurements - uPVC and other Plastic Pipes
The measurement shall be taken on at least two separate occasions:
1. As soon as a pipeline has been installed, tested and the trench

backfilled, but before the dewatering is removed.
2. Immediately prior to the issue of a Certificate of Completion.
If any of these tests indicate that the deflection may exceed the permitted
values the pipe or pipes shall be replaced. Any pipe removed for this reason
shall be taken from site and not incorporated in the permanent works.
All pipes replaced for any reason shall subsequently be subject to deflection
checks as described above. Deflection checks shall also be carried out on
adjacent pipes for 20 m either side of the removed pipes.
The permissible positive or negative deflections on the pipelines shall be as

follows (a reduction in the diameter is considered to be a negative
deflection):-
After Initial Installation 3%

Long Term 5%
4.4.9 Stanks to Pipelines in Granular Bedding
Where pipes are laid on a granular bed or with a granular backfill, a stank,
i.e. an impermeable barrier, shall be provided across the full width of the
trench and for the complete depth of the bedding at intervals not exceeding
50 m, and generally mid-way between manholes or chambers.
The stank shall consist of:-
Either a 300 mm long plug of fine grained clayey soil or a 300 mm long plug
of a mixture of sand and bitumen consolidated in an approved manner.

Or a mixture of sand and clay or the local material known as sabkha

compacted to form an impermeable barrier at least one metre in length.
Or a layer of thick polyethylene cut to fit around the pipe across the full width
of the trench and laid on the granular bedding material at its natural repose
angle.
All methods must form an impermeable barrier. Bitumen shall not be used
for thermoplastic pipes.
4.4.10 Thrust and Anchor Blocks to Pressure Pipelines
Underground pressure pipelines shall be provided with concrete blocks as

follows:-
Thrust/anchor blocks shall be provided at every installed bend, tee or angle

branch.
Anchor/thrust blocks shall be provided on pipelines laid to gradients steeper

than 1:20, up to 1:15 every third pipe shall be anchored, up to 1:10 every
second pipe and at 1:5 every pipe shall be anchored.
Concrete shall extend to undisturbed ground on thrust faces of thrust blocks

and on both faces of anchor blocks.
Where details are not shown on the drawings the Contractor shall prepare
proposals for thrust and anchor blocks including calculations and submit
them to the Engineer's Representative for approval. Such approval shall not
relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for the adequacy of his proposals.
Special details shall be shown on the drawings or instructed at site where
environmental or ground conditions dictate.
4.4.11 Pipes Protruding from Structures,

Concrete Surrounds and Anchor Blocks
Unless otherwise detailed a pipeline at or below ground level protruding from

a structure shall have two flexible joints adjacent to the structure. A band of
an approved concrete encasement rubber shall wrap around the pipe prior to
placement of any concrete such that the rubber protrudes 25 mm from the
concrete. The pipe shall be layed so the distance to first exposed flexible
joint and the distance between first and second joint are as follows:-
Table 4-7. Requirements for Flexible Joints for Protruding Pipes
Distance between
Pipe Diameter Maximum distance
first and second joint(mm)
(mm) to first joint (mm)
Min. Max.
Up to 300 150 450 2.5 * dia.
300 to 1000 300 1.5 * dia. 2.5 * dia.
Above 1000 450 1.5 * dia. 2.5 * dia.

In the case of Group B pipe materials, particular attention will be placed on

elliptical deflection conditions.
These joints will be required at surrounds and anchor blocks unless directed
otherwise on site.
4.4.11.1 Group A Pipe Materials
Between the structure and the first joint any disturbed ground below the pipe
will be removed and replaced with Class B concrete in the form of a cradle,
all to the direction of the Engineer. The cradle shall not extend beyond the
first joint.
Beyond the first flexible joint within the excavated working space of the
structure the concrete fill shall be brought up 300 mm below the pipe invert
only. Specified bedding materials will then be used.
4.4.11.2 Group B Pipe Materials
Within the excavated working space for the structure disturbed ground below
the pipe will be removed and replaced with Class B concrete to within 300
mm of the underside of the pipe. Specified bedding materials will then be
used to support the pipe.
The width of the concrete backfill shall not be less than the nominal trench
widths except for any permanent shuttering against temporary trench
supports to facilitate removal of such trench supports after concreting.
Where a flexible pipe passes through a rigid concrete face to a structure or

surround the pipe shall be protected from stress concentration and possible
fracture of the pipe at the concrete face. A 10 mm thick neoprene or other
approved synthetic rubber strip shall be wrapped around and cemented to
the pipe unless special wall protection units are used.
The neoprene will normally extend through the width of a wall to a dry
chamber or structure but will be limited to 150 mm or 100 mm is exposed to
liquid (groundwater or liquid inside the structure) a sealant groove shall be
formed if detailed and filled with an appropriate, approved, joint sealant.
Care shall be taken to ensure that the rubber strip is not displaced during
concreting.
Where a pipeline protrudes from a concrete surround, no protection from

stress concentration will be required if the surround ends at a flexible joint
leaving the next pipe free. If the surround ends on a pipe barrel the specified
protection will be provided and, for pressure pipes only, the protruding pipe
will be wrapped from the edge of the neoprene strip along to the next flexible
joint at which the concrete surround is interrupted with an approved
compressible material such as damp-proof sheeting or building felt of
minimum thickness 2 mm.

4.4.12 Protection of Pipelines and Pipeline Component
4.4.12.1 Pipelines
Protection of pipelines shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendations which shall be included with submission details for
agreement by the Engineer. The minimum requirements are shown below:
Class A concrete protection slabs as detailed on the drawing shall be

provided over the uPVC pipelines under roads when cover to pipe is equal
or less than 1.2 m for a gravity line; and for pressure line at any depth. In
case of GRP pipe concrete surround shall be provided as per drawing if the
depth of cover is less than 1.5 m and the pipeline lies within a strip of 20 m
each side of the centreline of the Road Corridor.
4.4.12.2 Pipeline Components
All buried valves, couplings, flange adaptors, and other metal components
shall be encased to guard against corrosion. Other pipe joints, valves and
similar items on both buried and exposed pipelines shall be encased where
specified or shown on the drawings.
The encasing shall be by one of the following methods, as detailed.
(1) Surrounding with Class B concrete.
(2) Enclosed by an approved hot-poured bitumen compound.

(3) Wrapped with tape.
Method (2) shall not be used with plastic pipes.
The item to be encased shall first be cleaned and its original surface
treatment made good. The surface shall be dry before encasing is carried
out, which shall not be done before the pipeline has been tested.
The bitumen compound shall be cast in purpose-built moulds in accordance

with instructions issued by the supplier.
The protective wrapping tape shall be open-weave cotton or synthetic fibre

or woven glass fibre coated on both sides with an even coat of petrolatum
(petroleum jelly) containing a filler. The tape and paste shall be suitable for
use in the prevailing climatic soils pumped liquid and ground water
conditions.
Before wrapping with tape the item to be encased shall be enclosed with an
approved mastic or inert putty-like filler which shall be moulded by hand so
as to provide a smooth surface for the tape. The tape shall be tightly spirally
wrapped with 25 mm overlaps so as to enclose the whole of the item and a
minimum of 150 mm of pipe length on each side. The enclosure shall be
firmly pressed out to prevent air being trapped under the wrapping.

4.4.13 Indicator Posts to Pressure Mains

Where pressure mains pass through open ground, not adjacent to roads, or
where the danger of accidental breakage by excavation is evident, the
Engineer may instruct the erection of indicator posts of an approved design.
Details of the indicator post construction and spacing shall be shown on the
drawings or be directed by the Engineer.
The depth, location and size of the pressure main shall be detailed in Arabic
and English, to an approved design, on an engraved plastic or non-
corrodible plate attached to the post.
In addition at all air valve chambers, the Contractor shall erect indicator
signs on posts, to an approved design, at locations described to him by the
Engineer.
4.4.14 Enclosing Granular or Stone Surround with Geotextile Filter Fabric
All slotted pipes and pipes laid beneath the permanent groundwater level the
granular bedding material shall be laid on and enclosed within a geotextile
filter fabric.
Filter fabric used for subsurface drainage works shall consist of long-chain
synthetic polymer fibers composed of at least 85 percent by mass
polyoiefins, polyesters, or polyamids. They shall be formed into a network
such that the filaments or yarns retain dimensional stability relative to each
other, including selvedges.
The fabric shall be stabilised against ultra-violet light, inert to commonly

uncounted chemicals and chemical properties of the in-situ soil and water,
and it shall conform to the following minimum requirements:
Table 4-8. Requirements for Geotextile Fabric for Subsurface Drainage
Min.
Property Test Method
Requirements
Grab Strength (N) ASTM D 4632 800
Puncture Strength (N) ASTM D 4833 355
Burst Strength (Kpa) ASTM D 3786 2000
Trapezoid Tear (N) ASTM D 4533 220
Permeability (M/S) ASTM D 4491 10-4
Apparent Opening Size (Mm) ASTM D 4751 0.6
Ultraviolet Degradation
ASTM D 4355 70 @ 150 H
(Percent Retained Strength)
Where filter fabric is used to enclose granular or stone pipe surrounds, the
fabric will be placed on the prepared trench formation and carefully
supported during pipe laying operations. When the pipe has been laid
complete with surround to the correct level the filter fabric shall be closed
over the top of the surround by forming a 'lap' of minimum width 500 mm. All
membrane joints shall be overlapped a minimum of 500 mm.

Care shall be taken not to puncture or damage the membrane in any way
during installation or during backfilling of the trench. Fabric damaged or
displaced before or during installation or during placement of overlaying
aggregate material shall be replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of the
Engineer at the Contractor's expense.
During periods of shipment and storage, the fabric shall be maintained

wrapped in a heavy-duty protective covering and protected from direct
sunlight, ultra-violet rays and temperatures greater than 60oC.
4.4.15 Underground Services Warning Tapes
Service protection tapes shall be installed above all sewage, drainage and
irrigation pipelines and pressure mains constructed or exposed under this
contract excluding individual service connections.
For pipelines with the top of the pipe barrel more than 900 mm below
finished surface level the tape shall be placed over the centreline of the
pipeline at 600 mm below finished surface level during backfilling and
compaction operations. For pipelines with less than 900 mm cover to the
top of the pipe barrel the tape shall be placed over the centreline of the pipe
at 300 mm above the top of the pipe barrel during backfilling, compaction
and reinstatement operations.
The tape shall be continuous over pipelines and at joints between tapes from
separate rolls the joint shall be lapped a minimum of one metre.
Tapes shall be durable and detectable by electro-magnetic means using low

output generator equipment. They shall remain legible and colour-fast in all
soil conditions at pH values of 2.5 to 11.0 inclusive.
The tapes shall be flexible with a minimum width of 150 mm and thickness of
150 microns and shall be subject to the Engineer's approval.
Site tests to confirm detectability of the warning tapes after installation and
backfill shall be performed when ordered by the Engineer.
Text in Arabic and English indicating the protected services lying below the
tape shall be permanent ink bonded to resist prolonged chemical attack by
corrosive acids and alkalis with the message repeated at a maximum
interval of two metres. Tapes shall be colour coded as follows, with black
text as indicated. The sign and styles of the text shall be approved by the
Engineer.
Sewers : Yellow
CAUTION : Sewer below
Sewage pressure mains: Yellow
CAUTION : Sewage pressure main below
Drains : Yellow

CAUTION : Drain below
Drainage pressure main: Yellow
CAUTION : Drainage pressure mainbelow
Irrigation pressure mains: Orange
CAUTION : Irrigation pressure main below
4.5 PIPEWORK WITHIN STRUCTURES
(1) Pipework shall be supplied to the general arrangements and limits

indicated on the Contract drawings and shall be supplied complete with
all joint rings, gaskets, washers to each side of a bolted joint, nuts,
bolts, grease and any other components necessary for the complete
installation.
(2) The layout and design of the pipework shall be such as to facilitate its
erection and the dismantling of any section for maintenance of
associated plant by inclusion of approved mechanical coupling or
flange adaptors.
(3) Where a common delivery pipe is used, individual pump delivery

branches unless otherwise shown on the drawings shall be jointed to it
in a horizontal plane and angled to prevent sharp changes of flow
direction.
(4) Adequate supporting and anchoring arrangements for all pipes shall be
included which may take the form of straps, stays, tie bars or concrete
cradles. All pipe hangers and supports inside pumping stations and
valve chambers or other structures shall be of 320S17 stainless steel.
All fixing bolts shall be stainless steel grade 320S17.
(5) GRP pipes shall be provided with puddle flanges where they pass
through the walls of underground or water retaining structures.
(6) Small bore pipework for sump pumps, vents, etc., may be an approved
plastic material.
(7) All pipes connected to pressure vessels, pumps, etc., shall have
flanged connections.
(8) All pipes shall be checked for alignment and mating of flanges and
connections before secured. Pipes shall not be sprung into position.

4.6 MANHOLES, CHAMBERS, AND SPECIAL STRUCTURES
4.6.1 General
The Contractor shall construct all manholes, chambers, and special

structures including transition chambers and outfall structures as indicated
on the drawings and herein specified.
Manholes, chambers, and special structures shall conform in shape, size,

dimensions, materials, and other respects to the details indicated on the
drawings or as ordered by the Engineer.
4.6.2 Construction of Manholes, Chambers, and Special Structures
All manholes, chambers, and special structures shall have reinforced-

concrete bases as detailed on the drawings. Manhole bases for storm-
sewers less than 600 mm and bases for chambers may be precast or cast in
place at the Contractor's option and as approved by the Engineer. For
precast reinforced-concrete manhole bases, openings for pipes shall be cast
in the base at the required location during its manufacture. Field cut
openings will not be permitted. All other manhole and special structure
bases shall be cast in place as indicated on the drawings.
Manhole and chamber cover slabs shall be cast in place reinforced-concrete

as marked on the drawings. The ductile iron frames and covers for manholes
and chambers shall be brought to grade by the number of courses of
concrete blocks shown on the drawings or as instructed by the Engineer and
a reinforced concrete frame into which the ductile iron frame is embedded.
Class B concrete shall be cast to a minimum thickness of 150 mm around

the concrete blocks for rigidity or as detailed on the drawings.
The inverts shall conform accurately to the size of the adjoining pipes. Side
inverts shall be curved and main inverts (where direction changes) shall be
laid out in smooth curves of the longest possible radius which is tangential,
within the manhole, to the centerlines of adjoining pipelines all as indicated
on the drawings and instructed by the Engineer.
The ductile iron frames, grates and covers shall be to the Dubai Municipality
standard frame, grate and cover as indicated on the drawings and
hereinafter specified in Clause 4.7.
All benching and channel shall be formed with Class A concrete unless
shown otherwise in the drawing. 7 mm minimum GRP laminate shall be
applied to benching and channel.
Manhole walls shall be plain Class A concrete formed to the shape and
thickness shown on the drawings by the use of sound formwork material to
give a fair faced finish.
Internal surfaces of manholes and structures shall be protected with a

reinforced plastic liner in accordance with Clause 9.2.1.3 or with an
approved coating in accordance with Clause 9.2.1.2(2)(a) as and where

shown on the drawing and the external (buried) surfaces shall be protected
in accordance with Clause 9.2.1.2 (1) either with water-proof membrane with
protection board or with a brush-applied bituminous emulsion as indicated in
the drawing.
Pipes entering and leaving manholes, chambers and special structures shall
be laid soffit to soffit unless otherwise shown on the drawings. Details of
pipelines entering and leaving manholes, chambers, etc., shall be as
specified for pipes protruding from structures in accordance with
Clause 4.4.11.
All construction joints to manholes, chambers and special structures shall be

perfectly watertight. Waterstop across joints in structures as specified in
Clause 3.16.3 shall be provided where detailed in the drawings or as
directed. Joints shall be fully scabbled.
Manholes and chambers shall be completely constructed as the Works

progress and as each one is reached by the pipework. Frames and covers
shall be placed immediately after the completion of the manhole and
chamber.
4.6.2.1 Road Gullies
Gullies shall comprise the gully grating and frame and the polypropylene
gully pot, all as shown on the drawing.
The gully pots shall be supplied with a fibre glass sand bucket with lifting
handle, as detailed in the drawing. The sand bucket shall have perforations
in its upper part and small holes 3 mm in diameter in its bottom part. The
total area of perforations shall not be less than 20,000 sq. mm and the
minimum diameter of each hole shall be 50 mm. The depth of the bucket
shall not be less than 750 mm.
The gully pot shall be surrounded by a minimum of 150 mm of concrete as

shown on the drawing.
The connecting pipe between the gully pot and the drain/manhole shall be
160 mm dia. uPVC.
The connection into the drain pipe shall be made by means of an oblique
junction which may be of uPVC.

4.6.3 Access Covers, Frames, and Grates
4.6.3.1 General
The Contractor shall furnish all ductile iron frames, grates, and covers
conforming to the details shown on the drawings, and as specified in Clause
4.7 to RTA/DM Standards.
The Contractor shall submit for approval detailed shop and working drawings
of all castings before fabrication. Such drawings shall be obtained from the
supplier(s) he chooses to select from the approved list of RTA/DM (see
Clause 4.7.1).
The castings shall be of good quality, strong, tough, even-grained ductile

iron, smooth, free from scale, lumps, blisters, sandholes, and defects of
every nature which would render them unfit for the service for which they are
intended. Covers and frames contact surfaces shall be machined and the
compatible frames and cover carefully marked to ensure correct covers and
frames are matched on site.
If required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall obtain from the supplier/
manufacturer a guarantee that replacement component parts will be
available for a minimum period of 10 years from the issue date of the
Completion Certificate.
All covers, frames and grates shall be delivered to Dubai with a transit
protective packaging or wrapping. Any damage occuring to the approved
coating system shall be made good prior to installation.
One set of prising and lifting keys of approved design shall be supplied by
the Contractor with each twenty manhole covers and frames supplied.
4.6.3.2 Access Covers and Frames
All access covers and frames shall be of heavy duty construction complying
with BS EN124 and the requirements of the RTA/DM Standards (Clause
4.7). With the exception of those for sewerage manholes, access covers and
frames shall be sand tight with seatings designed to be non-rocking unless
detailed otherwise.
Double triangular covers must be loosely coupled by stainless steel bolts

with nuts provided with an approved method to render the nuts incapable of
both un-due tightening or loosening.
Holes provided in non-ventilating covers for lifting keys shall be appropriately

shaped pockets which shall not penetrate through and there may be no
projections above cover level.
Both sides of covers and frames shall be protected with an approved epoxy
coating system appropriate to the Dubai environment (refer to Clause 19.4).
The coating system may be applied at the place of manufacture or in Dubai
under controlled application conditions approved by the Engineer.

Covers for sewerage manholes and chambers shall also be provided with a
reinforced plastic sealing plate. The design of cover, frame and sealing plate
shall be such that no load can be transferred from the cover to the sealing
plate.
Access covers shall be as follows:-
(1) Sewerage
(a) Manhole covers shall be 600 mm x 600 mm square clear opening

double triangular heavy duty, embossed with the word 'Sewerage'
in Arabic and English.
(b) Inspection chamber covers shall be single seal 600 mm x 600 mm

square clear opening heavy or medium duty, embossed with the
word 'Sewerage' in Arabic and English. Alternately, 600 mm x 600
mm square clear opening double triangular covers may be used
subject to approval by the Engineer.
(2) Storm/Land drainage
Manhole covers shall be non-ventilated, 600 mm diameter clear opening

double semi-circular heavy duty with sealing plate, embossed with the word
'Storm' in Arabic and English.
(3) Pumping Stations, Associated Chambers and Where Specified
They shall be rectangular 600 mm x 750 mm or 600 mm x 900 mm or

multiples of these sizes, as detailed on the drawings with concrete infill, and
shall be heavy duty.
Where ventilated covers are detailed the total area of ventilation shall not be
less than 5 % of the minimum clear opening area and the covers shall be
provided with suitable protective sand traps which shall seat in the access
cover frame.
4.6.3.3 Reinforced Plastic Sealing Plates to Access Covers
Reinforced plastic sealing plates to access covers shall be designed to

provide a push-fit, gas-tight seal with the cover frame. The sealing plate shall
be in the form of a plug with a flange to prevent the plate passing into the
manhole. The seal shall be achieved by means of an approved integral
synthetic rubber gasket mechanically locked into the periphery of the plate.
The gasket shall be suitable for the service temperature range 0oC to 60oC
and possess good weathering and H2S resistance. Any lubricant used on
the seal shall be silicon based. The underside of the plate shall have a resin-
rich finish and there shall be no exposed fibres. Cut and/or drilled faces shall
be sealed with resin.
The plate shall have a minimum thickness of 5 mm and be capable of

withstanding a static load of 150 kg applied centrally over a 150 cm square
surface area with a deflection, measured at the centre of the plate, not
exceeding 25 mm.

A minimum of two number reinforced plastic lifting handles shall be provided

per plate. They shall be of the same materials as the plate and securely
laminated to the plate or fixed by stainless steel blind rivets.
The complete sealing plate including gasket shall be resistant to 10%

sulphuric acid at 50oC for 100 days.
4.6.3.4 Road Gully Gratings and Frames
Road gully gratings and frames shall be of ductile iron construction to BS

EN124 badged to RTA/DM Standard (Clause 4.7), and having a minimum
waterway of 900 sq. cm. The grating and frame shall be of a non-rocking
construction and shall be dimensioned as detailed in the drawing. Gully
gratings shall be of the raised kerb type complete with sand seal, road
retaining bar and a removable GRP debris bucket. The weir depth shall be a
minimum of 165 mm and the frame and cover are to be protected with an
approved epoxy coating system appropriate at the place of manufacture or
in Dubai under controlled application conditions approved by the Engineer.
The clear opening size shall permit removal of the GRP grit sand bucket.

4.7 DUBAI MUNICIPALITY STANDARDS FOR COVERS AND GRATINGS
Table 4-9. Standards for Covers and Gratings for Storm/Land Drainage
MANHOLE GULLY GRATINGS
PUMPING
REQUIREMENT IN OUT FLUSHED UPSTAND STN.
ROAD OF KERB KERB ACCESS
ROAD COVER
Double Double
Shape Semi- Semi- Square -
Circular Circular Rectangula
r
Size of clear 600 dia. 600 width weir dpt 600 x 750
opening dia. Nom.450 165 600 x 900
Standard BS EN BS EN BS EN BS EN BS EN124
124 124 124 124
Strength D400 C250 D400 150 KN D400

(A 350) (B 150) (A 350) (B 150)
Material Ductile Ductile Ductile Ductile Ductile

Iron Iron Iron Iron Iron
Protective Epoxy Epoxy Epoxy Epoxy Epoxy

Coating
Ventilation No No - - No
Construction Solid Solid - - Concrete
Infill
Sealing Plate Yes Yes - - -
Inscriptions Storm Storm Storm Storm Storm
Tightness Yes Yes - - -
Rocking No No No - No
Locking No No No - No
Interchangeability Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Other - - - GRP GRID Special

Keys
Suppliers 1-5 1-5 1-5 1-5 1, 2

Table 4-10. Standards for Covers and Gratings for Sewerage
HOUSE PUMPING
REQUIREMENT MANHOLE CONNECTION STN.
CHAMBER ACCESS
COVER
IN ROAD OUT OF ROAD
Shape Double Double Square Rectangular

Triangular Triangular
Size of clear 600 x 600 600 x 600 600 x 600 600 x 750
opening 600 x 900
Standard BS EN124 BS EN124 BS EN124 BS EN124
Strength D 400 C 250 C 250 D 400

(A 350) (B 150) (B 150)
Material Ductile Ductile Ductile Ductile

Iron Iron Iron Iron
Protective Coating Epoxy Epoxy Epoxy Epoxy
Ventilation No No No No
Construction Solid Solid Solid Concrete
Infill
Sealing Plate Yes Yes Yes -
Inscriptions Sewerage Sewerage -
Sewerage
Tightness Yes Yes Yes -

Rocking No No No No
Locking No No No -
Interchangeability Yes Yes Yes Yes
Other - - - Special Keys
Suppliers 1-5 1-5 1-5 1, 2

4.7.1 Approved List of Suppliers
1. ELKINGTON
2. PASSAVANT
3. STANTON
4. SELFOCK
5. GLYNWED BRICKHOUSE

SECTION 5: - BRICKWORK AND BLOCKWORK
5.1 MATERIALS
5.1.1 Concrete Bricks and Blocks
All concrete Bricks & Blocks shall conform to RTA/DM Local Order No.
44/1990.
Concrete bricks and blocks shall be constructed from Class B (sulphate

resisting Portland Cement) concrete but the coarse aggregate shall be 10
mm to 5 mm. The blocks shall be cast in clean oiled moulds.
They shall be free from cracks, uniform in size, true to shape, free from
deleterious matter, clean, hard, impervious with smooth faces in appearance
similar to normal Class B concrete and with well defined arises.
Bricks and blocks shall not be incorporated into the Works until they have
matured under suitable conditions for 28 days.
5.1.2 Bricks
Engineering bricks and special purpose bricks such as radial bricks, weir
bricks, copings and bull nosed bricks shall have an average compressive
strength of at least 69 N/mm2 and an average absorption not exceeding 4.5
percent by weight measured by a standard boiling or vacuum method.
Faces of engineering bricks to be exposed to the weather or liquids shall not

be wire cut.
Bricks for arches and circular work of 1.5 metres and less in diameter shall
be purpose made radial bricks.
5.1.3 Sand for Mortar
Sand for mortar shall comply with the following table:-
Table 5-1. Sand for Mortar
Sieve Size Rendering Brickwork/General Purposes

5.00 mm 100 100
2.36 mm 90 - 100 90 - 100
1.18 mm 70 - 100 70 - 100
600 microns 40 - 80 40 - 100
300 microns 5 - 40 5 - 70
150 microns 0 - 10 0 - 15
5.1.4 Lime for Mortar
Lime for cement-lime and lime-sand mortar shall be the hydrated type to the
approved standard.

5.2 CONSTRUCTION
5.2.1 General
Blockwork shall comply with RTA/DM Local Order # 44/90.
Bricks and blocks shall be properly stacked on level hardstanding. Broken

blocks shall be removed from the site.
Bricks shall be adequately protected from inclement weather.
During hot and dry weather bricks and blocks shall be wetted as necessary
and the tops of walls shall be wetted before a course is laid
All faces of brickwork or blockwork will be kept clean and no rubbing down of
exposed faces will be permitted.
Vertical faces of all bricks shall be well buttered before being laid and the
whole well grouted at each course.
Brickwork and blockwork should be built in a uniform manner. Corners and

other advanced work should be raked back and not raised above the general
level more than 1.0 m at one lift.
All blocks shall be laid on even full beds of mortar; vertical faces of all blocks
shall be well buttered before being laid and the whole well grouted at each
course.
The overall dimensions of four blocks laid in mortar shall not exceed by more
than 25 mm the overall dimensions of the same blocks laid dry.
5.2.2 Engineering Brickwork
Unless otherwise specified or ordered all engineering brickwork shall be built

in English bond.
In all engineering brickwork the overall dimensions of four bricks laid in

mortar shall not exceed by more than 25 mm the overall dimensions of the
same bricks laid dry.
When concrete is to be faced with brickwork, header bricks shall be built into
every fourth course and at intervals of 2 bricks horizontally so as to project
1/2 brick into the concrete. Headers in successive courses shall be
staggered.
5.2.3 Blockwork
All blockwork shall be built level, plumb and true to line with all perpends in
line vertically. Blockwork shall be built in stretcher bond and alternate
courses shall be bonded in at all junctions. All blockwork shall be set in
gauged mortar as described to the lengths, heights and thicknesses shown
on the drawings. Fair and fair-faced work shall be kept perfectly clean and
no rubbing down of blockwork will be allowed. Blockwork to be plastered
shall have joints struck off flush and left rough.

5.2.4 Cement Mortar
Mortar for precast concrete units, brickwork and blockwork shall be gauged
in the proportions of one part of cement to three parts of sand. Lime shall
only be added if specifically ordered.
Cement mortar shall be mixed on a clean surface in small quantities

sufficient only for 30 minutes work and shall not be remixed or worked up
again after setting or hardening; any mortar that has become set or hard
shall be rejected and removed from the site.
Ingredients shall be measured in proper boxes and shall be turned over and
thoroughly mixed on a wooden platform.
5.2.5 Cement Lime Mortar
Cement lime (gauged) mortar shall consist of one part Portland Cement, one
part of lime and six parts of sand by volume (1:1:6). All materials shall be
accurately gauged using gauge boxes and shall be thoroughly mechanically
mixed. Mortar that has begun to set shall not be revived or re-used.
5.2.6 Cement Mortar Rendering
Cement mortar rendering shall consist of two or more coats; the undercoat
shall be 13 mm thickness and scored to form a key for the final coat which
shall be not less than 6 mm in thickness. The finished coat shall be worked
with proper metal floats, and the face left with an even and polished surface.
The mortar for the undercoat of the rendering shall be gauged in the propor-
tion of one part of cement to three parts of sand, and the finished coat shall
be in the proportion of one part of cement to two parts of sand.
For at least 24 hours before rendering is applied the concrete or brickwork

face or previous coat of rendering shall be thoroughly soaked with water,
and the finished rendering shall be watered at least four times a day and
kept damp for a period of a least fourteen days after completion. Not more
than three days shall elapse between the application of one coat and its
being covered up with a second or finishing coat. All arises shall be sharp
and linear.
When rendering is to be applied to brickwork, the joints shall be raked and

cleaned out to a depth of 13 mm.

SECTION 6: - INSPECTION AND TESTING OF PIPELINES

AND STRUCTURES
6.1 CLEANING AND INSPECTION OF PIPELINES
The Contractor shall ensure during and after construction that the pipes
remain clean and free of all silt, mortar, debris and other obstructions, and if
required by the Engineer, the pipelines shall be cleaned out using approved
methods and equipment which do not damage the internal lining of the
pipes and manholes. When work is not in progress the open ends of the
pipeline shall be securely plugged with an approved watertight plug or
stopper to prevent the ingress of deleterious matter into pipelines.
After backfilling pipe trenches and completing chambers, hatch boxes, etc.,
and before the trench surfaces are reinstated, the interior of pipelines shall
be cleaned of silt and debris by approved methods for inspection by the
Engineer's Representative as follows:-
All newly constructed pipelines of 600 mm (nom.) internal diameter and

smaller shall have a loose plug passed through them to show that they are
clear of obstruction and free from deflection. The loose plug shall be
dimensioned to suit the permissible minimum deflected diameter of the
pipe. Alternately, a deflectometer capable of measuring diametric
dimensions both vertically and horizontally may be used as specified in
Clause 4.4.8.
All newly constructed pipelines greater than 600 mm (nom.) internal

diameter will after cleaning be inspected from the inside and the Contractor
shall provide a suitable trolley for this purpose.
All renovated or replaced pipeline shall after cleaning, be inspected from

the inside using CCTV inspection as specified in Section 13.
In addition gravity pipelines or sewers shown as straight lines between

manholes on the drawings shall be subjected to a light sighting test as
detailed in the pipe laying specification Clause 4.4.3.
Pipelines, manholes, chambers/structures will be inspected again before

being put in service or taking over (whichever is sooner) and if required by
the Engineer's Representative shall be cleaned again in whole or in part by
suitable means which may include, if directed, flushing with clean water.
6.2 TESTING OF PIPELINES
6.2.1 General
The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for the supply of water
used for testing and cleaning of pipelines which shall be obtained from a
source approved by the Engineer. All water required for testing and
cleaning shall be provided by the Contractor at his cost.
Prior to commencement of flushing or testing, approval shall be obtained to

the methods and programme for testing and to the method of disposal of all
fluids used for flushing or testing purposes. Under no circumstances will

permission be given for the discharge of such fluids into the existing
sewerage system.
If permission is given to use new or existing pipelines or culverts which are

not part of a live system, they shall be thoroughly cleaned of all silt and any
resulting damage made good after use.
If lagoons for the storage of such fluids are permitted, they must be suitably
protected with fencing and attended by day and night to prevent access by
the general public and will not be sited adjacent to buildings. Approved
means of preventing the formation of mosquito larvae on the surface of the
lagoons will be employed.
Testing of pipelines shall in all cases be applied in the presence of the

Engineer's Representative. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least
48 hours before hand of his intention to test a section of pipeline. The
Contractor, at his own expense, shall provide complete plant and all struts,
thrust blocks, etc., as may be necessary for effectively testing the pipelines
to the specified pressures.
Pipelines shall be properly completed and supported before being put

under test. No testing will be permitted until seven days after thrust blocks
and other holding down works have been completed.
For both gravity and pressure pipelines only testing of new, renovated, or
replaced sections of pipelines and fittings will be required under the
Contract, in accordance with this Specification, unless detailed otherwise.
Such testing will be carried out before making final connections to the
existing network. However where tees or other fittings are inserted into
existing pipelines and where lengths of pipeline are replaced no backfilling
will be allowed at the tees or fittings or at the joints between new and
existing pipework until the pipeline has been returned to service and a
visual inspection of all such fittings and joints made at the network
pressure.
Should any inspection be unsatisfactory or any test fail the Contractor shall
replace defective pipes, leaking joints or otherwise re-execute defective
work as instructed following which cleaning and testing will be repeated
until the Engineer's Representative certifies the pipeline to be satisfactory.
6.2.2 Testing of Non-Pressure Pipelines
All non-pressure pipelines of 600 mm nominal diameter or smaller shall be

given a preliminary air test when the pipeline is bedded and jointed before
backfilling and a final water test after backfilling in the presence and to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
Unless otherwise instructed non-pressure pipelines shall be tested in

sections between manholes.
Preliminary and final air and water tests will not normally be applied to
pipelines greater than 600 mm (nom.) internal diameter and acceptance of
these pipelines will be dependent on satisfactory visual inspection of the
pipes and joints.

Air Test (Preliminary Test)
After a length of pipeline is bedded and jointed, and before backfilling, it

shall be given a preliminary test as detailed below:
1. The Contractor shall plug all pipe outlets with suitable plugs, and brace
each plug securely where needed.
2. Air shall be pumped in slowly to the pipe until a pressure of 100 mm

head of water is indicated on a manometer connected to the system.
3. After the internal pressure of 100 mm is obtained, two minutes shall be

allowed for the air temperature to stabilize within the pipe.
4. Air may be added to restore the pressure to 100 mm.
5. During a further period of 5 minutes (without further pumping of air) the

pressure should not fall below 75 mm.
6. Release of the air pressure shall be carried out by removal of the

stopper at the end of the pipeline away from the manometer which will
remain connected. Failure to carry out the air pressure release in this
manner shall render the test invalid.
7. The Contractor will not be permitted to commence testing later than 4

hours after sunrise or earlier than 4 hours before sunset during the
summer period unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
Water Test (Final Test)
After backfilling the length of pipeline under test, it shall be given the
following final test:
1. All branches and open ends shall be closed with suitable stoppers,
secured with longitudinal braces before testing commences.
2. Water shall be filled from the lowest point and air allowed to escape. No
entrapped air shall remain in the pipeline while testing.
3. An internal pressure equivalent to a head of water of depth to invert of

the pipeline plus 1.25 m, or 4 m head whichever is greater shall be
maintained for 30 minutes to allow for initial absorption of water.
4. After that, the test pressure shall be maintained for 60 minutes and
water added shall be measured.
5. Pipeline shall be treated as passed if water consumption in 60 minutes

does not exceed 7.5 litres per metre of diameter per 30 m of length of
pipeline under test.
Where in the opinion of the Engineer's Representative the above test is not
sufficiently indicative of water tightness by reason of high ground water
levels the test will not be applied. Acceptance of the pipelines will then

depend on satisfactory inspection or testing for infiltration as referred to

below, and air test of the pipeline in manhole lengths.
The Engineer may require any length of pipe suspected of being damaged
to be retested by the water test at any time during the contract period.
Infiltration Test
After completion of backfilling and restoration of normal subsoil conditions,

all gravity pipelines and manholes shall be examined for infiltration as
follows:
1. All inlets to the system shall be closed sufficiently to prevent the

entrance of water.
2. Pumping of groundwater shall be discontinued for at least 3 days prior

to the test for infiltration.
3. The section of the pipeline under test, including manholes, shall be

accepted as satisfactory if the infiltration does not exceed 1.00 litre per
hour per metre of pipe line per metre of nominal internal diameter.
Notwithstanding the satisfactory completion of the infiltration test, if there is

any discernible flow of water entering the pipeline at a point which can be
located either by visual or closed circuit television inspection, appropriate
measures shall be taken to stop such infiltration.
6.2.3 Testing of Pressure Pipelines
All pressure pipelines of 675 mm or more internal diameter shall have each
joint individually tested by means of an approved joint testing apparatus.
Pipelines of less than 675 mm shall be subjected to a preliminary air test as

soon as a length of pipe has been laid and before backfilling. Pressure
pipelines shall then be given a final test using water after they have been
backfilled, cleaned and inspected.
Preliminary pressure testing of pipelines may be carried out if so required

by the Engineer with partial backfill only and exposed joints, but the stability
and safety of the Works must be ensured at all times.
Each test shall be restricted to pipes of one class. Pipelines shall be tested
in sections not exceeding 500 metres or between valve positions. In
addition the whole pipeline shall be tested upon completion. Particular care
must be taken to isolate air valves, etc., not to apply higher pressure than
specified at any point on the pipelines and to ensure that the pipelines are
adequately anchored before any test is carried out.
Gauges used for testing pressure pipelines shall be capable of reading

increments of 0.1 metre head. Before any pressure gauge is used, the
Contractor shall arrange for it to be checked independently and a dated
certificate of its accuracy shall be provided to the Engineer. Calibration of
pressure gauges shall be carried out at regular intervals as required by the
Engineer

Air Test (Preliminary Test)
As soon as a length of pressure pipe has been laid and before backfilling,
when applicable and when ordered it shall be subjected to the following
preliminary test:
1. The Contractor shall plug all pipe outlets with suitable plugs, and brace
each plug securely where needed.
2. Air shall be pumped in slowly to the pipe until a pressure of 300 mm

head of water is indicated on a manometer connected to the system.
3. After the internal pressure of 300 mm is obtained, two minutes shall be

allowed for the air temperature to stabilize within the pipe.
4. Air may be added to restore the pressure to 300 mm.
5. The test will not be satisfactory if the air pressure falls to less than 275
mm during a period of 5 minutes without further pumping of air.
Water Test (Final Test)
Pressure pipelines shall be given the following final test using water after
they have been backfilled, cleaned and inspected:
1. All the joints of the pipeline shall be left open for the purpose of
inspection for leakage if any, where practicable or instructed by the
Engineer.
2. Pipe ends shall be closed with suitable stoppers, secured with

longitudinal braces/thrust block, before testing commences.
3. Water shall be filled slowly (to prevent possible water hammer) from the
lowest points and air allowed to escape through an air vent fixed for the
purpose at the highest points of the pipeline section under test. No
entrapped air shall remain in the pipeline while testing.
4. Pressure in the pipeline shall then be raised steadily up to and

maintained at the rated pressure for a period of 30 minutes to allow for
absorption and achieve conditions as stable as possible for testing.
5. If no leakage has been observed, pumping shall then be resumed and

the pressure slowly raised to the specified test pressure.
6. Unless specified elsewhere or directed otherwise by the Engineer, the

test pressure shall be 900 KN per square metre (91.8 m head of water).
7. Test pressure shall be continuously maintained by the use of the pump

for a period of 60 minutes and the amount of makeup water required to
maintain the pressure shall be accurately measured (to the nearest 1/8
litre).
8. Pipeline shall be deemed to have passed the test if all the following
conditions are satisfied:

a. No water is visible coming out of the pipe or joints at any point;
b. Amount of make-up water required does not exceed 1 litre per

hourper 100 mm diameter per kilometer of pipeline under test;
c. The loss of the pressure during the test period does not exceed
70KN per square metre.
6.3 TESTING OF VALVES
Valves and all pipelines appurtenances shall be hydraulically tested

together with the pipeline in which they are installed. Valves shall be tested
for operation under working pressure and shall be adjusted so that they
operate smoothly, seat properly and are installed to tolerances
recommended by the manufacturer.
6.4 TESTING OF RENOVATED AND REPLACED PIPELINES
All non-pressure pipelines renovated or replaced by slip lining, soft lining, or

pipe bursting methods shall be given an air test or water test per Clause
6.2.2 in the presence and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
6.5 TESTING OF WATER RETAINING STRUCTURES
All water retaining structures shall be visually inspected to confirm that

there is no infiltration. Where it is required by the Engineer, water retaining
structures shall be tested for watertightness. The structure shall be filled
with water and shall stand for a period of three days, to allow for absorption.
The structure shall be considered satisfactory if, subsequent to this period,
there shall be no fall in level over a period of 24 hours (after making the
allowance for rainfall and evaporation) and there shall be no visible leaks,
or damp surface areas.
This shall be carried out before any backfilling and before the application of
any external concrete protection has taken place. Any damages revealed
as a result of such tests shall be made good to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.

SECTION 9:-CORROSION PROTECTION AND ODOR CONTROL
9.1 MATERIALS
9.1.1 Corrosive Environments
Corrosion protection systems and surface coatings shall in all cases be

suitable for exposure to their contact with environmental conditions which
may include any or all of the following :-
(1) The climatic conditions prevailing in the project area with particular
emphasis on temperature variations, high surface temperatures and
high humidities.
(2) Septic sewage with a pH value of less than one.
(3) Sulfuric acid solution in sewage slimes in concentrations up to 15 %

by weight.
(4) Hydrogen sulfide and other gases emanating from sewage, septic
sewage and sewage sludges.
(5) Saline groundwater with high chloride or sulphate contents both below
the water table and in soil zones above the water table where capillary
action and the presence of oxygen may cause extremely severe
conditions.
(6) Wind blown chlorides.
(7) Wind blown abrasive sands.
9.1.2 Paint
Protective and decorative paint systems including primers and undercoats

shall be obtained ready mixed for use. All containers of paints and other
coating systems shall show date of manufacture, shelf life and pot life where
applicable. Paint shall be applied as per Clause 9.2.2 (refer to Clause 19.4
for schedules of protective coatings and surface preparations).
The Contractor shall only be allowed to use paints which are delivered to the
site in sealed cans or drums bearing the name of the manufacturer and
properly labeled.
Tints and shades of final coats shall be advised by the Engineer or his
Representative.
9.1.3 Impervious Tanking Membrane
Membrane used for tanking to concrete structures shall be impervious, self-

adhesive and covered with a release agent.
Rubber bitumen/PVC membrane shall have a minimum bitumen thickness of

2.0 mm and PVC thickness of 0.3 mm.

9.1.4 PVC Sheet Lining Materials
PVC sheet materials to be used for lining concrete structures and pipelines
internally shall be manufactured from polyvinyl chloride, plasticisers and
pigments to make permanently flexible sheets.
The colour of the sheet shall be approved on site.
The PVC sheet shall have a minimum thickness of 1.5 mm and shall be
formed by extrusion to have on one side locking keys or ribs of either ‘T’ or
diamond section at centers not greater than 75 mm. It shall be capable of
forming a continuous 100% effective seal with the use of welding strips or
other approved method and shall be supplied with all materials and tools for
making the joints.
The tensile strength of the material shall be not less than 17000 kN/m2.
All weld strips, patches and other sheets used in the permanent fixing of the
ribbed sheet shall be of a material having the same composition as the
ribbed sheet.
9.1.5 Reinforced Plastic Liners
Reinforced plastic liners to be used for lining pumping stations and

manholes shall be manufactured (as per Clause 19.1.4) to the dimensions
given on the Drawings, within the following tolerances :-
(1) The work size, which is defined as the internal diameter as specified by
the manufacturer, shall be declared and shall not differ from the normal
diameter by more than ± 1%.
A manufacturing tolerance on the work size of 10 mm will be allowed

provided that a tight fit is achieved between the liner and the slab liner.
(2) Liners shall be supplied in lengths to suit requirements with a resin-rich

finish to internal surfaces.
(3) Minimum thickness shall be 7 mm for sewerage work and 5 mm where
approved for drainage work.
(4) The out of squareness shall not be greater than 10 mm.
(5) The deviation from straightness of the bore of the liner shall not exceed
20 mm.
Although the liners are not designed to be structural, they shall have a
sufficient stiffness to withstand :-
(1) Buckling or distortion in transit or storage.
(2) A hydrostatic head of 8 metres without distortion damage, leakage or

permeation.
(3) Grouting pressures.

Prior to grouting of the manhole liner at least 24 hours shall be allowed for
temperature equalization between the manhole structure and the reinforced
plastic liner.
The manufacturer shall provide shop drawings of the proposed top slab
liners prior to manufacture for approval.
The manufacturer shall stipulate the maximum deflection of the slab liner
permitted without causing surface cracking to the gel coat. The Contractor
must take care not to exceed this limit, and any surface cracking that occurs
will be repaired.
9.1.6 In-Situ Laminations
The Contractor shall apply either of the following systems of laminations to

renovate the manholes:
(1) Epoxy resin mortars and laminating systems.
(2) Lamination using glass chopped strand mats impregnated with

isophthalic resin and with vinylester resin.
(3) Bisphenol polyester resin with heavy duty glass cloth inclusion.
Epoxy Resin System
A mortar consisting of an epoxy resin and hardener shall be mixed with a

filler material to produce a thixotropic dense trowel suited mix.
The mortar shall be manually applied to all internal surfaces and left at least
15 minutes.
A minimum of 7 mm of GRP laminate shall then be applied in two layers.

The benching laminate shall be sealed on to the in-situ channel liner with an
approved compatible material. The top surface of the benching shall be
treated to produce a non-slip finish.
Isophthalic and Vinylester Resin System
Firstly the surface of the manhole walls and the surface of the cover slab
soft, benching and channel (concrete) shall be coated with isophthalic resin.
Three layers of 600 gm/m2 glass chopped strand mat shall then be applied
and impregnated with isophthalic resin to provide an approximate thickness
of 5 mm.
Next one layer of 600 gm/m2 and one layer of 300 gm/m2 glass chopped
strand mat shall be applied and impregnated with vinylester resin.
Following this two layers of glass veil shall be applied and impregnated with
vinylester resin.
Finally a coating of vinylester resin with paraffin wax shall be applied to
provide a total minimum thickness of 7 mm.

Bisphenol Polyester Resin with Heavy Duty Glass Cloth Inclusion System
All cleaned surfaces shall be primed with a polyester based primer to seal
the surface and aid the application of the lining.
The base coat of resin reinforced with filler shall be trowel applied to
approximately 1.5 mm thick. The reinforcing cloth shall be consolidated into
the first trowel coat with particular attention being paid to ensure that the
cloth is fully wetted out. This application shall be allowed to cure overnight
before applying the top coat of resin. This resin reinforced with the same
filler shall be troweled on and dressed with a rolling aid.
9.1.7 Epoxy Mortar
Where indicated on the drawings or specified to use epoxy mortar for

benching and channels in any manhole or any other structure such as
chambers, pump station wet-well, etc., they shall be formed to have a min. of
10 mm thickness of an approved epoxy-resin mortar system.
The epoxy mortar system shall be a trowellable, two component epoxy resin
system consisting of a prefilled base and unfilled reactor which when mixed
shall produce a high strength, impermeable and chemically resistant mortar.
The epoxy mortar system shall have excellent chemical resistance to sodium
chloride and sulphuric acid (shall pass the relevant chemical resistence test),
and shall have high impact resistance. Typical properties are given in the
following table:
Table 3-7. Properties of Two Component Epoxy Mortar
Property Test Method Limit

Sag at 10 mm thickness - None
Working Time ASTM C308 > 90 min. at 25°C
Full Cure at 25°C - 3 to 7 days
Setting Time at 25°C - 30 to 45 min.
Water Absorption ASTM C413 < 0.07 %
Compressive Strength BS 6319:Part 2 > 40 N/mm2 at 25°C,
7 days cure
Flexural Strength BS 6319:Part 3 > 3 N/mm2 at 25°C,
7 days cure
Tensile Strength BS 6319:Part 7 > 8 N/mm2
Bond Strength BS EN 12615:99 > 30 N/mm2
Density BS 6319:Part 1 1750 kg/m3
When placed on a concrete substrate the epoxy mortar system shall have
an adhesive strength of not less than the internal cohesive strength of
concrete.
To achieve the necessary adhesion to the substrate an epoxy primer
compatible for use with the mortar and the substrate shall be applied.

The epoxy mortar, or the primer where required, shall be suitable for
application onto a substrate with a moisture content of 4% or less as
measured by the "wet-check" Moisture Meter or other instruments approved
by the Engineer.
The pot-life of the mixed mortar shall not be less than one hour at the
temperature at the place of application at the time of mixing. The Engineer
may restrict application to such time as the ambient temperature is
sufficiently low for the specified pot-life to be ensured.
There shall be strict control of surface cleanliness between primer and epoxy
mortar and between coats of the same. Vacuum removal of dust and sand
shall be employed and water soluble contamination shall be removed as
specified above. Where dirt or dust has become trapped in the primed
surface it shall be removed with suitable abrasive paper. The surface being
primed shall be free of visible moisture throughout these operations.
The mortar manufacturer shall stipulate primer and epoxy re-coat intervals
for all curing temperatures likely to be encountered and these shall be
adopted with a maximum tolerance of +4 hours. Where this is exceeded the
surfaces to be re-coated shall be suitably abraded to remove gloss.
Mixing of the components shall be strictly in accordance with the

Manufacturer's recommendations and care shall be taken to avoid the
entrainment of air in the mixes.
Wet thickness gauge shall be used by the mortar applicators continually to

check that sufficient mortar is being applied to achieve the required dry
thickness.
9.1.8 Bituminous Emulsion
Bituminous emulsion shall be to the approved standard and shall not contain
less than 53 % of bitumen.
9.1.9 Waterproof Paper
Waterproof building paper shall be to the approved standard. For roadworks

it shall be Class B.
9.1.10 Protective Materials for Wrapping Pipeline Components
The protective materials for wrapping pipeline components shall comprise a

rust inhibiting compound for the bolts, a mastic or comparable filler which will
not harden for moulding over the assembly, and a waterproof tape for
wrapping.
9.1.11 Approved Paint Suppliers
The following paint systems have been successfully used in sewage

environments in Dubai. Reference to these systems in no way precludes the
use of similar or superior systems by other suppliers.
Supplier Paint System

1. Colebrand Limited Epoxy Prefabrication Primer: CXL 100

Colebrand House Epoxy Resin Solvent Free Coating : CXL 115
20 Warwick Street High Build Epoxy Airless Spray Coatings
Regent Street CXL 141 for temperate climates applications
London WIR 6BE CXL 140 for hot climates applications
England
2. Corroless International Corroless T

Limited
Berk House, Basings View Corroless Epoxy
Basingstoke
Hampshire RG 21 2HW
England
9.2 INSTALLATION OF PROTECTIVE COATINGS AND LINERS TO

CONCRETE
9.2.1 General
Concrete structures shall be protected both internally and externally where

indicated on the Drawings and by the methods detailed.
9.2.2 Protective Coatings/PVC Liners
All protection systems shall be applied strictly in accordance with the

manufacturer's instructions, two copies of which shall be included with the
Contractor's application for the approval of the material, and when approved
will be deemed to be part of this specification unless stated otherwise.
The permissible rate of permeation of all protection systems shall not exceed
0.0027 per inches (ASTM, 1 per inch = 1 gramme of water per hour per
square foot (0.0929 m2) per mil (0.0254 mm) of thickness for a 1 inch (25.4
mm) difference in Hg vapour pressure on each side of a membrane.
Coatings shall not be applied at expansion, contraction or construction joints

which incorporate a sealant.
(1) External Buried Surfaces
The external surfaces of concrete substructures shall be protected or

"tanked" by one of the following methods which will be indicated on the
Drawings.
a) An approved impervious bituminous waterproof membrane:
The membrane shall be tropical grade, cross laminated to have high tear
strength; and puncture and impact resistance and shall be chemically
resistant for protection against aggressive soils and contaminated
groundwater.

The membrane shall comply with the following :-
Property Test Method Typical Results
2
Tape Strength ASTM D638 Long 4.2 N/mm2
Trans 4.8 N/mm2
Tensile Strength ASTM D638 Long 42 N/mm2

Trans 48 N/mm2
Elongation Film ASTM D638 Long 210 %

Trans 160 %
2
Tear Resistance ASTM D1004 Long 340 N/mm22
Trans 310 N/mm2
Adhesion to Self Concrete ASTM D1000 1.8 N/mm2

2
Puncture Resistance ASTM E154 220 N 65 mm2
Water Resistance : ASTM D570

After 24 hours 0.14 %
After 35 days 0.95 %
Environmental Resistance ASTM D543 Conforms
2
Moisture Vapour ASTM E96 0.3 g/m2 /24 hrs.
Transmission Rate
The membrane shall be laid on to smooth concrete blinding surface free

from sharp edges and projections and on to walls primed with an approved
primer and applying the performed membrane, sticky side downwards, laid
strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. The minimum
over laps shall be 50 mm side and end.
During the backfilling operation around all tanked structures, the waterproof
membrane shall be protected from damage by the use of an approved
protection board. The board shall be manufactured from graded and
selected kork granules bound with modified bitumen and encased between
two layers of tough asphalt paper. The board shall be light weight and
capable of providing protection against abrasive backfilling. The board may
be stored outside, but shall be kept flat on original pallets.
b) A brush applied bituminous emulsion:
The surface shall first be wire brushed and all dust and loose scale removed.
Three coats of bituminous rubber emulsion paint shall then be applied. The
second coat shall not be the same colour as either the 1st or 3rd.
Both methods of protection shall totally enclose the substructure within a

waterproof membrane to the limits shown on the Drawings.
Water Proofing Membrance the following test shall be checked with Dubai
Centeral Laboratory;

1. Tensile Properties for Water Proofing Materials (Bitumen Sheet) BS EN

12311-1:2000
2. Low Temperature Flexibility of Modified Bituminous Sheet Material
(ASTM D5147 C-11:2002)
3. Compound Stability of Modified Bituminous Sheet Material (ASTM
D5147 C-15:2002)
4. Tensile-Tear Srength of Bituminous Water Proofing Material (ASTM
D4073:1994R98
(2) Internal and External Exposed Surfaces
Where exposed surfaces of concrete structures are not protected by

reinforced plastic liners one of the following systems will be indicated on the
Drawings where required.
a) An epoxy resin, acrylic, polyester or latex paint system:
The surface shall first be wire brushed and all dust and loose scale removed
(refer to Clause 19.4 for schedule of surface preparations). An epoxy resin
or other primer/sealer (for concrete and allied substrates) shall then be
applied followed by coats of high build epoxy airless spray or other coatings
to give a minimum dry film thickness (dft) of 300 microns. Freedom from
pinholes shall be established by use of a spark tester. The approved paint
system must have adequate flexibility to suit the thermal movements of the
concrete without cracking whilst maintaining an effective bond.
b) A PVC sheet lining system :
The PVC sheet lining shall be fixed such that the keys or ribs are cast into
the concrete surface. The lining shall be capable of taking up the same
profile as the concrete substrate as indicated on the Drawings.
Site operatives for employment on this work shall be certified by the

manufacturer as trained to a satisfactory standard in fixing and welding
techniques.
After completion of either of the linings or systems as described in sub-

clauses (a) and (b) above they shall be offered for inspection and testing.
Two sets of testing equipment, e.g. feeler probes and spark testing, shall be
provided and be maintained and available at all times for the sole use of the
Engineer's Representatives.
Only linings or systems completely free from pinholes will be accepted.
9.2.3 Reinforced Plastic Liners
The construction methods employed shall be so as to ensure that a

completely water and gastight seal is made preventing any exposure of the
concrete surround to the corrosive liquids and gases present as detailed
below .
In particular:-

Reinforced plastic liners shall be handled in the same manner as reinforced

plastic pipes. In addition, extra care shall be taken to avoid damage to the
liners which are not designed to carry loads.
The manufacturer shall visit the site to demonstrate to the Contractor in the
presence of the Engineer's Representative the methods of handling and
lifting, including formation of the joints between the chamber liner.
The Contractor is reminded that these liners are not designed to withstand
pressure exerted by the concrete during construction.
9.2.4 Cutting and Sealing of Reinforced Liners
Where the Contractor is required for any reason to cut reinforced plastic
liners, he shall seal the exposed ends with an approved resin before
incorporating the cut reinforced plastic in the work. No cut reinforced plastic
shall be used until the resin has cured.
The resin shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the reinforced

plastic item and shall be pigmented so that the areas where it has been
applied are easily identifiable.
It shall be delivered to site in sealed containers bearing the name of the

manufacturer and properly labelled as to its content and shelf life.
9.3 ODOR CONTROL FACILITIES
9.3.1 General
The Contractor shall provide the labor, materials and equipment necessary
to install and test the odor control facilities as shown on the Contract
Drawings and as specified herein. The odor control units shall be either of
the activated carbon filter types or of the natural soil filter bed types as
indicated in the Drawings.
9.3.2 Soil Moisture and pH Probes
Moisture and pH probes shall be able to continuously measure percent

moisture and pH in the soil. All components shall be highly resistant to
corrosion due to sewage and very high concentration of hydrogen sulfide
and other gases. Soil moisture probes shall measure moisture on a
percentage basis in the full range of soil moisture (0-100 percent). pH
probes shall at a minimum be accurate within the 4-10 standard unit range.
All probes shall be designed for maintenance and replacement with
minimum soil disturbance.
9.3.3 Activated Carbon Odor Control Filter
The activated carbon odor control filter shall be furnished and installed in
accordance with Clause 20.3. The air blowers for the odor control unit shall
be as specified in Clause 20.3.
9.3.4 Natural Soil Odor Control Filter
9.3.4.1 Materials

HDPE (High Density Polyethylene) Liner
The HDPE liner shall be furnished and installed in accordance with Clauses
19.3.4 and 19.2.13 and as shown on the Contract Drawings.
Washed Stone
Stone for the air plenum shall be washed, rounded, uncrushed, well graded
in size from 20 mm to 25 mm and consisting of clean, and durable particles
free from dirt, vegetation or other objectionable matter and free from an
excess of soft, thin elongated, laminated or disintegrated pieces. The
Contractor shall submit a sample of the stone to the Engineer for approval
prior to placement.
Wood Chips
Wood chips shall be obtainefrom hardwood and shall be of 10 mm to 50 mm

diameter. Not more than 2 percent shall consist of leaves, twigs or shavings.
They shall be free of extraneous materials, stone and debris. The Contractor
shall submit a wood chip sample to the Engineer for approval prior to
placement.
Soil Filter
The soil filter shall be a mixture of approved natural sand or sandy loam and
treated compost. The compacted soil/compost mix shall have a 50 percent
porosity. The compost shall be a product of thermophilic aerobic
stabilization. It shall be adequately stabilized, so as to be completely free of
any odors. The compost shall be friable, pass through a 13 mm mesh
screen, and be free of stones, stocks and all objectionable debris. Compost
shall have a pH of 5.5 to 8.0 and no less than 25 percent volatile solids. The
compost source is subject to the review of the Engineer. All compost shall be
"cured" to the point that it is no longer self heating.
9.3.4.2 Installation
The Contractor shall place the stone, wood chips, soil and compost in layers
of uniform thickness as indicated on the Contract Drawing(s) or as directed
by the Engineer. The stone, wood ships, soil and compost shall be placed so
as not to damage the aeration piping. Damaged piping is to be replaced by
the Contractor at no additional cost to the owner.
9.3.4.3 Monitoring
The Contractor shall perform the following selected soil and atmospheric
analyses at the direction of the Engineer, but not more than once per week
with the exception of soil moisture and pH, for the length of the natural soil
filter maintenance period. The results of the analyses shall be recorded and
presented to the Engineer at the end of each month. Soil samples must be
taken so as not to disrupt the even distribution of air through the odor control
filter.
Atmospheric Hydrogen Sulfide

Hydrogen sulfide (H2S) gas concentrations shall be measured in the

atmosphere directly over the filter bed with a probe placed immediately
above the surface of the natural soil filter. The H2S levels shall be monitored
and recorded continuously.
Soil Moisture and pH
Soil moisture and pH shall be monitored and recorded continuously at a

depth of 0.75 meters from the natural soil filter surface using the soil
moisture and pH probes as specified in Clause 9.3.2.
Chlorides, Sulfides and Biological Analysis
Chloride and sulfide concentration shall be measured from soil sample

collected at a depth of approximately 0.75 meter from the natural soil filter
surface. A biological analysis shall be performed on the same soil samples
to identify biological organism in the filter media. The samples for these
analyses shall be taken once per month unless otherwise directed by the
Engineer.
9.3.4.4 Maintenance
Where excessive settling or discontinuities have occurred in the soil filter

media, the Contractor shall replace the entire soil/compost media or add
additional soil/compost mixture at the direction of the Engineer.
9.3.4.5 Acceptance Test
The Contractor shall test the porosity of the compacted soil/compost mixture
before placement and provide the results of the test to the Engineer.

SECTION 10: - BUILDING SPECIFICATIONS
10.1 CONCRETE
10.1.1 Tolerance
Floor and roof slabs shall be level to a point within ± 5 mm of the level
shown on the drawings. Columns and beams shall have no irregularities
exceeding 3 mm in a 3m length. The position of the face of columns, beams
and walls at any point shall be within 5 mm of its position derived from the
drawings.
10.1.2 Concrete Finish
All exposed concrete beams, columns and slab surface described as fair-
faced shall be Type f.f. as follows: -
Type f.f. shall be an as struck finish entirely free from honeycombing, stains,
pins, clippings, lining joint marks, nail and screw marks, raised grain marks,
air holes and surface defects and shall be uniform in colour tone and surface
texture with clean true faces and arises.
10.1.3 Construction Bays
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval prior to
concreting his proposals for the sequence of placing concrete and the
position of horizontal and vertical construction joints.
10.1.4 Small Pre-cast Items
Small pre-cast items such as lintels, sills and padstones shall be built in as
the work proceeds and have a fair-faced Type f.f. finish where exposed to
view and hacked surfaces where plastered.
Lintels shall have a minimum bearing of 100 mm or larger if indicated on the

drawings and shall have inserts for fixing windows and/or doors cast-in.
Sills shall be weathered and have a throat as described, if projecting, and

shall have inserts for fixing windows and/or doors cast-in.
10.1.5 Cast-in Fixings
Cast-in fixings shall be securely fixed to formwork ready for casting and shall
be true to line in the positions shown on the drawings.
10.1.6 Timber Cast-in Fixings
Timber cast-in fixings shall be made from 38 mm x 38 mm dovetailed

shaped softwood battens pressure impregnated with preservative.

10.2 BRICKWORK AND BLOCK WORK
All Bricks & Blocks Works shall conform to RTA/DM Local Order No.
44/1990.
10.2.1 Damp-Proof Course
Horizontal and vertical damp-proof courses shall be hessian based lead

cored bituminous damp-proof course weighing not less than 4.4 kg/m2 to
accepted standards and approved by the Engineer.
Horizontal damp-proof courses shall be laid on an even level bed of fresh

mortar and shall be lapped for the full width of the sheet at corners and
junctions. Stepped damp-proof courses shall be wide enough to be built in to
both skins of the wall and to cross the cavity in one piece.
Vertical damp-proof courses shall be continuous and shall be the width of

the block closing the reveal.
Damp-proof courses shall not be bridged with mortar.
10.2.2 Wall Ties
Wall ties shall be 18/8 stainless steel vertical twist type 200 mm long.
Wall ties shall be built in the mortar beds as the work proceeds and shall be
spaced at a maximum of 900 mm horizontally and 450 mm vertically and
shall be staggered. Each door and window opening shall have wall ties at
each joint at 225 mm centres vertically.
10.2.3 Door and Window Frame Ties
As described for Joinery Fixing Accessories. Door and window frame ties
shall be fixed as described under Joinery Work.
10.2.4 Mastic
Mastic for pointing door and window frames shall be one part gun-grade
polysulphide mastic to accepted standards and approved by the Engineer.
Mastic seals to windows or door frames shall be neatly gun applied to clean,
solid and dry backgrounds in one operation. The mastic shall be a triangular
seal across the whole joint and any surplus shall be cleaned off when set.
10.2.5 Brickwork and Blockwork
Brickwork and blockwork shall be as specified in Section 5.
10.2.6 Cement Mortar
Cement Mortar shall be as specified in Section 5.

10.2.7 Pointing
All pointing shall be done as the work proceeds and shall be flush with face
of blockwork.
10.2.8 Hollow Walls
Hollow walls shall be constructed with an outer skin of blockwork and an

inner skin of blockwork leaving a cavity of the widths shown. The two walls
shall be tied together with wall ties as described and the cavity shall be kept
and left clear of all droppings. Openings shall be left at intervals in the
blockwork at the bottom of the cavities and all debris shall be cleared out
and the openings bricked up on completion. Cavities shall be closed at
opening reveals with either brick or block to match the surrounding material
and a continuous vertical damp-proof course shall be built in.
10.3 ROOFING
10.3.1 Roof Screed
Roof screed shall be laid to fall over the concrete roof slab and have a
minimum thickness of 35 mm and maximum thickness of 75 mm. The screed
shall be thoroughly mixed 1:4 cement/sharp sand mix with very little water
added. The screed shall be laid and compacted and shall be levelled off and
finished with a steel trowel. Precautions must be taken to prevent rapid or
excessive drying out.
10.3.2 Roof Primer
Primer for concrete shall be suitable for use with the waterproofing
membrane and shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
10.3.3 Waterproofing Membrane
Flexible waterproofing membrane for roofing shall be bitumen based to

accepted standards and approved by the Engineer.
Surfaces to receive the membrane shall be smooth, dry and free from dust.
The membrane shall be laid on a primed surface and in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
10.3.4 Roof Insulation
Roof insulation shall be 75mm thick closed cell non-absorbent rigid

polystyrene insulation board. The insulation boards shall be placed
immediately after the membrane has been laid.
10.3.5 Roof Surface
Roof surface shall be 50 mm thick 450 mm x 450 mm precast concrete

paving slabs laid dry.

10.3.6 Roof Decking
The roof decking shall be aluminium profiled sandwich sheeting fixed to

Metsec ‘Z’ section purlins all in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions. The Contractor shall provide working drawings and
manufacturer’s literature for approval before ordering the same.
10.3.7 Fascia Cladding
The fascia cladding shall be of single skin construction formed from profiled
aluminium sheeting with matching aluminium profiled flashings. The
Contractor shall provide working drawings and manufacturer’s literature for
approval before ordering the same.
10.4 JOINERY
10.4.1 Timber-General
Timber for joinery shall be air dried and the moisture content be allowed to
reduce until it reaches a level in equilibrium with local conditions. It will be
deemed to have reached equilibrium when the moisture content is 12% +
2%.
10.4.2 Timber Sizes
Timber shall be 3 mm less per wrought or finished face than the sawn size.
10.4.3 Hardwood
Hardwood for joinery shall be sound, well conditioned and seasoned

3
Mahogany or Meranti with an average density of 529 Kg/m and a moisture
content of 12% + 2%. Exposed surfaces of joinery shall comply with the
following requirements.
Knots : Pin knots up to 6 mm diameter will be

permitted.
Checks & Shakes : Checks up to 3 mm width and 300 mm long

will be permitted.
Pitch Pockets : Not permitted unless cut out and filled.
Plugs and Inserts : Not permitted.
Joints and Lamination

Glue Lines : Not permitted.
Rate of Growth : Not fewer that 8 growth rings per 25 mm at

any point on any cross section.
Slope of Grain : Not greater than 1 in 8.
Species & Character : Same on all surfaces and matched as far as

possible.

Pinholes : Permitted if filled.
A sample of each representative section for use in the work shall be

previously submitted for approval by the Engineer's Representative.
10.4.4 Timber Fixing Accessories
Nails for fixing joinery shall be aluminium or sheradised mild steel.
Screws for fixing joinery shall be sheradised mild steel.
Bolts shall be stainless steel.
Adhesives for exterior use shall be synthetic resin types, weather and
boil-proof, complying with the approved standard. Adhesives for interior use
shall be synthetic resin types, moisture resistant and moderately weather
resistant, complying with the approved standard.
Door frame and lining fixing cramps shall be of 25 mm wide x 14 swg thick x
250 mm girth stainless steel, one end turned up 50 mm and twice drilled and
the end fishtailed for building-in.
Dowels for fixing door frames shall be 10 mm dia. x 100 mm long stainless
steel.
10.4.5 Timber Preservative
Timber preservative shall be water repellent and protect the timber from all
wood destroying fungi and insects particularly termites. The preservative
shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions including
treatment to all ends, notches and joints in treated timber out on site.
10.4.6 Ironmongery
Ironmongery shall be as shown on the drawings.
10.4.7 Workmanship
All exposed faces of joiners work shall have wrought faces.
All arises shall be rounded to a 1.5 mm minimum radius unless specified or

drawn to a greater radius.
Where the term 'framing or framed' is used it shall mean all halvings,
dovetails, tenons and hardwood pins and the best known means of putting
this work together.

10.4.8 Storage
All joinery shall be protected from the weather during transit and shall be
stored under cover, clear of the ground in clean, dry ventilated conditions so
as to maintain the specified moisture content.
All framework shall be put together loosely and stored as described and
shall not be wedged and glued together until required for fixing.
10.4.9 Door Frames
External door frames shall be built-in as work proceeds with fixing cramps as
described. The fixing cramps shall be screwed to the back of the frames at
450 mm maximum centres with two sheradised screws 25 mm long. The
fishtail ends shall be built-in to the brickwork or blockwork mortar joints as
the work proceeds.
10.4.10 Doors
External doors shall be hung on one and a half pairs of hinges unless
otherwise detailed, to give a maximum tolerance all round of 2 mm.
10.5 METALWORK
10.5.1 Aluminium
Aluminium alloy sections for aluminium shall be type H59 TF box sections.
10.5.2 Aluminium Louvers
Aluminium louvers shall be made from NS 4 H3 aluminium and have a

natural or bronze anodised finish. Sizes to be as shown on the drawings.
10.5.3 Aluminium Windows
Aluminium windows shall be manufactured by an approved specialist

window manufacturer from extruded aluminium sections mechanically
cleated and sealed. Glazing to be fixed into opening with clip on aluminium
beads and gasket sealed.
Finish to windows to be natural anodised 25 microns in thickness. Windows

are to be fixed into openings with stainless steel screws and sealed all round
in mastic bedding.
10.5.4 Ironmongery
Rates for supplying and fixing ironmongery shall include for all boring,
cutting, mortising, sinking, making good, replacing damaged screws, oiling,
adjusting, leaving in good working order and mastering all locks.
Screws shall be of suitable gauge and material for the purpose and shall
match the item to be fixed.

10.6 PLUMBING
10.6.1 Copper Tubes
Copper tubes shall be half hard copper tube of accepted standard approved
by the Engineer.
10.6.2 Copper Fittings, Waste Pipes, Ball Valves etc.
All fittings shall be of an accepted standard approved by the Engineer and

as described on the drawings.
10.6.3 uPVC Pressure Pipes and Fittings
uPVC pressure pipes and fittings for water supply shall be of an accepted
standard approved by the Engineer.
10.6.4 Workmanship
The plumbing installation shall be carried out to the satisfaction and in

accordance with the Acts and By-laws of the Dubai Electricity and Water
Authority.
10.6.5 Pipework
All pipework shall be neatly executed in long lengths to avoid unnecessary

jointing. Horizontal pipes shall be fixed with a slight fall to prevent airlocks
and to enable the system to be easily drained down.
10.6.6 Copper Tube Fixing
Copper tube shall be fixed clear of walls and ceilings with two piece copper
spacing clips or with proprietary plastic pipe clips. Clips shall be at 1.20m
horizontally and 1.50m vertically for 15mm diameter pipes and at 1.80m and
2.40m respectively for 22mm and 28mm diameter pipes. Capillary joints
shall be neatly made with all surplus solder removed.
Screw threads on compression joints shall be wrapped with PTFE tape prior
to tightening.
10.6.7 Waste Pipes
uPVC waste pipes for sinks and urinals shall be fixed and jointed in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Fixing clips shall be at
0.50m horizontally and 1.20 m vertically and joints shall be by 'O' rings, seals
or solvent cement. Care shall be taken to allow for expansion in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions.
10.6.8 Sleeves
uPVC sleeves shall be provided through walls and ceilings for pipes and
shall be internally 3 mm minimum larger than the pipes.

10.6.9 Testing
Soil and waste pipes shall be air tested for leaks to a pressure of 38 mm
water gauge, constant for three minutes.
Rainwater pipes shall be tested for leaks as above and gutters shall be
tested by filling with water to overflow level.
Testing shall be undertaken to hidden sections of pipework before they are

built-in.
All leaks found shall be rectified and retested.
10.6.10 Storage Tanks
GRP cold water storage tanks shall be placed on 2 nos. galvanised mild
steel brackets bolted to the wall.
10.7 PLASTERWORK & OTHER WALL, FLOOR & CEILING FINISHES
10.7.1 Cement
Cement shall be Portland Cement as described in Section 3.
10.7.2 Lime
Lime shall be the hydrated type to the approved standard.
10.7.3 Sand
Sand for plasterwork with gypsum plasters shall be suitable for use with the
brand of gypsum plaster used. Sand for rendering, internally and externally,
and floor screeds shall comply with Clause 5.1.3.
10.7.4 Gypsum Plasters
Gypsum plaster shall be of an accepted standard approved by the Engineer.
10.7.5 Plaster Trims
Metal angle beads and plaster stops for plasterwork and plasterboard shall
be manufactured from galvanised mild steel.
10.7.6 Metal Lathing
Metal lathing shall be manufactured from galvanised mild steel having a

minimum short way aperture of 6 mm.
10.7.7 Plasticizers
Plasticizers shall be an approved vinyl resin type and used in the manner
and proportions recommended by the manufacturer.

10.7.8 Bonding Agents
Bonding agents generally shall be an approved polyvinyl acetate (PVA) type

and used in the manner and proportions recommended by the manufacturer.
10.7.9 Storage
Plaster shall be stored in a building in dry condition on timber platforms and

shall be used within two months of manufacture.
Plasterboards shall be stored in a building in dry condition and shall be laid

flat and stacked on a sheet of polythene.
10.7.10 Floor Tiles
Vitrified and fully vitrified floor tiles shall be as detailed on the drawings.
Floor tiling shall be laid with a proprietary tile adhesive (approved by the
Engineer) either directly onto a clean, dry and level concrete sub-floor, or on
a cement/sand screed laid over the sub-floor. The sub-floor surface shall be
scabbled to remove all surface laitance prior to tiling or screeding. The
screed shall be mixed semi-dry by hand or in a pan mixer and shall be a 1:4
cement/sharp sand mix with just enough water to enable it to hold together
when squeezed in the hand. The sub-floor shall be kept damp for 24 hours
and the screed shall be laid and well compacted to a thickness of 56mm and
brought to the required levels using a draw float. The finished floor screed
shall be kept damp for a period of 7 days prior to commencement of tiling.
The tile adhesive shall be spread evenly by steel trowel to a thickness of
3mm onto which the clean, dry tiles shall be laid to give a 3mm minimum
joint width. The tiles shall be grouted with a proprietary and approved tile
grout within a minimum period of 24 hours after laying.
10.7.11 Wall Tiles (Internal)
Coloured wall tiles shall be 152 x 152 x 5.5mm thick glazed tiles approved
by the Engineer.
10.7.12 Wall Tiles (External)
External wall tiles shall be as detailed on the drawings.
The concrete surface to receive tiling shall be prepared as follows:-
1) Concrete surface to be 100% keyed by either bush hammering, hacking

or water scabbling of smooth surface.
2) Concrete surface shall be thoroughly moistened and a concrete slurry

mix of one part cement to two parts of medium sharp sand applied as
splatterdash thrown onto concrete surface.
3) While the surface is wet apply 1:3.5 mix sand/cement render to a

thickness of 12mm in two coats to a plumb and level finish and with
wood float finish.

The completed rendering is to be protected and allowed to dry slowly with

damping as necessary. After curing, the surface is to be allowed to dry
completely before the fixing of tiles.
Tiles shall be fixed with proprietary tile adhesive (approved by the Engineer).
The tiles are to be bedded strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions with 10mm joints between tiles.
At least 24 hours after fixing tiles are to be jointed using approved mortar.
Movement joints are to be formed between tiles in positions shown on the

drawings to the full depth of the tiles, bedding and render. Joints are to be
10mm wide and are to be filled to within 8mm of surface with inert filler and
finished with 2 part polysulphide pointing in colour to match tile jointing.
10.7.13 Tile Adhesive
Tile adhesive for floor and wall tiling shall be as recommended by the Tile
Manufacturer and used in accordance with the adhesive manufacturer's
instructions.
10.7.14 Tile Grout
Tile grout for floor or wall tiles shall be as recommended by the

manufacturers of the ceramic tiles and used in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
10.7.15 Expansion Joints
Expansion joints in floor and wall tiling shall be 6.5 mm wide Polyethylene
backing strip with 6.5 mm wide approved silicone sealant, gun applied on the
face in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Expansion joints in floor tiling shall be at 6 m maximum centres in both

directions and around the perimeter of rooms, over structural joints and
around machine bases and holes in the floor. The joints shall be the full
depth of the floor tiles, bedding and screed x 6.5 mm minimum width. The
joints shall be primed with two coats of approved primer and when dry, filled
up to within 6 mm of the tile finish with polyethylene compressible foam strip.
An approved joint sealant shall then be gun applied and tooled to a slightly
concave smooth even finish.
10.7.16 Backgrounds
All backgrounds shall be clean, dry, free from efflorescence, paint, oil and
dust and adequately prepared to provide a good key. All loose, flaking and
unsound material shall be completely removed and all mortar joints shall be
raked out, if required, to a minimum depth of 10 mm. Concrete surfaces shall
be well wetted five minutes prior to plastering or rendering.

10.7.17 Dissimilar Materials

Joints between dissimilar materials such as blockwork and concrete shall be
covered with a 300 mm wide continuous strip of expanded metal lathing
fixed to both sides with masonry nails or plugs and screws at 200 mm
centres.
10.7.18 Hacking
Concrete surfaces shall be well hacked to expose the aggregate thus

providing a firm coarse textured background.
10.7.19 Dubbing Out
Dubbing out of all areas to receive plaster or render shall be in the same mix
as the subsequent coat, not exceeding 10 mm thickness in one application,
and shall be allowed to harden.
10.7.20 Splatterdash or Stipple Coat
Splatterdash or stipple coats shall consist of 1:1.5 cement/sharp sand mixed

with 50% water/50% PVA bonding agent to form a thick slurry. The mixture
shall be vigorously brushed onto the background and stippled to give a close
textured key. The resulting finish shall be kept damp to prevent rapid drying
out and allowed to harden for seven days minimum before subsequent coats
are applied.
10.7.21 Internal Finishes-General
All internal finishes shall not commence until the building is watertight,
including glazing, and reasonably dried out.
10.7.22 Internal Render
Internal render shall be applied to concrete blocks as follows :-
The render shall be two coat work comprising a stipple coat as described
previously and a finishing coat giving a maximum thickness of 12 mm. The
mix shall be in the proportion 1:1:6 cement/lime/sand. The render shall be
kept damp for a minimum of three days. All window and door openings must
be closed to prevent through draughts causing rapid drying out.
10.7.23 Stucco
A PVA copolymer based putty for concrete and plaster shall be applied, in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, to the surface of the
internal render after curing has taken place. The stucco shall only be applied
in sufficient thickness to seal the surface of the render and remove minor
surface irregularities to give a smooth surface ready to receive the
decorative finish.

10.7.24 External Render
External render shall be applied to concrete, concrete blocks and clay bricks
as follows :-
The render shall be three coat work comprising a stipple coat as described
previously, an undercoat and a finish coat giving a maximum thickness of 16
mm. The mixes shall be in the proportions shown on the schedule of mixes.
The undercoat shall be level, true and of sufficient thickness to prevent the
background joints showing through and shall be kept damp for three days
before applying the final coat.
Where shown on the drawings the final coat shall be approximately 5 mm

thick coloured Tyrolean open honeycombed texture machine applied render.
A key for the final coat shall be provided by combing the undercoat prior to
setting with wavy lines 20 mm apart and 5 mm deep. The final coat shall be
6 mm minimum thickness and worked to a level and smooth finish with a
wooden float with clean, true and level arises. The whole shall be protected
from rapid drying out in hot, dry and windy weather.
Table 10-1. Schedule of Mixes for External Render
Concrete,Concrete Blocks Aerated Concrete Blocks

Mix Type or Engineering Bricks of Soft Clay Bricks
Undercoat Finish Undercoat Finish
Cement:Lime:Sand 1:1.5:4 1:1:5 1:2:8 1:2:8

to 4.5 to 6 to 9 to 9
Cement:Ready-Mixed 1:4 1:5 1:8 1:8
Lime / Sand to 4.5 to 6 to 9 to 9
Cement:Sand with 1:3 1:5 1:7 1:7
Plasticizers to 4 to 6 to 8 to 8
10.8 GLAZING
10.8.1 Glass
Glass for glazing shall be the best of its respective kind and free from
blemishes and imperfections. Glass shall be as shown on the drawings.
10.8.2 Bedding Compound
The bedding compound for external glazing shall be an approved non-

setting butyl rubber based proprietary compound and sufficiently elastic to
allow for thermal or other movement of the glass and timber, compatible with
the approved decorative wood stain.
The bedding compound shall show no sign of separation after bedding.

10.9 PAINTING AND DECORATING
10.9.1 Painting-General
All primers, oil bound undercoats and finishes, emulsions and polyurethane
interior varnishes shall be used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and shall be obtained from an approved manufacturer.
Only fresh paint delivered to site in original sealed containers shall be used.
Each container shall be labelled with the manufacturer's name, contents,
colour, quantity, batch number and date and instruction on method of
application.
10.9.2 Exterior Stain
Pigmented stain shall be PX 65 as manufactured by Sadolin's Ltd., and used

in accordance with their recommendations, or other equal and approved, two
coats before fixing and one coat after fixing.
10.9.3 Workmanship
All painting shall be carefully executed with clean brushes and in the best
manner and applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
All paints, stains and varnishes shall be well stirred before use and thinned
only in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Painting of exterior work shall not be carried out in wet, dusty or foggy
weather and interior work shall not proceed in dusty conditions.
All woodwork shall be prepared to a fine clean finish by scraping or sanding

all made dust free immediately before painting and coating.
10.9.4 Stopping to Plaster
Plaster shall be clean and dry and free from loose material. Holes and
cracks shall be cut back and solidly filled, allowed to dry and rubbed down
smooth.
10.9.5 Steel Priming
Mild steel shall be blast cleaned and primed with two coats of primer within
four hours of cleaning.
Galvanised mild steel shall be degreased with white spirit and primed with
two coats of primer.
10.9.6 Oil-Based Paint
Interior primed softwood and all primed mild steel shall be painted with two
undercoats and one gloss or semi-matt finish coat of oil-based paint to give
a smooth, even and solid finish, all as instructed. Each coat shall dry
overnight before applying further coats.

10.9.7 Internal Finish to Walls
The paint finish to internal walls shall be PVA copolymer matt emulsion paint
or as detailed on the drawings.
10.9.8 Ironmongery
All fixed ironmongery except hinges shall be removed before painting and
refixed on completion.

SECTION 12 - SAFETY PROCEDURES
12.1 GENERAL
The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety of personnel and the
public during the contract period and compliance with safety requirements
stated herein shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility or liability
under the Contract.
Prior to the commencement of the Works, the Contractor shall submit a

safety policy for the Contract detailing all proposed specific safety
arrangements for the agreement of the Engineer. This shall include but not
be limited to the requirements set out in this section.
If at any time safety requirements are not being met by the Contractor, the
Engineer shall have the right to instruct the Contractor on the necessary
safety provisions and the Contractor shall comply with such instructions
forthwith.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer immediately of any accident that
occurs whether on or off site in which the Contractor is directly involved
which results in any injury to any person whether directly concerned with the
site or whether a third party. Such initial notification may be verbal and shall
be followed by a written comprehensive report within 24 hours of the
accident.
12.2 FAMILIARISATION WITH SAFETY PROBLEMS
The Contractor shall make himself familiar with the condition of the site
before tendering in order to assess the nature of safety problems he is likely
to encounter and the safety requirements.
12.3 SAFETY OFFICER
The Contractor shall appoint a Safety Officer who shall be responsible for all
aspects of safety. He shall be conversant with and experienced in all general
civil engineering construction and sewer safety techniques and emergency
procedures, and shall be on site at all times operatives are working. He shall
enforce and supervise the safety procedures at all places of works and make
sure that adequate safety equipment, required under Clause 12.5, is
available in good working condition and at all places of works at the time
works are on-going.
The Safety Officer shall also be responsible for organizing, implementing

and maintaining any road closures, traffic diversions, removal of parked cars
causing an obstruction, etc., in adequate time to ensure compliance with the
Contract programme.
12.4 SAFE WORKING CONDITIONS AT THE SITE
The Contractor shall provide Method Statements detailing proposed safe

methods of work with the Tender. The methods should generally follow the
recommendations of the following publications :

1) Code of Construction Safety Practice as published by the Dubai

Municipality.
2) Administrative Order No. 330 in connection with Safety Manual of

Dubai Municipality.
3) Health and Safety Guideline No. 2, Safe Working in Sewers and at

Sewage Works as published in the United Kingdom.
Accident procedures and emergency procedures shall be fully detailed.
No persons shall be allowed to enter a confined space until the safe

methods of work have been agreed upon and fully implemented to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
12.5 SAFETY EQUIPMENT
The Contractor shall make sure, prior to commencement of works on site,

that adequate safety equipment, apparatus and devices are available, and
that as a minimum the following equipment and devices are available at
each entry point to a confined space:-
Type of Equipment No. Required

a. Safety harness and ropes 2
b. Lifting frame and tackle for safety harness 1
c. Gas detector (suitable for H 2 S) 2
d. Approved mechanical air blower and power supply 1
e. Emergency breathing apparatus 2
f. Atmosphere monitoring device, capable of monitoring 1
oxygen levels, and levels of toxic and flammable gas
g. Washing facilities with disinfectants, toiletries As Required
h. Communication facilities As Required
i. Lighting (explosion proof) As Required
All personnel working on, visiting or inspecting any part of the Works shall be
provided with and be required to wear appropriate protective clothing or
apparatus.
This may include:-
Safety helmets, coats, gloves, footwear, goggles, ear muffs, breathing

apparatus and any other protective apparel or any other equipment deemed
necessary by the Engineer.
Every hoist, lift, sling, chain, rope, pulley block and any other lifting tackle,
used in the Works shall be thoroughly examined by a competent person at
least once every 6 months and shall be test loaded to 150% of the safe
working load and shall then be tagged with the safe working load and the
date of successful testing by an authorised testing authority.

All parts and working gear whether fixed or movable, including the anchoring
and fixing appliances of every crane and lifting machine shall be of good
construction, sound material, adequate strength and shall be properly
maintained. All parts and gear shall be examined at least once every twelve
months.
A register of all such equipment and examinations shall be kept up to date

by the Contractor and be available for inspection by the Engineer.
12.6 SAFETY PROCEDURES
12.6.1 General
All excavation shall be adequately supported against collapse and provided

with protective safety barriers and appropriate warning signs and bunting.
Suitable and sufficient scaffolds shall be provided and properly maintained

for all work that cannot safely be carried out from the ground or from part of
the structure or from a ladder. Every scaffold shall be of good construction,
of suitable and sound material and of adequate strength for the purpose for
which it is used. Unless designed as an independent structure, every
scaffold shall be rigidly connected to a part of the structure which is of
sufficent strength to afford safe support. Protective headgear shall always
be worn.
All manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations for the use,

application, erection or construction of any material or item of equipment or
plant shall be followed precisely.
Special care shall be taken to protect all employees when using power tools
or materials which will produce a fine dust and in particular all asbestos
based products. The operator should stand upwind of the operation and
wear an approved respirator and goggles. Wherever possible overalls
should be worn and should consist of 60% polyester fibre and 40% cotton.
Transportation of any material by the Contractor shall be in suitable vehicles

which when loaded do not cause spillage and all loads shall be suitably
secured. The Engineer shall have the right to instruct the withdrawal from
the site of any vehicle which does not comply with these requirements or any
of the Dubai or UAE traffic regulations and laws.
The Contractor shall adopt the safety procedures as proposed by him as per
Clause 12.4 for entry into a manhole or other confined space. However, the
following safety procedures are outlined as a guide only. The Contractor
shall, where appropriate, use these procedures in addition to his proposed
procedures while entering into a manhole or a confined space. Also included
are additional information on safety procedures for manhole entry in
Appendix 3 contained in Part 3 of 3 of these Specifications for his guidance
and use where appropriate.
It shall be explicitly understood that safety is the responsibility of the

Contractor and use of any of these procedures as outlined under this clause
or in Appendix 3 shall not relieve him of any of his contractual
responsibilities.

a) The manhole or confined space shall be thoroughly vented by

mechanical air blower prior to entry.
b) A full gas check is to be undertaken prior to entry. If the level of toxic or

explosive gases is above the safe level (maximum acceptable for
hydrogen sulphide is 10 ppm) or the level of oxygen is below a safe level
(18%) then entry is not permitted without the use of full breathing
apparatus.
c) All persons entering a manhole or a confined space shall wear a safety

harness properly rigged to the lifting frame.
d) The mechanical air blower shall be kept close by the manhole or

confined space which has been entered.
e) The hydrogen sulphide level in the manhole or confined space shall be

continuously monitored. If the level rises above 10 ppm then the
manhole or confined space shall be evacuated immediately.
f) At least two people shall be available close to the point of entry to

operate the air blower and lifting tackle in the event of an emergency and
who shall note the location of the nearest telephone in working order and
the telephone number of the nearest hospital before entry is permitted.
g) No smoking shall be permitted and ‘no spark’ tools shall be used.
12.6.2 Atmosphere Monitoring
When any person is in a confined space, the atmosphere at the work place
and at the base of the access manhole or pit shall be continuously monitored
by a Monitoring Device to detect oxygen deficiency, flammable gas and toxic
gases. The monitoring equipment shall be designed to be lowered into the
work place or access manhole and shall not depend on a sample draw tube
from the surface. The monitoring equipment shall be the first piece of
equipment to be lowered into the place of work and shall be the last piece of
equipment removed.
The Contractor shall provide, maintain and calibrate the approved monitoring
equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. The
Contractor shall provide adequate numbers of monitoring devices to fully
cover all proposed work places and open manholes or access pits with
adequate spare devices, parts and batteries as needed to ensure complete
monitoring of all sites of work at all times throughout the construction period.
No entry into a confined space shall be allowed until the monitoring devices
have been properly placed at the work place or access site and the readings
indicate that the atmosphere is safe. Operatives are to be fully trained in the
use of the monitoring equipment and in the necessary response to alarm
conditions.
12.6.3 Atmosphere Ventilation
Before any person is allowed to enter a confined space, the atmosphere

shall be adequately ventilated. As a minimum, both ends of the sewer
section or work place shall be opened to the atmosphere either by removing

the manhole covers or through open access pits. Positive ventilation shall be
provided at all times when a person is in a confined space, even if the
atmosphere monitoring equipment indicates that the atmosphere is safe for
access.
12.6.4 Safety Harness
Each person entering a confined space shall wear a harness at all times.
The harness shall be designed such that it will enable an unconscious
person to be lifted to the surface in a vertical posture.
12.6.5 Emergency Breathing Apparatus
Each person in a confined space shall have emergency breathing apparatus

available and ready for use within the confined space. The breathing
apparatus shall have a minimum capacity of 2 litres and a working pressure
of 0.2 bar and shall be tested daily, prior to starting work.
12.6.6 Active Confined Space Entry
Before any person is allowed to enter a confined space that is in active

service, the Contractor shall ascertain the schedule of sewage flows which
can be anticipated over the duration of the work. This shall include average
and peak gravity sewage flows and the discharge flows from all upstream
pumping stations. Should the combined gravity and pumped flows exceed
safe working conditions at the work place, then the Contractor shall prepare
a plan for the control and diversion of flows around or away from the work
place. The method of flow diversion shall be as approved by the Engineer
and by the Dubai Municipality. A "permit to work" system shall be employed
for work on sewers where incoming flows (from pumping or diversion) are
controlled by people remote from the work site.
12.6.7 Washing Facilities
Every work place where persons are entering a confined space, shall be
provided with facilities for washing.
12.6.8 Communication
The Contractor shall provide a means of communication, appropriate to the

safe system of work, between ground level and any work place within the
confined space.
12.6.9 Lighting
When permanent works are being constructed or inspected, the confined

space shall be adequately lit. The lighting apparatus shall operate at a
voltage not exceeding 50 Volts. The circuit shall be protected against
overload. No transformers, switches, fuses, contact breakers, etc., shall be
taken into the confined space. Bulbs shall be protected against damage.
12.7 TRAFFIC CONTROL

Prior to initiating any work at a site, the Contractor shall prepare, for the
approval of the Engineer, a plan for the diversion and control of traffic
around the work site. The approved traffic control plan shall be submitted to
the Roads and Transport Authority (RTA) - Roads Department and Dubai
Traffic Police for review. Work at the Site may not commence until the traffic
control plan has been approved by the RTA and Dubai Traffic Police.
The traffic control plan shall include a street plan of the work site showing all
traffic lanes and building access drives that will be affected by the work. The
proposed system of traffic diversions and the manner of control shall be
clearly illustrated, including the location and types of traffic cones, warning
signs and warning lights to be used. The plan should indicate the
anticipated schedule of works for which traffic must be diverted. Road
diversions and road signs shall conform to Clause 1.3.4.
The traffic control plan shall take into consideration the requirements of the
work crew for access to the work site, for positioning and parking of vehicles
needed for the work and for the temporary storage of equipment and
materials.

SECTION 16 - MICRO-TUNNELLING AND PIPE JACKING
16.1 GENERAL
The Contractor shall furnish all labour, tools, materials and equipment
required to design and complete the installation of pipelines using
micro-tunnelling or pipe jacking methods as and where indicated on the
Drawings and as specified, including surveying, instrumentation and
dewatering. The Contractor may also elect to use micro-tunnelling
methods to install those pipelines where the installation method has been
left to the option of the Contractor.
The method selected by the Contractor shall be capable of maintaining the

stability of the tunnels when accounting for soil and groundwater
conditions and shall take into account the types of soil likely to be
encountered during construction and the likelihood of encountering
caprock or cobbles.
The options available to the Contractor can include the following:
a. Micro-tunnelling Method. The Contractor may select either the

auger type system or the slurry type system depending on his
evaluation of the tunnelling conditions based on the site
investigations.
b. Pipe Jacking Method. The pipeline can be installed either by

jacking the tunnel shield or by jacking the entire tunnel shield and
pipe string. The selection of jacking method is dependant on the
type of micro-tunnelling system to be used.
The Contractor shall decide the excavated dimensions of the drive and
reception shafts at the locations shown on the Drawings and as required
for the micro-tunnelling method selected. Minimum shaft dimensions shall
be used at all locations.
Caisson-type manholes may be used where possible to minimize drive and

reception shaft dimension and traffic disruption.
The Contractor shall also determine the necessary horizontal alignment of

the tunnel and the locations of any additional shafts that his approved
construction method may require. The Contractor's work shall at all times
remain within the road right-of-way and the selection of shaft locations
shall be such as to minimize disruption of normal traffic and inconvenience
to the public.
The Contractor's design shall include for all dewatering or other

groundwater and soil support systems, necessary to prevent any adjacent
ground from being adversely affected by shrinkage movement or loss of
fines during and after the construction of shaft and tunnels.
The Contractor's design shall include for all ground stabilization measures
either in advance or during micro-tunnelling operations.

The Contractor's design shall include formulation of construction

procedures to minimize ground movement and prediction of movement
during shaft and tunnel construction.
The settlements arising from the construction of the works shall be limited
to the following:
a. Ground or roadway surface above the pipe center line: 5 mm.
b. Front face of adjacent structures: 5 mm.
Safety measures are of paramount importance. Tunnelling through sands

below the water table is a potentially dangerous situation. A
comprehensive statement of safety policy related to these micro-tunnelling
works shall be submitted prior to commencement of works.
It is emphasized that in general no open trenching shall be allowed due to

the congested nature of the area and that sheeting shall have to be
provided for all open excavations when such open excavation is
unavoidable. However, the number and size of all proposed shafts shall be
kept at a minimum.
The proximity of buildings is such that the driving of steel sheet piles to
shafts is not permissible, nor is any construction noise greater than 70 dB.
All constructional plant forming part of the micro-tunnelling system is to be
electrically driven, either by mains supply or on-site generation.
Before commencing on site the Contractor shall submit a full Method

Statement indicating how all the measures required in this Specification
are to be accommodated including details of the sizes and type of micro-
tunnelling equipment proposed and the disposal of waste materials
including any slurry. This method statement shall be in addition to, and in
conformity with any other method statement(s) the Contractor is required
to submit for micro-tunnelling at the time of tendering.
The pipes and joints proposed for use in micro-tunnelling item(s) shall, as
a minimum, comply with the appropriate standards set for pipes and joints
(refer to sub-section 4.1) used in conventional (open-trench) pipeline
construction in all respects including materials of manufacture, tolerances,
minimum strengths, etc. In particular, the pipes and joints must comply
with the details of Clause 4.1.6 for use in micro-tunnelling or similar jacking
operations. The Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer that the proposed
pipes and joints shall adequately withstand the temporary loads applied
during installation.
If the Contractor elects to propose GRP pipes with concrete surround for
micro-tunnelling, he shall submit along with his Tender, comprehensive
material standards and complete specifications for these pipes for review
and consideration of the Engineer. He shall also provide evidence of
successful use of such materials elsewhere in a similar construction
method and in areas of similar soil conditions including the highly saline
nature of the groundwater as in Dubai.

16.1.1 List of Approved Specialist Firms/Sub-Contractors
Included below is the list of specialist Firms/ Sub-Contractors who are

approved to work for Micro-tunnelling on this project. The Contractor shall be
required to select and engage specialist Firm(s)/Sub-Contractors(s) from the
approved list to carry out all the Micro-tunnelling works of this project
(except where the Contractor himself is included in the approved list):-
1. Euro-Iseki Ltd. (U.K.) 2. Foundation Engineering (U.A.E.)/

Avonbrook House, Masons Rd. Laserbore (U.K.)
Stratford-Upon-Avon C/O Foundation Engineering
Warwickshire CV37 9LQ P.O. Box 2526
United Kingdom Dubai, U.A.E.
Tel. : 44(0) 789 292227 Tel. : 04-450247
Fax : 44(0) 789 268350 Fax : 04-457641
Telex : 312440 PBSSPAG
3. M.C. Clancy (U.K.) 4. Dutco (U.A.E.)/

Clare House Coppermill Lane Brochier (Germany)
Harefiled, Middlesex UB96HZ P.O. Box 233
United Kingdom Dubai, U.A.E.
Tel. : 0044 5825263 Tel. : 04-851445
Fax : 0895 825263 Fax : 04-852103
16.2 SURVEY CONTROL
16.2.1 General
The Contractor shall set out the works and establish the laser guidance
system for the micro-tunnelling machine using survey stations given on the
Drawings or indicated by the Engineer on site. Any temporary control points
are to be recorded and notified to the Engineer for checking.
16.2.2 Survey References
The laser guidance system for the micro-tunnelling machine shall be such
that the machines position can be continuously monitored. Any deviations
from line or level shall be recorded as each new pipe is inserted.
16.2.3 Structural Survey
A pre-construction survey of all structures within 4 times the depth of

micro-tunnel on each side of the tunnel centerline shall be completed within
30 days before the start of the micro-tunnelling activities. The Contractor
shall submit a report containing photographs and descriptions of the
structures.
Concurrently, a level survey on these structures and the surfaces of the

roadway within the above mentioned envelope shall be completed. All these
survey data shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to any construction.

16.2.4 Site Investigations
The Contractor shall engage a competent geotechnical firm to design and

conduct a comprehensive soil investigation program along the route of all
lines to be constructed using micro-tunnelling methods.
Boreholes shall be sunk adjacent to all proposed shaft locations. Due to the
variability of soil, rock and groundwater conditions, boreholes should also be
sunk at intermediate locations. It is recommended that boreholes be sunk at
a maximum intermediate spacing between shafts of 50 meters. In any case,
it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to adequately familiarize
himself with the ground conditions along the pipeline routes and to assure
himself that the selected construction method is appropriate and safe. This
data is also vital to the proper selection of cutting head for the tunnelling
machine.
The boreholes shall be sunk at least 2.0 meters below the level of the
proposed works or at least 50 percent deeper than the proposed works,
whichever is deeper and shall be sited at least 2 metres off the proposed
tunnel line to avoid creating areas of weakened ground.
The following parameters shall be determined from undisturbed samples

taken at different depths, particularly at the tunnel depth:
- Standard penetration tests,

- Liquid and Plastic limits (Atterberg limits),
- Particle Size distribution,
- Shear strength,
- Moisture content,
- Height of water table, and
- Chemical composition of the groundwater
The boring logs, results of the laboratory tests and a discussion of the
results as they pertain to the selection of micro-tunnelling method and the
selection of cutting head shall be compiled in a "Soils Investigation Report"
and submitted to the Engineer prior to commencing micro-tunnelling work on
any section.
16.3 GEOTECHNICAL INSTRUMENTATION
The Contractor shall engage a geotechnical firm to design, install and

operate a geotechnical monitoring program. The monitoring program shall
include:
- Optical survey for layout and verification of all instrument locations and
elevations.
- Borehole drilling for installation of settlement anchors, observation

wells and, if requested by the Engineer, inclinometer casings.
- Furnish, install and grout observation wells and, if requested by the

Engineer, inclinometer casings including sensor and readout unit, and
furnish and install settlement anchors and settlement markers.
- Furnish and install surface settlement points on existing structures.

The observation wells, settlement anchors, settlement points and

inclinometer casings (if requested) shall be installed and monitored for 14
days prior to advance of the tunnel heading to the station of the
instrumentation, or to the start of shaft excavation or to the start-up of a
dewatering system.
The geotechnical firm shall read and record data in accordance with the
schedule below and report data from the geotechnical instrumentation within
24 hours to the Engineer during the course of the work for eeeeo-tunnelling
or shaft excavations.
Monitoring Schedule
Activity Instrument Reading Frequency
Tunnelling Piezometer and Daily while heading is within 100 feet

Obs. Wells of instrument. Weekly while heading
is 100 to 500 feet from instrument.
Inclinometer, Daily while heading is within 50 to

Settlement 500 feet of instrument. After each
anchors and advance of 5 feet, when heading is
settlement points within 50 feet of instruments.
Excavations Obs. Wells Daily from start of dewatering to

system shutdown.
Inclinometer Daily from start to completion of

excavation.
Weekly until backfill completed within

50% of final grade.
Monthly until backfill completed.
16.3.1 Settlement Points
The geotechnical firm shall determine optimum location of settlement points

to monitor existing structures as acceptable to the Engineer.
He shall provide settlement points on the road surface and within existing
structures. Settlement points in the vicinity of the shafts will be agreed with
or at the direction of the Engineer.
He shall monitor all settlement points with reference to benchmarks located

outside the area of influence of the works. Monitoring shall demonstrate
repeatability to 0.01 foot.

16.3.2 Settlement Anchors
The geotechnical firm shall install settlement anchors and reference head in
drill hole in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Anchors shall be
grouted in place with cement/bentonite grout mix. Proportions by weight
shall be 1 part of cement to 3 parts of bentonite to 3 parts of water, (1:3:3).
16.3.3 Inclinometers (If required)
The Contractor (or his specialist sub-contractor as per Clause 16.3.4) shall
install inclinometer casings at locations as directed by or agreed with the
Engineer. The geotechnical firm shall supervise installation and testing of all
devices and provide qualified personnel for the proper operation and
maintenance of the installation and shall take field measurements for lateral
deformation both perpendicular and parallel to adjacent structure.
16.3.4 Groundwater Observation Wells
Prior to the installation works of the Groundwater Observation Wells, the

Contractor shall submit a detailed method statement for the installation
works to the Engineer for approval. The Contractor may engage a specialist
sub-contractor with the approval of the Engineer for the installation of
Groundwater Observation Wells. In any case the Contractor shall hire the
services of a Geotechnical firm who shall inspect the installation and shall
monitor the wells at a set frequency and prepare reports on the impact of
dewatering and ground movements. Such data and reports shall be
submitted to the Engineer on a regular basis.
16.3.5 Optical Surveys
The geotechnical firm shall reference all instrument locations and elevations
to existing benchmarks and line monumentation. He shall establish
elevations on all instrument reference points to a minimum accuracy of 0.01
foot.
He shall locate all instruments by coordinate and survey ties to permanent

topographic features to minimum accuracy of 0.10 foot.
16.4 DEWATERING
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a method statement for

dewatering along with necessary sketches indicating any dewatering route,
etc., and shall proceed with installation of dewatering system only with the
approval of the Engineer of the method statement and the dewatering
route(s).
The Contractor shall supply all equipment, tools, materials and labour for
dewatering and control of groundwater using dewatering systems consisting
of well points and/or deep wells. The system shall include any system
required to recharge the groundwater so that adjacent structures are not
affected with any additional piezometers and observation wells.
Once dewatering has begun, it shall continue 24 hours per day for extent of
time shaft excavations are open. Water levels shall be maintained at least

0.6 meter below shaft excavations and as required by the approved

tunnelling method. In event of disturbance of foundation soils or movement
of existing structures in excess of limits stated in Clause 16.1, or movements
of embankments, roadway or sheeting towards open excavation caused by
an inadequate or interrupted dewatering system, the Contractor shall
immediately notify the Engineer and take all corrective measures necessary
at no additional compensation.
The corrective measures shall include modification to the dewatering system

to correct the deficiency and repair of any associated damage at no
additional compensation. If the corrective measures prove unsatisfactory to
the Engineer and results in damage to an existing structure, all expenses
incurred in any redesign of foundation or remedial measures to repair
damage to structure and in any related construction shall be reimbursed by
the Contractor. The Contractor shall take out adequate insurance for this
risk and produce evidence of it to the Engineer upon request.
16.4.1 Submittals
The Contractor shall submit detailed dewatering plans to indicate proposed

type, depths, installation locations and method of water disposal from the
work sites, including locations of piezometers, observation wells and
reinjection wells, if required.
16.5 SITE INVESTIGATION
The Contractor shall avail himself of all available information concerning

ground conditions to determine the appropriate cutting head compatible with
the expected conditions.
The position of drive and reception shafts should be checked on site by the
Contractor to ensure that the design has provided sufficient working space
which will cause the least disruption to the flow of traffic.
Any alterations to the designed position of shafts must be approved by the

Engineer.
16.6 QUALITY CONTROL
The Contractor shall retain the services of a qualified specialist to supervise

the assembly, operation and maintenance of the equipment required for the
selected method of micro-tunnelling.
The finished micro-tunnelled pipe centerline shall have the following

tolerances:
a. Horizontal : ±50 mm per 100 m sewer length
b. Vertical : ±25 mm per 100 m sewer length

16.7 EQUIPMENT
The equipment utilized to perform this work shall be designed and provided
so as to carry out the micro-tunnelling work efficiently. It shall be able to
handle the ranges of ground conditions indicated by the boreholes and
groundwater level information, with excess capacity. The equipment shall be
able to maintain stability of the tunnel when taking into account the soil and
hydrostatic loads as well as any surcharges imposed by vehicular traffic.
The Contractor shall be capable of lubricating the pipe as it is advanced.

The equipment shall include a system for handling and transporting the
excavated material from the tunnel face, through the tunnel and via the drive
shaft to the ground surface. The excavated material, and the bentonite or
similar slurry, if used, shall be properly disposed of by the Contractor.
The equipment shall include a laser guidance system to permit continuous

controlling, monitoring and adjustment of the alignment and grade. The laser
shall be mounted independently of the thrust block. The tunnelling machine
shall be fitted with a calibrated laser target, robustly constructed and rigidly
secured to the tunnelling machine.
16.8 EXECUTION
Prior to the start of work on any pipe section, assemble all material,
equipment and tools necessary to conduct tunnelling work continuously until
that section is completed.
Institute approved traffic control and diversion program including required

traffic barriers, lights and signs. The traffic control program for each work
area is to be submitted to the Roads & Transport Authority and to the Dubai
Traffic Police for approval prior to mobilizing to the site.
Excavate the required shafts to complete the micro-tunnelling operations in

accordance with the approved schedule. The pipeline will be driven using
the method proposed by the Contractor and as agreed by the Engineer.
While the tunnel is being advanced, the Contractor shall monitor the ground
and building levels and geotechnical instrumentation as required.
The sewer lines are located such that manmade obstructions should not be
encountered. However, the Contractor should have contingency methods
available to remove natural or manmade obstructions should they be
encountered including the facility to withdraw the micro-tunnelling machine
along the line of the tunnel drive if obstructions or changes in ground
conditions are encountered within 30 metres, to allow a different micro-
tunnelling machine to be used.
The tunnel shall be excavated to a size such that the overbreak is kept to a
minimum. The overbreak occuring shall be filled with a suitable slurry to
keep ground movements within the tolerances given in Clause 16.1. Slurry
pressure or mechanical earth pressure shall be maintained to ensure a
positive pressure on the working face at all times.

At all times when the tunnel is being advanced, a field supervisor with
extensive experience in the operation of the equipment being used shall be
present.
The setting of the laser and target and the alignment of the tunnel relative to
the laser beam shall be continuously monitored (refer to Clause 16.2.2) to
ensure compliance with the horizontal and vertical tolerances as specified in
Clause 16.6.
16.9 TESTING
All pipelines constructed by micro-tunnelling shall be inspected and tested in

accordance with Clauses 6.1 and 6.2 for new pipes.
16.10 SAFETY
The Contractor is responsible for the safety of all personnel as well as for
the safety of the public during the performance of the work and is
responsible for maintaining safe conditions in and around the work area.
This is specified in more detail in Section 12.

SECTION 17 - GENERAL, ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL

SPECIFICATION
17.1 ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL PLANT TO BE SUPPLIED
Electrical and Mechanical plant shall be supplied and installed as detailed

and in accordance with sections 17 through 20 of the specification.
Specification section 17 through 20 shall also be applicable to temporary

plant required throughout the duration of the contract.
Particular care shall be taken to ensure that all components are suitable for
the corrosive climatic and environmental conditions prevailing in Dubai.
17.2 DRAWINGS AND INFORMATION REQUIRED FOR ELECTRICAL AND

MECHANICAL PLANT
As well as complying with the specified procedures for approval the following
documentation shall be supplied and procedures followed for all items of
electrical and mechanical plant in the Contract.
17.2.1 At the start of the Contract
Within 30 days of the Engineer’s order to Commence the Works the

Contractor shall submit the specified request for approval which shall include
:-
(a) Detailed drawings (6 No.) of the general arrangements and

specifications of all electrical and mechanical plant showing all
apertures, holes, chases, trenches and ducts required in associated
structures.
(b) Drawings (6 No.) of electrical and electronic equipment and

specifications giving details, dimensions, circuitry, component details
and schematic diagrams with a legend of symbols used and a written
description of the operation of the circuits marked thereon.
(c) Any additional drawings of particular items, called for by the Engineer.
The manufacture of items of Plant, shall not be commenced until written

approval of all relevant drawings and specifications have been obtained.
If the drawings are not approved one copy will be returned to the Contractor
marked to indicate the alterations required.
Upon final approval one copy will be marked Approved and returned.
After approval of drawings a further six copies shall be provided to the

Engineer.

17.2.2 As Built Record Drawing
During the course of the Works the Contractor shall maintain a detailed
record of all changes in order to facilitate accurate preparation of “As Built
Record” drawings and to ensure that these drawings are in all respects true
record of the installation.
The Contractor is at liberty to apply for copies of the Engineer’s drawings

which he considers will assist him in the production of the As Built Record
drawings required to be supplied by him, providing the Engineer is satisfied
the request is reasonable, copies will be provided by the Engineer at cost.
The Contractor shall treat the copies of the Engineer’s drawings as
confidential matter and shall not use them other than for the purpose for
which they are provided.
The final record drawings shall be prepared by the Contractor and shall
show the complete Works including the sizes and routes of all ducts,
pipework and cables. The scales used shall be such that all details are
legible when reduced for inclusion in the Operation and Maintenance
manuals. All drawings shall show scale bars as appropriate.
The drawings shall clearly show the names of the plant manufacturers,
giving model and type numbers, and all details of plant and machinery duty
ratings, sizes, current settings, fuse ratings, etc. of all items of plant including
electrical distribution cabling and wiring installations.
The Contractor shall provide three prints of all drawings and schedules
correctly modified as final record drawings. These shall be submitted to the
Engineer for approval before the issue of a Taking Over Certificate and shall
be a complete record of the Mechanical and Electrical installation.
If the drawings are not approved, one copy shall be returned to the
Contractor with marked indications of the alterations required.
Upon final approval, one copy of the drawings or document shall be stamped
“Approved” and returned to the Contractor.
One set of the approved record drawings on paper shall be included in each
of the Operation and Maintenance manuals. These may be full size drawings
folded and inserted into clear plastic sleeves bound directly into the
document. Reduced size drawings shall be legible in all respects, and the
actual reduced scale clearly marked on the drawings.
1 No. copy on magnetic disc or tape, digital drawings in AutoCAD release

13, Intergraph or DXF file as appropriate and three full size sets of approved
record drawings on polyester film or other approved reproducible film shall
be handed to the Engineer. The Engineer will not issue a Taking Over
Certificate for the Works until all approved record drawings have been
received.

17.2.3 Prior to Delivery of the Plant
Before plant is delivered the Contractor shall provide for the use of the
Employer and the Engineer:-
(a) Copies of all Test Certificates demonstrating compliance with the

specifications.
(b) Two copies of Draft Instructions for the Operation of the Plant which
shall describe the installation as a whole and shall give step by step
procedures for every operation in the running of the Plant. All
necessary drawings and sketches shall be included.
(c) Two copies of Draft Instructions for the Maintenance of the Plant.
These instructions shall include charts showing lubrication, checking,
testing and replacement procedures to ensure trouble free operation.
A separate section of these Instructions shall be devoted to a complete parts

list based on sectional arrangement drawings of the Plant. The maker’s
name, address and catalogue/serial numbers shall be given for each
component of the Plant supplied.
Recommendations for consumable supplies, e.g. lubricants, packings etc.

shall be included.
The Contractor shall obtain the Draft Instructions from the suppliers, check
them for accuracy and shall bind each Instruction Book in Uniform bindings,
the cover of which shall be finished with a black and greaseproof material
and the title printed on the front and the spine including the word ‘Draft’.
The Instructions shall be specific to this Contract, a collection of

manufacturer’s descriptive leaflets will not be acceptable.
The Plant shall not be considered to be completed for purposes of delivery

until the above information has been provided.
17.2.4 Prior to the Issue of the Taking-Over Certificate
Before the Taking-Over Certificate is issued the Contractor shall provide for
the use of the Employer and the Engineer:-
(a) Three copies of Approved Instructions for the Operation of the Plant
which shall describe installation as a whole and shall give step by step
procedures for every operation in the running of the Plant. Copies of
the as built record drawings and sketches shall be bound in the
document.
(b) Three copies of Approved Instructions for the Maintenance of the

Plant. These instructions shall include charts showing lubrication,
checking, testing and replacement procedures to ensure trouble free
operation.

(c) 1 No. copy on magnetic disc & tape on digital drawings in AutoCAD
release 13, Intergraph or DXF file as appropriate and two hard copies
of the following As Built Record drawings¤ for approval :-
(a) Drawings showing the internal construction of the major items, with
parts list and reference numbers for ordering spares.
(b) Complete assembly drawings of machinery and ancillary plant

showing all pipe connections and fittings.
(c) General arrangement drawings showing all equipment, cabling,

traywork, etc.
(d) Detailed arrangement of any conduit work buried in floors, walls or

ceilings, in any structure.
(e) Detailed wiring diagrams of the main circuits.
(f) Diagrams of connections between all items of equipment (e.g. main

and auxiliary switchboards, generators, control boards, motors,
starters, batteries, meters, instruments, relays, and allied
equipment, etc. with component values
(g) Three copies of detailed revised Specifications and Schedules of

the Plant as actually installed.
When (a), (b), (c), (d), (e) and (f) have been approved by the Engineer, the
Contractor shall provide two prints of each drawing or detail on thick paper
for the use of the Purchases, and one 35 mm photographic negative of each
drawing or detail mounted in a card frame 187 mm x 83 mm for the use of
the Engineer.
A separate section of these Instructions shall be devoted to a complete parts

list based on sectional arrangement drawing of the Plant. The maker’s
name, address and catalogue/serial numbers shall be given for each
component of the Plant supplied.
Recommendations for consumable supplies, e.g. lubricants, packings etc.

shall be included.
The Contractor shall bind each Approved Instruction Book in uniform

bindings, the cover of which shall be finished with a black and greaseproof
material and the title printed on the front and the spine including the word
‘Approved’.
The Contract shall not be considered to be completed for purposes of the

issue of the Taking-Over Certificate until the above information has been
provided.

17.2.5 During the Maintenance Period
The Contractor shall be responsible for the complete maintenance

(preventive and corrective) of the plant for one year and shall supply at his
own cost all spare parts required during this period (The maintenance
period). The maintenance period starts from the successful inspection and
commissioning of the plant and acceptance by the Employer. The plant
shall be re-inspected by the Employer at the end of the maintenance period
and any item found defective during the maintenance period shall be
replaced by the Contractor free of cost. The Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer a copy of the approved preventative maintenance schedule
proposed for the installed equipment.
17.3 WORKMANSHIP AND DESIGN OF PLANT
(1) The Plant shall be new, of sound workmanship and of robust design.
(2) The general electrical and mechanical design of the Plant and
particularly that of the bearings, contacts, and other wearing parts,
shall be governed by the need for long period of service without
frequent maintenance and attention being necessary.
(3) Unless otherwise specified, all items of Plant shall be rated for
continuous service at the specified duties under the prevailing
atmospheric and operational conditions on site.
(4) All component parts of the Plant shall be manufactured to a strict

system of limits and complete inter-changeability of similar parts is
required.
(5) All items of Plant for which spare parts may be required shall have
attached to them untarnishable serial numbers and basic information
as to rating, etc. in sufficient detail to allow the unit or assembly to be
identified in correspondence and when ordering parts.
(6) All parts subject to wear shall be readily accessible.
(7) Provision shall be made for taking up wear in all bearings and other
wearing parts or for easy replacement if adjustment is not practicable.
(8) If any moving parts show, in the opinion of the Engineer, signs of
undue wear or unsuitability for the purpose for which they were
installed, they shall be deemed to be defective materials, workmanship
or design and shall be replaced.
(9) Suitable packers and/or shims shall be fitted for ease of adjustment
and re-alignment of all machinery units. Particular attention shall be
given to combined sets.
(10) Where fitted bolts, spigots or other means for precise location are not
employed in the assembly of the Plant, locating dowels shall be fitted,
on completion of erection, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

(11) The equivalent control panel reference shall be prominently inscribed

on each item of plant in a manner to be approved by the Engineer.
17.4 LUBRICATION OF PLANT
(1) Adequate and, as far as is practicable, automatic means of lubrication

shall be provided for all moving parts.
(2) The positions of all greasing and oiling points shall be arranged so as
to be readily accessible for routine servicing. Where necessary to
achieve this, suitable extension pipes shall be fitted.
(3) Lubrication grease points shall comprise hexagon headed nipples

except where the lubrication required is of a special nature. In such
event they shall be fitted with metal labels to indicate the special
lubricant required.
(4) Where continual grease or oil feeding is required the capacity of the
reservoir shall be sufficient for not less than seven days continuous
services.
17.5 INITIAL CHARGES OF OILS AND OTHER CONSUMABLES
The Contractor shall supply the initial charges of oil, grease electrolyte and
similar materials necessary for the correct setting to work and operation of
the Plant.
17.6 SPARES
(1) Spares shall be readily interchangeable with the parts they replace,
and shall comply with the specification.
(2) Schedules shall be included for all spares recommended by the

manufacturers to cover periods of 2 and 5 years operation of the Plant.
The Engineer will determine the actual spares to be provided.
(3) Spares shall be packed and protected for storage to the appropriate
standard. Electrical equipment shall be sealed in polythene or similar
bags with a liberal supply of desiccant. Other items shall be protected
so as to avoid corrosion and spoilage for a minimum of twelve months
after handover to the Client. Machined surfaces of all mechanical
components shall be further protected by the application of a protective
coating which may be easily removed at the time of installation. Each
package shall have attached to it an untarnishable metal plate giving
information for identification. This shall include the maker’s name and
reference description as shown on the marked-up drawings supplied.
(4) The packages of items of spares shall be collected together by the

Contractor into consignments of reasonable size and then packed in
secure cases each of which shall contain a contents list. Where
electrical items are involved the cases shall be of tongue and groove
boarding. Each case shall be durably marked with the Contract
number and site address, and shall be sent to site after detailed

instructions have been received. Each package shall be clearly

identified as to its contents in both English and Arabic.
(5) The Contractor shall provide the detailed agreed schedule in duplicate
of the spares supplied one copy to be retained by the Engineer after
checking the goods.
17.7 TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS
(1) A schedule is included to cover all special tools necessary for the
proper maintenance of the Plant. The Engineer will notify the
Contractor which tools shall be included in the Contract. These tools
shall not be used for the purpose of erecting the works.
(2) The Engineer may require to inspect the tools and packaging before
dispatch and the Contractor shall hold them at his works and not allow
them to be sent by suppliers direct to site.
17.8 DELIVERY OF SPARES, TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS
Spares and tools shall only be dispatched to site after instructions for their
reception have been applied for and obtained from the Engineer.
The Contractor shall provide a lockable metal tool box to contain two sets of
tools as required by (1) above together with two sets of steel combination
spanners to fit every nut/bolt size on the plant including the holding down
bolts and unions, plus other tools of a special nature necessary for general
maintenance.
A supply of the recommended lubricants sufficient for a period of two year's

running shall be supplied for the plant. This does not relieve the Contractor
of the responsibility of ensuring that all grease lubricants have been filled
and the grease-gun applied to all nipples before starting up the plant.
Lubricants or their equivalents shall be those obtainable in the Dubai

markets.
The Contractor shall provide a detailed schedule in duplicate of the tools and
lubricants supplied one copy to be retained by the Engineer after checking
the goods.
17.9 PROTECTION AND PACKING FOR SHIPMENT/STORAGE
(1) All Plant shall be adequately protected and packed in accordance with
the approved standard. In addition the Plant shall be so protected as
to be safe from spoilage and corrosion until installation or in the case of
spare parts for a period not less than 12 months from its date of
handover to the Client.
(2) Items of plant which are finished painted at the manufacturer’s works
such as switchboards, shall be suitably encased in wood (such as
hardboard secured by screws to a wood framework) for their protection
before dispatch.

(3) Particular care shall be taken in the packing of electrical apparatus. It

shall be packed separately in sealed polythene or similar approved
bags (including a liberal supply of desiccant) taking all precautions to
exclude moisture.
(4) Packing cases shall be strongly constructed using tongued and

grooved boards with internal and external battens. Each packing case
shall be durably marked with the Contract number and site address
and such other marking as may be directed.
(5) The Contractor shall make good to the satisfaction of the Engineer any
deterioration of the protective coatings, paintwork, etc., which may
occur during transportation.
17.10 AUTOMATIC CONTROL OF PLANT
(1) The system of control and protection for unmanned automatically

controlled Plant shall be such that the Plant is protected against further
damage should any piece of apparatus fail and shall be capable,
should the electricity supply fail, of re-starting correctly on resumption
of supply.
(2) Each starter shall be provided with an individual fuse for the control
circuit deriving its control supply from the live and neutral in its
associated cubicle unless otherwise specified. Indicating lamps shall
be controlled by separate auxiliary contacts.
(3) In multi-unit installations the control arrangements shall provide

staggered starting and stopping of the Plant, so that not more than one
unit starts or stops at a time, to minimise electrical and hydraulic
surges on the systems.
(4) The duty change to stand-by pump shall be signalled by a suitable

lamp labelled STAND-BY PUMP IN USE and unless otherwise
specified an alarm relay with a minimum of four contacts shall be
provided to initiate such alarms as may be specified or required to be
fitted at a later date.
(5) Each pump level float switch shall be separately provided with its own
low voltage supply transformer to avoid all pumps being cut out should
one transformer fail.
17.11 INSTRUCTIONS AND TRAINING OF EMPLOYER’S STAFF
The Contractor shall provide qualified engineer(s) to instruct and train the
Employer’s staff in the operation and maintenance of the plant.
After the equipment has been installed, tested, adjusted and placed in the
satisfactory operation the Contractor shall provide the services of the
manufacture's representatives to instruct the Employer's operating personnel
in the use and maintenance of the equipment. An instruction and training
programme shall be conducted for up to 6 operators designated by the
Employer. The Contractor shall give the Employer at least two month's
written notice of the proposed instruction and training programme.

Instruction and training covering basic system operation theory, routine

maintenance and repair, and "hands on" operation of equipment shall be
included. The duration of the instruction and training period shall be based
on the complexity of equipment involved and the equipment manufacturers
recommendations. The Engineer's/ Employers acceptance of the adequacy
of training received must be obtained before terminating the programme.
17.12 MAINTENANCE OF PLANT
The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of the plant for one
year from the date of Taking Over and shall supply at his own cost all spares
required during this period.
The Contractor shall carryout weekly, monthly, quarterly and yearly

inspection and preventive maintenance schedules of the plant and any other
maintenance schedules of the plant as recommended by the supplier of the
plant. The Contractor shall respond immediately to all plant alarms which
take place during the maintenance period. The Contractor shall make all
arrangements for the complete re-inspection of the plant by the
Employer/Engineer at the end of the maintenance period and any item found
defective during maintenance period shall be replaced by the Contractor at
his own cost. The warranty period for any component/item found defective
and/or repaired/ replaced during maintenance period shall be agreed by the
Engineer/Employer.
Plant keys shall be handed-over to the Sewerage System Section of the

Dubai Municipality Drainage & Irrigation Department at the end of the one
year maintenance period.
17.13 RETURN TO SITE
Eleven months after the Plant has been in operation, a visit to site shall be
made by an experienced fitter, of the Contractor or the Manufacturer, who
shall service all the Plant. The service shall comprise tracing and correction
of all faults and replacement of any item of plant found to be defective which
the Engineer considers to be the Contractor’s liability.
17.14 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
17.14.1 Introduction
The Operating instructions shall be prepared in English in such a way as to

provide a step by step description of the preparation and setting to work of
the whole of the Plant and its shutting down.
The Maintenance Instructions shall be in English and include the following :-
a) Schedules of routine maintenance to be carried out for each item of

Plant installed. 1 copy of the appropriate schedules and instructions
shall be mounted on neatly finished plywood boards suitably protected
by clear varnish or other approved material. and fixed on the wall
adjacent to the item of plant to which they refer.

b) Schedule of equipment supplied giving manufacturer's name and

appropriate Make/Model No./Cat. No.
c) Schedule of spares supplied.
d) Schedule of tools supplied.
e) Sectional arrangement drawings of major items of Plant i.e. pumps

valves etc. with dismantling instructions.
f) Plant layout drawings showing the "as erected" installation.
g) General arrangement and schematic diagrams of the "as installed"

control panel.
h) "As wired" diagrams of all electrical connections between the control

panel and installed loads.
i) Full and comprehensive instructions for the maintenance of all items of

equipment installed.
j) Test certificates for motors, pumps, compressors, pressure vessels,

lifting equipment, transformers, electrical installation and other items
where appropriate.
k) Pump performance curves as tested.
l) System curves.
m) Schedule of recommended lubricants and their equivalents.
17.14.2 General Requirements and Contents
i) General
a) The Contractor shall provide 3 No. fully detailed manuals including

all mechanical, electrical and electronic equipment.
b) Two copies of the draft manuals shall be submitted to the Engineer
for review and approval as required by Clause 17.2.3, before
delivery of the equipment.
c) The final copies of the manuals shall be provided to the Engineer

within 60 days of the commencement of the maintenance period.
They shall include all revisions and comments made be the
Engineer and any revisions or corrections necessitated by changes
made during installation and testing.
d) Manuals shall be contract specific, and be fully indexed and

sectioned, for allocation and distribution to the specialist staff
involved on the particular plant and equipment.
e) Where several sub-contractors and manufacturers have supplied

equipment the Contractor shall provide a complete integrated

manual which clearly demonstrates the inter-relation of the

equipment.
f) Manuals shall be provided in durable hard backed A4 sized loose-

leaf four ring binders. Lever arch binders are not acceptable
g) The manuals shall enable the client to safely operate, maintain,

dismantle, reassemble and adjust all part of the works.
h) Original copies of leaflets and instructions provided by the

specialist manufacturers shall be provided. Superfluous
information shall be clearly deleted and relevant information
referred to separately in the text.
i) All instructions and manuals shall be written in accordance with

appropriate National Standards and other recognised guidelines on
technical manual writing.
ii) Contents
a) These shall comprise a number of volumes, dependent on the

amount and technical content of the equipment installed. The
operating instructions shall always form a separate volume.
Manuals shall include sections containing information as described
in the following paragraphs.
b) Introduction. the name, address, telephone and fax numbers of the

Site, the Engineer, the Consultant, the Contractor, Sub-contractors,
Manufacturers and their Agents. The date the Contract
commenced, and the date of the Taking Over certificate. A brief
description of the plant provided and the contractual scope of the
work, with descriptions of any work subcontracted.
c) General description of equipment
i) General process description. This shall provide information on

treatment standards, flows and a general description of the
treatment processes provided, process P&I drawings shall be
included with the manual.
ii) Process design parameters. This shall provide information on

the performance of the individual processes.
iii) General description of the mechanical equipment. This shall

provide a brief description of all mechanical plant provided.
iv) General description of the electrical equipment. This shall
provide a brief description of the equipment provided, listing
individual control panel compartments and the remote controls.
d) Detailed description of the mechanical equipment. This shall

provide details of all the mechanical equipment including
manufacturer type, rating, duties, characteristic performance curves
and schedules for all components stating serial numbers.

e) Detailed description of the electrical equipment. This shall provide

details of all electrical equipment and cables including information
on the control panel(s), listing the display and controls available for
each compartment and stating the rating, manufacturer and
supplier of main components, and full component schedules with
serial numbers, calibration procedures a schedule of input and
output signals, detailed number, signal type, polarity, digital open or
closed state and analogue range.
f) Operating instructions. These shall provide details of how each

piece of plant is controlled and operated in both automatic and
hand modes, including the control philosophy and its
interrelationship with other interdependent plant. Details of plant
operation under non-routine conditions and details of start-up and
shut-down procedures with any associated safety checks shall be
provided.
g) Inspection and maintenance instructions. These shall provide

schedules recording the time interval for routine inspection,
maintenance and lubrication tasks, with reference to individual
manufacturer's instruction manuals for full details. They shall
describe briefly the more complex tasks that must be under taken
at irregular intervals. In addition to the routine operating and
maintenance task this section should identify the following:
i) more complex tasks, involved with plant shut-downs, fault

rectification to components level, fault diagnostics, overhauls,
etc.
ii) specific hazards associated with operating and maintaining the

plant ,e.g. auto starting, high voltage, noise levels.
iii) highlight any particular complex or critical tasks over the above
normal requirements.
iv) measurements and guidance on limits of acceptable wear for all
items subject to wear.
h) Fault finding and correction. This shall provide a guide to first line
checks that can be undertaken in the event of plant failure without
the need for reference to the detailed instructions. A detailed guide
of more complex checks shall be provided in Section (g).
i) Inventory of installed plant. A schedule of this shall be
provided.
j) Drawings list. A list of the ‘As-Built’ drawings shall be provided.
k) ‘As Built drawings’. Approved copies of all "As-Built" drawings
shall be included for the following:-
i) process and instrumentation diagram
ii) site layout showing main works operational features
iii) equipment and machinery layout
iv) mechanical and electrical details

iv) electrical power circuit diagrams

v) control schematic diagrams
vii) HV and LV distribution single line diagrams
viii) HV and LV cable routes
ix) PLC programmes or computer programmes
x) one master copy of the proprietary software package shall

be provided to the Engineer within one week of Contract
completion. All software licenses and/or registration
requirement must be forwarded promptly to the Engineer for
subsequent registration with the manufacturer. Sole rights
to all software developed and written on all schemes
financed by the Engineer shall be retained by the Engineer.
xi) assembly drawings shall clearly show the construction
details and be in sufficient detail to facilitate re-assembly.
xii) cable schedules shall include cable reference numbers and
core reference numbers relating to power circuit diagrams.
i)
The above are to be supplied to the satisfaction of the
Engineer. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer black and
white prints of each on thick paper and one ISO size A2 (594 x
420) negative of each. All drawings shall be prepared on a
CAD system and printed on ISO standard sized paper A1
unless specifically requested otherwise. Each drawing shall be
marked with the Engineers Consultant's, Contractor's and
manufacturers names and references, drawing number, title,
scales, date of completion and a full description and date of all
amendments, and shall be certified 'As-built'. The project title
shall be included in a box at the bottom right had corner of each
drawing.
17.15 WORKS TESTING AND INSPECTION OF MANUFACTURED ITEMS
All manufactured items for incorporation in the Works shall be offered for
inspection, examination and witness testing and shall be supported by
certificates to demonstrate compliance with this specification and with the
approved manufacturing and testing standards specifications.
Where manufactured items are to be shipped the packaging shall also be

offered for inspection before dispatch.
Inspections when required shall be carried out by the Engineer or his
appointed Inspecting Engineer. A schedule of proposed equipment to be
witness tested is included in the Contract Documentation.
The Contractor shall give to the Engineer and the Inspecting Engineer
reasonable notice, which shall normally be of two weeks, of the date and
place at which plant will be ready for prescribed testing.
If the tests are beyond the resource of the manufacturer he shall make
arrangements for these to be carried out elsewhere. Any variation of this
requirement shall be agreed and confirmation in writing shall be obtained
from the Engineer.

The Contractor shall supply four unpriced copies of all sub-orders for
manufactured items. Two copies of each of these sub-orders shall be
forwarded to the Engineer and two to the appointed Inspecting Engineer at
the time the sub-orders are placed. The sub-order shall indicate the Works
for which the item is required, state in detail the inspection and test
requirements, give sufficient information for ready identification and shall
state that these items will be subject to witness testing and inspection.
Four copies of all test certificates and, where relevant, curves shall be
supplied to the Inspecting Engineer within two weeks of completion of any
witnessed tests.
Where witness tests are not required or instructions to waive witness tests
have been issued, the test certificates and curves shall be forwarded to the
Inspecting Engineer within two weeks of the date of testing.
On each test certificate sufficient information including the Contract Number

and details shall be given for ready identification of the material or
equipment to which the certificate refers.
No inspection or passing by the Engineer, of plant or materials covered by

this Contract, whether carried out or supplied by the Contractor, shall
release him from any of his obligations under the Contract.
The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for complying with the above
testing and inspection requirements, including the provision of test
certificates, curves and any other information required by the Engineer and
shall ensure that due care is taken by himself and his Sub-Contractors or
suppliers before presenting the Plant for inspection or test. If unauthorised
delivery has taken place the Contractor may be required to arrange for the
Plant to be returned to the manufacturer for inspection and/or witness testing
by the Inspecting Engineer.
All apparatus, instruments and connections required for the tests shall have
been tested for accuracy within the preceding 12 months.
Any equipment used in the testing of the Plant shall in all respects comply
with the appropriate safety regulations and/or requirements regarding
electrical apparatus for the safety of the Plant and the men working therein.
The Contractor shall carry out tests as stated in the approved standard;
performance tests and such other tests as are necessary, in the opinion of
the Engineer, the Engineer’s Representative or his Inspecting Engineer, to
determine that the Plant complies with the Specification either under test
conditions in the manufacturer’s works, on site or elsewhere or in the
ordinary working.
Where pumps are included in the Contract, at least one unit of each size
shall be tested with the suction rigged to conform to site conditions.
All cast metal components designed for the retention of liquids, e.g. pump
casings, gear boxes, engine crank cases, etc., shall be checked for
soundness after machining etc., but before assembly or painting by treating
with paraffin or similar method.

Where tests and inspection have been completed to the Engineer’s

satisfaction, and when the test certificates, curves etc., have been checked,
the Engineer will confirm acceptance in writing. Plant shall not be
incorporated in the work or delivered until this acceptance has been
received.
17.16 TESTING AND CERTIFICATION OF MOTORS
Witness testing may be waived on standard types of small motors from

recognised manufacturers and on small components used in the
manufacture of units of plant.
Testing shall be done & Certification shall be issued by the Inspection &
Certification Section of the DCL.
Motors of 15kW and above shall be witness tested for performance to the
approved standard.
Type test certificates shall be provided and shall include the following
information for all motors :-
(1) Approved standard of manufacture

(2) Class of insulation
(3) Size and type of cable fittings
(4) Type of bearings, sizes and lubricant
(5) Type and rating of heaters
(6) Brush sizes and maker (if fitted)
(7) Line current all phases
(8) Phase current balance
(9) Efficiency and P.F. at 100%, 75% and 50% of Full load
After initial witness testing each motor shall be combined with its driven units
and witness tested to demonstrate satisfactory performance, correctness of
assembly and ease of re-assembly at site. The assembled units shall be
adequately marked and dowelled.
17.17 SITE TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL AND

MECHANICAL PLANT
(1) Cables laid underground shall be tested in accordance with the

appropriate standard specification and to Dubai Electricity & Water
Authority - Electricity Division's requirements for insulation resistance,
and continuity of earth circuit in the presence of the Engineers’
Representative before the cable trenches are back-filled. All joints
made during the installation of cables which prove faulty when tested
shall be remade and re-tested to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
(2) The connections of all electrical circuits shall be proved to be correct

and the whole installation shall be tested for insulation resistance and
earth loop resistance in the presence of the Engineer or the Engineer’s

Representative and Dubai Electricity & Water Authority - Electricity

Division Representative with instruments provided by the Contractor.
Any faults or defects shall be remedied at the Contractor’s expense.

Certificates in accordance with approved standard regulations of all
service authorities shall be issued to the Engineer.
(3) On completion of erection all pipelines shall be tested to ensure

tightness of joints and connections to a pressure agreed between the
Contractor and the Engineer.
Test pressures will not exceed standard specification requirements
unless otherwise specified.
(4) Lubricating and fuel lines, sumps, tanks, etc., shall be adequately
flushed to remove any foreign matter before being put to use.
(5) On completion of erection of each item of Plant the Contractor shall

test and check it and as far as is possible proving it under working
conditions.
(6) As soon as is practicable after erection the Contractor will be required

to co-operate under the supervision of the Engineer in test
running the completed installation (of which the Plant may form the
whole or a part) and, as far as is possible, proving it under working
conditions.
(7) Following successful initial testing the installation shall be operated

continuously by the Contractor(s) for 24 hours, or such time as the
Engineer may specify, following the requirements of subclauses (8)
thru (13) during which time the Contractor will check that the
installation is in safe working order and fulfills the function for which it is
intended.
(8) Operational demonstrations and system validation tests are required

for all mechanical and electrical equipment, Telemetry and SCADA
systems specified including all associated and related electrical
systems and control devices specified.
All costs for this shall be included in the Contract Price.

Materials, water, chemicals and electrical power for testing and
commissioning and validation shall be supplied by the Contractor.
Temporary facilities, storage, and similar facilities necessary for these
shall be supplied by the Contractor. Testing and commissioning shall
be performed under continuous inspection by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall provide sufficient experienced skilled staff to carry out
the testing and commissioning. The various equipment manufacturers
shall be present, if specified.
All defects and malfunctions found by testing and commissioning shall
be corrected immediately, using approved method and new materials
for repairs as required. Interruption time necessary for corrective work
may, at the Engineer's discretion, be added to the specified testing and
commissioning period.

Satisfactory completion and approval of required commissioning and

testing is one of the conditions precedent to the Engineer's acceptance
of the work, but does not constitute final acceptance.
Testing and commissioning shall be in accordance with the Project

Specification, the relevant International Standards, DEWA
requirements, industry norms and to the Engineer's approval.
(9) Test Procedures
Testing shall be carried out in stages as follows :-
i) primary tests and checks

ii) unit testing
iii) system validation tests
iv) commissioning and setting to work
The Contractor shall not proceed from one stage to the next without
the Engineer's approval.
Consolidation of demonstration, testing and instruction requirements.

Unit and system validation testing, commissioning and instruction of
the Employer's personnel may be performed simultaneously but
requires the written agreement of the Engineer where this is at
variance with requirements specified elsewhere.
(10) Primary Tests and Checks
All component unit and complete systems shall conform to the

Specification, Drawing and the approved working drawings, samples,
construction manuals, materials lists, and other approved submittals.
All specified components and complete systems shall have been

installed satisfactorily and are operable.
All installation shall be safe to use. Temporary access, covers etc., will
only be permitted if approved by the Engineer.
All cleaning work shall be completed.
Equipment shall be free from physical damage due to mechanical

force, exposure to the elements, incorrect connection etc.
(11) Unit Testing
Unit testing is defined as tests on individual equipment items such as

pumps, compressors, deodorisers, blowers, fans, conveyors and all
similar equipment item. Tests may be performed simultaneously on
groups of identical equipment, items, and groups of items supplied by
one manufacturer, if practicable.
Clean water shall be used to fill tanks, wells piping and systems that
contain water, sewage or sludge in normal operation. Where

necessary specified chemical shall be used for chemical systems but

shall not exceed in-service concentrations.
Tests shall show that all component units operate with the quantities,
efficiency, repeatability, and accuracy specified.
Tests shall be carried out continuously for a minimum period of

24 hours.
(12) System validation tests
System validation tests shall not commence until tests have been
satisfactorily completed.
This is defined as testing of complete systems that perform a discrete

process function such as autodesludging, pumping systems,
emergency power systems, Telemetry SCADA and similar systems.
Each system shall include associated structures tanks, piping, utilities,
instrumentation and controls, and like related items. Two or more
separate systems shall be validation tested simultaneously when
necessary to validate an entire specific function.
Clean water shall be used for system validation tests if it is possible to

carry them out satisfactorily with this medium. If the tests require use
of the medium used in service, then this shall be used.
Each system validation tests shall be carried out for minimum of 24

hours, unless longer is needed to prove the performance of the
system.
.
(13) Commissioning and Setting to Work
Commissioning is defined as testing all the equipment and system

together under actual operating conditions using all the mediums used
in actual operating conditions. Setting to work follows consecutively
from this. Once the equipment and systems are operating satisfactorily
they are left to work.
Each system shall be tested including standby equipment by

continuous operation under the "in-service" condition for not less than
14 consecutive days, with no interruptions except for normal
maintenance or corrective work. Where the in-service condition is an
automatically controlled repair cycle with on/off intervals it shall be so
operated.
Systems shall be operated continuously under constant inspection of
trained operators. System operation shall be cycled from full load to
light load and back to full load each 24 h. Variable speed equipment
shall cycle through the applicable speed range at a steady rate of
change. Simulated alarm and failure operating conditions shall be
induced. Test controls and protective devise shall be tested for correct
operation in adjusting system functions or causing system shutdown.

Subject to Contractor's request and Engineer's approval in each case,

the Contractor may simulate certain operating conditions relating to
flow rates, water levels, and malfunctions. Permission for simulations
will be granted only where it is unwise or impossible to obtain the
conditions covered by the capability of ranges or equipment. The
simulation method shall reflect reasonable anticipated operating
conditions.
17.18 PLANT SUPPLIERS FOR THIS CONTRACT
In order to limit the number of manufacturers of electrical and mechanical

equipment used by RTA/DM and to simplify related maintenance, the
following suppliers have been selected for this Contract :-
Submersible Pumps: Stenberg Flygt AB

Suetsarevagen
S - 171 20 SOLNA 1
Sweden
OR ABS Pumpen GmbH

Postfach 1220
D5204 Lohmar 1
Scheiderhohe
West Germany
OR DAE Pumpen AS
Tolderlundsveg 3
DK - 5100
Odense C
Denmark
Klein, Schanzlin & Becker (KSB)

Aktiengesellschoft,
6710 Frankenthal (Pfalz)
Germany
HV Switchgear: South Wales Switchgear Ltd

Blackwood
Gwent NP 2XH
United Kingdom
OR ASEA Brown Boveri

P. O. Box 351 or P. O. Box 11070
Dubai, UAE
D - 6800 Manneheim 1,
W. Germany
OR Groupe Schneider
P. O. Box 43103
Abu Dhabi
UAE

Electrical Control Panels and LV Switchgear:
Binghalib Engineering
P.O. Box 6969
Sharjah
United Arab Emirates
OR Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Werrer-von-Siemens-Strasse 50
Power Engineering Group
E5 Division
D8520 Erlangen
Federal Republic of Germany
OR Blackburn Starling Ltd.

Queens Drive
Nottingham
United Kingdom
The Contractor shall be responsible for liaising with the suppliers, obtaining,
checking for accuracy and issuing all drawings and other documents and for
co-ordination of supply and installation.
17.19 CLIMATE
All plant and materials used shall be suitable for the climatic conditions
described below.
Meteorological and Ambient Conditions Prevailing in Dubai:
Maximum Ambient Temperature 52oC
Minimum Ambient Temperature 1oC
Design Ambient Temperature 55oC
Maximum Surface Temperature

(recorded under direct sunlight) 85oC
Minimum Barometric Pressure 998 mb
Average Barometric Pressure 1015 mb
Maximum Ambient Humidity 100%

Minimum Ambient Humidity 20%
Design Ambient Humidity 100%
Maximum Design Wind Velocity 160 km/hr
Average Yearly Rainfall 80 mm - 150 mm
The climate in Dubai is relatively mild from November to May, and hot from
May to October with high relative humidity.

Under certain combinations of the above climatic conditions, considerable

condensation may take place.
Particular attention should be paid to the prevailing corrosion conditions. A

considerable amount of salt is contained in the atmosphere which together
with the extremely high ambient humidity can produce severe corrosion.
Distribution of rainfall is irregular, and the precipitation amounts are normally

of no significance. However, sudden heavy rainfall can occur in a very short
period of time.
The prevailing wind directions are from the North and West. Strong winds
are common with maximum velocities exceeding 160 km/hr and sand storms
occur in the summer months.
17.20 ELECTRICITY SUPPLY
The electricity supply available from the Dubai Electricity & Water Authority -
Electricity Division network is 3 phase 220/380 volts, 50 Hz 4 wire.
17.21 DERATING DUE TO THE CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
The minimum derating for all electrical equipment including cables shall be
in accordance with the relevant Electrical Standards appertaining to the
climatic conditions referred to in Clause 17.19.
Switchboards, motor control centres, and electrical equipment shall be

suitable for continuous operation in an ambient temperature of 55oC. The
fact that switch gear, control rooms, pump rooms may be air conditioned
shall not be taken into account when rating equipment.
17.22 TROPICALISATION
17.22.1 General
In choosing materials and their finishes due regard shall be given to the
conditions under which equipment is to work. Tropical duty materials shall
be used wherever possible.
17.22.2 Metals
Ferrous metals shall be prepared and coated in accordance with the painting
specification. Small iron and steel parts (other than stainless steel) of all
instruments and electrical equipment the cores of electromagnets and the
metal parts of relays and mechanisms shall be treated in an approved
manner to prevent rusting.
Cores etc. which are built up of laminations or cannot for any other reason
be anti-rust treated shall have all exposed parts cleaned and heavily
enamelled or lacquered.
When it is necessary to use dissimilar metals in contact these shall be
selected such that the electro-chemical potential difference is not greater
than 250 mV and if practicable the two metals shall be insulated from each

other by an approved insulating material or by a coating of approved varnish

compound.
17.22.3 Screws, Nuts, Springs, Pivots etc.
The use of iron and steel shall be avoided in instruments and electrical
relays wherever possible. Steel screws when used shall be zinc, cadmium
or chromium plated or when plating is not possible owing to tolerance
limitations shall be of corrosion resisting steel. Springs shall be of bronze or
non-rusting material. Pivots for which non-ferrous material is unsuitable shall
be of an approved rustless steel where possible.
Testing of Thickness of Coating (Galvanized Steel) shall be checked with

Dubai Central Laboratory.
17.22.4 Wood
The use of wood shall be avoided as far as possible. When used it shall be
of an approved type to resist termite attack and fungal decay.
17.22.5 Electrical Insulating Materials
The use of hygroscopic insulating materials shall not be permitted except

where immersed in oil or suitably sealed to prevent ingress of moisture.
17.23 WORK IN DANGEROUS AREAS
The Contractor shall comply with any safety precautions called for by the
Engineer such as a "Permit to Work" system for access to designated high
risk areas including wet wells, sumps, valve chambers sewers and buildings
in addition to Electrical Danger Areas.
A minimum of 21 days notice in writing shall be given when requesting

Permits to Work. No unauthorised interruptions to the plant operations will
be tolerated. The applications for permits to work/plant shutdowns shall be
accompanied by approved method statements addressing all working
practices, operational implications, safety procedures, hazards and risks.
The "Permit to work" system will be administered by the Engineer.
17.24 CLASSIFICATION OF HAZARDOUS AREAS
The wet wells of pumping stations and raw sewage open channels to a
height of one metre above coping level shall be classified as Zone 2; in
accordance with BS EN 60079:1997.
17.25 HEALTH AND SAFETY AT WORK, ETC. ACT 1974
The entire installation and apparatus shall comply with DM Environmental

and Safety Section, DM Drainage & Irrigation Department and all their
standard and specification which mentioned in Dubai Sewerage & Drainage
master plan.
17.26 PROGRESS REPORTS

The Contractor shall furnish a progress report for the ME&I Works at the end
of each month utilising software generated CPM planning and reporting
methods The Contractor shall in his report state the details with dates of the
submission, approval, manufacture, works testing, shipment, installation, site
testing & commissioning of the proposed equipment.
17.27 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND STANDARDS
All equipment furnished under this specification shall be new, and wherever
possible, shall be a standard product of an approved or experienced
manufacturer, assembled from standard components readily available in the
market.
Equipment shall conform to the applicable requirements of the particular and

general project specifications and reference standards.
Manufacturer's, manufacturing premises, sub-contractors and suppliers shall

operate on an internationally recognised and approved quality system, or an
equivalent in-house quality system approved by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall, if required supply full details of the quality system to the
Engineer for his review and approval.
17.28 ADAPTATION OF EQUIPMENT
No responsibility for alteration of a planned structure to accommodate

substitute equipment shall be taken by the Engineer. Equipment which
requires alteration of the structures will be considered only if the Contractor
assumes all responsibility for making and co-ordinating all necessary
alterations, at no additional cost to the Employer. All modifications to
structures, mechanical, electrical, or other work made necessary by such
substitution shall require the approval of the Engineer. The cost of this work
shall be made at the Contractor's expense.
After approval of the mechanical and electrical drawings the Contractor shall
prepare and submit to the Engineer revised drawings showing any
necessary revisions to the proposed building and civil structures. The
location, size and details of box-outs and fixings for mechanical and
electrical and other equipment shall be shown on the revised drawings and
the Contractor shall be responsible for providing in the civil structures the
correct location and size of the box-outs and fixings shown on the approved
mechanical and electrical drawings. The Contractor shall prepare at his own
cost the necessary revised civil drawings and detailed structural and other
design calculations and submit them to the Engineer for approval. The
Contractor shall not be entitled to an extension of time for completion for any
delays from the preparation of such revised drawings. The Contract price
shall not be increased as a result of any changes in the civil structure from
that designated unless such changes are the result of variation properly
ordered by the Engineer.
17.29 GUARANTEE
The Contractor shall provide a guarantee for the maintenance period for all
equipment in accordance with the General Conditions of Contract. In

addition to the general guarantee requirements, equipment warranty shall

cover:
a) faulty or inadequate design

b) improper assembly or erection
c) defective workmanship or materials
17.30 CO-ORDINATION
The Contract Drawings show in a general arrangement form the layout

desired for the principal equipment, piping, and similar appurtenances, and
shall be followed as closely as possible. Proper judgment shall be exercised
in carrying out the work to secure the best possible headroom and space
conditions throughout, to secure neat arrangement of all equipment and
accessories, to overcome local difficulties and interference with structural
conditions wherever encountered.
The Contractor shall take all measurements for his work at the installation
site, verify all dimensions and conditions at the place of installation verify the
sub-contractor's drawings and be responsible for the proposed installation,
of the equipment within the available space specified and shown on the
Drawings. Proposed deviations from the Drawings and Specification shall
be submitted to the Engineer in writing giving full details and reasons for the
requests. The Engineer’s approval must be obtained for any modification of
the original works.
17.31 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTS
This clause is supplemental to Clause 17.17 Site Testing and

Commissioning of Electrical and Mechanical Plant.
a) Test procedures Method Statement. At least 45 days before testing and

commissioning is to be performed, a detailed and comprehensive
method statement shall be submitted for the performance of each
separate test. Each method statement shall describe and itemise the
involved system including associated electrical equipment,
instrumentation and control system. Evidence of an organised step-by-
step procedure, properly co-ordinating the efforts of the various trades
and manufacturers representative involved, and of the operations of the
facilities should be provided. Method Statements shall include an
estimated duration and commencement date for each procedure and a
schedule of personnel and equipment required.
b) Method Statement information. Each method statement shall include the

following information, as applicable :
i) description of temporary procedure facilities, including drawings and

sketches as necessary to fully illustrate the requirements.
ii) list of test materials and estimated quantities
iii) list of instruments, measuring and recording devices, and other test
equipment, whether a part of the equipment or furnished separately
for temporary use. Copies of calibration certificates shall be
submitted for any test equipment.
iv) names of supervisor and participating personnel

v) recording intervals.
c) Record materials. Samples shall be submitted of the forms, charts, and

other materials to be used when recording demonstration and validation
test results. Wherever possible, standard forms shall be used.
d) Test recording. Neat and comprehensive records of each test shall be
maintained by the Contractor. Each portion of the test procedure shall
be described with all components itemised. Records shall be prepared
on forms in a step-by-step fashion paralleling the approved method
statement. Forms shall list for each test or check the following:
i) check/list taken
ii) result anticipated
iii) result obtained
iv) if incorrect, corrective action taken
v) re-test/check result
vi) steps (iv) and (v) shall be repeated until all systems operate as
required. Instruments, gauges, and other sensors and display
devices forming a part of the various systems shall be employed for
data acquisition where applicable. The Contractor shall furnish all
other instruments, gauges, recorders and test devices as required,
types conforming to the approved method statements.
vii) The names of the personnel conducting the tests and the serial
numbers of any measurement equipment employed.
All applicable data such as, but not limited to, water and other liquid
levels, flows, pressures, head differentials, duration of runs, instrument
readings, voltage settings, drive speeds, motor running currents, torque,
voltages and related information, as applicable, and in accordance with
approved test procedures shall be recorded at the start and finish of
each operational demonstration and at 30 minute intervals during system
validation tests, unless other intervals are specified.
e) When a repeat of the same demonstration or validation test is required to

verify the results the repeat procedure shall be indicated on the recorded
data by numerical indication, data and time.
f) Test and commissioning reports including results, final settings and

adjustments made shall be provided in a separately bound volume of the
Operations and Maintenance Instruction Manuals.
17.32 SITE RELIABILITY TRIALS
This Clause is supplementary to Clauses 17.17 and 17.31
The Site Reliability Trials shall be carried out as follows under the control of
the Contractor's staff and the supervision of the Engineer. The purpose of
these trials shall be as follows:-
(i) To confirm the results of the Works Tests.
(ii) To confirm the performance guarantee figures.

(iii) To provide a comprehensive record of machinery performance, bearing

temperatures and alignment at the time of commissioning.
The Contractor will be responsible for the following:-
a) To provide all necessary measuring instruments, indicators, temporary

pipework, temporary pumping plant and all other apparatus necessary
to carry out tests as detailed herein. The Contractor shall provide all
necessary skilled personnel and testing water and fuel for the Site
Reliability Trials.
b) To liaise with his sub-contractors associated with the completion of any
part of the Works to ensure that all parties concerned are present
during any tests to carry out their responsibilities within the defined
limits of their individual sub-contracts.
c) To provide Test Certificates in quadruplicate giving a detailed record of

all electrical and mechanical tests carried out on the plant and cabling
under the Contract both in the manufacturers works and at site. Test
certificates for the cable installation shall be issued with the Record
Drawings.
The Site Trials shall be carried out under the control of the Contractor's staff
and the supervision of the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide all of the
necessary labour and instrumentation to conduct the test.
Failure of one of the elements during the test run shall invalidate the test run,
and test runs shall be repeated until a continuous uninterrupted test run of all
equipment has been obtained.
The Site Reliability Trials, as applicable shall include the following:-
(i) A record of bearing, coupling clearances, protective device settings

and alignments shall be tabulated to show the "as-built" condition of
each pump set and drainage equipment machinery.
(ii) A record of all limit switches, overloads, relay and protective settings
etc. shall be tabulated to show the "as-built" condition of each
applicable part of FBA’s and other electrical switchgear and include a
discrimination chart.
(iii) All cables shall have an insulation test to confirm the integrity of the
insulation. A tabulated record of results shall be made. Every cable
shall be subject to the following tests after installation:-
Witnessed high voltage pressure tests shall not be carried out on

P.V.C/S.W.A/P.V.C. control cables, but it shall remain the responsibility
of the Contractor to test the insulation of these cables both between
cores and between cores and earth during installation with a 500 volt
insulation tester.
The Contractor shall test all cables after installation to ensure phasing
out of cores and continuity of cores sheath and armour over the whole
length of the cable.

(iv) All earthing systems shall be tested to demonstrate the resistance of

the electrodes to earth and the earth conductor continuity is in
accordance with the Specification. The tests shall be made on
completion of the installation.
Tests shall also be performed to prove earth loop impedance for all
circuits. Calculations shall be produced in accordance with the IEE
regulations to support the relevance of the impedance measured.
(v) The control centres, control panels and instrumentation shall be
statically tested with motors disconnected to confirm the correct
sequence and functional operation.
(vi) Each pump shall be operated individually over the range from closed
valve to maximum emergency top water level on a re-circulation basis
using fresh water. During this test the following parameters will be
recorded:-
a) Motor current and voltage.

b) Pump and sewage treatment machinery outputs.
c) Ambient and Test Water temperatures.
d) Rotational and linear speeds, noise generated
e) Process product composition.
f) Sampling, Process and Dynamic Instrumentation settings.
(vi) All equipment subject to water pressure shall be hydraulically tested to

at least 8 bar, 1.5 times the maximum working pressure, twice the
closed valve pressure or 1.5 times the surge pressure whichever is the
greater.
The hydraulic tests shall also be applied to the above ground pipework
at Site after erection. The Contractor shall provide the necessary
equipment including any temporary blank flanges which may be
required to isolate equipment.
(vii) All cranes shall be tested at works with a load 25% in excess of the
rated load.
The tests shall be repeated at site when erection is complete using test
weights to be provided under the Contract.
Certificates shall be provided for both tests and these shall include
details of centre span deflections recorded during the test procedure.
After all the deficiencies apparent during the site reliability trials have
been rectified to the Engineer's satisfaction, apart from necessary
retesting, the following test shall be carried out:-
(viii) Circuit Breakers and Control Gear:

Routine tests including H.V. pressure tests, and mechanical tests.
(ix) Protection and Control Circuits:

(x) All inter-tripping circuits in conjunction with other items of plant

supplied under separate contracts and controlled by others under the
supervision of the Engineer.
All testing and commissioning records shall be bound into a separate

volume of the Operations and Maintenance Manual.

SECTION 18 - ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATON

18.1 HV AND LV FACTORY BUILT ASSEMBLIES (F.B.A.'s)
HV FBA's shall comply fully with the requirements of an approved

International Standard for metalclad switchgear and control gear.
LV FBA's shall comply with the requirements of an approved International

Standard for Type Tested Multi-cubicle-type Assemblies in order to provide
fully segregated self contained compartments.
18.1.1 Construction
Switch and control boards shall be factory built assemblies (FBA) and be
constructed and certified by an approved short-circuit testing authority. They
shall normally be of steel, flush fronted cubicle type, and of rigid
construction, the sheet steel being not less than 2 mm. Each FBA shall be
multi-cubicle or multi-box type form 4 with a separate compartment for the
busbars and for each functional unit or group. The protective conductor
shall not be exposed. Unless otherwise detailed they shall be self standing
and have front access. Each enclosure shall be suitably protected to an
approved International Standard against dust, damp & vermin . Removable
back and other plates, where fitted shall be provided with suitable gaskets or
inserts.
Each door shall be :
(a) hung on substantial stainless steel hinges secured with SS bolts.
(b) secured with a corrosion resistant, lockable handle, operating at a

sufficient number of points to ensure firm pressure on the gaskets
around the whole periphery. Lock and handle shall be heavy duty and
approved by the Engineer and shall have common keys, and be
compatible with existing RTA/DM lock types.
(c) interlocked with a fuse-switch disconnector, moulded case circuit

breaker so that, unless otherwise detailed, it cannot be opened unless
all the equipment contained in the cubicle is completely isolated from
all supplies.
A circuit diagram and diagram of connections of permanent nature shall be

mounted inside the termination enclosure.
Steel used for the construction of boards shall be zinc sprayed or equally
protected. Bolts, nuts, washers, etc. shall be of stainless steel. Small fixing
screws and other similar items shall be of non-ferrous metal. Screws, bolts
etc. on the face of boards shall be of stainless steel. Painting shall be to
final coat of stove enameled grey gloss finish for external surfaces, unless
otherwise detailed, and stove enameled white gloss finish for internal
surfaces. Each coat to be individually stoved on. All paints shall be applied
to the directions of the paint manufacturer. Surfaces of boards which will be
in contact with or close to structures shall, in addition, be coated with
bituminous paint or equal.

18.1.2 Earthing Bar
Boards shall be properly earth bonded and provided with a tinned and
sleeved copper earthing bar of minimum size 300 mm2 running the full length
of the board and supplied with terminals of adequate size for connection to
the station earthing system.
18.1.3 Terminals
All internal connections, terminals, and metal supports for equipment and
cables shall be included.
Cables, unless otherwise detailed, shall enter through the underside of the
board via approved cable glands secured to a blank steel glanding plate.
Space shall be provided to accommodate cable glands of appropriate size
for incoming and outgoing circuits. Direct termination on equipment such as
distribution board fuses or miniature circuit breakers is not acceptable.
Undrilled non-ferrous gland plates bolted into position shall be provided
where single core cables are terminated.
All gland plates and trays shall be earthed.
Termination blocks shall not be more than 400 mm from the gland plates.
They shall be referenced, readily accessible, of adequate size and suitable
for accommodating surge diverters.
18.1.4 Busbars
Bus bars and connections shall be identified by phase colour marking and
adequately supported by suitable insulators the whole to be mechanically
and electrically designed to withstand the full fault capacity as specified
herein.
Busbars shall be rated at 50 kA for 1 sec as minimum of solid rectangular

section copper, rigidly supported and extending for the full length of the
board. They shall be of uniform cross sectional area throughout. They shall
be separately housed, arc protection shields being provided at each cubicle
division. Access covers shall carry warning labels. Connections to the
busbars shall take the form of rigidly supported copper strip and the
mechanical and dielectric strength of busbars and supports shall be capable
of withstanding the worst conditions of electrical surge which can occur in
the installation. All bare copper shall be tinned. Busbars and connections to
busbars shall be protected by flame retarded cold shrink or heat shrinkable
tubing.
18.1.5 Anti-Condensation Heaters
Anti-condensation heaters shall be provided unless otherwise detailed.

They shall normally be of enclosed tubular pattern each served from a
service fuse by a front of board rotary switch and shall be controlled via a
humidistat.
The capacity of the anti-condensation heaters shall be considered at 10

watts per square metre of cubical surface area, excluding the base with a

minimum of 20 watts and shall be of available standard range of watts as

follows :-
STANDARD RANGE OF WATTS STANDARD VOLTAGES

20, 30, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120 110, 220V, 380 Volts
18.1.6 Indicating Lamps
Indicating lamps shall be housed in flush mounted, square or circular lamp

units, measuring not less than 25 mm across the smallest dimension.
Bezels shall be of the non-metallic rustproof type. All indicating lamps shall
be low voltage with self contained transformer. Bulbs shall be voltage rated
higher than the transformer secondary to ensure long life.
Indicating lamps shall be supplied from individually fused circuits.
Lamps shall be well ventilated and the design shall permit removal of lamp
glass and bulbs from the front of the unit.
All pilot lamp bulbs shall be of the same voltage regardless of transformer
primary voltage.
18.1.7 Indicating Instruments
Indicating instruments shall be as Clause 18.18
18.1.8 Motor Starter Isolation
Each motor starter shall be provided with its own MCCB or fused switch,
which shall be suitable for padlocking in the "off" position.
18.1.9 Control Circuit Protection
Separate short circuit protection devices shall be provided for each circuit
and shall be clearly marked to show the circuit that is protected.
18.1.10 Rotor Resistances

Rotor resistances shall normally be contained in separate enclosures
adequately ventilated to dissipate heat generated and arranged so that the
grids are accessible. If resistance is installed in the starter section, then a
thermostat shall regulate the temperature of the starter section.
18.1.11 Socket Outlets
Socket outlets where detailed, shall be of low voltage not exceeding 220 V
fed from a suitable double wound and fused transformer with earth leakage
protection. They shall be 3 pin 16 ampere flush socket outlets with flaps.

18.1.12 Metering
When provision for the Dubai Electricity Water Authority (Electric Division)
metering equipment is specified the Contractor shall obtain details of the
equipment and shall submit drawings of the arrangements to be provided
for approval. The approved arrangements shall be incorporated and
annotated in the drawings submitted to the Engineer. When the KWH meter
is supplied by the Control Panel Manufacturer, the meter shall be forwarded
to the Dubai Electricity Water Authority (Electric Division) for calibration tests
prior to installation. The calibration certificates shall be included with the
documentation.
18.1.13 Labeling
Labels shall be colourless transparent plastic material not less than 3mm
thick with beveled edges to half the thickness. Each shall be reverse
engraved in Arabic and English the engraving being filled white and the
reverse side painted blue unless otherwise detailed. Main labels shall be
provided as detailed and subsidiary labels be provided for each item on the
face of the board, stating what it indicates or controls. Any item which is not
isolated at the board shall, in addition, be provided with a warning label
"Danger Live Terminals Isolate Before Maintenance" with flash and voltage
in red letters on white background in Arabic and English. A drawing giving
label sizes and a list of inscriptions shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval before manufacture. All labels shall be fixed before taking-over
tests are carried out.
All external labels shall be affixed with chrome plated nuts and bolts with
slotted holes to allow for expansion of the label. All internal labels shall be
engraved multi-layered plastic to an approved design affixed with chrome
plated nuts and bolts or a permanent adhesive.
18.1.14 Spares
The spare parts list for the FBA’S shall be as approved by the RTA/DM.
A complete spare set of all fuses and indicating lamp bulbs in each cubicle
shall be provided suitably marked and clipped in readily accessible positions,
preferably inside the door; in each cubicle.
18.1.15 Future Equipment
Where provision for future equipment is detailed the arrangement shall be

such that equipment can be installed safely without interfering with the
operation of the existing plant. Cubicles provided for future equipment shall
be complete with busbars and isolators.
18.1.16 Standby Generator Connection
Each panel shall have provision for standby generator incoming supply as
an alternative to the main supply as follows:-
(a) For a load of 125 Amps or less, a suitably rated three position change
over switch with indicator lights shall be provided.

One No. 3 phase, weatherproof neutral and earth, 5 pole male socket for
the connection of a standby power generator supply shall be flush
mounted on the L.H. bottom section of the panel. Where the panel is
located inside of a weather proof kiosk. A lockable door shall be provided
to afford direct access to the socket. Each socket shall be complete with
a female plug for the termination of the generator supply cable. The
socket shall incorporate a mechanically interlocked mechanism to
ensure that the plug is fully/correctly inserted into the socket prior to
switching on the supply. The fitting shall be rated at 125 A, 600 V and
shall be compatible with the existing fittings. Each socket shall be
complete with a secured cover which may be placed in position when the
plug is removed, and as detailed on the single line diagram.
(b) For a load higher than 125 Amps appropriate termination and change
over arrangements shall be provided, and as detailed on the single line
diagram.
18.1.17 Weatherproof Switchboards
Panels for use in locations exposed to the weather shall be installed within
Fibre Glass Kiosks.
(a) All fixing screws, bolts, etc. shall be of stainless steel.
(b) Each push button shall operate through a suitable shroud covering the
whole of the button and forming a barrier between the button and the
interior. All operating spindles on isolators, etc. shall enter their
enclosures through packed glands or similar, to exclude moisture.
(c) Each board shall be protected by an outer shell.
Hinges for kiosks shall be of an approved grade of Stainless Steel and

robust in design. Lock and handle shall be heavy duty and approved by the
Employer and all locks shall have common keys. Door restrainers shall be of
an approved grade of Stainless Steel and of adequate cross section (min. 6
mm x 35 mm). The clear space between the front of the control panel and
the kiosk shall not be less than 650 mm, clearance to the rear and sides
shall be a minimum 300 mm and a maximum of 500 mm for enclosures with
front access only. For enclosures with front and rear access the minimum
clearance to the rear and sides shall be 600 mm.
A generator plug and socket enclosure shall also be provided on the L.H.S.
of the kiosk. The enclosure shall be fitted inside the kiosk, mounted flush
with appropriate opening and lockable doors.
18.1.18 Panel Wiring
Joints of main or control wiring between the components are not permitted.
All control panel wiring, motor starters, control gear and the like shall be
carried out in a neat and systematic manner with cables supported clear of
the panels and other surfaces at all points to obtain free circulation of air.
Claw washers shall be used to terminate all small wiring. Insulating bushes
shall be provided where necessary to prevent chafing of wiring. Neoprene

will not be used with PVC wiring. All panel wiring shall be in PVC sheathed
cable or fire-resisting cable of approved type.
All control panel wiring, motor starters, control gear and the like shall be
carried out in a neat and systematic manner with cables supported clear of
the panels and other surfaces at all points to obtain free circulation of air.
Claw washers shall be used to terminate all small wiring. Insulating bushes
shall be provided where necessary to prevent chafing of wiring.
All circuits above 200 Volts shall be wired in 450 / 750 Volt grade cable but
circuits at 200 Volt and below in 300 / 500 Volt grade cable. The conductors
shall be of copper and shall have a minimum cross sectional area of 1 mm2.
All wire ends shall be tinned before termination and all terminals shall be
protected by PVC sleeves or flame retarded cold shrink or heat shrinkable
tubing. All wires shall be fitted with numbered ferrules of approved type at
each termination.
Crimped lugs shall be fitted to all wires and cables for termination.
18.1.19 Thermal Overload Relays
Thermal overload relays shall be temperature compensated (-10oC/80oC)

sensitive to phase failure, adjustable and be calibrated in terms of motor full
load current. Auxiliary volt free contacts shall be fitted for remote indication
circuits.
Relays shall be manually reset by means of integral push-buttons or levers.
A testing facility shall also be provided. Terminals shall be of the pinch
screw pattern.
18.2 CIRCUIT BREAKERS

18.2.1 H.V. Circuit Breakers
Circuit breakers for use in AC circuits of rated voltage above 1 kV shall be of
either the SF6 insulated, vacuum type or air break type. They shall comply
with an approved International Standard and be suitable for use with the
voltages and fault levels anticipated.
18.2.2 Air Break Circuit Breakers
Circuit breakers of rated voltage below 1 kV shall be of the air break type
and shall be suitable for controlling loads as indicated in the schedules. They
shall comply with an approved International Standard and be suitable for use
on systems with voltages and faults levels anticipated.
18.2.3 General
The circuit breakers should be horizontally isolated, horizontal drawout
pattern air break type. The closing and tripping mechanism shall be as
detailed in the relevant Clauses or schedules.
The operating mechanism shall have a mechanical ON/OFF indicator and a
manual trip device fitted with means for locking test terminal blocks healthy
trip lamp (coloured white) and associated push-buttons set of auxiliary
switches SUPPLY AVAILABLE lamps (blue) (on incoming units only) and

cable boxes complete with glands of suitable size for the accommodation of
the incoming and outgoing cables entering from below.
Each circuit breaker shall be provided with an operations counter.
Closing solenoids shall be suitable for operation at 80% of the nominal

supply voltage.
Closing and tripping batteries shall comply with Clause 18.16.

Auxiliary contacts for the indication of breaker state for use at 24V DC shall
be provided.
Circuit breakers shall be designed and constructed such that inspection

maintenance and replacement of the main fixed and moving contacts shall
be easily possible on site. Detailed manufacturer’s instructions shall be
incorporated in the maintenance manuals. Breakers requiring their complete
return to the manufacturers for service will not be acceptable.
All circuit breakers shall be provided with interlocks to ensure that:-
Circuit breakers cannot be plugged in or isolated when it is closed.
The circuit breaker cannot be closed until it is fully plugged in or completely

isolated.
The circuit breaker cannot be closed in the service position without

completing the auxiliary circuits between the fixed and moving positions.
Facilities shall be provided for testing the circuit breaker operation when in
the isolated and withdrawn position. Auxiliary jumper connections if
necessary shall be included.
The incoming circuit breakers should be fitted with over current tripping and
earth fault relays with auxiliary relay for instantaneous remote trip and
indication.
If transformer protection relays are to be located on the LV breakers an

intertrip relay shall be provided to trip the HV breaker on operation of
transformer protection device.
All incoming circuit breakers shall be fitted with a voltmeter with a selector
switch to read voltage of the line and line to neutral.
Ammeters shall be fitted on the bus bar side voltmeters on the line side of
the incoming circuit breaker trips.
The LV circuit breaker shall trip every time its associated HV circuit breaker
trips.
Any other interlocking shall be provided as necessary to ensure the safe

operation and maintenance of all electrical equipment provided under the
Contract.

All components of the switchgear including bus bars and cable boxes shall
be capable of withstanding the tests outlined in the approved International
Standards.
18.3 EARTH LEAKAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND SWITCH

DISCONNECTORS
Earth Leakage circuit breakers and fuse-switch disconnectors or switch

disconnectors shall, unless otherwise specified, be of front access type.
They shall be of the horizontal draw-out triple pole type, provided with a
detachable neutral link suitable for the system voltage and capable of
withstanding the fault current of the system.
Contacts shall be of robust design, of adequate cross sectional area,

capable of carrying the full load current for an indefinite period and shall be
readily renewable. The fixed contacts shall be shrouded.
The switching mechanism shall be of a well proven type, interlocked to

prevent access under energised conditions and shall incorporate a
mechanical switch position indicator labeled "ON" and "OFF".
18.4 FUSE-SWITCHES AND FUSE-SWITCH DISCONNECTORS
(1) All fuse-switches and fuse-switch disconnectors shall be capable of

withstanding the fault level of the system.
(2) Unless otherwise called for in the detailed specification the following
standards sizes shall be employed throughout :-
60, 100, 150, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600 and 800 A.
60 A units shall be suitable for adapting carriers to accept 30 A fuses.
(3) The switch action shall be parallel, giving a simultaneous make and
break action on all contacts.
(4) Moving contacts shall be provided with suitable fillets between phases
with fixed contacts fully shrouded.
(5) The construction of fuse-switches and fuse-disconnectors shall be

suitable for easy removal of contacts and all moving parts under site
conditions.
18.5 FUSES
Fuses for systems of up to and including 1,000 Volt pressure, shall be of the
HRC cartridge type to approved International Standards.
Control circuit fuses, alarm indicator fuses, semi-enclosed fuses, domestic

consumer unit fuses and high voltage fuses shall be manufactured to an
approved International Standard.

18.6 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
Current transformers shall be manufactured to an approved International

Standard.
18.7 INSTRUMENT VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
Voltage transformers shall be manufactured to an approved International

Standard.
18.8 ISOLATING TRANSFORMERS
Isolating transformers shall be manufactured to an approved International

Standard.
18.9 SELECTOR SWITCHES
(1) Selector switches shall be of robust design and construction and rotary
in operation. Bezels shall be of non-metallic rust-proof type.
(2) Switches for voltmeters shall be capable of selecting :-
R-B, B-Y, Y-R, R-N, B-N, Y-N and OFF
(3) Switches for ammeter
18.10 EARTHING
All switchboards and control boards shall be provided with a proper system
of earthing, suitable for connection to all protective conductors and metallic
sheathing of all associated cables, so as to be effectively connected to the
general mass of earth at the sub-station from which the installation is
supplied, in accordance with approved regulations and codes of practice as
required by the supply authority and to the approval of the Engineer.
18.11 AC MOTORS
(1) AC motors shall be continuously rated to S1 duty and performance and

be suitable for 15 starts per hour.
(2) Conditions of operation and type of protection shall be as given in the

detailed specification.
(3) Frame sizes shall be in accordance with an approved International

Standard.
(4) Commutator segments shall be constructed from hard drawn copper or

equal approved and of ample cross-section with sufficient depth to
permit "skimming".
(5) Brushes where applicable shall be of standard sizes. They shall be
mounted in holders with springs such that the correct pressure is
applied and no portion of the load current is carried by the springs. An
alternative device which ensures constant pressure at the brushes
throughout their life may be offered. The whole brush assembly shall

be continuously rated for the duty and so constructed that it can be

conveniently removed.
(6) Windings shall be designed to give an even temperature distribution,

free from hot spots.
(7) Temperature sensitive thermistor devices shall be embedded in each

phase winding for motors of 7.5 kW and above unless otherwise
specified.
(8) The rotor assembly shall be statically and dynamically balanced,

vibration shall not exceed the limits set out in the approved
International Standard or such finer limits as defined in the detailed
specification. Bearings shall have lubricators suitable for ensuring an
adequate supply of lubricant at all times. For motors of 37 kW and
above the bearings shall have plugged pockets suitable for insertion of
thermometers or temperature probes.
(9) Moving parts of the motor shall be provided with guards and where
appropriate hinged doors shall be provided for easy access to
commutator and brush gear.
(10) Unless otherwise specified, heaters shall be incorporated to prevent

moisture condensation when the motors are stationary. Where heaters
are not fitted the motor shall have a suitable drain hole in the casing.
(11) Terminal boxes shall be conveniently located and of adequate size to

accommodate all connection requirements. The heater and thermistor
connections may be located in the starter box provided they are
isolated from other connections, shrouded, and clearly marked.
Alternatively separate boxes with non-interchangeable covers may be
provided for the heater and thermistor connections. Terminal boxes
shall be provided with removable plates suitable for drilling and tapping
by others unless details of the required drillings are given in the
detailed specification.
(12) Each motor shall be provided with a suitable external earthing terminal.
(13) Each motor shall have a rating plate with the following information:-
(a) Manufacturing standard reference.

(b) Maker’s name and motor type number.
(c) Frame size.
(d) Rating.
(e) Class of insulation.
and, where significant

(f) Ambient working temperature.
(g) Type of coolant.
(h) The permissible overspeed.
In addition motors of 7.5 kW and above shall have individual identification

numbers.

18.12 MOTOR STARTERS
18.12.1 General
The starter cubicles as required are to form part of the FBA and as such
circuit connections protection devices and the like shall comply with the
approved International Standards appertaining to the FBA’s . The cubicles
shall be easily accessible for maintenance purposes and shall be damp-
proof and dust-proof. The motor starter shall comply with an approved
International Standard and shall be suitable to carry the full load current of
its rated duty at its most severe load conditions. All starters shall be capable
of at least 20 starts per hour at 100% full load torque. Motor starters shall be
dust-proof. Motors up to and including 11 kW shall be started direct on line.
Motors above 11 kW shall be started in accordance with applicable clauses
detailed herein.
18.12.2 L.V. Starters
Each starter shall be housed in a separate compartment which shall contain

the following:-
a) 1 No. triple pole MCCB or fuse switch externally operated and

interlocked with the cubicle door. There shall be provision for
padlocking in the OFF position.
b) Contactors selected from one of the following types:-
i. 1 No. TP contactor for switching direct-on-line (DOL) in accordance

with an approved International Standard and fitted with auxiliary
contacts.
ii. Closed transition star-delta starting
iii. For auto-transformer starting there shall be provided magnetically

operated starting, accelerating and running contactors operating
under mechanical or pneumatic timing devices. The auto-
transformer shall limit the starting current to 4 times full load current
(FLC) with 60%, 70% and 80% tappings.
iv. For slip ring rotor resistance starting there shall be provided
magnetically operated starting, accelerating and running contactors
operating under mechanical or pneumatic timing devices.
v. Contactors shall be selected for AC4 duty.
vi. For Solid State Reduced voltage Starting there shall be provided a
micro-processor based electronic logic module and a 3 pole, 6
thyristor (SCR) full wave power section together with the following
features:-
(1) Turn on current adjustment - 100 to 400% FLC.

(2) Pulse start adjustment - 0 to 2 seconds.
(3) Adjustable current ramp time - 2 to 30 seconds.
(4) Starting current limit adjustment - 100 to 400% FLC
(5) Over temperature protection.

(6) Fan assisted cooling above 11 kW.
c) 1 No. Electronic Motor Protection Relay with the following features:-
Protection Against:
overcurrent unbalance
single phase
earth fault
Digital Indication of:
relay settings
% of FLC that the motor is taking
continuous monitoring of thermal capacity of motor
thermal capacity used during start of motor
if tripped, how much time before restart to take place
stall or short circuit trip
earth fault trip
starting
Documentary evidence must be produced showing the current/time

characteristic of each overload at its setting (hot/cold for the thermal
overload) overlaid on the motor manufacturers thermal stability time/current
characteristic for comparison. Consideration must be given as to the
requested method of starting (DOL, auto transformer etc.).
d) 1 Set of auxiliary relays and timers required to provide the necessary

indication and control sequence.
e) Motor starter TEST switch to allow operation of the starter with no

supply to the associated motor.
f) 1 Set of main motor terminals and auxiliary terminals for remote

controls and indicators all complying with clause 18.1.3.
g) 1 Set terminals for remote lock-off stop push buttons.
h) 1 No. 220/110V 50 Hz double wound single phase transformer with

earth screen and of suitable capacity to supply all pilot lamp
requirements. The control and pilot lamp circuits shall be fuse
protected on both sides. The transformer secondary shall be centre
tapped and earthed via a removable bolted earth link. The transformer
primary shall be supplied through a suitably rated fuse and neutral link
via auxiliary contacts of the main fuse switch with a suitably wired
switch marked "TEST" for the purpose of conducting functional tests to
the control circuit whilst the main fuse switch is isolated.
The switch shall be interlocked so as to prevent the closing of the
cubicle door with the said switch in the "ON" position.
i) 1 No. anti-condensation heater (off when starter contactor is closed).
The heater shall be separately fused.

j) 1 Set of power factor correction capacitors with fuses for all corrected
drives.
k) 1 Adjustable thermostat to be mounted in the starting resistance

cubicle and protecting the resistance from overheating by tripping the
main contactors. (Resistance and auto-transformer starting).
The following equipment shall be mounted on the door of the starter cubicle:-
l) 1 No. ammeter fitted with suppressed scale to read motor running and
starting current.
m) 2 No. pilot lamps to indicate "SUPPLY ON" (green) and "MOTOR

RUNNING” (Red).
n) 1 No. pilot lamp to indicate "MOTOR FAILED" (Amber).
o) 1 No. Blue pilot lamp to show automatic operation has been selected.
p) Pilot lamps shall comply with Clause 18.1.6.
q) 1 No. "HAND/OFF/AUTO" selector switch.
r) 1 Local/remote selector switch as required.
s) 1 set "START/STOP" push button.

t) 1 No. externally operated overload reset push button.
u) 1 No. motor and cubicle heater "OFF/AUTO" control switch.
v) 1 No. hour counter reading to 9999 hours.
w) 1 duty label.
1 No. digital display unit.
Volt-free N/O and N/C auxillary contacts wired to terminals for remote
indication of motor running, motor stopped, hand and automatic selected,
shall be provided for all starters.
18.12.3 H.V. Starters
All H.V. starters shall be generally equipped as L.V. starters except as

detailed below.
i) 1 No. TP externally operated load isolating switch mechanically

interlocked with the cubicle doors and electrically interlocked with the
main contactor. The isolator shall have three positions: closed, open
and earthed position. There shall be provision to lock the isolating
switch in the OFF & Earth position.
ii) 1 No. Externally hand operated shrouded control isolator with the
above unit to provide a contactor test facility.
iii) 3 No. bolt on type HRC fuses suitably fault rated.

iv) 1 No. Triple pole H.V. vacuum contactor which shall comply with
requirements of an approved International Standard and be designed
to minimise the mean currents chopped and transient over voltages to
those which could occur with an equivalent air contactor. Continuous
vacuum monitoring facilities shall be provided and interlocked with the
contactor coil.
The contactors shall be suitable for mechanical duty in accordance with an

18.12.4 Slip Ring Rotor Resistance Motor Starters
18.12.4.1 General
Where slip ring rotor resistance motor starters are employed the rotor
resistance shall be of the metal grid type and shall limit the starting current to
that specified for the size of drive.
Rotor resistance shall be mounted in floor standing units, panel top units or
integral panel units.
18.12.4.2 Floor Standing units
The rotor resistance may be mounted within floor standing cubicles

constructed of 2mm (minimum) thick sheet steel of welded construction. The
cubicles shall be provided with adequate ventilation louvers and access to
the resistance units shall be by means of a lockable, hinged front door. The
cubicle shall be arranged for cabling from below.
Both the exterior and interior of the cubicle shall be stove enameled to in
Grey to an approved International Standard. Warning notices to indicate
electrical hazard within shall be fixed to all access panels.
Each cubicle shall be equipped with a heater which shall be continuously
"on" while the associated resistance bank is de-energised.
18.12.4.3 Panel Top Units
The rotor resistance may be mounted within separate cubicles mounted on

top of the control panel. These cubicles shall be identical in construction to
the control panel and dummy cubicles shall be provided as necessary to
ensure uniform height of the entire control panel.
The cubicles shall be provided with adequate ventilation louvres and access
to the resistance units shall be by means of a lockable, hinged front door.
Cable connections to the main control panel shall be via suitable cable
glands to maintain the integrity of the control panel enclosure.
Each cubicle shall be equipped with a heater which shall be continuously

"on" while the associated resistance bank is de-energised.
18.12.4.4 Integral Panel Units

The rotor resistance may be mounted within a cubicle within the control
panel itself provided that:-
(a) The resistance cubicle is adequately ventilated front and rear.
(b) The resistance cubicle is provided with suitable cable gland entries to
maintain the integrity of the control panel enclosure.
(c) The resistance cubicle is located so that no electrical components are

mounted above it.
(d) The motor starter equipment is located in a separate, totally enclosed

cubicle within the control panel.
(e) 1 No. TP wound magnetic overload relay fully adjustable but set at the
actual current setting required to trip under a stalled motor condition
within the maximum time that the motor characteristic permits this
condition to exist.
18.13 MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (M.C.C.B'S)
(1) M.C.C.B's shall withstand the system short circuit current of not less
than 30 KA.
(2) M.C.C.B's shall accommodate the maximum number of poles

available.
(3) The rated voltage insulation shall not be less than 600 V AC and the
rated operation voltage shall not be less than 380 V AC.
(4) The rated operational current for uninterrupted duty shall meet loading
requirements.
(5) The switching mechanism shall be fully interlocked with the

compartment door to prevent entry by personnel while the M.C.C.B is
in the energised position.
(6) All contacts shall be shrouded to prevent accidental contact by
operations and maintenance personnel.
(7) Thermal and magnetic settings shall be adjustable.
(8) Volt free contacts shall be provided for ON/OFF indication, contacts
shall be wired to case mounted terminals.
18.14 PUMP CONTROLS
The control unit shall be suitable for operation on 220 V AC supply and in
the ambient conditions prevailing in Dubai. It shall contain a built -in battery
with a minimum life of 2 years. Stored data shall be protected from being
lost in the event of a power failure. The unit shall record the time taken to
empty the sump and calculate the idle time to continuously adapt the
operation of the pump(s) to the station inflow to achieve the most
economical operation. The current sensors for use in conjunction with the

computer logic system shall be either a current transformer or a low level

sensor and shall be installed in the control panel.
The current transformer primary current shall be as close to the pump's

operating current as possible.
The control system shall have the following facilities:-
(1) The pumps shall be controlled automatically by a computer logic

system installed in the control panel using signals received from float
level switches on a 1st duty, 2nd duty/standby (2 pumps only) and 3rd
duty/standby (3 pumps) to chamber of pumps basis with a common
stop. The duties shall alternate automatically.
(2) Each pump shall be capable of selection for manual/auto duty.
(3) The automatic duty shall be selected by an auto/hand selector switch.
(4) Each pump in manual shall be controlled by start/stop push button.
(5) Individual pump start delay to reduce starting current surges.
(6) The emergency stop (low level) float shall be in circuit for both manual
and auto modes of operation and shall stop all the pumps.
(7) A high level in the pump shall be indicated in the panel through a float
switch and a continuously rated flasher light mounted on top of the
kiosk marked 'HIGH LEVEL IN SUMP'.
(8) Reset button to erase all stored operating data from the memory.
18.15 TELEMETRY SYSTEM
The objectives and key features of the telemetry system will be as follows:
(1) The monitoring and remote control of automatically operating plant

from a central point.
(2) To provide operational data for both normal and fault conditions
including the initiation of alarms in order to minimise the frequency of
visits and to provide a prompt response to faults.
(3) To collect, store and process operational data for management

purposes.
The system shall make use of the public telephone network.
Sufficient space shall be provided in the control panel for the telemetry
system. The Contractor will be provided with outline requirements for the
system and will be required to then offer detailed proposals and
specifications for the plant and equipment to be supplied.

The specifications, plant and equipment etc. shall be subject to the approval
of both the Employer and the Engineer.
During the commissioning/start up period of the system it will be necessary

to provide appropriate training and instruction in the operation and
maintenance of the system for the Employer's operations staff.
18.16 BATTERY UNITS
The battery and charger shall be housed in a single sheet steel floor
mounted ventilated cabinet with batteries housed in the lower part of the
cubicle.
The unit shall be complete with a self adjusting constant potential trickle
charger suitable for operating from a 220V single phase AC supply. The
charger shall be rated to continuously energise relay coils and lamps as
applicable. The charger shall be designed to maintain a constant voltage
within 3% irrespective of mains voltage or frequency variation. Booster
charge facilities shall be included.
The unit shall be fitted with the following:-
1 No. Supply ON indicating lamp
1 No. ON/OFF switch
1 No. Charger ammeter
1 No. OFF/FLOAT/BOOST switch
1 No. Charger failure alarm relay and lamp
1 Set of cable terminals and fuses.
All battery cells shall be either nickel iron or nickel cadmium structure with an
alkaline electrolyte and be provided with a suitable drip tray to protect the
cabinet from corrosion caused by accidental spillage of the battery medium.
Batteries shall be 30V or 110V DC and of suitable ampere hour capacity to
operate the closing and tripping coils motor of the circuit breakers. Dual duty
batteries (i.e. for engine starting and for tripping circuit breakers) will not be
acceptable.
18.17 TRANSFORMERS
18.17.1 Standards
Transformers shall be manufactured to an approved International standard

and be of the Naturally Air Cooled Oil Filled Hermetically Sealed type.
Transformer oil shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the local
conditions.

18.17.2 Windings
The windings shall be connected delta-star with group 4 phase displacement

primary to secondary vector group reference DY11 (plus 30o) with the star
point of the secondary winding brought out through the tank and suitably
terminated in a separate housing for solid earthing in addition to the neutral
connection. Provision shall be made for current transformers for fault
protection to be mounted on both neutral and earth connections.
The percentage value of the equivalent impedance of each transformer shall

not be less than that required to restrain the secondary voltage fault level to
the maximum permitted by the switchgear.
Solid insulation material for immersed type transformers shall be as defined

in an approved International Standard modified as necessary for service in
an ambient temperature of 50oC.
The high voltage windings shall be provided with tapping at +5%, +2.5%, -
2.5%, -5% with constant flux voltage variation as defined in an approved
International Standard.
Tap selection shall be by means of an externally operated manual control

off-circuit tapping selector. A mechanical tap position indicator shall be
provided and the selector shall be capable of being padlocked in any
position.
The tap changing selector shall be located below the oil level inside the tank
and the selector operating rod shall extend outside the tank.
18.17.3 Construction
The core shall be constructed from cold rolled steel laminations

manufactured to an approved International Standard. The laminations shall
be insulated from each other by means of a suitable temperature resistant oil
proof coating.
The windings design and construction shall provide adequately designed

and located coolant flow ducts so that possible hot spots are eliminated.
Windings shall be braced to withstand dynamic stresses due to short circuit
conditions. Full details shall be provided of arrangements for taking up or
eliminating coil shrinkage during service. The core and winding shall be
designed so that the iron loss is at a minimum but the ratio of copper loss to
iron loss shall be in accordance with an economic design and the
manufacturer shall state the ratio used.
The arrangement of internal connections shall be such that the transformer
core and winding may be lifted bodily from the tank without disturbing the
cable boxes or insulators.
The transformer tanks shall be constructed from high grade steel with
electrically welded seams. The structure of the tank shall enable it to be
handled whilst filled with oil and shall be pressure tested to 70 kN/m2.

Tank shall be fitted with skids and four removable rollers and lifting eyes
suitable for the mass of the transformer and oil.
The tanks shall be provided with external cooling tubes to provide natural
cooling under the climatic conditions.
All terminals shall be brought out through oil tight insulating glands into
respective disconnecting terminal chambers to facilitate cable testing.
The tanks shall be non-breathing hermetically sealed type.
The tank covers shall be of such construction as will prevent the

accumulation of moisture and shall be bolted to a flange on the tank top to
form a weather-proof seal. All gaskets shall be of synthetic rubber and cork
compositions. The tank tubes and all steelwork shall be shot blasted
internally and externally before painting and a rust inhibiting paint shall be
applied to both external and internal surfaces before applying a final finish.
The exterior shall be given an additional coat on Site of a durable oil and
weather resisting paint of an approved colour.
The design and construction of the transformer core winding and tank shall
ensure that the noise level at full load is kept to the minimum consistent with
economic design. The tank shall be reinforced or braced where necessary
to reduce the noise level.
The complete transformer arranged for service shall be capable of

withstanding the specified impulse voltage on the H.V windings.
All windings, winding terminals and connections shall be fully immersed in oil
under all operating conditions and materials shall be suitable for this duty
and not be subject to deterioration from contact with oil.
The windings shall be thoroughly dried out under vacuum at the

manufacturer's works and shall be delivered to Site filled with oil to the
normal level and ready for service.
18.17.4 Fittings
The following fittings are required:-
(a) Thermometer pockets, one for oil and one for winding temperature.
(b) 200 mm diameter dial type oil and winding temperature indicators each
fitting with 2 No. sets of adjustable contacts for alarm and trip
functions.
(c) Rating and diagram plate complying with an approved International
Standard and of a durable and non-corrodable material.
(d) Oil gauge clearly visible from ground levels.
(e) Pressure relief valve with alarm contacts.

(f) Separate neutral earthing terminal with independent access cover

enclosed with a weather-proof housing for the restricted earth fault
current transformer.
(g) Earthing terminal.
(h) Marshalling box for overtemperature, pressure alarm and trip contacts.
(i) Large identity labels shall be affixed to each transformer identifying

their primary circuit breaker.
(j) H.V and MV disconnecting chambers where compound filled cable

boxes are provided.
All joints shall be arranged so that they may be tightened externally.
A H.V compound filled cable sealing box complying with an approved

International Standard shall be provided. Large filling orifices and adequate
expansion space shall be provided. The necessary compound shall be
included.
The cable boxes shall be completely detachable from the transformer

without breaking the cable termination. Suitably drilled cable sockets shall
be provided.
18.18 INSTRUMENTS, INDICATORS AND TRANSMITTERS
Where not specified elsewhere, the following shall apply:-
18.18.1 General
All instruments, gauges and control equipment shall be to approval, and

those which perform similar duties shall be of uniform type and manufacture
throughout the scheme in order to facilitate maintenance and the stocking of
spare parts. Moving parts and contacts shall be adequately protected from
the ingress of dust, and all instruments shall be protected by moisture and
dustproof cases including those mounted in panels. All equipment shall be
suitable for its environment and of industrial quality.
Panel mounted receiving instruments shall be of the electrically operated

miniature flush mounting type unless otherwise stated.
Where applicable each instrument chassis shall be easily withdrawable from

its housing for maintenance without interrupting its signal.
All instrument bezels shall be finished in black
Main indicating instruments shall be of 140 mm minimum diameter.

Secondary indicating instruments shall be of 75 mm minimum diameter.
Scales shall be clearly marked with black lettering and graduations on a
white background. Instruments of the same type and range have identical
scales. Ranges shall be selected to show normal plant operation between
50% and 75% of the instruments range.

18.18.2 Instrument Ranges
Indicating instruments shall be selected to operate using the following units:-
Flow l/s Litres per second

Level m Metres
Pressure m.hd Metres head of water
o
Temperature C Degree Centigrade
p.p.m Parts per million
Concentration
Mg/l Milligram per litre
Current A Amperes
Voltage V Volts
Power W Watts
Electrical Energy Whr Watt-hours
Frequency Hz Hertz
Speed r.p.m. Revolutions per minute
Standard S.I. multipliers shall be used (kilo-, milli- etc.).
18.18.3 Field Mounted Instruments
Field mounted instruments shall, where possible be hermetically sealed. If

this is not possible they shall be of weatherproof construction with heavy
cast metal cases.
Transmitters and similar equipment shall be further enclosed in purpose

made weatherproof, glass reinforced fire-retardant polyester resin cabinets.
Particular regard shall be paid to the ease of access to all instruments. Serial
number/calibration plates shall be visible when the instrument is in its
cabinet.
Locally mounted indicating instruments shall be mounted in viewable

positions.
Field mounted instruments shall be complete with all mounting brackets,

pillars, sun shades, fittings and fixings to complete the installation.
18.18.4 Panel Mounted Instruments
Panel mounted instruments shall where possible be hermetically sealed. If

this is not possible they shall be enclosed in moisture and dust proof cases.
18.18.5 Indicators
All indication instruments shall have performances and scale markings in

line with an approved International Standard.

Level indicators shall be scaled vertically, alarm levels being indicated by red
areas.
Motor current ammeters shall have red lines or adjustable movable pointers
to indicate motor full load current.
18.18.6 Digital Indicators
Digital flow indicators shall be three figure electronic digital display type.
Precaution shall be taken to ensure that fluctuation in the signal, however
caused, does not render the last figure to unstable and unreadable during
normal running when updating of readings at three second intervals.
Indicators shall read zero at “no flow” condition.
Direct readings shall be displayed without use of conversion factors other

than multiples of ten, which shall be clearly indicated. Display figures shall
be 14 mm gas discharge and visible from 12 metres distance.
18.18.7 Integrators
Flow integrators shall be six figure non-resettable mechanical impulse

counters with a minimum figure size of 9 mm x 4.5 mm.
Electronic counters may be employed providing precautions are taken to
maintain the count during power failure.
Integrators must not record under “no flow” condition.
Direct readings shall be displayed without use of conversion factors other

than multiples of ten which shall be clearly indicated.
18.18.8 Chart Recorders
All chart recorders for use in control and instrument panels, desks, consoles,
etc., shall comply with the following unless specified elsewhere.
Maintain accuracy of quantity and time measurement to an approved

International Standard.
Have a separate scale plate for each signal channel.
Have a linear scale not less than 100 mm long with clear graduations and
markings.
Have the units of the measured variable and any multiplying factor clearly
marked on the scale plate.
Be flush mounting with black bezel.
Be designed so that the chart may be withdrawn from the front and replaced
without interrupting the indicating section.
Have a plug-in chassis which may be withdrawn from the front leaving the
housing in position, without interrupting its signal.

Have a minimum chart speed of 20mm per hour and a minimum chart
duration of 4 weeks.
Have charts with printed calibration of 0-100% and 24 hr. time marks.
Have a window of anti-glare or low reflectivity glass in a hinged, lockable

door which opens a full 180o, with adequate window and door sealing to
prevent the ingress of dust and reduce the ingress of moisture to an
absolute minimum.
Match all other meters and instruments (including indicating meters, meter
relays, integrators etc.) on the same panel, and on similar panels in the
same room, as regards style, finish and appearance.
The Contractor shall ensure that all meters intended for installation on
inclined surfaces are suitable for that application, and that when so mounted
the accuracy will be maintained over the whole range.
Sufficient charts shall be provided for two year operation at the time of
take-over.
18.18.9 Transmitters
Transmitters shall provide 4 mA to 20 mA output signals proportional to the

measured conditions. They shall operate on a 2 wire system receiving their
power from the residual 4 mA in the transmission signal. They shall be fitted
with output meters to give an approximate indication of transmitter output
scaled 0 - 100%.
Differential pressure transmitters which shall have capacitance or inductive

type sensing elements shall be fitted with direct mounted, stainless steel, 3
valve manifolds. Pressure and level transmitters shall be fitted with two
valve manifolds.
Transmitters shall be manufactured from materials suitable for use with the
process medium and for the site ambient conditions and this shall be
Pipework shall be run in copper or stainless steel pipe as appropriate with a

minimum gradient of 1 in 12 after an initial rise (gas) or fall (liquid) of 300
mm.
Transmitter equipment should be supplied and installed complete in all detail

including pipework, stop cocks, drain cocks and any similar ancillary items of
equipment.
Process data, calibrated span, range, output, protection, accuracy and

connection details shall be as necessary to satisfy the particular specification
requirements.

The transmitter shall have non-interacting external zero and span

adjustment and shall have facility for an optional external damping
adjustment.
Each transmitter shall be equipped with a stainless steel nameplate,

permanently attached, indicating the following specified data as a minimum:-
1. Transmitter tag no.

2. Purchase order no.
3. Name and address of manufacturer
4. Type/Model no.
5. Serial no.
6. Calibrated range
7. Range and maximum working pressure, temperature, speed, vibration
level etc.
8. Materials of construction
9. Electrical protection classification.
18.19 FLOW MEASURING EQUIPMENT
18.19.1 Electro Magnetic Flow Meters
Magnetic flow meters shall be provided in accordance with the following:-
Meters shall be of the short form, having a modulated, direct current

excitation and inherent total zero stability.
The power consumption shall not exceed 16 watts per 100 mm of diameter.
The output shall be 4-20 mA and the system accuracy shall be within 0.75%
of the flow rate. Test Certificates shall be provided.
The field coils shall be fully encapsulated.
The equipment shall be guaranteed suitable for the ambient and process
liquid temperatures and the atmospheric environment.
Each flow-meter primary element shall be supplied with a Teflon liner and
electrodes of material best suited to the particular process fluid.
Primary units shall be as follows:-
Suitable for accidental submergence to a depth of 3 metres.
Have flanges in accordance with the relevant mechanical clauses relating to

pipes, flanges, fittings etc.,
Rated well in excess of the maximum possible fluid pressure, including

possible surge pressures.
Be supplied and installed complete with Flange Adaptor coupling or similar

approved arrangement to permit removal for repair or inspection.

Incorporate electrodes to detect when the pipe is not full. The detectors
output shall control circuits within the converter to short out the analogue
signal and initiate an indication of the "pipe not full" condition.
a. Complete with amplifier (converter), drive unit (if applicable) and all
cable for connecting between the components. Where this equipment is
exposed to the environment it shall be housed in a GRP enclosure.
The amplifier/converter shall be:-
Fully screened to prevent interference from adjacent equipment.
Incorporate voltage stabilisation to ensure maintenance of system accuracy

with a supply variation of +10%.
b. Each installation shall be provided with Ultrasonic electrode cleaning

equipment or inherent protection against sludge build up. This facility
shall include equipment for hand and automatic operation, and shall be
installed complete with the necessary switches, push-buttons, timers etc.
c. Where the flow-meter is exposed to the environment provision shall be
made to protect the detector head from direct sunlight. The protective
device shall be secure with ease of removal for maintenance purposes.
18.19.2 Ultrasonic In-line Flow Meter
Ultra-sonic flow measuring equipment for "in-pipe" applications shall operate

on the phase difference technique employing 2 No. ultra-sonic probes
displaced longitudinally and mounted on opposite sides of the pipe to detect
the difference between the upstream and downstream flight times. The
equipment shall include acoustic transducers and a transmitter, and shall be
installed complete with all necessary fittings, cables and connectors.
The acoustic transducers shall be non-intrusive and arranged so that they

may be removed without shutting down the process line.
All materials in contact with the process liquid shall be approved for use in
the specified application.
All items of equipment attached to the pipe and/or pipe insert shall be of non-
corrosive material, designed to withstand continuous submergence to a
pressure of 3m head and guaranteed suitable for the temperature and
process pressures, including maximum possible surge pressures.
The transmitter shall process the signals from the acoustic transducers and
shall:-
(i) provide an output of 4 - 20 mA proportional flow,

(ii) be suitable for direct or wall mounting with up to 30m of cable,
incorporate contacts to initiate an alarm in the event of mal-function,
(iv) include facilities for field checking and zero adjustment.

The complete system shall operate with a minimum accuracy of ±1.5% of full
scale deflection over the full ambient temperature range. A test certificate
shall be provided for each set of equipment.
18.19.3 Ultrasonic Open Channel Flow Measuring Equipment
Where ultra-sonic equipment is specified for measuring flow in open channels,

the equipment shall be supplied and installed in accordance with the above
Clause 18.20.1, except that in this application the control unit shall be micro-
processor based incorporating algorithms for converting level to flow, as
appropriate and shall provide a 4-20 mA output proportional to flow. The
system accuracy shall be within ±1.0% of the instrument span over the
range 5% to 100% flow.
18.19.4 Installation of Ultrasonic Sensors
Each ultra-sonic sensor shall be installed on a robust, rigid structure

provided for the purpose under this Contract. The structure shall include a
means of leveling the sensor so that the transmitted beam is perpendicular
to the liquid surface and shall provide a safe and easy access to the sensor
for servicing and maintenance.
The Contractor shall, where applicable, provide a canopy around and/or

above the sensor and/or the control unit to provide a protection from direct
sunlight.
18.20 LEVEL MEASURING & CONTROL EQUIPMENT
18.20.1 Ultrasonic Level Measuring Equipment
Where ultra-sonic level measuring equipment is specified , level measurement

shall be accomplished by the use of non-contact, echo-time measuring
equipment operating at ultra-sonic frequency. The equipment shall transmit
pulses which are reflected back to the sensor from the surface of the liquid
whose level is being measured.
The equipment shall consist of a hermetically sealed sensor incorporating

both transmitter and receiver, together with a separate control unit.
The equipment shall be provided with automatic temperature compensation,
shall be suitable for operation in the designated application under the
prevailing climatic and environmental conditions.
The sensor shall be suitable for mounting in the open, or within an enclosed
tank, and shall be totally enclosed and hoseproof with environmental
protection appropriate for the installed location.
The control units shall incorporate facilities for adjusting independently both
zero and span, and shall have an output of 4-20 mA proportional to level.
The overall accuracy of the level measurements shall be within ±1.0% of the
instrument span.
The connection between the sensor and control unit shall be via a single
length of commercially available screened cable, and the equipment shall

operate with up to 150 metres of such cable. Cable connections / joints will
not be permitted above the processing liquor.
The Contractor shall ensure that all equipment is suitable for the application,
particularly with regard to the blocking distance and transmitted beam angle
/ cone.
18.20.2 Pressure Level Measuring Equipment
Where pressure level measuring equipment is specified in the relevant

application clause, level measurement shall be accomplished by the use of a
chemically inert high density fine ceramic transducer.
The equipment shall be provided with automatic temperature compensation,

shall be suitable for operation in the designated application under the
prevailing climatic and environmental conditions.
The sensor shall be hermetically sealed and suitable for mounting in sewage.
It shall be readily removable.
The control units shall incorporate facilities for adjusting independently both
zero and span, and shall have an output of 4-20 mA proportional to level.
The overall accuracy of the level measurements shall be within ±1.0% of the
instrument span. The connection between the sensor and control unit shall be
via a single length of commercially available screened cable, and the
equipment shall operate with up to 150 metres of such cable. Cable
connections / joints will not be permitted above the process liquor.
18.20.3 Float Level Control Equipment
Where float level equipment is specified, level control shall be accomplished

by the use of a plastic encapsulated float switch. The float switch shall operate
at 24V AC for irrigation installations and 48V AC for sewerage installations.
The Float casing shall be manufactured of polypropylene supported by a
Stainless steel suspension chain.
18.21 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF LIGHTING AND SMALL POWER

INSTALLATIONS
The Contractor shall provide and install all the necessary fittings, sub-
distribution boards, contactors, etc. for the complete small power and lighting
installations as follows:-
18.21.1 Small Power Installations
General
Low voltage supplies required for illumination and power supplies etc. shall be
as follows:-
Socket outlets shall be manufactured from polycarbonate and protected from

the ingress of dust and moisture to an approved standard. All socket outlets
shall be colour coded in compliance with an approved International Standard.
Each socket shall be provided with a plug.

All handlamps shall be 25V and the socket outlets colour coded violet.
220V socket outlets colour coded blue.
380V socket outlets colour coded red.
Installation
Small Power Installations shall be provided so that the following facilities are
available in each area.
a) Motor Room
16 amp 250 V 3 pin un-switched socket outlets (sufficient quantities to

ensure that any extension cable used does not exceed 3m).
16 amp 25 V socket outlets (sufficient quantities to ensure that any

extension cable used does not exceed 3m).
32 amp 380 V TP&N socket, switched and mechanically interlocked.
b) Control Rooms
A minimum of 4 No. twin 13 amp 220 V switched socket outlets; final

numbers and arrangement are subject to approval.
c) Exterior to Wet Well
32 amp TP&N socket, switched and mechanically interlocked
d) Pump Chamber Dry Well
As motor room.
e) GRP Kiosks (for control panels)
As motor room with sockets at each panel end.
f) Accommodation
A minimum of 2 No. Twin 13 amp 220 V switched socket outlets to an

approved International Standard to each habitable room and kitchen.

18.21.2 Lighting Installations
General
Lighting installations shall be provided to give minimum illumination levels as

detailed below. Lighting levels will be measured at a plane 1000 mm above
ground/ floor/ access level. Two way switching will be included for areas
where access may be gained via two physically separate points.
The Contractor shall prepare lighting layout drawings of sufficient detail to

enable duct requirements to be ascertained prior to the casting of roof
beams and columns. Lighting conduits shall be surface mounted on ceilings
and walls except in tiled areas where the conduits shall be concealed
beneath the tiles.
The lighting shall be located in easily accessible positions for the purpose of
maintenance. If this is not possible the Contractor shall advise the method
for undertaking maintenance and if this requires special equipment such as
scaffolding, hoists or access tower, this shall be provided by the Contractor
at no extra cost.
The Contractor shall submit his proposed scheme together with details of the
fittings he proposes to use and his calculations of illumination levels for the
Engineer’s approval.
The following lighting levels shall apply:
a) Motor Room
350 lux using energy efficient anti-corrosive fluorescent fitting with

polycarbonate diffuser;
b) Dry Well
350 lux using energy efficient watt anti-corrosive fluorescent fitting with
polycarbonate diffuser;
c) Control Rooms
400 lux using energy efficient fluorescent fittings with easy clean antiglare
diffusers.
d) Wet Well
As dry well, all fittings to be approved for Zone 1 environment.
e) External Lighting
Over each external entrance door there shall be installed 1 No. 250 watt
high pressure sodium floodlights controlled by an external weather-proof
switch.

On the exterior of building mounted on each corner shall be polycarbonate

vandal proof light fittings controlled by a light sensitive cell with manual
override. This system shall be fully automatic and be mounted in the FBA.
f) Access/Car Park Areas
An average illumination of 20 lux shall be achieved.
g) Miscellaneous
GRP Kiosks (for control panels)
As motor room to provide sufficient lighting to be able to maintain the FBA at

night.
External Maintenance Areas
Sodium weather-proof floodlighting to provide 50 lux at the working height.

Final locations of these units to be agreed at site.
Accommodation
Each room to contain sufficient 100 Watt light fittings with opaque white
glass to achieve the illumination level defined in an approved International
Standard as appropriate for the intended use of the room.
18.21.3 Emergency Lights
Emergency lights shall be wall-mounted, twin lamp units arranged to give at

least 3 hours illumination in the event of main power supply failure. The
units shall include integral battery, battery charger and battery status
indicator. A lamp test facility shall be included. Emergency light units shall
be connected to a dedicated electrical circuit separate from all other lighting
or small power supplies.
Lamps shall be provided as follows:
Motor Room - 1 No. unit adjacent to each access door;
Dry Well - 1 No. unit at each stairway landing plus 1 No. unit at pump level.
Control Room - 1 No. unit adjacent to each access door.
Accommodation - 1 No. unit adjacent to each access door.
18.22 PORTABLE PLANT
The Contractor shall supply for each pumping station:
1 No. Gripper Type handlamp with wire cage and 25 V, 40 watt B.C. rough
service lamp complete with 30 metres of 3 core tough rubber sheathed cable
and plug suitable for low voltage socket outlets;

1 No. 500 watt, 220 V, 50 Hz weather-proof portable floodlight complete with

stand, 30 metres of 3 core T.R.S. cable with plug suitable for 220 V volt
socket outlet;
18.23 WIRING & CABLING ACCESSORIES
Generally for all small power and lighting installations the following Clauses
shall apply:-
18.23.1 Wiring
Wiring shall be carried out in PVC cable enclosed in conduit. The minimum
copper conductor size used shall not be less than 1.5mm2. The use of
junction boxes between fittings shall be kept to a minimum and where
practicable all connections shall be made at the fitting. Where used junction
boxes shall be rectangular pattern and where possible their position shall be
hidden from immediate view but not made inaccessible. Circuit wiring shall
not be connected directly onto the terminals of lighting fittings but shall be
made off in point boxes consisting of a standard box containing porcelain
shrouded pinch screw connectors to which connections shall be made to the
light fitting by heat resistant flexible cables.
18.23.2 Distribution Boards
All distribution boards shall be of the totally enclosed metal clad pattern (500
V rating) manufactured in accordance with an approved International
Standard.
The enclosure shall be made from zinc coated mild steel formed to a clean
line and complete with a lockable hinged cover with gasket. Removable
plates with conduit knockouts shall be provided at top and bottom.
All distribution boards shall be complete with a Residual Current Circuit
Breaker. The circuit breaker shall be rated and have the same number of
phases as the circuit from which it is fed.
Doors shall be fitted with gaskets and shall be easily removable to preserve
the finish and simplify installation. Each distribution board shall be arranged
for top and bottom cable entry and shall be provided with an ample cable
termination plate and chamber to enable cables to be neatly glanded with
tails grouped and terminated onto appropriate internal termination's.
Distribution boards shall be wall or floor mounted and shall when specified
incorporate on-load isolators which shall be front of panel operated with
ON/OFF indicator and capable of being padlocked in the OFF position.
Distribution boards shall incorporate HBC cartridge fuses or combinations of
single pole and neutral and triple pole miniature pole circuit breakers
(MCB's) as specified.
Each bank of MCB's/fuses shall be clearly identified with its appropriate

phase colour code and the mounting framework for the banks of
MCB's/fuses shall be easily removable to simplify installation. Adequate
phase barriers and shields shall be fitted to ensure that after installation and
wiring all bare terminals and wires are covered to prevent accidental contact
with live conductors during the normal procedure of fuse changing and
resetting of MCB's.

All distribution boards shall have a fusing factor of 1.5 to afford "close"
overcurrent protection to circuits.
All neutral bars shall have a separate terminal for each fuseway within the
distribution boards.
The termination of the circuit cables at distribution boards shall be neat and
slack left at each fusebank or neutral bar to enable the complete assembly
to be removed for inspection without disconnection. Neutral conductors shall
be connected to the bar in the same order as the phase conductor to the
fuseway.
Each distribution board shall be complete with a permanent circuit

identification chart preferably mounted within the front door. This chart shall
be permanently and legibly filled in as circuits are completed with the circuit
description including the fuse rating.
Painting of distribution boards shall be in approved colours.
18.23.3 Socket Outlets
Socket outlets shall be connected to a ring circuit with each 30 amp circuit
feeding a maximum floor space of 50m2. All socket outlets shall be
switched and of the shuttered type. They shall accept 13 amp. square plugs
and comply with an approved International Standard. They shall be selected
from one of the following types.
(a) Surface and externally mounted socket outlets shall be manufactured

from polycarbonate and protected from the ingress of dust and
moisture to an approved International Standard.
(b) Flush mounted socket outlets shall be of the grid switch pattern with
matt chrome heat cured powder lacquer finish covers.
18.23.4 Switches
Switches shall be of the "multiple phase" type incorporating phase barriers

with the switches arranged in multigang boxes. They shall be one of the
following types:-
a) Surface and externally mounted switches shall be manufactured from

polycarbonate and protected from the ingress of dust and moisture to
an approved International Standard.
b) Flush mounted switches shall be of the grid switch pattern with matt
chrome heat cured powder lacquer finish covers.
Special care shall be taken to ensure that all switches are securely
fixed truly vertical and that flush mounted switches are flush with the
wall finish so that the overlapping cover plates seat onto the rims of the
boxes.
18.23.5 Lighting Fittings

Lighting fittings shall be complete with all supports, suspensions, flexible

cables, pendants and plugs. They shall be connected to the main circuit
wiring with heat resisting flexible cables of a minimum conductor size of
1.5m2 insulated with silicon rubber.
Break joint rings shall be used in conjunction with batten holders, ceiling
roses or back plates mounted onto a flush installation.
The earthing of all pendant or semi-pendant fittings shall be by a separate

core in the connecting flex or cable securely bonding the earth terminal on
the fitting to the glanded joint of interconnecting cables. In no case shall
pendant chains or conduit support tube be used as a means of earthing.
Standard fluorescent lighting fittings shall have two suspension or fixing

points.
Lampholders for flexible pendants, batten or wall mounting shall be of the all
insulated skirted pattern with cord grips. All lampholders shall be of the
bayonet cap pattern.
The point box suspensions and other parts of the lighting fittings shall be
erected at times to suit the building programme for decoration. The
glassware, diffusers, shades, lamps and tubes shall not be fitted until all
building work is complete.
All fittings shall be left clean inside and outside ready for use. All fluorescent
fittings shall be suitable for instant start.
All fluorescent tubes shall be of an approved manufacture and standard

white in colour. They shall be suitable for the lighting fittings in which they
are installed and of the correct voltage. Diffusers on fluorescent fittings shall
be polycarbonate.
All incandescent lamps shall be of an approved manufacture with metal coil

filaments gas filled pearl in standard sizes with standard caps to suit the
fittings in which they are installed.
The Contractor shall supply and install all lamps for the entire lighting
installation and shall replace all burned out lamps up to the time that the
Employer takes final acceptance of the works.
18.24 CABLES
18.24.1 General
All multi-cored cables on low voltage installations shall be 600/1000V grade.

Manufacturer's test certificates shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval of the material before commencing cable installation.
Where a neutral conductor is required this conductor shall be in the form of a

core of the same section as the other cores.

The Contractor shall ensure that each cable is of sufficient rating for its
normal and fault conditions. To assess the rating and cross section required
for each cable the following factors shall be considered:-
(a) Fault level.
(b) Conditions of ambient temperature relevant to method of laying.
(c) voltage drop.
(d) Voltage drop in motor circuits due to starting.
(e) Overcurrent settings of circuit breakers.
(f) Disposition of cabling whether in air, ducts or ground.
Cable ratings shall be calculated in accordance with an approved procedure.
The Contractor shall submit details of the cable sizes for the Engineer's
approval before ordering.
The Contractor shall be responsible for measuring the length of cable
required.
Each cable shall be supplied in a suitable length, continuous through its run.
Through joints will not be permitted without the written permission of the
Engineer.
The earthing conductor shall be of adequate cross sectional area and shall
either be one core of a multicore cable or a separately run single core cable.
The use of conduit, water or other service pipes in any part of the earth
continuity conductor is strictly prohibited.
The Contractor shall supply and install all necessary cable glands and
sealing boxes required to complete the installation.
The cores of each cable shall be taken direct to the terminals of the
equipment to be connected. Cable ends shall be sealed in suitable
chambers bolted to terminal boxes.
The general routing of cables is indicated on the Drawings but the final
routes shall be agreed with the Engineer before any work in connection with
the cable installation is commenced. All cables shall be installed in strict
accordance with the requirements of this Specification.
Cables with a conductor size of less than 1.5mm2 section shall not be used
in the installation.
All cables used shall bear the manufacturer's original guarantee and all
cables shall be delivered to Site in their original wrappings. The Contractor
shall obtain the permission of the Engineer before removing wrappings and
commencing installation.
The Contractor shall ensure that the installation is installed so that no more
than one phase will occur at switch lighting or power outlets where these
outlets are less than 2.5m apart unless guarded by a wall partition or other

barrier. If this is impracticable the Contractor shall obtain the advice of the
Engineer before proceeding.
The scheme of wiring shall conform to the colour code requirements of an

A minimum tail length of 250mm shall be left on all cables at outlet positions
for connection of the apparatus fed by the outlet.
The installation of multi-core and single core cables or bunching of cables in

conduit is to be carried out on the assumption that such cables will carry
alternating current.
The excessive bunching of small cables in large conduits will not be

permitted.
The Contractor shall include for terminating each cable in excess of 30 amp
current carrying capacity in a pressure operated mechanically crimped leg
terminal or terminal socket.
18.24.2 PLYSW & PVC Oversheath Cables
PVC insulated and sheathed galvanised steel wire armour cable with an
overall PVC sheath (PVCSWA PVC) shall conform to an approved
International Standard. They shall be of approved manufacture of 600V or
1000V grade with copper conductors.
All such cables shall be terminated with mechanical glands in accordance
with an International Standard and shall be of a type to provide adequate
mechanical support by locking on the armour, with outer seal, shroud and
earthtag.
18.24.3 PVC SWA PVC Cables
PVC insulated and sheathed galvanised steel wire armour cable with an
overall PVC sheath (PVC SWA PVC) shall conform to an approved
International Standard. They shall be of 600V/1000V grade with copper
conductors from an approved manufacturer.

with an approved International Standard. The gland shall be of a type to
provide adequate mechanical support by locking on the armour, with outer
seal, shroud and earthtag.
18.24.4 XLPE PVC SWA PVC Cables
XLPE insulated and PVC sheathed galvanised steel wire armour cable with
an overall PVC sheath (XLPE PVC SWA PVC) shall conform to an approved
International Standard. They shall be of 600/1000V grade with copper
conductors from an approved manufacturer.

with an approved International Standard. The gland shall be of a type to
provide adequate mechanical support by locking on the armour, with outer
seal, shroud and earthtag.

18.24.5 PVC Insulated Cables
Single-core PVC insulated cables shall comply with an approved

International Standard and shall be 450V/750V grade.
Multi-core PVC insulated cables shall comply with an approved International

Standard and shall be 600V/1000V grade.
The cable used shall not be less than 1.5mm2 cross-sectional area.
18.24.6 PVC Insulated MICC Cables
PVC MICC insulated cables shall comply with an approved International

Standard and shall be 600V/1000V grade. The cable used shall not be less
than 1.5mm2 cross-sectional area.
For fire alarms and associated uses they shall be coloured orange
18.25 CABLING METHODS
18.25.1 General
All cables shall be either clipped to walls or ceilings of structures or run in

ducts and trenches. All cable hangers, cleats, saddles, brackets and similar
supporting devices shall be of an approved type and of adequate strength
for the cable they are supporting. They shall be non-ferrous and so treated
as to withstand site conditions without corroding.
Every cable whether in or out of sight shall be neatly run vertically

horizontally or parallel to adjacent walls, beams or other structural members.
Bending of cables shall be in accordance with the following table:-

Minimum
internal radius
of bend (times
Insulation Finish Overall overall
diameter diameter* of
cable)
Rubber or PVC(Circular Not exceeding 10
or circular stranded Unarmoured mm 3(2)+
copper or aluminium Exceeding 10 mm,
conductors) but not exceeding 25
mm 4(3)+
Exceeding 25 mm 6
Armoured Any 6
PVC or XLPE (SAC Armoured or 8
or shaped copper Unarmoured Any
conductors)
Copper sheath 6
with or without
Mineral PVC covering Any
* For flat cables, the factor is to be applied to the major axis.
+ The figures in parentheses relate to single core circular conductors of
stranded construction installed in conduit or trunking.
Spacing of clips, saddles and cleats shall be such to prevent sagging of the
cables at all times during their installed life.
Cables run in indoor trenches shall be segregated and run on trays or

brackets secured to the trench wall. No cables shall be run on the bottom of
these trenches.
Where a number of cables are terminated to any particular item of
equipment then special care shall be taken to ensure that the cables finally
approach the equipment from a common direction and are individually
terminated in an orderly and symmetrical fashion.
The Contractor shall prepare drawings showing his precise requirements for
cable trenchwork detailing the width and depth of trenches and indicating the
road crossing cable ducts required. These drawings shall be prepared in
consultation with the Engineer and be approved before issue.
The sanding and laying of cables shall satisfy the following requirements:-
(a) Cables shall be laid at a depth of 750mm for LV and 1000mm for H.V
cables. The depth shall be assessed from finished ground level unless
otherwise directed by the Engineer.
Generally LV and H.V cables should not be run in the same trench but
should be laid staggered. However where necessary to pass through
ducts it may be necessary to lay one above another and H.V cables
should be laid first and sanded before laying the LV cables.
(b) Before laying cables the Contractor should inspect the trenchwork to
ensure that the bottom of each trench is firm and of smooth contour
and free from broken stones or rock.

(c) 75mm of riddled sand shall be placed in the trench to form a bedding
for the cables.
(d) Cables up to and including 50 mm2 cross-sectional area may be hand-

drawn.
Heavier cables shall be treated as follow :-
(1) They shall be laid using rollers not more than 3 m apart and where
drawn round corners skid plates and additional rollers shall be used.
The cable shall be pulled by means of a suitable winch with a pulling

eye and cable-sock or equal approved device to ensure even load
distribution on the cable.Cables shall be laid with adequate separation
and shall be gently "snaked" to avoid tension during backfilling and
subsequent settlement.
(e) Before sanding and backfilling all laid cables shall be inspected by the
Engineer.
(f) After cables have been laid they shall be covered with a further 75mm
of riddled sand which shall be well tamped around the cables.
Mechanical punners shall not be used for this work.
(g) The Contractor shall supply cable cover tiles. These shall be of the
precast concrete type complying with an approved International
Standard and engraved "Electricity".
(h) After sanding cable covers shall be placed in position to overlap the
cables by a minimum of 50mm either side of the cables.
(j) A second inspection following sanding and tiling shall be made by the
Engineer before backfilling.
(k) The Contractor shall carry out backfilling and be responsible for
ensuring that tiles are not disturbed and that no large rocks or stones
are dropped on tiles or included in the backfill material.
(l) After backfilling the Contractor shall reinstate to finished ground level.
(m) The Contractor shall supply and lay in position the necessary cable
route marker posts at a maximum of 10 metres apart and at any
change in direction of cable route.
Where cables enter or leave buildings the ducts shall be sealed at the points
of entry into the building. The Contractor shall include for caulking with an
approved compound, followed by not less than 40mm of bitumen compound
or a weak sand/cement mixture as directed by the Engineer. Care must be
taken to ensure that the PVC sheathing of cables is not damaged during
caulking due to excessive temperature if heated bituminous compound is
employed.

Wherever it is necessary to remove the PVC sheath of cable (e.g. at a joint)

the minimum length necessary shall be removed and the exposed copper
sheath or armouring shall be adequately covered by a PVC tape or sleeve or
other suitable means.
All cable shall be delivered on robust cable drums with cable ends treated to
form an effective seal. When a cable is cut from a drum the cable end left
on the drum shall be immediately sealed in an approved manner to prevent
the ingress of moisture.
Each and every cable shall be permanently identified at each end by its
cable number. Cable markers shall comprise oval markers with semi-rigid
black PVC carrier strip and shall be fixed axially by means of two PVC
covered aluminium strips with buckles. Cable markers shall also be installed
at entry and exist points of buried ducts, exits from buildings and in such
other positions as are necessary to identify and trace the route of any cable.
All power shall be connected to main switchboards and other items of plant
so that the correct phase sequence colour coding are preserved throughout
the system. All such cables shall be identified with phase colours for 3 and 4
wire systems and blue and brown for single phase. On rotating plant, where
to achieve the required direction of rotation it is necessary to connect the
phase cores to the appropriately identified terminals, special core ferrules
shall be fitted to identify each core with the terminal to which it is finally
connected.
In addition control cables shall have individual cores identified by means of

suitable permanent ferrules bearing the same numbers at both ends. Core
identification shall occur at every point of termination using an approved
system of ferrule markers. Numbering shall read from the terminal outwards
on all cores. At those points of interconnection between wiring where a
change of number cannot be avoided double ferrules shall be provided on
each wire. The change of numbering shall be shown on the wiring diagrams
of the equipment at which the change is made.
Where the termination of control cable cores or the supervision of

termination of cores is specified as being the responsibility of another party
(e.g. the termination of certain control and instrumentation cables) any
necessary temporary means of core identification shall be agreed with that
party. Should the Contractor propose to use junction boxes in auxiliary
control cable circuits for the purpose of marshaling a number of cables
feeding to a common item of equipment full details shall be given to the
Engineer and the Contractor shall only proceed after receipt of the
Engineer's written approval. Any such junction box shall be of the wall
mounting pattern with double terminals, with cores ferruled and identified in
accordance with the system schematic and cable diagrams.

18.25.2 Conduit System and Associated Cables
All conduit systems and their component materials shall comply with an
Conduit shall be neatly run on the surface or buried. Ways shall be provided
for additional conduits at all distribution boards. The size of conduit shall be
as detailed for a particular position or as determined by the number of cables
to be drawn in. In no case shall conduit less than 20mm diameter be used.
Sunken and concealed conduit systems shall support fittings independently
of any false ceiling.
All conduits shall be installed in an approved manner and arranged with

adequate ventilation and drainage where necessary. All bends or sets shall
be formed in the conduit itself. The Contractor shall ensure that conduit
draw-in boxes and junction boxes are of sufficient capacity to allow all cables
to be installed.
The whole of the conduit system shall be completely swabbed through to

remove any loose matter or dirt before cables are drawn in. Where conduits
connect to switch boxes, draw-in boxes and the like, the conduits shall have
a machined faced socket screwed on to the end which when tightened is
flush with the outside of the box. The conduit is then to be secured to the
apparatus by means of a hexagon smooth bore brass bush screwed from
the inside of the apparatus into the conduit socket in order to make a sound
and tight mechanical joint.
All horizontal runs shall be supported at no more than 900mm. Vertical runs
shall be supported at no more 1200mm. Where directional changes occur
support shall be provided at no more than 150mm either side of the bend.
Bending of conduit shall be carried out as follows:-
a. PVC - a bending spring of the correct size shall be used in all cases.
The heat source shall be provided by a hot air torch. When the conduit
is in a pliable state it shall be bent around a suitable former and held in
position until the conduit has set. No other method will be approved.
b. Steel - Purpose manufactured bending machine complete with formers.

Bending blocks may be used at the discretion of the Engineer for special
applications.
Only couplers, bends and spouted fittings supplied by the manufacturer shall
be used. Expansion couplers shall be used in surface installations where
straight runs exceed 8 metres and at all expansion joints in the structure.
Standard junction or adaptable boxes shall be provided at all junctions and

at sharp changes of direction in addition to any special positions where they
are called for by the Engineer. Inspection couplers may be used in long runs
to facilitate drawing in cables. All junction boxes must be accessible in the
completed works.
Particular care must be taken to ensure that no water is allowed to enter the
conduit at any time and all conduits shall be arranged with adequate
ventilation and drainage where necessary or as directed by the Engineer.

For buried conduit continuous lengths shall be installed between boxes.

Positioning of joint boxes within floor screeds is not permitted.
The ends of conduits laid or set in formwork prior to concreting shall be

temporarily sealed off with a coupler and a plug.
Fixing to surfaces of walls shall be by spacer bar saddles securely fixed by

screws. Where conduits are concealed or laid in structural floors they shall
be held in position with substantial fixings of make and pattern to be
Weather-proof boxes and accessories shall be used outdoors where agreed

on Site by the Engineer or where indicated in this Specification or on the
Drawings.
Conduit shall be installed such as to permit complete rewiring without the

need to carry out builders work.
No single conduit serving phase socket outlets lighting points and switches
shall contain more than one phase.
Wiring shall be carried out on the looping-in system and no joints other than
at looping-in points will be allowed.
18.25.3 Flexible Conduit
Where the conduit system terminates at any equipment requiring a non-rigid

connection a flexible conduit shall be installed of the PVC sheathed metallic
type fully watertight with factory made connection adapters.
Each flexible connection shall include not less than 400 mm length of flexible
conduit and a separate earth conductor shall be run within the conduit
connected to the earth terminals in the equipment and the fixed conduit run.
The flexible conduit shall not be used as an earth continuity conductor.
18.25.4 Cable Trunking and Associated Cables
The trunking shall be manufactured, as specified, from either heavy gauge

continuous hot dipped galvanised steel, stainless steel or heavy duty rigid
unplasticised PVC ( self extinguishing, and unaffected by sunlight and/or
water; the material shall be suitable for continuous ambient temperatures of
65oC). Each length shall be supplied with the necessary connection sleeves
and shall have joggled sides to allow flush fitting.
Each length of trunking shall be fitted with easily removable covers attached
to the trunking by an efficient fixing.
The trunking system shall be complete with purpose made angle and set
accessories designed to afford easy installation of and to avoid tight right
angle bends in the circuit cables installed in the trunking. All trunking
accessories shall be complete with removable covers. No site made mitred
joints will be allowed.

Where cable trunking is installed in vertical runs efficient circuit cable clamps
are to be installed at not greater than 500mm intervals.
The Contractor shall ensure that the size of the trunking is adequate for the
number of cables passing through it but as a minimum the size should be
50mm x 50mm. All bends tees and intersections shall be of the gusset type
and manufactured by the maker of the trunking and to similar standard.
18.25.5 Cable Tray
Cable tray shall be manufactured as specified from heavy duty perforated

galvanised or stainless steel or rigid unplasticised PVC with deep flanges
(PVC shall be self extinguishing and non-inflammable and shall be
unaffected by sunlight or water; It shall be suitable for continuous ambient
temperatures of 65oC).
The cable tray shall be complete with approved type fixings while cleats shall
be of the aluminium or nylon pattern. Cables which shall be attached to
cable tray or structure by saddles or cleats respectively shall be spaced to
ensure compliance with an approved International Standard. The spacing of
supports shall be 1200mm in all cases where cables are supported by cable
tray and 750mm where supported from tray or by cleats. All cables shall be
saddled or cleated in position as they are installed along the route. All cable
tray changes in direction or level shall be made via sets and adequately
sized angles to provide a support to the cables. The cable runs on trays
shall be fixed to the tray by purpose made approved fixing clamps. Cable
trap brackets shall be of galvanised steel. Site manufactured bends and
junctions will not be permitted.
18.26 EARTHING
The earthing system shall comply with the requirements of an approved

International Standard and the Dubai Electricity and Water Authority
regulations.
Earth tapes on 11 kV 6.6 kV and 3.3 kV plant shall comprise a minimum of

50mm x 6mm copper tape and on 380V equipment, a minimum of 38mm x
4mm copper tape.
The metalwork of ALL items of electrical equipment provided under the

Contract shall be securely bonded to earth. Earthing shall be effected by
means of the metal sheath of cables which shall be securely bonded to the
metalwork of the apparatus concerned at each end or a separate earth
conductor. A separate conductor shall be provided for all items of plant
rated 20 kW or greater.
Armour wires on main cables shall be solidly bonded as additional earth

paths but cables from standby generators shall be insulated or bonded to the
main earth system depending on instructions received from the Engineer.
Particular care shall be taken on cable termination boxes to ensure that the
cable sheath and armour is adequately bonded to the associated item of
plant. If continuity is inadequate copper connections shall be made between
the apparatus frame and the cable sheath.

Where the cable sheath and armour is used as the earth path return then it
shall be established that the impedance is sufficiently low to carry the fault
current and disconnect the equipment. If not a separate copper earth
conductor shall be installed.
Particular care shall be taken to ensure earth continuity across items of

equipment situated within a cable run, should the design of such equipment
not give adequate and lasting continuity through its structural body then
additional earthing clips and conductors shall be provided to independently
bond the cable sheaths together. Similarly additional earthing clips shall be
provided to bond the cable sheaths to any piece of apparatus fitted with a
special earth terminal should the earth connection of the terminating gland
prove inadequate. Any additional clips shall be contained within the
apparatus wherever possible.
The earth tapes shall be protected against corrosion and be complete with
test links. Earth tapes shall be held in position by saddles screw fixed to the
substrate.
Connections shall be sweated and riveted and shall be electrically and

mechanically continuous. Joints between the main conductor and the earth
electrodes shall be readily accessible for periodic inspection and shall be
protected against damage and corrosion.
Where rigid or flexible conduit and/or trunking is incorporated into the Works
a separate internal earth conductor shall be run which shall be securely
bonded to the terminating apparatus by means of a special earth terminal.
When instructed by the Engineer an earth electrode system shall be

installed. This will comprise a system of vertically mounted rods. Leads from
each electrode shall be brought to concrete disconnection chambers to
enable each electrode to be disconnected for testing purposes. Each
electrode shall be capable of providing an effective earth within the limits
specified. The earth pit containing the earth rods shall be of the preformed
type with concrete inspection covers.
When standby generators are specified it may be necessary to install two

earth electrode systems, depending upon local conditions.
Earth rods shall be copper or steel cored with a metallic bonded copper
outer surface.
Rods shall be internally connected via threaded connections forming part of

the earth rod and provided with special hardened tips and caps to avoid
distortion when driven into the ground. Approved non-ferrous clamps for
connecting the rod to the copper strip shall be provided.
All excavation trenches and disconnecting chambers will be the

responsibility of the Contractor including the supervision of the backfilling of
trenches setting and alignment of disconnection and inspection chambers.
On completion of the earth installation the Contractor shall demonstrate to

the Engineer that the resistance of the electrodes and the earth network is

within the specified limits. Test equipment shall be supplied by the

Contractor.
18.27 ELECTRIC ACTUATORS
Where required valves and penstocks shall be operated by means of

electrically driven actuators with integral reversing starters.
Actuators shall be suitable for use with a nominal 380 volt 3 phase 50 Hz
power supply and shall incorporate a motor, integral reversing contactor
starter, local control facilities and terminals for remote control and indication
connections.
The actuator shall be capable of opening or closing the valve or penstock

against an unbalanced head equal to the maximum working pressure.
The safety margin of motor power available for sealing and unsealing the
valve or penstock shall be sufficient to ensure torque switch trip at maximum
valve torque with the supply voltage 10% below nominal. The operating
speed shall give valve opening and closing at approximately 300mm per
minute.
The actuator shall be capable of functioning at ambient temperature ranging

from 0o to 55oC for twice the valve stroking time at an average load of at
least 33% of maximum valve torque. Where actuators are required for
modulating purposes continuously rated motors shall be provided.
Overload protection shall be provided by a direct sensing thermostat

embedded in the motor windings.
The gearbox shall be of the total enclosed oil bath lubricated or grease filled
type suitable for operation at any angle and provided with appropriate filling
and drain plugs. The drive shall incorporate a lost motion hammer blow
feature. The output shaft shall be hollow to accept a rising stem and
incorporate thrust bearings of the ball or roller type. The design shall permit
the gear case to be opened for inspection or disassembled without releasing
the stem thrust or taking the valve out of service.
All operating spindles, gears and headstocks shall be provided with

adequate points for lubrication.
A handwheel shall be provided for manual operation engaged when the

motor is declutched by a lever which shall be padlockable in either position.
The drive shall be restored to power automatically by starting the motor.
The handwheel drive must be mechanically independent of the motor drive,
and any gearing should be such as to permit emergency manual operation in
a reasonable time. Clockwise operation of the handwheel shall give closing
movement of the valve or penstock. The effort required for manual
operation shall not exceed 250N.
Handwheels shall be clearly marked with the words "OPEN" and "CLOSE"
and arrows in the appropriate directions. The rims of handwheels shall
have a smooth finish.

The actuator shall be fitted with a drive bushing which is easily detachable
for machining to suit the valve stem or gearbox input shaft. Bushings shall
be fitted in the base of the actuator to enable standard length valve stems to
be used.
Transparent PVC covers shall be fitted to protect the threads of rising

spindles.
Actuators shall be provided with open and close torque and/or position limit
switches as required by the type of valve or penstock plus two additional
limit switches at each end of travel for remote indication and interlocking. A
mechanical latch shall be provided to prevent the open torque switch tripping
while the initial unsealing hammer blow is applied. Two additional sets of
limit switches consisting of 3 switches per set shall be provided. Each set
shall be independently adjustable to any valve or penstock position. Switch
contact ratings on inductive circuits shall be 5 amp. AC up to 440V, 50 watts
DC up to 250V.
An illuminated mechanical dial indicator shall be provided to show

continuous movement valve position, and the actuator shall incorporate a
sealed potentiometer of at least 3 watts rating for continuous remote position
transmission.
The reversing contactor starter and local controls shall be integral with the
valve actuator and housed to prevent breathing and condensation build-up.
The starter shall be suitable for 60 starts per hour and shall comprise
mechanically and electrically interlocked reversing contactors of approximate
rating to the motor size with coils fed from a 120V control transformer of
40VA minimum rating. The common connection of the contactor coils at the
transformer shall be grounded so that the contactors drop out on the event
of leakage to earth. The primary winding shall be separated from the
secondary by a grounded screen and shall be protected by two easily
replaceable cartridge fuses. Secondary windings shall also be protected by
cartridge fuses.
Local controls shall comprise push-button switch for Open, Close and Stop,
and a Local/Off/Remote selector switch padlockable in any one of three
positions:-
(a) Local control only.
(b) Off/On electrical operation.
(c) Remote Control with local stop.

It shall be impossible to operate both open and close pushbuttons
simultaneously. Stop pushbuttons shall be mushroom headed "Stay-
put" type.
Each actuator shall incorporate the following:-
(a) Easily replaceable phase discriminator to prevent starting with an

incorrect phase rotation or dead phase.

(b) Plug-in interposing relays with dust covers for Open/Close/Stop control
from a specified remote DC supply.
(c) Plug-in instantaneous reversal monitor relay with normally open

contacts and having its coil energised from the control transformer only
when the Local/Off/Remote switch is in the remote position to show
that the actuator is electrically operable by remote control.
Internal wiring shall be of a tropical grade PVC insulated stranded cable of 5

amp. minimum rating for control circuits and appropriate size for the motor 3
phase power. Each wire shall be clearly number identified at each end. The
terminal compartment shall include a moulded "transfer back" terminal block
of the stud type the 3 phase power terminals being segregated by a
separate insulating cover. The terminal compartment shall include a double
O-ring seal to provide a watertight barrier to the electrical enclosure so that
electrical components are protected from moisture ingress while the terminal
cover is removed.
The actuator enclosure shall be watertight and where specified shall be

explosion-proof to an approved International standard.
The actuator starters shall be integrally housed with the actuator in robustly
constructed totally enclosed weatherproof housings. The motor starters
shall be capable of starting the motors under the most severe conditions.
The starter housing shall be fitted with internal heaters so as to provide

protection against damage due to condensation. Heaters shall be suitable
for single phase operation. The heaters shall be switched "on" when the
actuator is stopped and shall be switched "off" when the actuator is running.
18.28 PLC’S AND MICROPROCESSOR EQUIPMENT
i) Microprocessors and PLC Equipment
All telemetry, micro-processor and PLC equipment shall comply with this
Clause, and the relevant clauses in Section 17 to 20.
For telemetry, computers, micro-processors and similar solid state

equipment, status inputs and outputs shall be isolated by opto-isolators or an
approved alternative and analogue inputs shall be as differential circuits.
Individual noise filtering shall be provided as necessary for each application.
Series mode rejection and over-ranging protection shall be fully adequate.
Where applicable components shall be mounted on high grade flame

retardant printed circuit boards which shall comply with the relevant part(s)
of BS 4584, have gold plated edge connections, be equipped with test points
to facilitate checking of major functions and have mechanical keying to
prevent accidental insertion of an incorrect card.
The equipment shall accept status inputs from site and panel mounted volt
free contacts and 4-20 mA analogue signals from site and panel mounted
transmitters. Analogue inputs shall be scanned into a 10 bit binary analogue
to digital converter with buffered inputs.

Status outputs shall be suitably rated for switching filament indicator lamps,
connecting into alarm systems, operating hardwire control circuits or other
switching functions in accordance with the requirements of the application
Clauses.
Analogue outputs shall be 4-20mA suitable for driving control circuits,

indicating meters, recorders and integrators. The overall accuracy of
transmitted analogue signals shall be within ±0.5% of FSD over the
operating temperature range of 0oC to 50oC.
The power supply unit shall be suitable for operation on a supply having a
voltage variation ±6% and a frequency variation of ±2%. The power unit
shall have an isolated output and incorporate protection against voltage
spikes on the mains supply, over-voltage and short circuit.
The equipment shall maintained in operation during a period of mains failure,

either drawing power from the main instrumentation and control
battery/charger system or from a separate UPS system, as appropriate.
Each system unit shall include spare installed capacity of not less than 15%
of each type of input and out put module, together with a minimum of 20%
spare system logic capacity.
All systems and equipment shall include diagnostic and automatic self test
routines with volt-free contacts to initiate an alarm in the event of
malfunction.
As far as possible all computers, micro-processors, plc’s and similar system

elements provided throughout the whole system shall operate with similar
protocol/language so as to provide a compatible system with all peripherals,
programs, program development units, file management routines, data
storage facilities and similar facilities being common to all elements.
All equipment shall be fully programmed in accordance with the

requirements of the application Clauses. All programs, in the form of flow
diagrams or logic circuits shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval not
less than 6 weeks before the equipment is to be inspected.
In all cases the facility shall be provided for modifying the program, altering
set points and adjusting time settings while the equipment is "on line". There
shall be a permanently connected means of accessing set points and timer
settings.
All equipment associated with an operator interface shall utilise a high level,
engineer orientated language to permit programming, editing and similar
functions by engineers and operators.
ii) PLC’s
All PLC's shall be provided with the following facilities/accessories unless

specified elsewhere
Program to be stored on an EPROM
EPROM eraser

3 No. Spare EPROM's

Serial Computer Interface
Hand held programmer for local programming
Computer Software for programming
Computer interface and EPROM programmer to enable programs prepared
on the computer program to be transferred and stored on the EPROM.
Local battery backup for RAM.

SECTION 19 - MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION
19.1 FINISH
All covers flanges and joints shall be properly faced, bored, fitted, fixed,
hollowed moulded or chamfered as the case may be according to the best
approved practice. All working parts of the plant and other apparatus shall in
like manner be well and accurately fitted, finished, fixed and adjusted.
19.2 MATERIALS
All materials incorporated in the Works shall be the most suitable for the duty
concerned and shall be new and of first class commercial quality, free from
imperfection and selected for long life and minimum maintenance.
19.3 VALVES
19.3.1 General
Valves and penstocks shall be capable of withstanding corrosion in the

ambient conditions.
Nylon or other thermoplastic materials liable to attack shall not be used

where hydrogen sulphide is likely to be present.
All valve waterways shall be coated internally with a solvent free epoxy or
polyester lining of 100% solid content to be applied at the place of
manufacture. The lining shall be of 250 micron nominal thickness and
holiday free.
All valves and penstocks will normally be witness tested at works.
Unless otherwise specified all valves and penstocks shall be anti-clockwise

opening and the maximum effort required, applied at the circumference of
the hand wheel to operate the valves against the maximum unbalanced
head shall not exceed 55kg.
All hand wheels shall have the words "to open" and "to close" in Arabic and
English with arrows indicating the direction of rotation cast on and shall be
coated in plastic, nylon or other approved materials in order to withstand the
ambient conditions.
Unless otherwise specified or agreed spindles and extension spindles shall

be of stainless steel comply with AISI Grade 316.
Extension spindles, where required, shall be connected by suitable muff type

couplings manufactured from stainless steel grade 315. The muff couplings
shall be supplied drilled with nuts and bolts for connection to the spindles.
A clear polycarbonate tube shall be securely fitted to protect the thread of

rising spindles.
The nuts shall be of gunmetal or synthetic material and mating surfaces of
gates and bodies shall be of gunmetal, copper alloy or synthetic material.

All fixing brackets, bolts and nuts, washers, etc. shall be comply with AISI
grade 316.
Where "Operation by Tee Key" is specified the valve or penstock shall be

supplied with a suitable yoke with a squared cap of standard size to receive
the tee key.
The key shall be supplied at the rate of one key per two valves or two
penstocks unless the valve or penstock is to be installed in an isolated
location in which case one key shall be supplied for each fitting location.
Before delivery to site all working surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned, and,
if metal, protected by grease.
Packing must be sufficient to ensure complete protection of the fitting during

transit and storage.
Valves under 300 mm diameter together with all hand wheels and other
easily detachable items on both valves and penstocks are to be packed in
timber packing cases and properly bound with steel packing bands.
All valves of 300 mm and over are to be protected with wood or plywood
discs or flanges together with straw rope and hessian wrapping.
19.3.2 Non-Return Valves
Unless higher pressure ratings are required for the pipelines non-return
valves shall have a pressure designation of 10 bar which shall be marked on
the valve body. Unless detailed to the contrary to suit existing pipework,
flanged valves shall have their flanges to a pressure of 10 bar and be drilled
accordingly. The face to face lengths of the valves shall be either 2 x ND +
100 mm or to an approved international standard, the longer length to be
allowed for in all cases using make up pieces where necessary to achieve
the required lengths.
Non-return valves shall be manufactured to conform to the requirements of

an approved international standard. Valves shall be of the single door swing
check type and shall have bodies of cast iron with copper alloy seatings and
resilient faced disks. Valve spindles and all construction bolts shall be
stainless steel comply with AISI grade 316. Door to spindle connections
shall incorporate a keyway.
All valves shall be clearway, and lugs provided on screwed seats, etc., for
assembly purposes shall be removed.
Valves shall, unless impracticable through size or otherwise specified shall

be capable of passing 90 mm dia solids.
Valves shall be provided with a removable cover on top of the body casting,
to enable the hinge and door to be inspected or removed.
The door opening shall be restricted to a maximum angle of 700 at the
hinge, measured from a plane passing through the hinge at right angles to
the axis of flow. Valves shall be provided with extended door spindles fitted
with lever arms suitable for balance weights.

There shall be enough space between reflux valve and the wall of the valve
chamber so that the valve spindle could be withdrawn to the sides for
repair/maintenance of swing door without removing valves.
When specified limit switches, operated by external cams rigidly attached to

the door spindles shall be provided. The limit switch shall operate when the
valve door has moved through an angle of approximately 100. The switch
shall provide normally open and normally closed electrically separated
contacts of the make before break type.
19.3.3 Gate Valves for Sewage and Related Fluids
Unless higher pressure ratings are required for the pipeline, gate valves
shall have a nominal pressure designation of 10 bar which shall be marked
on the valve body. Unless detailed to the contrary to suit existing pipework,
flanges shall have a nominal pressure designation of 10 bar and shall be
drilled accordingly. The face to face lengths of the valves shall be in
accordance with an approved international standard.
Gate valves shall be manufactured to conform to the requirements of an

approved international standard and shall normally be metal seated with
valve bodies of cast iron and the seatings copper alloy faced. The gates
shall be of wedge pattern, copper alloy faced with inside screw non-rising
stems of forged bronze or stainless steel comply with AISI grade 316. They
shall have a packed gland stuffing box seal.
Where resilient seated gate valves are detailed the valve bodies shall be
cast iron. The gates shall be of cast iron and wedge pattern with nitrile
rubber covering and with inside screw non-rising stems of stainless steel or
forged bronze. They shall have a seal of nitrile rubber ‘O’ rings to an
approved international standard.
Actuator operated valves larger than 300 mm dia. shall have copper alloy
faced guides and slippers. 300 mm dia. and smaller actuator operated
valves installed other than in a vertical position shall have machined guides
and gates.
Valves shall normally be provided with drain plugs.
All cast iron shall be to an approved international standard.
19.3.4 Air Valves
Unless higher pressure ratings are required for the pipeline, or otherwise
indicated in the Contract Documentation air valves shall have a nominal
pressure rating of 10 bar which shall be marked on the valve body and shall
be designed for a liquid temp. of 500C and air temp. of 700C.
Air valves for pumped pressure pipelines shall be the special high pressure
‘Dual’ large orifice type. The following shall be used as a guide for the
general sizing of large orifice air valves :-

Pipeline (mm) 200 300 350 450 600 900 1000*

Bore
Air Valve (mm) 20 25 50 80 100 150 200
size
Ball size (mm) 100 100 100/125 100/125 125 125/200 150/200
* For larger mains air valves may be fitted in clusters of two or more
as required.
For other duties, such as distribution mains single, small orifice type
standard air valves having a nominal 25mm male thread inlet and with a ball
size of 100 mm shall be used.
The test pressure for different components of the air valves shall be as follows:-
Body Seat Ball/Float
20 bar10 bar 10 bar
The materials of construction for air valves shall be as follows :-
Body, Cover : Cast Iron to an approved international standard

& Duct Cover
Ball/Guide : Polypropylene
Seat : Nitrile Rubber
Air Release : Moulded Rubber

Nipple
All Bolts : Stainless Steel, comply with AISI Grade 316
All components shall be highly resistant to corrosion due to sewage and very
high concentrations of H2S and other gases. All internal components shall be
strong in design and of stainless steel comply with AISI grade 316.
The access cover for air valves shall be in such a position that the valves could
be easily removed for repair/maintenance.
The siting of the air valves shall be at locations shown on the drawings, as
recommended by the pipeline surge analysis or as decided by the Engineer on
site.
19.3.5 Flush Valves
An automatic flush valve shall be attached to the pump volute to provide a

flushing stream from the pump’s discharge to flush the station sump and to
keep it free from sludge build up. The valve shall close after a
predetermined period of time or when the pump stops whichever occurs first
and shall be totally leak proof in the closed position. The valve shall open
automatically in readiness for the next pumping cycle.

The valve shall be suitable for operation based on the ejector principle
utilising a ball as the closing device or shall be suitable for operation on AC
supply.
The material of construction for the flush valve shall be of cast iron to an
19.3.6 Flap Valves
Metal Flap Valves
Flap valves shall be designed for a nominal pressure rating of 10 bar which
shall be marked on the valve body, and a liquid temperature of 500C.
Flaps and frames shall be of cast iron to an approved international standard

with end flange faced and drilled to an approved international standard.
Mating surfaces of flaps and frames shall be of an approved non-ferrous
metal machined to ensure a watertight fit in the closed position.
Hinge pins shall be of phosphor bronze to an approved international

standard all flaps shall be double hung and seated off the vertical.
Springs shall be of stainless steel comply with AISI, grade 316.
All cast iron surfaces shall be cleaned by grit or shot blasting to be free from
grease, then coated as specified for the environment. Hinge pins and
mating surfaces shall be smeared with grease.
Plastic Faced Flap Valves
Flap valves shall be faced in an approved synthetic material so as to be

corrosion-free in the ambient conditions. The flap shall be weighted to assist
closing and shall be suitably braced and reinforced.
Hinge pins shall be of stainless steel and all flaps shall be double hung and
seated off the vertical.
Mating surfaces shall be accurately moulded or machined to ensure a

watertight fit in the closed position.
19.4 PUMPS
19.4.1 General Requirements
Rotary Pumps are required to pump storm/groundwater or raw sewage

containing rags, fibrous material and general waste matter including grit and
other abrasives, partially treated sewage, sewage sludges and/or grit laden
sewage.
Pumps shall be designed to pump satisfactorily solids of 90 mm diameter
unless otherwise specified. Freedom from choking is essential and is more
important than high pumping efficiency.

Pumps unless otherwise specified shall be designed to have stable

head/quantity characteristics, so as to avoid large changes of quantity with
small changes of head. The pumps shall be capable of operating with the
sump surcharged to its maximum level and the Pump motors shall be rated
accordingly.
The fluid velocity at entrance to pump impellers shall not exceed 3.6 m/s for
pumps with suction pipework larger than 200 mm dia. nor 5.5 m/s for smaller
pipework. The fluid discharge velocity shall not exceed 3.6 m/s for all
pumps.
Pump bodies, covers, brackets, bearing housings, wearing plates, eye rings,
support brackets, etc., shall be manufactured from close-grained cast iron or
nickel iron.
Pump castings shall be of substantial construction to give long life under

abrasive conditions and to enable them to withstand shock loads caused by
solids in suspension.
Impellers shall be of best quality close-grained cast iron or nickel iron for
sewage pumps and stainless steel grade 316 or equal for storm/groundwater
pumps.
Impellers shall be keyed onto shafts.
Shafting shall be of stainless Steel comply with AISI grade 316 or equal of
adequate size to avoid the possibility of fatigue failure. The duty speed
range shall be well below the first critical speed. At any change in diameter
of the shaft the shoulder shall be generously radiused to reduce stress
concentration.
The rotating elements shall be dynamically balanced before final assembly.
Pump casings shall be hydraulically tested before assembly to a pressure of

1.5 times the closed valve head of the pump plus the maximum suction
pressure.
Cathodic corrosion protection shall be provided for the storm/ground water

pumps.
Pumps shall be performance witness tested at the manufacturer’s works by
the Engineer in accordance with the appropriate standard using clean cold
water. Unless otherwise specified pumps shall be tested with the motor
which will drive them after installation.
Mass produced pumps shall be tested to prove the duty/guarantee point.
Special pumps (ie. those for which the impeller is specially trimmed or
otherwise designed) shall be tested to prove the duty/guarantee point and to
develop Quantity/Head, Quantity/Power, Quantity/Efficiency curves for the
pump at operating speed, or if the pump is multi or variable speed, at
maximum and minimum speeds.
19.4.2 Submersible Pumps

Submersible pumps shall comply with the General Requirements for Pumps.
They shall be close coupled units comprising a single, stainless shaft, a

squirrel cage electric motor and a single entry, end suction pump.
Stainless steel lifting frames or eye bolts shall be fitted to casings for
connection of lifting chains.
Motors shall have IP68 protection and be continuously rated for use both
when submerged in sewage or storm/ground water at ambient temperature
and when in air. Motor windings shall be fitted with normally closed
thermistors complying with relevant specifications and providing protection
when the pump is running.
Motors above 30 kW rating shall also be fitted with a lower bearing

temperature monitor and stator housing liquid level monitor. The monitoring
equipment shall be designed and installed so that automatic re-starting of
the motor is not possible in the event of a fault. The monitoring units shall
be manufactured by the pump supplier and supplied as free issue to the
control panel manufacturer to form part of the control panel.
Two mechanical seals shall be fitted on the shaft between the electric motor
and the pump impeller. The space between these two seals shall be oil
filled.
Motor feed cables shall be ethylene propylene rubber insulated flexible

cable, with each power core of tinned copper wire nylon earth screened and
polychloroprene sheathed overall. Suspension of motor cables shall be via
stainless steel cable socks from suspension brackets.
Discharge bends shall be of close grained cast iron or stainless steel and
shall provide both pump support and lower guide rail/rope location. The
pump discharge connection system shall be designed so that the weight of
the pump provides a clamping force. Sealing between the pump and bend
shall be achieved by the weight of the pump and there shall be no leakage at
the joint between the faces.
Mounting brackets for the pump shall be comply with AISI of Grade 316
Stainless Steel.
Guide rails and holders shall be manufactured from stainless steel comply
with AISI grade 316 rigidly supported at both ends. Alternatively stainless
steel guide wire arrangement with stainless upper guide holder may be
used.
Lifting chains shall be of stainless steel and shall include shackles for
connection to pump lifting points. They shall be at least 1.50 m longer than
the guide rails.
The lifting chain shall be fitted with a stainless steel tag detailing the safe
working load, the test load, the date of testing and the name of the testing
authority.
Pump materials shall be according to Table 19-1

Table 19 - 1 Schedule of Pump Materials
Cast parts Cast iron
Studs, nuts, screws Stainless steel

and washers
Lifting handle Stainless steel
O-rings Nitrile rubber (700 IRH)
Stationary wear ring Nitrile rubber-clad steel
Rotating wear ring Stainless steel
Upper Mechanical shaft seals Tungsten carbide/Tungsten carbide
Lower mechanical shaft seals Tungsten carbide/Tungsten carbide
Impeller for Storm/Ground water Stainless steel
Impeller for Sewage Cast Iron
Shaft Stainless steel
19.5 PRESSURE AND COMPOUND GAUGE FOR SEWAGE AND SLUDGE
Pressure gauges for use with sewage and sludge shall be Bourdon gauges.
The pressure transmission system shall be of the air-filled or oil-filled sealed
type incorporating reinforced plastic or stainless steel capillary tubing and
diaphragm transmitter.
For the air-filled system, the diaphragm shall be mounted in a clean-out

housing. The transmitter housing shall be mounted directly onto a 25 mm or
greater bore straight through isolating cock. The cock shall be mounted
directly onto the pressure tapping.
Where the gauge is mounted directly on the pressure tapping a Schaffer

diaphragm gauge may be used. Schaffer diaphragm gauges shall be fitted
with 20 mm or greater bore straight through isolating cocks.
Gauges shall be graduated in metres of water and bars gauge, together with
vacuum where appropriate. The accuracy of the system shall be ± 1.50% of
range or ± 2.50m bar.
Gauges shall have 150 mm diameter circular faces. Gauge graduations

shall be such that the gauge is never used continuously beyond 60% of the
maximum graduation.
The gauges shall not be connected to air release pipes or auxiliary suction
pipes.

The gauges shall be fitted with a pressure snubber to dampen pressure

pulsation.
The face shall have a warning label marked in red “IMPORTANT - TURN
OFF WHEN NOT IN USE” both in English and Arabic.
Before delivery, each gauge shall be tested in accordance with an approved

international standard and the test certificate sent the Engineer.
19.6 CENTRIFUGAL FANS (AIR BLOWERS)
Centrifugal Fans to be used as air blowers shall be of heavy duty, single inlet
direct drive type. They shall be suitable for handling temperature upto 800C,
dust free air, and aggressive gases and moisture normal to the sewage
environment. The fan shall be low-noise, explosion proof and corrosion
resistant.
The blower shall be designed to handle, as a minimum, the rated air volume
against the stated head, as indicated in the Contract Documentation.
General Construction
Mating flanges and/or flexible connection, as appropriate, shall be provided

for the inlet and outlet.
The fan shall be mounted together with motor support pedestal on a

common base frame. Fan blades, casing and other parts normally in contact
with gases shall be of stainless steel or plastic construction.
The fan shall have a backward curved centrifugal impeller which shall be
overhung on the motor shaft.
Driving motors shall be of well known manufacture with protection and

insulation appropriate to their location.
Blower Enclosure
Enclosure panels shall be of GRP modular construction materials consisting

of chopped strand mats, roving and unsaturated polyester resin to approved
international standards.
The GRP material shall be composed of :- 0.5 mm minimum thickness

gelcoat to provide chemical resistance, layers of chopped strand mat
reinforcing in resin content 60-70% by weight. Woven roving glass fabric
layers to provide strength and rigidity with resin content 45-55%, surface
layers shall consist of “C” glass surface mat (45-50 gm per square metre)
with resin content of 90% by weight.
All cut edges shall be made smooth using a resin top coat and are to be gel
coat sealed. Rigidity of the enclosure can be increased by adding sufficient
stiffeners.
The enclosure shall be U.V. resistant, have high impact resistance, high
abrasion resistance, low sound absorption dB 10-15 in the 100 - 500 Hz
range, low thermal conductivity of 1.4 W/m2 0C and be non combustable.

19.7 SUPPORTS AND FIXINGS
Unless otherwise specified all supports, fixing bolts, screws, etc., and other
fixings shall be provided, shall be stainless steel comply with AISI of
minimum Grade 316 and shall be as follows;
i) Threaded and fitted with 3mm thick washers beneath bolt and nut. The
length shall be such that when tightened down with a nut & bolt the
threaded portion will not protrude more than half a diameter of the bolt.
ii) When fastening galvanised components or aluminium alloy

components. PTFE washers shall be fitted beneath the stainless steel
washers for both bolthead and nut.
iii) AISI Stainless steel grade 316 shall be used for construction of pumps,
fastening galvanised or aluminium alloy components, holding down
and anchor bolts.
Not withstanding the above, the Contractor shall consider galvanic corrosion
between various metals when selecting materials for proposal.
19.8 SETTING OF MACHINERY
The machinery shall be mounted on flat steel packings of thickness selected

to take up variations in level of the concrete foundations.
The packings shall be bedded by chipping or grinding of the concrete

surface.
Packing shims of the appropriate thickness shall be located adjacent to each

holding down bolt. The number of shims shall not exceed three at each
location.
The machinery shall be aligned, levelled and pulled down by the nuts of the
holding down bolts with a spanner of normal length. No grout shall be
applied until the machinery has been run and checked by the Engineer for
stability and vibration.
Where specified an approved high performance non shrink grout shall be

poured to bed the equipment.

19.9 SUPPORT OF PIPEWORK AND VALVES
All necessary supports, saddles slings, fixing bolts and foundation bolts shall
be supplied to support the pipework and its associated equipment in an
approved manner. Valves, meters, strainers, and other devices mounted in
the pipework shall be supported independently of the pipes to which they
connect.
All brackets or other forms of support, which can conveniently be so

designed, shall be rigidly built up of sections.
No point of passage of pipes through floor or walls shall be used as a point

of support, except with the approval of the Engineer.
19.10 PENSTOCKS
19.10.1 General
Fixings shall be of the drilled anchor type and made of stainless steel.
All penstocks shall be suitable for an on/off seating head of 10m minimum
but in no instances shall be less than 1.5 the maximum working head.
Penstocks shall conform to the following specifications:
(i) Austenitic Ni Resist Cast iron
(ii) Stainless Steel
(iii) Plastic
The size of penstock to be used in any particular location shall be as

described in the Contract Documentation and approved by the Engineer.
The frame, doors, sealing faces and spindles of each type of penstock shall
be as specified in the appropriate clauses herein.
Unless otherwise described in the Contract Documentation all penstocks

shall be provided with handwheels of adequate diameter with suitable
gearing where necessary to ensure that the required operating force applied
by hand does not exceed 55 kg.
Handwheels shall have the works “To open” and To close” in Arabic and
English with arrows indicating the direction of rotation cast on them. The
direction of closing shall be clockwise and a vandal/weatherproof, clear
polycarbonate tube cover shall be securely fitted to protect the thread of
rising spindles. The tube shall be clearly and permanently engraved to
indicate the position of the penstock.
Spindles shall have machine cut robust trapezoidal or square form threads
as necessary. They shall be of stainless steel. Extension spindle coupling
shall be of the muff type and they shall be drilled and provided with a
stainless steel nut and bolt for securing the spindle to the penstock spindle
head which likewise be drilled to take the bolt.

All penstocks shall be of the rising type unless otherwise stated.

Headstocks shall be provided except in cases where the handwheels can be
mounted on the penstock frames. Unless otherwise stated for penstocks of
300mm (square or circular) or more thrust tubes shall be provided. For all
motorised/actuator operated penstocks thrust tubes shall be provided
between the penstock frame and headstock in order to absorb the thrust in
both directions of operation. Thrust tubes shall incorporate all necessary
fixing brackets and spindle guide plates.
Permissible rates of leakage under the specified working head shall be as

follows;
On seating installation : - 5 litres per meter of slide perimeter per hour.
Off seating installation: - 30 litres per meter of slide perimeter per hour.
The slide perimeter shall be measured as the total length of contact faces
between the gate and frame in the closed position.
All materials used in the manufacture of penstocks shall conform to

approved international standards.
19.10.2 Austenitic Ni Resist Iron Penstocks
The frames, doors and stems guides for iron penstocks shall be made from
austenitic Ni resist iron. The penstocks shall be designed so as to ensure
tight closure while maintaining freedom of door movement during operation
and minimising sliding wear of the sealing faces. They shall incorporate
adjustable wedges manufactured from a material that shall not be
susceptible to corrosion.
Non-ferrous metal sealing faces shall comprise accurately machined

phosphor strips bedded and fixed to the frame and door. The strips shall be
secured by countersunk screws that shall not be susceptible to corrosion.
The faces of the strips shall then be brought together in the operating
position and hand scraped to a water-tight finish.
Non-ferrous metal strips shall be fitted to the frame guides and gate.
Penstocks shall be prepared and painted in accordance with painting

specification.
19.10.3 Stainless Steel Penstocks
The frames and doors of stainless steel penstocks shall be comply with AISI
of Grade 316 S31. The design of the doors shall be such that the required
working pressures can be withstood without deflection or distortion that
would affect the operation of the penstocks. Any strengthening of doors by
the provision of ribs and gussets shall be carried out by welding and not by
bolting.
The side sealing faces may consist of simple metal to metal contact between
the door and frames or by synthetic rubber seals and plastic guides as
necessary to withstand the required working pressure without leakages.

Spindles shall be manufactured in stainless steel comply with AISI grade

316 S31.
19.10.4 Plastic Penstocks
The frames of plastic penstocks shall be made from continuously welded

stainless steel. Frames shall be reinforced and gusseted to ensure rigidity
without dependence upon the bridge which shall be bolted for ease of
removal.
The doors of plastic penstocks shall be made from sheets of approved rigid
cellular polymer sandwiched between sheets of approved rigid compressed
composite plastics. The linear coefficient of thermal expansion of the
material shall not be greater than 1.6 x 10 per oC. No PVC or GRP
materials shall be used. The doors thus formed shall have sufficient
strength to withstand the required working pressures without deflection,
distortion or that would affect the water-tightness of the penstocks. Totally
enclosed steel matrices shall be incorporated in the door construction to
ensure adequate rigidity.
The sealing faces and side guides shall be to the approval of the engineer
and shall consist of plastic strips having a high resistance to sliding wear
and a coefficient of friction of less than 0.10. The sealing strips shall be
securely fixed to the inner faces of the frames and shall incorporate
removable stainless steel adjusting devices.
Spindle operating nuts shall be of gunmetal or manufactured from an

approved ultra high molecular weight polyethylene material. The operating
nuts for the spindle retaining blocks shall be fixed in a visible position inside
a separate gate lifting bracket bolted on to the top of the door with stainless
steel fasteners. The operating nut or spindle retaining block shall not be
contained within the door.
All plastic materials shall be non toxic ultraviolet stabilised and shall have fire
resistance in accordance with an agreed internationally approved standard.
19.10.5 Actuators
Where electric actuators are required for valves or penstocks they shall
comply with the requirements of Section 18 the Electrical Specification.
19.11 LIFTING EQUIPMENT
19.11.1 Electrically Operated Traversing Cranes
Cranes shall be electrically operated traversing type and be complete with

gantry rails and all accessories including a set of slings.
The gantry joists and rails shall be provided with provision for jointing and fix
to the structure. The lifting capacity of the apparatus shall be sufficient for
the heaviest load which will be obtained when erecting or dismantling the
plant or other parts of the installation. The capacity of the cranes proposed
shall be stated in the equipment supply schedule.

The crane shall be tested at the makers works at 25% above the rated load,
and test certificates shall be provided.
The crane shall be of the double girder travelling type. The traveller carriage
shall run on bridge rails which shall be securely fixed to the gantry.
The crane shall be provided with a maintenance platform over the full span.
The maintenance platform shall be provided with double handrails
throughout and a fixed ladder access.
Longitudinal and traverse motions shall be provided for the crane and shall
be such that operation is speedy without impairing safety in working. The
hook and load chains shall be such that the hook will reach to the maximum
depth.
Ball or roller bearings shall be employed on all motions and the load hook
shall revolve on a ball swivel. All gears shall be machine cut and all runway
wheels machined.
A reliable braking and locking arrangement shall be provided.
The crane structure shall be designed in accordance with the requirements

of an approved international standard.
Two hoist speeds shall be provided, not exceeding 3 m/min across the
working range of the crane. Cross travel speeds shall be approximately 15
m/min. All motions shall be electrically driven. The speeds of all motions
shall confirmed in the appropriate schedule the speeds on all motions.
The load shall be carried on a flexible steel wire rope coiled onto a cast iron
barrel having right and left hand machine cut spiral grooves to ensure a true
vertical lift. The load rope shall be of sufficient length to reach the maximum
depth. The load hook shall comply with an approved international standard
and shall revolve on a ball swivel. A safety catch shall be fitted to the hook.
The crane shall be remote controlled on all motions from a non-metallic

pendant push button station. Buttons shall be of the hold-to-operate type.
The pendant enclosure shall give protection to IP54 requirements.
Operation of the crane shall be possible from any position across the full
span. The pendant legends shall be inscribed in English and Arabic.
The power supply to the hoist shall be of festooned cable type running on a
rigid support system. An earth conductor shall also be provided.
The electrical equipment shall be controlled at 110 volts. The transformer

shall be protected by HRC fuses on both primary and secondary circuits.
A main supply isolator shall be provided and mounted at operating height

from ground level. Three sets of red "conductor alive" warning lamps shall
be provided.
All motors and electrical equipment shall be rated in accordance with the
climatic and other Specification requirements.

The integrity of the hermetic seal to the box girders is to be maintained. All
cables shall be enclosed in a steel conduit which is to fastened to the
exterior of the girder.
19.11.2 Manually Operated Lifting Equipment
A close lift, hand operated gear driven lifting block, on a single runway
beam, shall be provided when specified in the Contract Documentation. The
Safe Working Load of block and beam shall be at least 25% above the
weight of the heaviest item which will require lifting for maintenance
purposes. Equipment shall have the following minimum ratings: 500 kg for
the hoist and 1000 kg for the beam.
The whole assembly including beam, gear driven travelling trolley, pulley
block and chains shall be subject to a capacity test carried out on site by an
approved independent body. The proof load applied for certification shall be
50% in excess of the Safe Working Load (SWL) shall be clearly marked on
the lifting block and on the runway beam. The test date is to be displayed on
the runway beam.
The bottom block shall be of the steel fully swivelling type with a safety catch
fitted to the hook.
A secondary load chain/cable and hook shall be supplied, suspended from

the trolley. The chain/cable shall be fixed length so that the hook is
suspended approximately 1000 mm below the bottom flange of the beam.
The hook, and chain/cable shall be tested to the same safe working load as
the main hoist. The secondary load chain/cable shall be used to support a lift
at intermediate levels whilst the main load chain is reslung.
19.11.3 Lifting Frames
Lifting Frames shall comprise an "A" frame or portal supporting a composite

beam over the lift centre lines which will carry a hoist block with traverse.
The composite parts of the device shall comply with the relevant
specification clauses.
19.11.4 Lifting Davits
Lifting davits shall comprise of a simple single mounting; capable of

traversing the uispan of the area of lift and be fitted with a chain block as
Clause 19.11.2 above. A socket shall be provided which is to be cast into
the reinforced concrete of the associated structure.

APPROVED INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS
ASTM C418
BS 466
BS 476
BS EN 10088-1
BS EN 1561
BS EN 837-1
BS 2061
BS 2374
BS EN 681-1
BS 2573
BS 2853
BS EN 1677-5
BS EN 13157
BS EN 13853
BS 3499
BS 3532
BS 3643
BS EN 14020
BS EN 1092
BS EN 12334
BS 5163
DIN 1690
DIN 1691
ISO 5752
ISO 5996

SECTION 20 - MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL
20.1 METAL AND PLASTIC MATERIALS
20.1.1 Aluminium Alloy
Aluminium alloys shall be selected as having properties appropriate to the

duty of the unit, the method of fabrication and the environmental conditions.
The materials shall be manufactured in accordance with an approved

International Standard and shall be anodised when specified.
Alternative alloys may be proposed by the Contractor if the manufacturer

considers its properties more appropriate to the application, the
environmental or the physical conditions prevailing.
20.1.2 Steel
Steelwork shall be manufactured/fabricated in accordance with an approved

international standard. Where specified or detailed steel work shall be hot
dipped galvanised in accordance with an approved International Standard at
the place of manufacture/fabrication.
20.1.3 Stainless Steel
Stainless steel shall have the following composition with mechanical

properties to the appropriate approved standard.
Table 20-1. Required Properties for Stainless Steel
Percentage Chemical Composition
Element Welded Fabrication Cold Fabrication

% minimum % maximum % minimum % maximum
Carbon - 0.03 - 0.07
Silicon 0.20 1.00 0.20 1.00
Manganese 0.50 2.00 0.50 2.00
Nickel 11.00 14.00 10.00 13.00
Chromium 16.50 18.50 16.50 18.50
Molybdenum 2.25 3.00 2.25 3.00
Sulphur - 0.03 - 0.03
Phosphorous - 0.045 - 0.045
Alternative, higher grade, stainless steel may be proposed by the Contractor

if the manufacturer considers its properties more appropriate to the
environmental or physical conditions.

20.1.4 Reinforced Thermosetting Plastics
Reinforced plastic shall be as follows unless otherwise agreed in writing by

the Engineer.
(1) Manufacturing Standards
The specification for design, materials, construction, inspection, and

testing of plant manufactured from reinforced plastics shall conform to
the appropriate sections of the approved standard.
(2) Resins
(a) Isophthalic, Terephthalic, Bisphenol and Vinyl Ester resins may

be specified and they shall comply with the approved standard.
The resins used shall have a minimum strain to failure of cured
cast resin of 2%.
(b) Pigments or fire retardant resins (or fillers) shall only be used
when specified or ordered in writing.
(c) Additives shall not be included in the resins unless they are
required for viscosity control.
(d) Due attention must be paid to preclude the possibility of air
inhibition occurring on the laminate surfaces. The inclusion of
paraffin wax, etc., must be in accordance with resin suppliers
recommendations.
(e) Where protection against Ultra Violet light degradation is
required, a translucent UV inhibitor should be included in the
outer layers of the laminate.
(3) Curing
Curing systems shall be in accordance with the Resin Manufacturer's
recommendations. The manufacturer of the laminate shall
demonstrate that the laminate has been adequately cured prior to its
acceptance at the laminator's works.
(4) Reinforcement
(a) 'E' type glass chopped strand mat reinforcement shall be to the
approved standard and shall be to a maximum unit weight of 600
gm/m2.
(b) 'E' type glass woven roving fabrics shall be to the approved
standard and shall be to a maximum unit weight of 800 gm/m2.
(c) 'C' type glass veil (or synthetic fabric veil, where use is agreed by
the Engineer), shall be used to reinforce all surface sealing resin
layers on laminates.
(d) Use of 'ECR' Corrosion Resistant glass will be permitted.

(5) Structural Design
(a) The laminate shall be designed to withstand all the loadings

normally carried by the laminates.
(b) Under the worst combination of loading conditions, a maximum

strain of 0.2% shall be permitted in the laminate.
(c) A minimum laminate thickness of 6 mm shall be maintained for

all GRP laminates including the facings over or under stiffener
sections.
(d) Stiffener sections may be used to increase the rigidity of a

structure. The minimum glass reinforcement content shall be 1.2
kg/m2 in these areas. Stiffener sections may be manufactured
from the following materials.
(1) Polyurethane Foam

(2) Marine Plywood
(3) Other material agreed in writing
Stiffener sections shall not be made from steel or metal sections

unless written consent has been previously obtained. Where
stiffening sections are employed they shall not be construed as
adding to the strength of the section to which they are added.
(6) Moulds
Moulds shall be of adequate rigidity to retain dimensional stability and

permit a high level of laminate consolidation., The mould surfaces shall
be of a quality which will ensure the surface finish of the product.
(7) Fabrication Methods
Manufacture shall be by approved mechanical methods wherever

possible. Items produced by hand lay-up processes will only be
permitted if a suitable mechanically manufactured product is not
available. If deposition of resin by gun is used, this must be carried
out by airless spray technique.
(a) Unreinforced gel coats shall have a maximum thickness of 0.5

mm. Unreinforced flow (top) coats shall be fully brushed out to
remove resin rich areas. The flow coat shall not exceed 0.3 mm
in thickness.
(b) Surface veil or synthetic fabric reinforced layers shall consist of

approximately 90% resin by weight. The thickness of this
reinforced layer shall not exceed 0.5 mm.
(c) Chopped strand mat layers shall have a resin content of between
65% and 75% by weight.

(d) Woven roving glass fabric layers shall have a resin content of
between 40% and 60% by weight.
(e) Where edges of laminates are cut or exposed these shall be
sealed with a continuous layer of fully cured resin.
(f) Bisphenol or vinyl ester protective layers to
isophthalic/terephthalic laminates, shall be applied with a 'C' type
glass veil (or synthetic fabric veil) reinforcement after hardening
of the substrata. When this has sufficiently cured to prevent
movement, a continuous flow (top) coat of bisphenol or vinyl
ester resin shall be applied and fully cured. In such cases it is
anticipated that an appropriate paraffin wax additive will be
required to prevent air inhibition of the surface.
(8) Samples
(a) A sample measuring 1 metre square and typical of each different

laminate proposed shall be submitted for approval together with a
detailed descriptive specification at least 4 weeks prior to the
commencement of manufacture.
(b) Production samples measuring 300 mm square and typical of

each different section of laminate shall be submitted to the
Engineer's duly authorised Inspecting Engineer throughout the
period of manufacture for the purpose of testing.
(c) Samples of liquid and cast resin together with reinforcements

and surfacing veils (or fabrics) required to manufacture the
samples indicated in (b) above shall also be made available to
the Engineer.
Failure to provide any of the samples designated in (a), (b) and

(c) above shall be construed as representing a delay in
completion of the Contract under the terms and conditions
contained therein.
(9) Tolerances for Moulded GRP

Table 20-2 Thickness Tolerances for Moulded GRP
Nominal thickness Moulding from Moulding from Matched metal

(mm) open closed mould mouldings
mould. (mm) (mm)
(mm)
Up to but not p 0.50 ρ 0.20 ρ 0.18
including 1.5
1.5 to but not ρ 0.75 ρ 0.30 ρ 0.20
including 3.0
3.0 to but not ρ 1.10 ρ 0.50 ρ 0.30
including 6.0
6.0 to but not ρ 1.50 ρ 0.75 ρ 0.40
including 12.0
12.0 to but not ρ 2.00 ρ 1.40 ρ 0.50
including 25.0
25.0 and over ρ 3.00 ρ 1.90 ρ 0.65
(10) Quality Control and Testing
(a) The following tests for inspection and quality control shall be
carried out:-
(1) The laminate shall be fully cured and shall show full
resistance to a commercial acetone sensitivity test.
(2) The laminate shall give Barcol Hardness of at least 90% of

the resin manufacturer's recommendations. The
measurement of hardness by means of a Barcol Impressor
shall be carried out in accordance with the approved
standard.
(b) Resin burn off tests shall be performed on cut-outs, where no such
cut-outs exists the Engineer reserves the right to have 50 mm
diameter cut-outs for checks to be made on local glass
reinforcement content. The tests shall be conducted in accordance
with the approved standard and the result shall define glass
content.
(c) The following strengths of the laminate shall be determined in

accordance with the approved standard.
(1) Ultimate tensile unit strength
(2) Flexural strength
(3) Lap shear strength

(4) Shear and Peel strength of bond between thermoplastic

linings and laminate shall be at least 95% of the minimum
value specified by the laminate manufacturer.
(d) Where a laminate has been designed to take bolts in the make up
of the structure tests for bolt bearing strength shall be performed.
Bolt bearing strength tests shall be performed in accordance with
the approved standard.
(e) Where a laminate is to be used in conjunction with electrical control

equipment all or part of the following additional tests may be called
up which shall be carried out in accordance with the approved
standard.
(1) Electrical strength of sheet parallel to the plane of the sheet.
(2) Electrical strength of sheet normal to the plane of the sheet.
(3) Electrical strength of casting laminating resin system.
(4) Insulation resistance of laminated sheet using IEC taper pins.
(f) Additional tests may be called up at the discretion of the Engineer.

(g) (1) Test Certificate shall be obtained from the resin supplier for
the heat distortion temperature of resin and the unreinforced
resin extension to failure.
(2) Test Certificates shall be obtained from the glass

reinforcement manufacturer for each grade and type of glass
employed in the fabrication of the laminate.
(h) All the tests referenced in (a) to (f) above shall be witnessed by the
Engineer or his Representative unless waived in writing by the
Engineer.
(11) Trial Election
A sufficient proportion of the fabricated sections of the structure must

be trial assembled to demonstrate the correctness of fit of the various
sections.
20.2 METAL AND PLASTIC PREFABRICATED ITEMS
20.2.1. Ladders and Safety Hoops
Ladders and safety hoops shall be manufactured from either stainless steel
or glass reinforced plastic, as specified in the contract documentation.
The materials and manufacture of ladders and safety hoops shall be in

accordance with an approved international standard.
For all stainless steel ladders the stringers shall be 65 mm by 12 mm and

spaced 375 mm apart. The rungs shall be 25 mm dia. reduced to 20 mm

dia. at the ends and rivetted over. They shall be spaced at 225 mm centres.
The ladders shall be provided with fixing brackets or the ends of the
stringers shall be turned over to form fixings. The fixings shall be drilled for
16 mm diameter bolts.
Stainless steel safety hoops shall be of circular pattern fabricated from 50

mm by 10 mm flats. Fixing shall be by 12 mm dia. countersunk screws with
washers and nuts, the screws being inserted from the inside of the ladder
stringers.
Glass reinforced plastic ladders shall be dimensionally similar to stainless

steel ladders for rung widths and spacings. The treads of rungs shall be
roughened.
All fixing brackets, screws, bolts and nuts, etc. shall be SS comply with AISI
grade 316 S16.
20.2.2. Underground Hydrants and Covers
Underground Hydrants shall be of the screw-down pattern manufactured in

accordance with the approved International Standard.
20.2.3 Open Mesh and Chequer Plate Flooring
Open mesh and chequer plate flooring shall be of mild steel, aluminium or
reinforced plastic as specified in the Contract Documentation.
Unless higher loadings are called for floorings shall be designed to take
pedestrian loading based on a central point load of 100 kg under which the
deflection shall not exceed span/200 for metal flooring and span/100 for
reinforced plastic flooring. Reinforced plastic flooring shall have a non slip
tread surface.
Unless a higher grade of protection is detailed all mild steel flooring shall be
hot-dipped galvanised after fabrication.
20.2.4 Galvanised Steel Guardrailing
Tubular handrails and standards shall be of 10 gauge thickness 32 mm

nominal internal diameter steel tube. Solid handrails shall be 25 mm
diameter and solid standards 32 mm diameter. The balls on the standards
shall be of adequate size to accommodate the rails which shall be fixed by
grub screws for tubular rails and by welding for solid rails or by similar
approved fixings.
Heights of rails, overall dimensions and details of the bases for the
standards, fixing bolts and any other special requirements relating to the
guardrailing are shown on the drawings.
All components shall be galvanised after fabrication.

20.2.5 Aluminium Guardrailing
Unless otherwise specified or ordered, aluminium guardrailing shall be

constructed with tubular rails fixed to double ball pattern solid forged
standards. Both rails and standards shall have a minimum outside diameter
of 38 mm.
The rails and standards shall be of aluminium alloy anodised after

fabrication. The standards shall be fitted with base plates approximately
150 mm x 65 mm x 16 mm thick.
Heights of rails, overall dimensions and details of the bases for the
standards, fixing bolts and any other special requirements relating to the
guardrailing are shown on the drawings.
20.3 ODOUR CONTROL EQUIPMENT
20.3.1 Design Parameters
The Tenderer shall submit detailed proposals for the effective control of
odours emitted from wet wells.
Concentrations of H2S are likely to be as high as 250 ppm under natural

ventilation conditions with an average concentration of 50 ppm.
The odour control system shall be based on the use of bulk activated carbon
of the regenerative type. The system shall be designed for regeneration of
the carbon without the removal of any part of the plant from site.
Performance guarantees to reduce the H2S levels at 1.5 m above ground

level to 0.1 ppm and in the Wet Well to 3 ppm shall be included in the
proposals and shall be binding on the successful Tenderer.
The Deodoriser shall be designed during normal operation to give a

minimum of 16 air changes per hour.
A warning light of the flashing beacon type shall be placed at the entrance to
the wet well which shall operate if the system fails. It shall operate on the fail
safe basis and additional signage is to be provided warning operators not to
enter if the flashing/warning light is illumated. Safe working practices shall
be followed before any entry. A notice shall be placed underneath the
warning light and shall read as follows:-
DANGER
VENTILATION FAILURE
DO NOT ENTER WHEN THE RED LIGHT IS FLASHING

20.3.2 Description and Arrangement of Plant
20.3.2.1 General
The odour control plant shall comprise a rechargeable activated carbon bulk
plant with pre-filter as follows:-
Filter media housing

Sufficient Activated Carbon to give continuous operation for five years
(Inclusive of regeneration)
A. Pre-filter inclusive of housing, washable nylon filter etc.
B. Extract fan (s)
C. H 2 S monitor
D. Differential pressure gauge
E. Interconnecting pipework and valves
F. Ductwork between sump, fan(s), carbon filter and pre-filter
20.3.2.2 Filter Media Housing
The filter media housing shall be manufactured in uPVC and wrapped

externally with glass reinforced white pigmented polyester resin (GRP) in
accordance with the general specifications. Conductive resin strips behind
weld lines shall be included to alleviate static build up and be bonded to
earth.
It shall consist of a vertical cylindrical sections with flat base as follows:
Flanged access covers

Discharge stack
Connections for earth bonding, pre-filter inlet, differential pressure detector,
H2S monitor etc.
All materials shall be resistant to corrosion from chemicals encountered in

the process.
Design calculations shall be submitted in respect of the stack height

required to prevent down-draft occurring due to the possible effect of
adjacent structures.
20.3.2.3 Filter Media
The filter media shall be activated carbon and must be effective in dealing
with odours arising from concentrations of Hydrogen Sulphide gas.
A full specification of the type and grade of activated carbon proposed is to

be included with the Tender.
The Contractor shall state the expected life of the activated carbon and
guarantee sufficient supplies for five years of operation.
The activated carbon shall be suitable for insitu regeneration by water wash.
For which all necessary equipment shall be provided.

20.3.2.4 Extract Fans
Extract fans shall be provided as necessary in the system prior to the main
filter to transfer foul air as described previously.
Each fan shall be of the multi-vane centrifugal type and fabricated from
stainless steel comply with AISI Gr. 316 S31
A direct coupled drive is preferred but alternatives will be considered

providing it can be shown that belts and pulleys are fully protected.
Motors shall be in accordance with the electrical section of the specification.

They shall be suitable for continued operation within the hazardous location.
20.3.2.5 Differential Pressure Switch
An air pressure switch for detection of the efficiency of filters shall be

provided. It shall be of the differential pressure type and be protected for the
environment. The switch shall be intrinsically safe and shall be arranged to
initiate an alarm one week before filters require cleaning.
20.3.2.6 H 2 S Monitor
H2S Monitor for deodorising plants shall be of the "sensitised pad" type
enclosed in a factory manufactured clear UV protected housing mounted in
a clearly visible location on the filter media housing. The sampling point shall
be in the air stream just above the carbon bed level such that it detects the
level of H2S that is emitted from the filter.
The sensitised pad shall change colour relative to its exposure to H2S. A
colour chart with H2S (ppb) graduated against time (min) shall be supplied
for comparison.
20.3.2.7 Ductwork
Ductwork, casings, sun covers, louvers etc. shall be constructed of

chemically reinstated glass reinforced plastic or Upvc, or stainless steel as
specified and comply with the following:-
Comply with HVAC and SMACNA or similar approved publications
Obtrusions to air flow with the exception to dampers, vanes, splitters will not
be accepted.
All joints, fittings, support etc. shall have all sharp edges removed.
Where ductwork passes through ceilings, roofs, walls etc.; purpose made
vermin proof fittings are to be used.
Connection of individual components between an assembly and ductwork

shall be carried using angled flange joints.

Ducts in close proximity to walls and ceilings shall be mounted in such a way
as to exclude vermin runs.
Flexible joints are to be provided at all fan inlets and outlets

Where uPVC is exposed to direct sunlight it shall be enclosed in GRP for
protection.
The external noise levels due to the operation of the ventilation equipment
shall be unobtrusive at all times.
20.3.2.8 Filters
The filter designed should be as follows:-
Filters shall be installed at all points of entry to ventilation and air

conditioning systems. To reduce the ingress of dust around the frame to a
minimum and so constructed to facilitate maintenance.
Manufactured from approved corrosion resistant material.

Have a Minimum efficiency of 95%.
Have a maximum air velocity of 2.5 m/sec.
Provided with drainage points as necessary
Pressure of clean air > 90 Pa for 95% efficiency & > 125 Pa for 98%
efficiency.
20.3.2.9 Flexible Joints
Flexible joints shall have the effective cross sectional area as adjoining
ductwork or fan housing and shall be manufactured from material with a 15
minute fire penetration time.
20.4 VENTILATION
20.4.1 General
Ventilation equipment shall be supplied and installed for the areas specified.
The noise level due to ventilation equipment shall be no greater than sound
power level 65 dB(A) re 10-12 watts.
The Contractor shall include for sound absorbers and anti-vibration

mountings as necessary.
All inlets and outlets through the roof shall be fitted with approved GRP or
Aluminium cowls and bird screens. All inlets and outlets through walls shall
be fitted with sand trapped de-mountable aluminium louvers. All materials
used for external fittings shall be highly resistant to ultra-violet light
degradation.
All louvers shall be of the sand trap type and shall be fitted with internal
sand filters and mosquito screens.

20.4.2 Extract Fans
Extract fans shall be roof, wall or duct mounted electric motor driven axial
flow type. They shall be complete with weather protecting cowls of GRP or
aluminium if mounted externally, and any necessary ductwork.
Extract fans shall be sized to provide the minimum number of air changes
per hour for the area specified:-
Toilets 12
Stores 6
Workshops 15
Garages/Car park areas 8
Messes (two speed) 6-20
Motor Room 10 - 20
Dry Well 20.
20.4.3 Wet Well Ventilation
Refer to odour control equipment
20.4.4 Dry Well Ventilation
Ventilation equipment shall provide 20 air changes per hour to the dry well
area.
The system shall operate on the principle of forced draught outlet/ natural
ventilation inlet via the stairways and other apertures.
20.4.5 Motor Room Ventilation
Ventilation equipment shall be two speed to provide 10 or 20 air changes

per hour to the Motor Room area.
The system shall operate on the principle of forced draught outlet/ natural
ventilation inlet via inlet louvers. All inlet louvers shall be fitted with 50mm
thick metallic washable filters. Access shall be provided for cleaning/changing
filters.
20.4.6 Fans
Fans shall be of the axial flow or centrifugal types suitable for handling air of
high humidity and having concentrations of hydrogen sulphide.
They shall be of non-ferrous construction or be protected with suitable epoxy

resin coatings.

Wet well fans shall be constructed entirely from stainless steel to an

All bearings shall be of the roller or ball race type and shall be sealed for life.
20.4.7 Fan Motors
Fan motors shall be suitable for continuous operation in hot, humid

atmospheres at an ambient temperature of up to 55oC at 100% humidity.
The degree of protection provided shall be appropriate to the installed

location and approved by the Engineer.
All motors shall comply with the requirements of the electrical section of the
Specification insofar as it applies.
20.4.8 Ducting
Ventilation ducting shall be of GRP, Reinforced uPVC or Stainless Steel.

Material thickness, stiffening and joint arrangements shall be in accordance
with an approved International Standard.
Ducting shall be complete with all necessary supports. Stainless steel nuts
and bolts shall be used for all ducting joints and all Supports and brackets
shall be galvanised except where otherwise specified. All supports, brackets
and fixings in wet wells shall be stainless steel.
Ducting shall be sized so that the air velocity within the ducts shall not
exceed 5.5 m/s.
Flexible connections and anti-vibration mountings shall be provided as

necessary between the ductwork and fans and provision shall be made for
thermal expansion.
Where ducts pass through walls roof or floor slab the gap shall be sealed
with a non degradable approved material.
20.5 AIR CONDITIONING
20.5.1 Wall Mounted Air Conditioning Units
Air cooled 'window-type' air conditioning units, as supplied by an approved

and accepted manufacturer, shall be installed in positions approved by the
Engineer. They shall be provided complete with slide out chassis and
frame, suitable for clear openings set not higher than 1.5m above floor level.
They shall be suitable for continuous efficient operation in the climatic
conditions prevailing and the materials of construction (particularly
concerning the fins or extended surfaces of the refrigerant to air heat
exchangers) shall be subject to the Engineer's approval.
Both fresh air and re-circulated air shall be filtered and the filter shall be
arranged for ease of removal from the main unit for cleaning and
replacement.

Depending on the size of the room space and the heat load therein, the air
conditioning units shall be of 1 ton, 1.5 tons or 2 tons refrigeration capacity
(equivalent to an air cooling capacity of 13,250; 19,880 or 26,500 B.T.U.’s
per hour) or multiples thereof.
Each unit shall be provided with a manually adjustable thermostatic air

temperature control and such other controls necessary to allow the following
modes of operation:-
1. Off.
2. Fan only with two speeds.
3. Cooling at two possible fan speeds.
4. Re-circulation of air from room, through unit and back to room.
5. Part re-circulation of air with some exhaust airflow.
6. Part re-circulation of air with some fresh air inlet flow.
Each unit shall also be fitted with an automatic delay timer in the
compressor control circuitry to prevent the compressor having to start
against gas pressure in the event of an interruption in the power supply or
the cooling mode being switched off and on rapidly.
20.5.2 Centralised Air Conditioning Systems
Centralised air conditioning systems shall comply with the requirements of

the Particular Specification.
The system shall be complete with all necessary ductwork, diffusers, air
grilles etc. Two single package units shall be provided and installed. Each
unit shall be capable of providing 60% of the total cooling load.
Machinery shall be from an approved manufacturer, of types readily

available in Dubai and suitable for installation in direct sunlight. Filters,
re-heaters and/or humidifiers shall be provided as necessary to maintain the
condition of the equipment.
Supply and return air ducting shall be run in the void above the suspended
ceiling where applicable. Air vents to conditioned areas shall be via slot
diffusers integral with the suspended ceiling. The whole system shall be
designed to give an even temperature distribution throughout the air-
conditioned areas.
Single package units shall be of the type with two compressors and split
coils arranged so that the failure of a compressor shall not lead to total
failure of the air conditioning to any area. The two units shall be identical to
limit the quantity of spares.
Work on installation of air conditioning systems is only to be undertaken by

an approved local air conditioning contractor or by an international air
conditioning contractor who is associated with an approved local air
conditioning contractor.

It is recommended that the Contractor engages the services of an air

conditioning specialist who is familiar with local requirements and conditions
to design and specify the system and liaize with Dubai Electricity and Water
Authority, regarding approvals and inspections.
Copies of the design calculations, unit specifications and system

descriptions and drawings are to be submitted to the Engineer for approval
by the RTA/DM who will finally be responsible for the air conditioning
system. The RTA/DM will require two additional copies of the operating
manuals for the air conditioning system. Representatives of the RTA/DM
will require to be in attendance during commissioning.
A five year guarantee shall be provided against all malfunctions of the

compressor by the Dubai Electricity and Water Authority approved local air
conditioning contractor appointed.
20.5.3 Split Unit Air Conditioners
All materials used in the manufacture of the units shall be produced to

approved International Standards. The cooling tubes shall be manufactured
from solid drawn copper and shall be tested to 20 bars. Fins shall be of
Aluminium and shall be permanently bonded to the tube. Cabinets shall be
manufactured from pre-galvanised sheet steel and the outer panels
electro-statically powder coated with epoxy and stoved. Panels shall be
removable for access.
Condensate trays shall be fitted and the outlets piped to a suitable drain
point.
Fans shall have corrosion resistant steel impellers. Motors shall comply with
the relevant parts of the Specification. Anti-vibration mountings shall be
provided.
Air filters shall be fitted having 90% efficiency. If they are of the throw-away
type a five year supply of spare elements shall be provided.
The condenser unit shall be suitable for outdoor installation.
The coils shall be pressure tested to 20 bars and fins shall be permanently
bonded to them.
Motors shall be weatherproof and shall comply with the relevant parts of the
Specification.
Compressors shall be hermetically sealed. Crank-case heaters and

anti-vibration mountings shall be provided.
High and low pressure switches and overload protection shall be provided
and also an anti-recycling timer.
The units shall be sized to maintain a dry bulb temperature of 26oC and a
relative humidity of between 40% and 60% when the external shade
temperature is 52oC and the external relative humidity is 50%.

20.6 STANDBY DIESEL GENERATING PLANT
20.6.1 Application
The diesel generating plant is required to provide a standby source of power

and shall be suitable to start and take-up continuous full load after lengthy
periods of standing un-operated. It is the supplier's responsibility to ensure
that the plant is fully suitable for this class of duty and suitable for the
electrical loads to be applied to the plant. The equipment shall be suitable
for operation at a temperature of 50oC and should be derated accordingly.
20.6.2 General Description Of The Plant
The engine and alternator shall be mounted upon a purpose built one piece
robust rolled steel fabricated baseframe which shall be provided with lifting
lugs complying with an approved international standard. Steel support
channels shall be cast into the concrete base slab to which the base frame
shall be bolted. Jacking points and dragging points shall also be provided.
Anti-vibration mountings (oil resistant) may be included below the baseframe

if the Tenderer considers these desirable but the inherent vibration level of
the complete unit from zero to 10% above working speed should not
necessitate anti-vibration mounting. Oil drip trays, with drainage facility,
shall be provided below the engine to prevent floor contamination.
The Contractor shall supply the first fill of lubricating and fuel oil as well as
any necessary consumables for testing.
20.6.3 Engine - General
The engine shall be as follows:-
Rated for kW loading of the applied load with consideration given to sizing in
such a way that it is not subject to running for long periods of time under
light loading.
Of four stroke, compression ignition, self- lubricating, water cooled type

complying with approved international standard, as is applicable, running at
a nominal speed not exceeding 1500 rpm and shall be suitable for operating
on automotive diesel fuel. The rating shall suit the load requirements in the
ambient conditions stated.
The following shall be incorporated in the design:-
Replaceable plated cylinder liners

Replaceable valve seats
Replaceable valve guides.
Replaceable silicon bronze small ends
Valve gear shall be of the enclosed pattern
Cam shaft and crankshaft to be supported by lined steel shells
Crankcase pressure relief breather to be of the closed circuit type.
Air filter of the extra heavy duty “Desert” centrifugal type

The engine shall directly drive the generator with the coupling arrangement
being flexible. A flywheel shall be fitted to ensure stable operation. Means
shall be provided for manual barring of the engine for maintenance
purposes.
All exposed rotating or moving parts shall be protected by suitable guards

with brackets and securing arrangements of substantial construction and
shall comply with an approved international standard. Special attention shall
be given to guarding the flywheel-coupling and the radiator fan drive.
The guards shall be readily removable for plant maintenance purposes as

necessary.
Lifting eyes or lugs shall be provided on the cylinder head blocks if

necessary. The Tenderer shall include with the offer a drawing showing all
necessary lifting requirements with unit weights both for installation and
maintenance.
Remote alarm contacts, where referred to, shall be voltage free SPDT
suitable for 1 amp at 24 V DC/220 V A.C.
20.6.4 Engine - Lubrication
The lubricating system shall be of the closed circuit type suitable for fast
automatic start of the unit. The oil shall be pumped round the oil circuit by
an engine mechanically driven pump having a suction strainer and the oil
system shall not require priming prior to starting the engine.
The oil pump shall have associated with it a pressure regulating valve and a
separate over pressure relief valve. Large capacity dual filters with auto
bypass shall be fitted immediately after the oil pump. The filters shall be of
the replaceable type. Each filter shall be fitted with a pressure gauge and
drain cock. The oil cooler shall use the coolant of the engine cooling
system.
The lubrication system shall be designed to allow at least 400 hours of

continuous running between oil and filter changes and shall be provided with
a filler cap, dipstick and plugged oil drainage valve.
Dial type gauges showing the oil pressure and temperature after the filters
shall be provided.
20.6.5 Engine - Fuel System
This shall include a fuel tank with the necessary mounting brackets, and
pipework (including a flexible connecting pipe if the tank is not engine
mounted). The tank shall be of sufficient capacity for 8 hours continuous
operation or as specified at full load and shall be complete with a fuel shut
off valve, a dial type level indicator, minimum and maximum level switches
having SPDT contacts suitable for 24 V DC/220 V A.C. at 1 amp (for filling
control and alarm), a protected vent, an overflow connection and a plugged
drain valve.

A fuel feed pump driven from the engine shaft shall be provided, together
with a hand priming pump, also dual filters and a drip tray to collect any fuel
spill or leakage. The drip tray to have a drainage cock and flexible draw-off
pipe.
A dial type gauge showing the pressure after the filters shall be provided.
20.6.6 Engine - Cooling
The coolant shall be a proprietary anti-corrosive type in a closed circuit

system with a radiator mounted on the engine bedplate and having an
engine driven cooling fan arranged to discharge the cooling air to the
outside of the enclosing structure.
A mixture of coolants, rust inhibitor recommended by the generator

manufacturer for the climatic conditions prevailing in Dubai shall be used.
Quantities and mixture ratios shall be clearly identified in the Operational
Manuals provided for the project.
A flexible connection shall be provided between the radiator and the

surround opening to prevent hot discharge air escaping backwards. The
opening shall be large enough to allow installation and removal of the
generator plant and shall have an external rain protecting removable grille.
The radiator shall be sized to allow for the ambient conditions and the plant
layout at 110% of the engine full load rating.
The coolant shall be circulated by an engine driven pump having a pressure

gauge on the outlet pipework. The cooling system shall incorporate a
thermostatic valve to bypass the radiator to provide rapid warm up and
automatic temperature control. A dial type indicator showing the coolant
temperature at the hottest point of the cooling system shall be provided.
The coolant system shall include at the highest level in the system a volume
capacity either in the upper part of the radiator or by a separate header tank
to allow for coolant expansion and make-up. A coolant level indicator shall
be fitted.
The cooling system shall be provided with plugged valves as necessary to

enable all parts of the system to be drained.
20.6.7 Engine - Exhaust System
Each plant set shall be complete with all exhaust pipework including
stainless steel flexible exhaust piping or stainless steel bellows pieces from
the engine and suitable silencers either mounted above the engine or
complete with the necessary brackets and hangers for supporting from the
enclosing structure.
The exhaust system shall be complete with all pipework, fittings and
mountings to carry the exhaust gases away from the enclosing structure. All
pipework within the enclosing structure shall be provided with efficient
lagging.

The engine exhaust system shall be fitted with temperature indicators at the
outlet of each cylinder block manifold arranged so that the indicators may be
satisfactorily observed from floor level.
20.6.8 Engine - Speed Control
An electronic governor system shall be fitted to maintain engine speed and

recovery time within the limits of an approved international standard. The
system shall be arranged such that an adequate range of speed together
with fine speed adjustment is obtained.
Means shall be provided for electrical remote control of the speed over a
range of +5% of the normal speed.
An entirely independent overspeed trip shall be fitted to shut down the

engine if the speed exceeds 10% above the normal speed. This device
shall not operate if full load is suddenly thrown off the engine. Provision
shall be included to provide a remote electrical alarm. This overspeed
safety trip shall be hand reset at the engine.
20.6.9 Engine - Starting
The engine may be started either electrically or by means of compressed

air.
The starting system capacity shall be adequate to allow 6 consecutive start

attempts each of 15 seconds with 1 minute intervals.
After receipt of the starting signal, the starting system shall carry out all
sequential operations necessary to drive the unit up to normal voltage and
frequency. In the event of failure to start on the first starting control signal,
the system shall automatically initiate the starting sequence two further
consecutive times with the appropriate time spacing. Should no result be
obtained the system shall prevent further starting attempts and actuate a
circuit to provide a 'Failure to Start' alarm.
It shall be possible by means of a selector to alter the starting sequence to

provide a single start attempt of up to 1 minute before lockout and alarm.
An engine shut down solenoid shall be fitted, this shall be of the "energised
to run type" for operation from the engine control system battery. An
emergency stop push button shall be provided.
Stopping shall be attained by interrupting the shut down solenoid circuit and
this shall also cancel any outstanding repeat start attempts.
If compressed air starting is provided, an electrically driven air compressor

shall be provided capable of recharging the air bottles automatically within
15 minutes. A hand start diesel or petrol engined standby re-charging
compressor shall also be provided. The air system shall be complete with
all valves, gauges and stainless steel or copper pipework. The air supply
vessel shall be located off the engine bed and shall comply with an

approved international standard. Means shall be provided whereby any

condensed water is automatically drained from the system. A pressure switch
shall be incorporated to provide a low air pressure alarm.
With air starting, an Alkaline type battery unit shall be provided suitable to
energise the diesel plant control system continuously for a minimum of 24
hours. This battery unit shall be fitted with a voltmeter and means to provide
remote alarm in the event of low battery volts. Mains operated automatic
high-low rate charging shall be included having a charging ammeter to show
high rate with an adjacent push switch which when held depressed changes
to low rate scale. A "No Charge" remote alarm circuit shall be incorporated
to operate after 15 minutes delay.
If electric starting is used an Alkaline type battery shall be provided together

with rapid recharge by means of an engine driven charging generator with
automatic charging control and cut-out and including a generator charging
ammeter (which may be on the 'Engine Panel', referred to elsewhere). An
automatic mains operated constant potential type battery charger shall
also be provided incorporating self- protecting current limiting arrangements
and shall also be suitable to remain connected to the battery when charging
is proceeding by the engine generator. The battery unit shall be fitted with a
voltmeter also a mains charging ammeter to show high rate with an adjacent
push switch which when held depressed changes to low scale. Means to
provide remote alarm of low battery volts and "No Charge" shall be
incorporated to operate after 15 minutes delay excepting that the "No
Charge" alarm shall not be given when generator charging is proceeding.
The interconnecting cables between the starting battery and the engine
starter shall be provided.
The battery used for electric starting may also be used to energise the
diesel plant control system but shall have enough capacity remaining after
three engine start attempts to energise the control system continuously for
24 hours.
The control system shall be suitable to continue operating correctly during

the voltage dips occurring on the battery during the engine starts.
20.6.10 Engine Panel
A panel shall be provided on the engine unit, supported on anti- vibration

mountings at a convenient height and position for observation and operation
and shall have on the panel face:-
1. Lubricating oil pressure gauge

2. Lubricating oil temperature indicator
3. Fuel line pressure gauge
4. Coolant system temperature indicator
5. Engine stop push button
6. Charging Ammeter (Engine Generator)
7. Engine Speed Indicator with non-re-setable hours counter
(Mechanical Tachometer).

20.6.11 Engine - Safety Devices
The following safety devices shall be fitted and arranged to stop the engine:-
1. Oil pressure low

2. Oil temperature high
3. Coolant temperature high
4. Over speed
5. Fuel low.
20.6.12 Engine Wiring
All wiring associated with the engine shall be insulated with heat resistant
type insulation to an approved international standard for use at temperatures
of up to 85oC 600/1000 volt grade. Conductor section shall be stranded and
to suit the currents involved at the ambient temperatures arising but not less
than 1.5 mm2 excepting special types such as compensated or screened
cables.
All wiring on the engine (excluding starting cables) shall be brought out to a
common shielded terminal board mounted on the engine. Starting cables
may be connected directly to the items concerned on the engine.
20.6.13 Alternator Output
The output shall be suitable for the load after the alternator has provided for
its own auxiliaries, and shall have an overload capacity of 10% for one hour
at the ambient conditions.
20.6.14 Alternator Construction
The alternator shall comply with an approved international standard and be

of the brushless self excited type fitted with heavy duty lubricant packed ball
or roller bearings to give at least 4000 hours running without attention. The
machine shall be screen protected and drip-proof to an approved
international standard. The cooling air inlets shall be screen protected at the
end remote from the engine and shall be designed to deflect and remove
dust from the incoming air stream so that, as far as possible, it shall be
prevented from entering and accumulating within the ventilation spaces or
elsewhere where a build up of dust may be deleterious to the performance
or reliability of the machine. When specified outlet ducting shall be provided
to duct the alternator cooling air out of the building.
The frame of the alternator shall be fitted with lifting lugs or eye bolts to an
20.6.15 Alternator - Terminals
Main terminal boxes shall be mounted on the alternator and shall contain
both phase and neutral terminals. The neutral end of each phase shall be
brought to a separate neutral terminal to facilitate testing of the windings
and a neutral link bar provided. The terminal box shall meet the
requirements of an approved international standard.

The alternator frame shall be provided with a bolted earthing lug.
20.6.16 Alternator - Insulation
The alternator windings insulation and temperature rise shall be in

accordance with an approved international standard and de-rated to allow
for the ambient conditions.
20.6.17 Alternator - Heaters
The alternator shall be fitted with 110V anti-condensation heaters. The

connections to these heaters shall be brought to a separate terminal box (or
a separately enclosed section in the main terminals box) and conspicuously
marked to indicate the danger that the terminals are likely to be alive from a
separate supply.
20.6.18 Alternator - Waveform, Regulation and Radio Frequency Interference
The alternator waveform shall meet the requirements of an approved

international standard. Voltage regulation shall be controlled by an electronic
type automatic voltage regulator, the regulation shall be in accordance with an
Provision shall be included to ensure adequate excitation of the alternator

under electrical fault conditions such that the output current would be not less
than 250% of full load current to ensure the tripping of protective devices.
Provision shall also be made for manual adjustment of the regulated output
voltage over the range of 10% above and 10% below the normal specified
voltage.
Radio frequency interference suppression equipment shall be included as

necessary for electrical parts of the generator to ensure that interference
levels conform to an approved international standard.
20.6.19 Control Panel Construction
The panel shall be constructed generally as described for FBA’s and shall
be suitable for indoor installation in the ambient conditions separately
specified, its construction shall be such as to allow full accessibility from the
front and to be suitable for mounting against a vertical wall with no rear
access. Floor fixing bolts shall be provided.
The panel shall be sealed so as to be substantially dust and vermin proof to

the requirements of an approved international standard. Cables will enter
and leave from the bottom. The panel shall be provided with a removable
rustproof plated gland plate. The Contractor shall provide and fit all
necessary cable glands. The control panel shall comply with the
specification for FBA's as and where applicable.

20.6.20 Control Panel - Front Panel
The following shall be mounted on the front face of the panel at suitable
viewing and operating heights:-
1. Voltmeter and selector switch
2. Ammeter and selector switch (Suitable current transformers are to be

provided by the Contractor and located to suit the general layout,
typically in the alternator cable box).
3. Frequency meter (47 - 53 Hz)
4. Voltmeter for battery voltage

Ammeter for Battery Charge
Push switch for range change (If not fitted on a separate charging
unit)
5. Selector switch, key operated, having positions:-
'Local' - 'Locked Out' - 'Remote' (Key to be removable in the 'locked out'

position only)
6. 'Raise/Lower' Alternator Voltage adjuster
7. Push buttons:-
'Increase Speed' (White)

'Decrease Speed' (White)
'Start' (Green)
'Stop' (Red)
'Sequence Reset' (White)
'Lockout Reset' (White)
'Check Alarm' (Orange)
'Lamp Test' (White)
The 'start' push button to be functional only when the control selector
switch is at the 'Local' position.
8. Lamp Indications:-
'Alarm Checked' (Orange)

'Incomplete Starting Sequence (White)
'Overspeed' (White)
'Fuel Low Level' (White)
'Coolant High Temperature' (White)
'Lubricant High Temperature' (White)
'Lubricant Low Pressure' (White)
'Charging Fail' (If not on a separate charging unit) (White)
Push buttons and lamp indicators may be combined together where

appropriate (i.e. 'Check Alarm'/'Alarm Checked').

20.6.21 Control Panel - Alarm Annunciator
All alarms shall be displayed on an alarm annunciator which shall be

mounted at the front upper part of the panel. The alarm system shall be of
the "first up" type and each alarm shall be provided with a volt free SPDT
contact for remote repeat alarm.
The annunciator shall be generally as described elsewhere.
20.6.22 Control Panels - General
Important Instruction
Generators shall not be provided with the manufacturers standard control

panel. Printed circuit boards and electronic components shall be kept to a
minimum. All control functions shall be effected by eight or eleven pin plug
in relays and all push buttons, lamps and fuses shall be as described else
where. All control components such as Automatic Voltage Regulator, Speed
Controller, Frequency Controller, Over/Under Voltage Controller, Pressure
and Temperature Controllers, Level Controllers, Timers, Counters etc. shall be
separate, independent items fixed to the back plate and prominently labelled.
Each unit shall be individually removable and 100% spare units shall be
provided. Under no circumstances will a PCB or control unit which controls
more than one function or variable be acceptable.
The panel shall be designed and constructed such that a general electrician
with no electronics experience or knowledge and with the use of standard
multimeter type instrumentation only can carry out fault finding, maintenance
and repair work with the guidance of the Operation and Maintenance
Manual.
The control panel shall contain the following items:-
1. Automatic voltage regulator (unless mounted on the generator unit) to

be self protected against under and over voltage and frequency.
2. Battery charger (unless a separate unit).
3. Contactor for alternator anti-condensation heaters.
4. Emergency engine shutdown from alarms as listed elsewhere. Engine

to be 'locked out' until the 'Lockout Reset' push button is operated.
Lockout, to provide contacts for the tripping of the generator (remote)
circuit breaker.
5. Monitoring and control relays as necessary.

6. MCB cut-outs, fuses etc. as necessary.
7. Terminals as necessary, including for remote stop/start operation and

indication, remote speed control and voltage adjust and remote circuit
breaker trip, also terminals for anti-condensation heater and local
supply (separately enclosed and with warning label). All terminals to
be coded in accordance with an approved international standard.

8. Wiring, as necessary, PVC insulated of not less than 1.5 mm2. copper
cross section, to an approved international standard, with
each conductor reference coded at both ends for identification Green
colour to be used for earth circuits only.
20.6.23 Bulk Fuel Tanks
Bulk fuel tanks shall be as follows:-
i) Sufficient quantity to provide approximately seven days operation
ii) Manufactured in accordance with an approved international standard

and be fabricated from good commercial quality mild steel plate of
minimum 5 mm thickness, ends dished and flanged, electrically welded
throughout and spatter removed.
iii) Provided with a 480 mm diameter raised manhole with joint and 8 mm
thick bolted on cover.
iv) Provided with galvanised access ladder and platform to manhole
v) BSTP connections shall be provided for fill, vent, outlet and drain.
Receive approved corrosion protection appropriate to its location.
20.6.24 Fuel Transfer Pumps
Electric fuel transfer pumps, if necessary shall be of the progressive cavity

type, self priming and capable of achieving a suction lift of at least 7 metres.
They shall be capable of pumping approximately 400 litres of diesel fuel per
hour from the bulk fuel tank to the day tank. Two number shall be provided
for each installation located immediately below the day tank. They shall
operate in an automatic duty/standby mode with automatic interchange of
duty to equalise wear.
Manual fuel transfer pumps shall be of the self priming diaphragm type with
detachable handle arranged to pump diesel fuel from the bulk fuel tank to
the day tank.
Provision shall also be made to pump fuel from the day tank to the bulk fuel
tank to empty the day tank for maintenance purposes.
20.6.25 Fuel System
The fuel system shall comprise the following:-
Fuel transfer pumps controlled by a float type level switch in the day tank.
Overflow back to the bulk fuel tank to be provided to guard against float switch
failure.
Mesh type filters not coarser than 120 mesh to be provided on the draw-off
line.

Free-fall fire shut-off valves to be fitted operated from the local fire alarm
system (where applicable) or a wire rope and heat sensitive fusible link.
Daily service tank to accommodate fuel for 8 hours running at full load.
Fuel supply piping system to be in suitably sized copper tubing.
20.6.26 Enclosure
Where specified the diesel generator shall be housed in a purpose built GRP
enclosure as follows:-
GRP fabrication as described elsewhere.
Protection against the ingress of dust and moisture to an approved

international standard.
Provide ample access for maintenance by way of hinged and removable

covers
Controls, indication etc. to be enclosed in an integral panel with a

polycarbonate hinged clear cover.
Small power & lighting system as per GRP enclosures described for
submersible pumping stations.
In all cases the maximum sound level shall not exceed 85dbA at 1m radius
from the generator and/or enclosure.
20.7 FIRE ALARM AND EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS
20.7.1 General
The Contractor shall arrange for an approved Sub-Contractor who shall be on

the list of Approved Contractors, to supply, install, wire and commission the
complete manual/automatic fire alarm system comprising manual fire alarm
call points, alarm bells and sounders, smoke and heat detectors and control
panels as indicated on the drawings. The fire alarm system equipment shall
be selected from equipment approved by the Fire Department. The system
shall be installed and maintained in accordance with the recommendations of
an approved international standard. The wiring shall be 1.5 mm2 MICC/PVC
for bell and battery circuits.
20.7.2 Manual Fire Alarm Call Point
Manual fire alarm call points shall consist of a die cast plastic cover locked in
position with screws. The enclosure shall house a micro switch. The micro
switch plunger shall bear onto an inset break glass panel fixed into the cover.
The call point shall be arranged for surface mounting. The cover and the
enclosure shall be self coloured red. The words “BREAK GLASS FOR
ALARM” shall be printed on the frangible glass. A testing facility using a
special key shall be provided to enable the call point to be tested without
breaking the glass and the frangible glass shall be covered with plastic film to

prevent injury when the glass is broken. The mounting height shall be 1500
mm above finished floor level.
The switching unit contacts shall be gold or silver plated or an alloyed metal
which will not corrode when left unattended in a highly polluted environment.
Contact blades and other metal parts of the switching unit shall also be
constructed from plated or alloyed metal which will not corrode when left
unattended. Contacts shall be normally open or normally closed to suit the
alarm monitoring system. The voltage and current rating of the contacts shall
be marked within the enclosure.
The call point shall comply with an approved international standard

:Specification for manual call points”.
The call point shall be resistant to the ingress of dust and water, and shall be
suitable for operation in the environmental conditions at the site of
installation.
20.7.3 Optical Smoke Detector
Optical smoke detectors shall comply with an approved international standard.
20.7.4 Detector Base
An operation indicator lamp of the light emitting diode type and a time delay
unit to override spurious alarms shall be fitted to the base.
20.7.5 Fire Alarm Panel
The fire alarm panel shall be wall mounted adjacent to the motor control
centre. The fire alarm system shall protect risk areas within the premises by
giving warning of a fire condition relayed by an automatic detector or by the
operation of a break glass callpoint. Operation of an individual detector is to
be displayed by an indicator fitted into the base of the detector. This indicator
will illuminate when its detector goes into alarm. Fixed temperature heat
detectors will not have this local indication facility. Upon receipt of an alarm,
the control units shall perform the following actions:
a) Illuminate fire zone detector

b) Activate alarm warning devices within the building
c) Operate internal fire sounder
d) Operate ancillary devices as appropriate
Alarm warning devices shall be de-activated by operation of the “Silence

Alarms” switch. The internal sounder will continue to operate and the fire
indicators remain lit until the key switch controlled push switch is operated.
This should only be achieved if the alarm initiating device is no longer in
alarm.
Reset of the controller, after the fire incident has been investigated, will be
achieved by operation of the “Reset” switch.

The enclosures of the panels shall be fabricated from sheet steel, minimum
thickness 1.5 mm and shall be provided with a hinged lockable door.
Protection to an approved international standard shall be provided.
The control unit should be designed to comply with the compulsory

requirements of an approved international standard, relating to “Automatic fire
alarm systems in buildings, control and indicating equipment”.
Alarm panels shall as a minimum requirement be equipped with the following:
a) Mains supply on indicator

b) DC supply on indicator
c) DC supply faulty indicator
d) Alarm indicator for each zone
e) Alarm accept push-button to acknowledge fire alarm signals, silence
external audible alarms and energise as internal bleeper unit.
f) Reset push-button to restore monitoring systems to the quiescent
condition
g) Integral sealed battery and trickle battery charger where appropriate
h) Alarm transmission facilities via the telephone alarm system
i) Terminations for incoming and outgoing wiring systems
j) Voltage free normally closed circuits which shall open in the event of
an alarm to shutdown ventilation and air conditioning equipment in the
immediate vicinity.
k) Suitable fault indication both visual and audible.
Alarm indicators shall be of the light emitting diode type. Indicators shall be
provided in pairs for each function.
Alarm panels shall continuously monitor all alarm circuits, including wiring and
control devices. When a fault monitoring circuit has been energised it shall not
reset until the fault condition is cleared.
Batteries shall be of the sealed lead acid type and shall have a capacity
capable of maintaining the system in normal working condition for at least 24
hours without recharging and subsequently to operate in the alarm condition
for at least one hour.
Battery charging to be of sufficient capacity to power the system whilst

recharging a fully discharged battery. The battery shall be fully charged within
8 hours.
Monitoring circuits shall utilise solid state components. Output relay contacts
shall be gold or silver plated and shall be rated for the circuit conditions into
which they operate.

Alarm bells shall be of the gong type with a minimum diameter of 200 mm.
They shall be continuously rated and be mounted 2200 mm above finished
floor level.
Bells shall be marked with the words “FIRE ALARM”.
20.7.6 Fire Extinguishing Equipment
The Contractor shall supply and install in the respective positions:
2.5 kg hand held CO2 operated for extinguishers and 4.5 kg hand held dry
powder type fire extinguisher, suitable for Class A, B and C fire risks,
flammable liquid, and fires from electrical sources. The extinguisher shall
comprise a light alloy or steel cylinder finished in blue epoxy resin fitted with a
controllable brass valve with pressure gauge or aluminum head cap for CO2
operated cylinders. Valves to be fitted with safety pin lever.
All equipment supplied shall be suitable for the high temperatures, humidities,
and dusty atmospheres experienced in Dubai, with a minimum jet range of 5-
7m discharging in approximately 15 secs.
All equipment supplied under this section shall be obtained from a company
regularly engaged in the manufacture and supply of fire protection equipment.
It shall essentially be a duplicate of equipment that has been in satisfactory
use for not less than five years prior to the bid date and be supported by an
approved service organisation capable of carrying out regular inspection and
maintenance of fire protection systems.
All portable fire extinguishers shall be manufactured in accordance with an

approved international standard and are to be wall mounted on secure
brackets with the base approximately 760 mm above floor level.
Fire extinguishing devices shall be clearly and indelibly labelled with clear
instructions for their use in English, Arabic and pictorial form.
20.8 ACCESSORIES
The Contractor shall supply and install where specified the items listed below:
a. FIRST AID BOX - wall mounted first aid box marked with a red
crescent and containing:
40 nr individually wrapped adhesive dressings

2 nr sterile eye pads and bandages
2 nr sterile triangular bandages
6 nr safety pins
6 nr sterile unmedicated dressings No. 8
6 nr sterile unmedicated dressings No. 9
2 nr sterile unmedicated dressings extra large
1 nr roll elastic bandage 2 inch
1 nr pair scissors
1 nr eyebath
1 nr bottle eye wash solution

25 g cotton wool
1 nr bottle antiseptic
1 nr card or booklet giving simple instructions
b. ELECTRIC SHOCK FIRST AID INSTRUCTION - Instructions in both

English and Arabic for the treatment of persons suffering from electric
shock. The instructions shall be printed on a substantial wall mounted
plate with a wipe clean surface.
c. DANGER NOTICE - Danger notices inscribed “DANGER DO NOT

OPERATE - MAN WORKING ON EQUIPMENT” in both English and
Arabic. The plates shall be of laminated plastic with white letters on a
red background and arranged to hang on isolator handles.
d. RUBBER GLOVES - One pair of heavy duty insulating rubber gloves.
The gloves are to be stamped with their date of manufacture and shelf
life.
20.9 GAS DETECTORS
20.9.1 Portable Gas Detectors: General
The detector shall be housed in a robust case sealed to comply with an

approved international standard. The case shall be provided with harness-type
straps to allow the equipment to be worn. Alternatively, a purpose-made
carrying case, also with harness straps, shall be supplied. In use, such a
carrying-case shall allow the display to be clearly visible.
The detector shall be explosion proof with an internationally recognised

certification as “intrinsically safe” allowing use in hazardous areas. The
detector shall be suitable for gas groups commonly found at sewage
treatment works.
The detector shall be powered by a rechargeable nickel cadmium battery pack

which shall be replaceable. A fully charged battery pack shall operate the
detector continously for a minimum of 10 hours. In use, low battery power
shall initiate an audible alarm.
The detector shall incorporate sensors to detect gas concentrations and

initiate alarms as follows:
Mode display range alarm initiate
combustible gas or 0 - 100% by volume of air, calibrated > 20%

vapour for methane
hydrogen sulphide 0 - 25 ppm >10 ppm
Oxygen 0 - 25% by volume of air >24%

<19%

The display may be switchable between the three modes. However, should
any one of the three gas hazards occur, a warning lamp shall light and an
audible alarm shall sound, irrespective of the position of the switch.
Due to the limited life of gas sensor cells, the cells in the detector or any spare
cells provided shall be less than 3 months old at the time of handover to the
employer. Each cell shall have its date of manufacture indicated on its cover.
The detector shall be provided with an extension tube 2 m long and manual
pump for sampling inaccessible places.
Only equipment which is supported by a service workshop in Dubai authorised

by the manufacturer shall be provided.
20.9.2 Portable Gas Detector
One complete set of portable gas detection equipment shall comprise:
1 nr Portable gas detector complete with sensors for combustible gas,

hydrogen sulphide and oxygen, and including rechargeable battery pack,
harness/carrying case and extension tube.
1 nr Single way charger to suit above battery pack

1 nr Stainless steel probe for extension tube
Test gases in 20 litre canisters:
1 nr 2.5% methane in air
1 nr 25 ppm hydrogen sulphide in air
1 nr 17% oxygen in nitrogen
1 No. box to house above equipment, suitable for wall mounting and
labelled “Portable Gas Detector”.
20.10 SURGE
The Contactor shall be responsible for supplying suitable pumping plant and
surge suppression equipment (if any) to ensure that transient pressure surges
do not exceed the following limits:
a) less than – 5m head at any point along the pumping main
b) greater than 50% of the pressure rating of pipes and fittings installed
on the pumping main.
These limits shall not be exceeded under any condition of normal working or
power failure.
The Contractor shall include for all necessary surge suppression equipment.
The equipment (if any) should be compatible with the characteristics of the

pumping plant proposed. It is therefore recommended that the Contractor

should perform his own assessment of the pressure transients.
To confirm the results of his initial assessment, the Contractor shall instruct
the pump manufacturer to carry out a comprehensive pressure surge analysis
on the complete hydraulic pumping system under all operating conditions, and
submit three copies of a report and calculations on the surge in the system
within 3 months of contract commencement to enable surge suppression
equipment to be manufactured in time for delivery and installation if found
necessary.
APPROVED INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS
BS 649
BS EN 55014
BS EN 12285-2
BS 2869
BS 3116
BS 4278
BS 4999
BS 5000
BS EN 286-1
BS 5266
BS 5304
BS EN 60079
BS EN 60947
BS EN 3P1-6
BS EN 54
BS 5472
BS 5501
BS 5514
BS EN 60445
BS 5839
BS 6746
BS 6899

This general specification includes many requirements that may or may not be applicable to the
particular Project. This specification shall be read in conjunction with the particular specifications; and
the requirements of the particular specification shall predominate in case of any difference.
21.0 IRRIGATION / AUTOMATIC IRRIGATION SYSTEM
Scope
The contract shall include for the complete supply of material, installation completion, testing,
commissioning and one year maintenance of the existing and proposed irrigation system
summarised below and as per this specification.
The work shall comply with the Dubai Municipality standards for material and quality of
workmanship.
1. Installation of primary distribution mains with fire hydrants, chambers, ducts, future
connections, etc.
2. Laying of Ducts for Mains, Sub-mains, Laterals and Control Cables and spare ducts for
current and future development under footpaths and roads.
3. Relocation of existing mains, valve chambers, as required.
4. Removing existing trees and shrub lines where it is affected by new road layout and close
co-ordination with RTA Horticultural Department representatives.
5. Excavation to foundation level for sweet soil filling including excavation of plant pits and
removal of unwanted excavated material.
6. Reinstatement of the affected areas as and when required during the progress of the
project.
7. Testing & commissioning of the system and demonstration of automatic operation.
8. Operation and maintenance of complete irrigation system for a period of one year after
commissioning of the system including trained operator and labours.
The Contractor shall include for all materials, labour, plant and tools and preparation of
detailed and co-ordinated shop drawings.
Note: All crossings across major roads/dual carriageways and U-turns shall be either through
ducts or no dig method, where required.
Backfilling and road base to be tested by an approved independent laboratory at least one
test per 100 mtr. interval or as per the request at specific location by the Client and by the
Engineer.
The Contractor to modify the existing manhole chambers; if required in order to match top
levels with the proposed landscaping levels.
The Contractor shall reinstate all roads and footpath where affected by the installation of
irrigation system to the approval of the engineer and the Client.
Refer to “Particular specification and relevant application of Administrative order No. 16 and
22 for Drainage, Sewerage and Irrigation Projects.” (Annex I).
The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the main irrigation system in the contract
area and for existing plantations.
General concept of the Irrigation Design shall be as follows:
1. Water requirement for the plantation shall be as follows:
a. Palm trees ...................... 120-150 lit/day

b. Ornamental trees ............ 60-80 lit/day
May 2017 Page 21/1
c. Grass................................ 12 lit/m2/day
d. Shrubs & hedges.............. 15 lit/day
e. Ground covers, Flowers & creepers 12 lit/m2/day
2. Maximum Daily Operation timing for Irrigation system to be as follows

a. Palm Trees ...........................................20 minutes
b. Ornamental Trees, shrubs, Ground
covers, Seasonal Flowers,
Creepers & Hedges..............................50minutes to 2 Hours
c. Grass Area......................................... Between 15 minutes to 2 Hours
depending on type of Sprayer and Sprinklers.
3. Type of Irrigation System for each type of Plantation shall be as per the Section 2
(Irrigation System, Materials) of this specifications and contract drawings for Installation
Details.
4. Contractor can arrange the area in different blocks with individual solenoid valve. Each
block (solenoid Valve) shall serve only one type of plantation.
5. Daily Operation time for the proposed irrigation system shall not exceed 16 hours.
6. For pipe sizing mean velocity of flow in Main or lateral pipes shall not exceed 1.5 m/sec.
The total head loss in Main line not to exceed 4.0 meter. Contractor to provide ring Main
with suitable no. of isolation valves to the approval of the Engineer
7. Total Friction loss from the far end of the lateral up to solenoid valve shall not exceed
2.5 metre. The total head loss in solenoid valve assembly not to exceed 3.0 meter.
8. The total head loss in Pump/filtration complex not to exceed 5.0 meter. Pump Station/
Filtration Station Manifolds shall be of Epoxy coated steel schedule 80.
9. Arrangement of Sprayers shall be in such away that water spray fro sprayer should not
hit the stems of the palm trees.
10. All materials and execution of the works shall be as per DM Drainage and Irrigation
Department Specifications and standards and to the approval DM Irrigation Engineer,
The Contractor shall include for all materials, labour, plant and tools.
Contractor shall make the connections to effluent line, complete with all fittings (GRP tee, VJ
Flange adopters), valve chamber etc. to the approval of the Engineer. The size, placement
and orientation of Valve chambers etc. has to be in such a way that sufficient room for laying
other services are maintained.
All crossings across major roads/dual carriageways and U-turns shall be either through ducts
or no dig method.
It shall be done strictly as per DM specifications and to the Approval of the Engineer. Back
filling and road base to be tested by an approved independent laboratory at least one test per
200 mtr. interval and part thereof & 30 mtr interval and part thereof respectively or as per the
request at specific location by the Engineer.
The contractor to modify all the existing manhole chambers; in the proposed Landscape area
(if required); to the approval of the Engineer and the concerned service authorities; in order to
match its top levels with the proposed landscaping levels.
The contractor shall reinstate all roads and footpath where affected by the installation of
irrigation system to the approval of the engineer.
Refer to the attached “Particular specification and relevant application of Administrative order
No. 16 and 22 for Drainage, Sewerage and Irrigation Projects.”
The contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the main irrigation system in the contract
area and for existing plantations.
21.1 SUBMITTALS
May 2017 Page 21/2

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the following documentation for review and
approval, before commencing work.
21.1.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
All catalogue cuts, diagrams, samples, drawings and such other data as may be required to
demonstrate compliance with the specification.
21.1.2 NO OBJECTION CERTIFICATES
Prior to start of any work at site the contractor has to approach all Service Authorities in
Dubai to get their no objection for the work included in this contract and a record drawings for
their existing services. Copy of these drawings and no objection certificate should be
submitted to the Engineer before starting the actual work at site.
Trial Trenches: Contractor to make detailed survey of project area, note existing levels
in the project area and take trial trenches for all the locations where plantation and irrigation
system has been proposed.
All these details to be submitted to the Engineer along with digital format.
Based on the information of existing levels and trial trenches made Contractor to propose
final location of tree plantation and irrigation services and submit shop drawings.
21.1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS AND VERIFICATION OF DIMENSIONS
Please note that the contractor to make detail survey of existing levels in the contract area.
Trail pits should be taken at every 50 meter interval, mark all the existing services in reference
to the road edge & building line along with its depth from existing the ground level & the
proposed Landscape finish level. Contractor to check availability of all the existing ducts that
are marked on the tender drawings. Contractor to propose the route of Irrigation piping based
this information. All this information regarding trial pits, existing and proposed levels,
availability of existing ducts shall be made available to DM Engineer within
mobilisation period of the contract. All this information shall be made available on
hardcopy & in Digital format to DM as it is required for adjusting landscape and pipes/services
alignment.
Any delay to provide the above-mentioned information regarding trial trenches, existing
services & levels which affects the progress of works shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor. The Client/Engineer keeps the right to take necessary action and penalise the
Contractor in such circumstances.
The successful Contractor shall submit shop drawings, for approval by the Engineer, for the
following:
a) In case of any conflict between contract drawings and any existing or future services
which may necessitate re-routing proposed irrigation Main or laterals, the contractor has
to prepare the shop drawings accordingly and submit it to the Engineer for approval. This
should be considered as integral part of the contract.
b) The Pump/Filtration Station/chambers mechanical, electrical and civil/structural works

shop drawings. Necessary modifications to the existing feeding chambers (civil and
mechanical). Valve chambers including valves, pipe works and civil works. Electrical
control equipment with circuit diagrams.
c) Details of mainline, lateral pipes and other typical connections.
d) Wiring diagrams including conduits, pull boxes, sizing and calculations to verify that cable
sizing is in accordance with DEWA regulations and equipment manufacturers
recommendations.
May 2017 Page 21/3
e) Electrical power and control wiring diagrams for irrigation controllers, field wiring and
grounding and CCU system including all decoders and interfaces.
f) Sketch plans for drip line layout and bubbler layout.
g) Sketch plans for sprayer and sprinkler layouts.
h) Detail of valve chambers and any modification to the existing feeding chambers.
The approval shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his responsibility under the contract for
successful completion of the work.
21.1.4 MANUFACTURERS CERTIFICATIONS
a) uPVC Pipe and fittings

Certification by a recognized certification mark scheme such as "The Kitemark" or by an
independent third party testing organization approved by the Engineer, that production
has been carried out under a system for supervision, control and testing, applied during
manufacture, in accordance with BS 5750 or an approved equal procedure.
b) Valve, and Special Steel Fitting

Manufacturer's certificate for pressure testing, and coating, including holiday and DFT
test reports for each valve, fitting, spool if applicable.
c) Emitters
Certification of coefficient of manufacturer's variation.
21.1.5 RECOMMENDATION OF THE MANUFACTURERS
The Contractor shall submit manufacturers' recommendations for installation and

commissioning of each material or piece of equipment for approval prior to commencing
work. Recommendations shall include testing methods, storage requirements, (if applicable)
maintenance and operational data. The contractor shall have a copy of the manufacturers'
instructions available on site at all times while work is in progress and shall follow these
instructions unless otherwise authorized to deviate by the Engineer.
21.1.6 SPARE PARTS
The Contractor shall submit manufacturer's list of spare parts for approval prior to
commissioning any piece of equipment. Recommendations shall include stocking
recommendations, exploded assembly diagrams illustrating location and spare parts to be
utilized and all relevant operational data.
21.1.7 INSTALLATIONS AND TESTING
The Contractor shall submit his proposed work method statement for approval prior to
commencing work. The statement shall detail proposed sequence of work, hold points,
testing frequency and document control.
21.1.8 PROGRAM/PROGRESS REPORTS
The Contractor shall submit a program of works as per the Clause 14 of the condition of the
contract for approval.
May 2017 Page 21/4

The Contractor also shall submit monthly progress report at the end of each month including
all the works constructed during the month with photographs, numbers of staff and labourers,
cash flow, test reports, overall progress and general details as per engineer approval.
21.1.9 MANUFACTURER'S LITERATURE
At such time as the list of materials has been approved by the Engineer, the Contractor shall
provide four (4) sets of manufacturer's technical and maintenance literature to the Engineer.
Data sheets shall provide sufficient technical information to identify each product and shall
include the name and the address of the nearest supply firm, which should have a local
representative in the Emirates of Dubai.
21.1.10 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
CONTRACTOR MUST SUBMIT ALL CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS OF ELECTRICAL

INSTALLATION ALONG WITH SAMPLES AND SPECIFICATIONS OF MATERIALS
PROPOSED IN ORDER TO OBTAIN APPROVAL PRIOR TO FABRICATION OR
INSTALLATION.
21.1.11 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS AND OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A) AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall maintain one set of contract drawings for the sole purpose of recording
accurate changes made as the work progresses ("As-Built" conditions) of the irrigation
system. All changes previously approved and all completed work shall be recorded on these
drawings.
The Contractor shall prepare as-built drawings clearly showing all location, depths, slopes,
heights, shapes and dimensions of all works as executed. All valve locations and piping shall
be dimensioned and recorded (except that wire locations, common to pipe ditches, need not
to be dimensioned). The Contractor must submit as-built drawings for all electrical
installations. The contractor should clearly mention location of lines, chambers etc. in
reference to building line and center line of the roads. The contractor must submit as built
drawings for all electrical installations.
Sizes of all the as-built drawings should be the same as that of DM Drainage & Irrigation
Department Standard (approx. 120cm x 60cm) size.
All as-built drawings should be prepared using Microstation program (latest version for
Windows). Mainline layouts to be on DM Survey sheets (scale 1:1000) as per Dubai
Municipality Drainage & Irrigation Department requirements and the Client approval. As-built
drawings of Mainline layouts of Automatic Irrigation system Main and Irrigation Network
Mains should be on separate drawings for each.
Contractor should prepare and submit as-built drawings for the pipeline profiles of the
Mainlines which are of size 6” and above. Pipeline profile drawings should be in Horizontal
scale of 1:1000 and Vertical scale of 1:100. Pipeline profiles to be submitted on separate
drawings with clear references to Mainline layout drawings marked on the same.
The Contractor to follow the Standards (regarding legend, line styles, colours, levels, size of
drawings etc.) of DM Drainage and Irrigation Department while preparing As-Built Drawings.
Chambers schedule are to be prepared indicating all relevant construction items and giving
co-ordinates for each manhole in compliance with DM grid system.
The Contractor must submit as-built drawings for all the electro-mechanical installations. All
the details of the installed equipments regarding manufacturer, model no., type, size. etc.
shall be provided in the legend of the drawings.
Pipeline profile drawings should be in Horizontal scale of 1:1000 and Vertical scale of 1:100.
May 2017 Page 21/5
Lateral line layouts for sprinklers/sprayers, drip and bubblers shall be in scale 1:500. All the
Layout drawings should be shown on background of light coloured Landscape as-builts, for
easy reference
The Contractor should follow the Standards (regarding legend, line styles, colours, levels,
size of drains, title block etc.) of DM Drainage and Irrigation Department while preparing As-
Built Drawings.
After final approval to the As-Built Drawings, Contractor to submit the following before the
final taking over of the project.
1) Three complete sets of “As-Built Drawings” folded properly and provided in plastic folders
as a part of Operation and Maintenance Manual;
2) A set of Mother Prints (on Heavy grade Polyester) and;
3) A copy of computer discs, CDs (with proper titles and plastic enclosure box) please note
that zip files will not be accepted.
Provisional acceptance will not be considered unless Contractor submits all the above said
As-Built Drawings.
Notes:
1) Contractor to check all existing irrigation system within the contract area (along with
existing filtration chambers) and shall record those details in the as-built drawings of the
project.
2) Contractor to prepare & submit the detailed records results of trial pits and trenches. All
such information shall be submitted to DM in digital format and hard copies.
3) Contractor to prepare and submit the detailed results of trial pits and trenches. Record of
all trial holes executed under this contract shall be made available in the form of drawings
(Scale 1:1000 for Plans & 1:100 for sections) to be the part of as-built set of drawings.
These drawings shall be made available to Services Co-ordination Unit of Roads
Department, RTA. All such information shall be submitted to RTA in digital format and
hard copies.
B. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
01 Assemble three (3) copies of manuals containing Operating & Maintenance instructions
for each piece of equipment and systems requiring service and Prints of As-Built
drawings as described above. O & M Manuals shall be bound in a hard cover 3-ring
binder of suitable size and properly indexed. Cover and Manual shall be as per DM
standards and to be approved by the Client. Contractor should also submit digital copy of
Maintenance Manual on CD.
02 O & M Manuals shall include the following information:-
a. Description of equipment
b. Operation of equipment
c. Maintenance of equipment and lubrication schedule
d. Servicing of equipment
e. Control Diagrams
f. Irrigation Valve Operation Schedule c/w Controller Station no., valve no., valve size,
flows, operating time, etc.
g. Diagrams of the system
h. Logic of operation of the systems
i. Valve charts
j. Performance characteristics: Curves and charts for equipment (Data shall refer to,
and identify specific modeling service and shall not be general advertising data).
k. Spare parts list
l. Names, contact numbers and addresses of spare part suppliers.
m. Test reports
n. Certificates
May 2017 Page 21/6
o. Bill of Quantities of Material used in the Contract

p. Letter of Satisfaction
q. Guarantees.
A digital copy (on computer CD) of Operation & Maintenance manual complete with
Valve operation Schedule, Circuit & control diagrams shall be submitted to DM along with
As-built drawings
03 Submit one copy of the manual to the Engineer for review and three final copies to the
Client after the final approval of the Engineer. Provisional acceptance will not be
considered unless Contractor submits completed O & M manuals and as-built drawings.
21.1.13 SILENCE OF SPECIFICATION
The apparent silence of the specification, drawings or other contract documents as to any
detail or the apparent omission from them of a detailed description concerning any point shall
be regarded as meaning that only the best general practice is to be used. All interpretations
of the specifications will be made by the Engineer on this basis.
21.1.14 SYSTEM EXPLANATIONS
During site visits by the Engineer, operation of the system will be delineated to all authorized
persons desiring such information.
Three copies detailed system operation and maintenance brochure will be provided to the
Client at the completion of the project by the Contractor.
21.1.15 LAYOUT OF WORK
The Contractor shall stake out the irrigation system in accordance with the scaled plans.
Staking shall be erected in such a manner as to insure permanency of the staked locations
until such time as the irrigation system is installed. Stakes shall be placed to show location of
valves, pipelines and control head. Stakes shall be flagged with bright flagging for ease of
location. All staking by the Contractor shall be subject to approval of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall stake the landscape patterns as shown on the landscape
drawings. These patterns shall be marked with lime powder and nylon ropes for future
use during plantation phase.
21.1.16 CLEAN-UP
During the course of construction, the Contractor shall remove waste material from the site
continually as is necessary to keep the site in an orderly manner. Waste material shall be
removed from the work site and not to be used as back-fill material. Upon completion of the
contract, the Contractor shall remove all waste equipment and parts and leave the site in a
neat and orderly condition.
21.1.17 WARRANTY
All work included under this Contract shall be warranted by the Contractor against all defects
and malfunction of materials and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of
completion of works. Should problems arise with the system during the warranty period, all
necessary repairs and/or replacements shall be made by the Contractor in an expedient
manner at no additional cost to the Client.
The Contractor shall be responsible for operation and maintenance of the system for a
period of one year from the completion date.
21.1.18 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING
May 2017 Page 21/7

All products shall be delivered in the manufacturers' original protective packaging and shall
be inspected at time of delivery. Any product, which are damaged and not in accordance with
specifications, or date stamp expired, shall be immediately removed from the site and
replaced.
Evidence must be submitted to verify materials, such as uPVC pipes, solvent cement, rubber
gaskets etc., have been properly protected during transport and storage prior to delivery to
the site.
All products shall be handled and stored in accordance with printed recommendations of the
manufacturer.
All site storage areas shall be shaded at all time. Pipe stacks shall be designed to ensure that
pipes and especially pipe sockets are not deformed during storage and/or effected by
sunlight.
Precautions shall also be taken to protect items sensitive to sunlight or heat prior to backfilling
operation. uPVC pipes shall on no account be exposed to sunlight for more than two days in
summer, or one week in winter. Any pipe, whether installed or not, which is observed to be
sunburn, or oval, shall immediately be removed from the site and replaced.
21.1.19 Operation & Maintenance of the System
The Contractor shall be responsible for operation and maintenance of the system till
the completion of End of Defects Liability period.
The Contractor will be responsible for operation, scheduling, and inspection of the system.
Contractor should be provide a skilled operator, a pipe fitter and a helper who are
experienced in widely varying irrigation requirements over various planting times and climatic
conditions for the optimal performance of the irrigation system. All these staff should be
available for full time on the site. Operating the system should be combined with the
instructions of the designer to formulate a set of standard operating procedures for the
system. During the planting and establishment time of the plantation Irrigation operation
should be provided as required.
Complete inspections are necessary during the operation of the irrigation system as follows:
Inspections of all the irrigation equipments line sprayers, sprinklers, Dripperlines, bubblers,
valves, pressure regulators, filters, pumps, flow/pressure sensors, fertiliser injection system
etc. should be done regularly during the operation of the system for their proper & optimal
operation. Each zone should be inspected for excessively wet areas that might indicate leaks
and dry patches which indicate improper coverage of the sprayers/sprinklers.
Equipments should be adjusted and corrected to give the optimum performance.
Driplines, and irrigation pipes should be inspected for breakages and attended immediately to
repair the same.
Arc and throw of sprayers and sprinklers should be inspected and adjusted in such way that it
will not throw the water on the roads and stems of the palm trees. All the pressure regulators
of solenoid valves should be adjusted to give the recommended pressures.
Filters and Basket Stainers must be inspected and cleaned periodically.
21.2 IRRIGATION SYSTEM, MATERIALS
Scope
The scope of this section includes a description of materials and methods for the hydraulic
element of the system.
May 2017 Page 21/8
All materials covered by this specification shall be from an approved local representative in
the Emirate of Dubai qualified to provide the appropriate level of technical support.
All equipment, fittings and accessories shall be suitably rated to comply with the system
design and operating parameters.
Note: Following are general specifications of DM for the Irrigation materials, the items which
are not required in this project shall not be considered in the scope of the works.
21.2.1 PIPES AND FITTINGS
21.2.1.1 uPVC PIPE AND FITTINGS
uPVC piping shall be fabricated from unplasticized polyvinyl chloride according to BS

3505:1968 and BS 3506:1969. Rating and size shall be as shown on the drawings but not
less than class D. Pipe shall be supplied in lengths no smaller than six (6) meters. Each
length of pipe shall bear markings of identify type and grade. All piping shall show no
evidence of blisters, grooves or other extrusion marks. The Contractor shall provide three (3)
samples of each size, one meter in length for approval prior to supply and installation. All
pipes three inches (3") and above to be with Lock Ring Socket. The socket to be integral part
of the pipe and in accordance to BS 4346 Part 2: 1970 and it should incorporate a triple
compression rubber seal complying with BS 2494: Part 2 and when jointed offers three-fold
hydraulic security under both positive and negative pressure heads. The socket should have
the same wall thickness as the pipe with an extra sleeve to maintain the correct pressure
rating at the joint.
All joints in pipe shall be made by solvent welding using adhesive solvent and primer as
recommended, in writing, by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer. All cans of
solvent and primer shall have labels intact and shall be stamped with date of manufacture.
No cans dated over two years old will be permitted. No thinning of solvent or primer will be
permitted. Lubricant and solvent cement used to make joints shall be approved in writing by
the pipes manufacturer or his designated representative and the Engineer. Only male joints
may be used up to 2". Joints larger than 2" shall not be threaded. All threaded joints shall be
made up using PTFE tape or an approved equal thread sealant.
Pipes sized 1-1/4 " and larger shall be of class D (12 bars working pressure) and smaller
pipes shall be class E (15 bars working pressure). Fittings shall be fabricated from UPVC
according to BS 4346.
For sizes up to 6” uPVC fittings shall be used. All uPVC pipes and fittings should be covered
by licensed Kite mark. All uPVC fittings shall be of pressure ratings not less than 15 bar at 20
deg. Celsius and 9 bar at 50 deg. Celsius.
For sizes 8” and above; GRP fittings with 15 bar pressure ratings shall be used in
chambers.
On no account shall saddle and cross type connections be made to uPVC pipe. All pipes
passing through ducts shall be solvent weld joints.
Flange couplers shall be PN 16 and in accordance with BS 4504. Bolts and nuts (whether
part of the coupler or for fixing) shall be A4 – 70 stainless steel.
Threaded riser pipe used to support valves and sprinklers and fittings may be galvanized
steel, or brass. All galvanizing shall be carried out after threading.
All valve chambers 8” and above shall have GRP fittings.
21.2.1.2 HDPE PIPE AND FITTINGS

May 2017 Page 21/9
The pipes shall be PN 20 rating with PE 100, SDR 9 for all distribution system. HDPE material
shall have density greater than or equal to 0.941 g/cm3. Pipes and fittings shall be
homogenous throughout and free from visible cracks, holes, foreign inclusions, blisters, dents
or other damaging defects. Joints are not acceptable. Material shall be uniform in opacity,
density, interior smoothness, and other physical properties. It shall have adequate resistance
to weathering and other ageing from outside storage for a minimum of two years after
manufacture.
If rework material is added or used, it shall be clean, derived from the same resin and
reground under the supervision of the same manufacturer and shall be compatible with the
material to which it is added.
The pipes and fittings shall be manufactured from HDPE containing only those antioxidants,
UVstabilizers and pigments necessary for the manufacturing of the pipes and confirming to the
requirements of this specification. This shall be suitable for butt fusion or electro fusion welding
techniques.
Any CONTRACTOR/ SUPPLIER shall follow manufacturer’s guideline for the applicability
of the material used. If required pipe manufacturers shall provide assistance and training. This
involves quality check of the material, handling of HDPE material, warehousing, preparation
for fabrication, selection of appropriate techniques and implementation of recommended
procedures, and testing of the components. Pipes shall be hydrostatically pressure tested
certified at the manufacturer's plant in accordance with ISO 1167.
As stated below, physical properties of the pipes and fittings shall be:
a) Made of high-density polyethylene (HDPE) and shall comply with the requirements of ISO
4427 PE 100.
b) The material used for the manufacturer of pipes and fittings shall be in accordance with
Table 1 and Table 2 of clause 4.4 of ISO 4427-1.
c) The minimum required strength (MRS) of the material compound shall be 10 MPa at 20º
C.
d) Hydrostatic strength of the material shall be in accordance with ISO 1167. It shall be more
than100 hours @ 20 0C on stress level: 12.4 Mpa for PE 100.
e) Lifecycle durability of 20 years is to be confirmed. The design temperature shall be 40º C.
f) The thermal stability of HDPE material shall meet the requirements of ISO 4427.
The pipe dimensions for water systems shall be based on standard dimensions according to
ISO 4427 and measured in accordance with ISO 3126. Straight pipe shall be supplied in
standard lengths measured at 23º C ± 2º C unless otherwise specified.
When viewed without magnification the internal and external surfaces of pipes shall be
smooth, clean and free from scoring, cavities and other surface defects. The pipe ends shall
be cut cleanly and square to the axis of the pipe. All HDPE pipes to be used for the
transmission and distribution of water shall be black and have purple stripes or according to
the national preference. The carbon black content in the compound shall be 2.25 ± 0.25 % by
mass when measured in accordance with ISO 6964. The dispersion of carbon black when
determined in accordance with ISO 11420 shall be equal to or less than grade 3.
The fittings shall be injection moulded or formed from material compatible to that of the pipe
and shall be as resistant to the external and internal environments as the other elements of the
pipe system. At locations where HDPE to metal connections are specified, slip-on flanged
connection is recommended along with HDPE stub-end (refer ISO-4427 Part-III and ISO 9624)
or special restrained transition fittings subject to approval by the CLIENT/ SUPERVISING
ENGINEER. The flanges shall be drilled to ASME B 16.5, as per the design requirements.
When viewed without magnification the internal and external surfaces of fittings shall be
smooth clean and free from scoring, cavities and other surface defects. The fitting shall be
blue or black and dimensions shall be measured in accordance with ISO 4427-3. Wall
thickness of the body of the fitting at any point shall be equal to or greater than the minimum
wall thickness of the corresponding pipe.
May 2017 Page 21/10
Straight lengths and coils of pipe shall have internally fitted end caps that prevent dirt and
debris from entering the pipe during handling, storage and transport. Caps shall be attached
by an approved method to prevent the accidental loss of the cap. All end caps shall have an
outer lip, which prevents the accidental insertion of the cap into the pipe. A method to permit
venting shall be provided in order to allow expansion of air due to temperature changes during
storage.
21.2.1.3 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
Steel pipe shall conform to API standard schedule 80 or other equal and approved. Welded
fittings shall be schedule 80 and weldneck. Flanges shall be in accordance with BS4504
PN16. All bolts, nuts and washers used for flange assembly or integral with bolted couplers
shall be stainless steel (A4 - 70).
All Pipes and fittings to be coated inside and outside by electrostatic fusion bonded
epoxy to average DFT 150 microns, or by fusion bonded plastic powder coating to
average DFT 500 microns.
21.2.1.4 THREADED STEEL PIPES & FITTINGS (FOR 3” AND BELOW)
Threaded steel pipes and fittings used for risers shall be hot dip galvanized mild steel class
(C) in accordance with BS 1387.
All G.I. & Steel Pipes and fittings to be coated, inside and outside with electrostatic
fusion bonded epoxy to average DFT 150 microns or by fusion bonded plastic powder
coating to average DFT 500 microns.
Any galvanized pipe installed in contact with the soil shall be wrapped with at least two layers
of an approved petrolatum impregnated tape of min. thickness of 1.15mm and applied with
50% over lap. The wrapping tape shall extend a minimum of 100 mm above the soil. Steel
piping and fittings shall only be installed above ground or otherwise specified.
Joints shall be threaded and sealed with PTFE tape or some other approved method.
Connections to the flanged equipment shall be via threaded flanged adopters. All bolts, nuts
and washers used for flange assembly or integral with bolted couplers shall be stainless steel
A4-70.
21.2.1.5 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
Ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be in accordance with BS 4772 or ISO 2531 and EN 498.
They shall be supplied by an internationally known and approved manufacturer. Ductile iron
pipes and fittings shall be supplied, stored, laid, back-filled and tested in accordance with CP
2010. The pipes shall not exceed 5.5 meters in length and push-in or flexible mechanical
joints shall be used unless otherwise stated.
Where flanged joints are used, the flanges shall be faced and drilled to PN16 as defined in
BS 4504, unless directed otherwise. Flanged joints shall be made with inside bolt circle
gaskets as described in BS 4865 part 1, and gaskets from plain rubber to BS 1737. Bolts
shall be stainless steel Grade A4-70, complete with nuts and washers. The threaded portion
of bolts shall be of such length that at least two threads shall protrude beyond the nut when
tightened.
Pipe barrels shall be class K9, tapers, bend and pipes with cast on flanges shall be class
K12, and tees shall be class K14.
The internal and external surfaces of all-ductile iron pipes and fittings shall be coated
according to one of the following methods:
i) Fusion Bonded Plastic Powder Coating (average 500 microns)

ii) Fusion Bonded Epoxy Coating (minimum 300 microns)
May 2017 Page 21/11
21.2.1.6 ASBESTOS CEMENT PIPES (NOT APPLICABLE)
21.2.1.7 GRP PIPES AND FITTINGS
All pipes and fittings shall have a resin rich inner layer, having a minimum thickness of 1.0
mm and a resin rich outer layer having a minimum thickness of 0.25mm incorporating one
layer of "C" glass. The remainder of the liner shall consist of at least one layer of 450 g/m
powder bound acid resistant chipped glass strand mat having a glass content between 25
and 30 % by weight.
All glass reinforcement shall be of the "ECR/Advantex" type. All pipes and fittings shall have
2
an stiffness of not less than 10,000 N/m and satisfy the requirement of ASTM D 3262-87.
Pipes shall withstand longitudinal tensile force of 100 N/mm of circumference. All the flanges
shall be PN16.
Pipes shall withstand longitudinal tensile force of 100 N/mm of circumference. All the flanges
shall be PN16.
All fittings (including bends, tees, reducers and flanges) used with AC pipelines shall be GRP
(glass fibre reinforced plastic) fittings and shall comply with the following specification:
AWWA C 950 - 95 AWWA Standard for “Fibreglass”

(Glass Fibre Reinforced Resin) Pressure Pipe
BS 5480 : 1990 Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastics (GRP) pipe and

Fittings for use for water supply Sewerage; parts 1&2.
.01 - General
This specification covers the design manufacture and testing of glass fibre reinforced plastic
(GRP) pressure fittings for use with Asbestos cement pressure pipe in nominal sizes 80mm
and larger. GRP fittings and pipe shall be designed and manufactured in accordance with
AWWA C 950-95 and the requirements herein. All components shall be produced by one
manufacturer.
The manufacturer shall be approved by Client and must demonstrate the experience and
capability to produce fittings of the same diameter and pressure range as those required. The
manufacturer shall be certified to ISO 9002 or BS 5750 Part : 2. Full range of fitting diameters
used for the project must be manufactured and delivered by the same manufacturer.
.02 - Construction
GRP fittings shall have the following principal construction:

A corrosion resistant, resin rich having a minimum thickness of 0.5mm. The liner surface in
contact with water shall be reinforced with “C” glass veil or mat impregnated with Vinylester or
Epoxy Resin. The liner shall be continuous along the circumference of the pipe and shall be
of uniform thickness and composition.
A structural wall consisting of continuous glass filament findings and/or woven rovings and
chopped glass reinforcement and may include fine fillers, all impregnated with Isophethalic,
Vinylester or Epoxy resin as required.
A resin-rich exterior surface having a minimum thickness of 0.025mm.
No dark pigments shall be allowed in the GRP fittings.
.03 - GRP fittings and flanges shall be designed in accordance with AWWA C950 for service at the
May 2017 Page 21/12
following conditions:
Maximum operating pressure 16 Bar

Maximum allowable vacuum -1 bar
Minimum depth of water 1.0 meter
Maximum depth of cover 3.0 meter
Truck loading (wheel load) 90 KN
Service temperature (Maximum) 40 deg. C
Flange X flange fittings shall be designed for installation above ground (in chambers) without
thrust blocks. Flange branches on Spigot Tees shall be designed to resist end thrust from
closed valves.
Spigot joints, where specified shall have the same outside diameter (OD) as approved by
Dubai Municipality for Asbestos cement (AC) pipe to which it is to be joined. The joint
dimensions and tolerances shall be equal to AC pipe spigots such that joint remains
watertight under all normal operating and surge conditions. The spigot ends shall be clearly
marked with a “homeline” indicating the proper insertion limit for the AC couplings. The spigot
width shall not be less than half the AC coupling joint width.
Flanged joints, where specified shall be GRP filament would flanged manufactured from
Epoxy or Vinylester resin and glass reinforcements. Flanges shall be flat faced and drilled to
BS 4504 PN 16 drilling pattern.
GRP Flange gasket (full face) design and thickness shall be as recommended by the GRP
fitting manufacturer. Hand lay-up flanges shall not be acceptable.
Laminated or Adhesive joints used in the fabrication of fittings shall be equal or superior in
strength to the sections they join. The thickness of laminated joints shall not be less than the
wall thickness of the adjoining pipe section. All hand laminations or windings shall utilize only
one type of resin throughout.
.04 - Chemical Requirements

GRP fittings shall be not impart any date, odour or colour to drinking water. GRP pipe/fittings
shall be certified and listed for potable water use by the water research center (WRC) U.K., in
accordance with BS 6920 or by the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) - USA in
accordance with NSF standard 14.
.05 - Dimensions
GRP fittings shall be produced in Metric sizes and shall be classified by their nominal inside
diameter (ND). The actual fitting inside diameter shall not be less than that shown in the table
below:
Nominal Diameter (ND) Minimum Inside Diameter

mm mm
80 78
100 98
150 148
200 198
225 223
250 245
300 298
350 348
400 397
450 447
500 497
550 547
600 597
700 696
800 795
May 2017 Page 21/13
900 895
1000 995
1200 1195
All standard fittings up to and including diameter 300mm used in the distribution system shall
be filament wound on precision steel moulds. Standard 90 and 45 degree bends of nominal
diameter 300mm and smaller shall be of the smooth radius type, having a turning radius of
1.5 times the bend nominal diameter. Fittings diameter 350mm and larger may be of the
moulder or mitered (manufactured from GRP pipe sections) construction and internal
surfaces shall be finished smooth.
The thickness of GRP flanges shall not be less than shown in the table below:
Nominal Diameter (ND) Minimum GRP Flange Thickness

mm mm
80-100 38
150-200 44
225 46
250-350 54
400 58
450 64
500-600 68
700 72
800 78
900 85
1000 88
1200 108
The wall thickness of GRP fittings shall be determined by the manufacturer to meet the
design requirements of this specifications but shall in no case be less than the minimum
thickness shown in the table below:
Nominal Diameter (ND) Minimum Pipe Thickness

mm mm
80-400 6.0
450 6.7
500 7.5
550 8.2
600 9.0
700 10.5
800 12
900 13.5
1000 15
1200 18
Flange drilling shall be as per BS 4504 PN 16
.06 Mechanical Properties

GRP fittings shall meet the following minimum strength requirements:
Property Test Method Minimum Value as per Table
1. Hoop Tensile Stress ASTM D2290 Portable 10 of AWWA C950 for class 250 psi
2. Axial Tensile Stress ASTM D 638 Portable 11 of AWWA C950 for class 250 psi
3. Axial Tensile Stress for

flg. X flg. Fittings ASTM D638 70 MPa
May 2017 Page 21/14
4. Stiffness (E1/D3) ASTM D2412

Dia < 300 1000 Pa
Dia > 300 5000 Pa
.07- Visual Requirements

GRP fittings shall be free from delamination, crazing, dry areas or cracks. Spigot ends shall
be free from end delamination, torn edges and gauges and shall be finished smooth to
ensure water tightness. All laminates shall be fully cured with a minimum Barcol hardness of
33 when tested in accordance with ASTM D2583.
.08 Testing
1. Routine Tests
The following test shall be carried out by the GRP pipe/fittings manufacturer at the frequency
specified. Test results and certificates shall be submitted to the Engineer for each
consignment delivery. Witnessing of factory testing by the Engineer may be required. The
Client and the Engineer shall have the right to retain up to 2% of the material delivered back
to the factory for inspection and /or testing by their representative at no additional cost. Test
method shall be in accordance with AWWA C 90 5480.
Test Frequency
i. Visual Inspection Every item
ii. Dimensions Every item
iii. Hydraulic pressure at 24 bars Once per 10 Flg. x Flg.
for 30 seconds items
iv. Stiffness Once per 100 items
v. Barcol hardness (resin cure) Every item
vi. Axial & Hoop Tensile stress Once per 100 items
vii. All GRP pipe used for fitting fabrication shall be factory
pressure tested at 24 bars for 60 seconds.
2. Qualifications (Type) Tests

The following tests shall be carried out on actual pipe/fittings produced by the manufacturer to
establish and accept the design basis for the products. These tests are not routine quality
control tests.
a) Long Term hydrostatic design pressure of the GRP pipe or fitting shall be established in
accordance with AWWA C950 Section 2.4.2.
b) Short term hoop tensile strength shall be within the ultimate strength of the pipe fittings.
Laminated joints and flanged joints shall withstand a hydrostatic test pressure of 3.5 times the
rated working pressure with no signs of leakage or weep. For Flanges joints, the flanges shall
be blinded and the ends unrestrained during the test.
.09- Submittals/Drawings
Prior to start of production, the fittings manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer detailed
drawings of each fitting required for approval. Design calculations, samples and sample
testing may also required by the Engineer for approval at no extra cost to the client.
For flanged fittings, the manufacturer shall submit before delivery, the recommended gasket
details, the bolt torque sequence and maximum recommended torque for each flange shall be
supplied.
.10 - Markings
Each fitting shall be indelibly marked with the following:
- Manufacturer’s name or trade mark

- Nominal diameter (ND) in mm (inside and outside)
- Pressure rating in bars
May 2017 Page 21/15
- Manufacturing date, month & year

- Inspection mark
- Coupling “homeline”, “position” position on spigot end.
.11 – Tangential Flanged Tee: this shall be used as Washout tee which shall have a bottom
tangantial flanged outlet. Tee shall be Spigot X spigot X Branch Flange. The size and the
configuration of the Tee shall be as detailed on the drawings. The detail of the product and
engineering data shall be submitted.
21.2.1.8 DUST CAP
Dust cap should be fixed at the end of each 4mm tube to prevent insects and dirt from
entering the tube. The cap should be durable plastic and heat resistant.
21.2.1.9 STAPLE STAKE
All drip tubes shall be held on the soil by Staple stake. The stake should be polypropylene,
minimum 220mm long, durable and heat resistant. Tails of the stakes shall be provided with
integral barb type flaps to increase retention in soil. The drip line shall be hold on the soil by
the same length staple stake at 10 m interval. The stake shall be featured separated surface
to grip the drip line.
21.2.2 VALVES
21.2.2.1 SOLENOID VALVES
Automatic remote control valves shall be of the sizes prescribed on the plan. The valves shall
be normally closed diaphragm type with slow opening and closing action for protection
against surge pressure. Actuation shall be by encapsulated type solenoids and rated 24
volts, 50 cycle unless otherwise specified.
The valve shall able to operate under very low flow and pressure conditions.
Construction shall provide for convenient access to functional parts without removal of valve
from system plumbing. A manual flow control adjustment, with shut-off capability, shall be
furnished on all valves. Valve pressure rating shall not be less than 200 PSI.
The diaphragm shall be of nylon reinforced BUNA-N rubber, and provide for a positive seal
between bonnet and body. The solenoid functional parts shall be of stainless steel, brass or
bronze for corrosion resistance. Diameter shall be as shown on plan. A mechanism shall be
provided for bleeding of the diaphragm chamber for manual operation. Valves shall be
fabricated from heavy cast brass or bronze. The valve shall be capable of working under dirty
(Treated sewage) water conditions. Inlet and outlet shall be threaded B.S.P.
All valves shall be provided with a pressure regulator capable of regulating downstream
pressure between 15 to 100 PSI (within an accuracy of +or- 5PSI) regardless of upstream
pressure. It shall provide full and accurate pressure regulating capabilities irrespective of
whether it is operated electrically or manually. The pressure measurement should be possible
via schrader valve or integral pressure gauge.
21.2.2.2 CHECK VALVE
Check valves three inches (3") and above shall be double flanged single door swing type
having ductile iron body and gunmetal seat to BS1400. Pressure Rating to be PN 16 or
more. All valves shall be coated with epoxy internally and externally to average DFT 300
microns for protection against corrosion of body components. All nut bolts to be of stainless
steel grade 316/ A4-70.
May 2017 Page 21/16

Check valves of two inches (2") and smaller shall be spring type manufactured from Brass or
Bronze. Inlet and outlet to be BSP female threaded. The spring to be of stainless steel.
Pressure rating to be PN16 or more.
21.2.2.3 GATE VALVE
Gate valves three inches (3") and larger shall be double flange, ductile iron waterworks
valves, with wedge type gate and non-rising stem. Valves shall be manufactured in
accordance with DIN3352. All valves shall be coated with epoxy internally and externally to
average DFT 300 microns for protection against corrosion of body components. Valves
installed below ground shall be provided with stem cap for key operation.
Valves to have non-rising stem of stainless steel, stem nut brass or cast aluminium bronze
with gun metal. Body components shall be of Ductile cast iron SG GGG-50. Stem sealing by
elestomer/ NBR rubber ‘O’ rings.
Up to size DN 400 resilient seated Gate valves are preferred with ductile iron wedge fully
covered with special grade elastomer EPDM rubber. Heavy duty steel keys with head
configuration to fit operating nut and handle length as required for proper above ground
operation shall be provided in numbers specified by the Engineer.
Valves above ground shall be provided with hand wheel. Nominal pressure for the valves
shall be 16 bar or more. All bolts and nuts to be stainless steel grade A4-70.
Gate valves two inches (2") in diameter and smaller shall have non-rising stem and be
manufactured from brass or bronze according to BS 5154. Inlet and outlet to be screwed
BSP. Rating to be PN16 or above.
21.2.2.4 AIR VALVE
Provide automatic double orifice air vents at all high points at all high points on the pressure
mains. Air valves and other similar items shall confirm to BS 2591. Automatic air valves shall
have non-corrosive floats in chambers with clear space ensuring blockage free operation. All
components for the air valve actuating mechanism including lever shall be stainless steel.
The body and cover of the valve should be of bronze or ductile iron with phenolic primer
coating. Nozzles with seals and actuating mechanism to be located in the removable upper
plate connected to the valve body using stainless steel (grade 316/A4) bolts. Valves shall be
coated with epoxy internally and externally to average DFT 300 microns for protection against
corrosion of body components. All nut bolts to be of stainless steel grade 316/ A4-70.
Pressure rating of the valve shall be 16 bar. The internal components shall be stainless steel.
The valve size and installation shall be as per site conditions and engineer instruction.
21.2.2.5 ELECTRICALLY ACTUATED BUTTERFLY VALVE
Electrically actuated Butterfly valves shall comply in all respects with DIN 3354 - PN16 Body
of Ductile cast iron SG GGG-50 Valve disc shall be of Stainless steel 316.
All valves shall be coated with epoxy internally and externally to average DFT 300 microns for
protection against corrosion of body components.
May 2017 Page 21/17

Valves shall be flanged type or mounted between flanges to DIN 250, part 1 for PN 16, face
to face dimensions to DIN 3202-K1 corresponds to ISO 5752, concentric type, streamlined
design.
With replaceable seat ring, fusion bonded on backing ring, leak tight closure on both
directions. For operation at differential pressure at maximum 16 bars with operating gears
with electric part turn actuator.
Variant DN-40-300, K1, Seat ring NBR (BUTA N), Shaft S.S. 1.4005, Maximum working
temperature +80 degree Celsius with maximum working pressure 16 bars.
All nut bolts to be of stainless steel grade 316/ A4-70.
Electric actuators shall have to open and close of at least 60 seconds and shall be provided
with an auxiliary operating wheel. The motor control should allow for stepped closing of valve
pausing at ½ closed and ¼ closed.
Motor and electrical protection shall be in strict accordance with the electrical specifications
and DEWA regulations; motors shall be rated to operate at an ambient temperature of 50
degrees centigrade, and a relative humidity of 100 %.
Electrical components shall be protected from condensation.
Electrically actuated butterfly valve shall be connected to low pressure cut-off switch for
automatic closing of valve in case of low pressure (down stream of valve) due to any
breakage in the system. But valve should not be closed if both downstream and upstream
pressure is low.(due to shutdown/ breakage of TSE Network Main). For this purpose
Contractor should arrange a differential pressure switch and arrange required control in
combination with other controls.
Complete control of the valve including partial closing of valve should be possible.
21.2.2.6 PRESSURE REDUCING, PRESSURE SUSTAINING & CHECK VALVE
These valves shall be installed as indicated on drawings to maintain a constant downstream

pressure regardless of demand fluctuations. The valve shall be automatic, fluid actuated, with
a flexible non-wicking, FDA approved, nylon fabric reinforced elastomer diaphragm. The pilot
shall be brass and tubing of copper/brass. The valve shall be flanged and of ductile iron body.
All internal and external exposed surfaces shall be FDA approved epoxy coated to minimum
DFT 300 microns. Valve sizes 4” and above shall be standard with an externally mounted Y
stainer for protection of control circuit and ball valves to isolate the pilot system from Main
valve. All nut bolts to be of stainless steel grade 316/ A4-70.
The valve shall open and close in modulating action. On pressure reversal, valve shall close
tightly. Adjustable pressure range shall be from 1.0 kg/cm 2 to 8.5 kg/cm2.
21.2.2.7 PRESSURE RELEASE VALVE
These valve shall be installed in the pump room as shown on drawings to release excess
pressure away from the system.
The valve shall be flanged, diaphragm type, hydraulically operated, pilot controlled, and
modulating type. The pilot shall be brass and tubing of copper/brass. The valve shall be fast
opening and slow closing. The valve shall be flanged and of ductile iron body. All internal and
May 2017 Page 21/18
external exposed surfaces shall be FDA approved epoxy coated to minimum DFT 300
microns. All nut bolts to be of stainless steel grade 316/ A4-70.
21.2.3 VALVE BOXES
Air valves (1" or smaller only), quick coupling valves, solenoid valves and wires pull boxes to
be installed in an access box of sufficient size to permit ready removal of the valve inner
assemblies without removing the box from the ground. Valve names and numbers must be
clearly marked inside and outside of the box with permanent plastic tags.
Valve boxes shall be fabricated from reinforced plastic and minimum recommended size shall
be as follows:
COVER DEPTH
Q.C.V. 250mm (dia) 230mm

Pull box, Air valve 1” & 430 x 295mm 300mm
Flush valve
Solenoid valves up to 2” 590 x 349mm 380mm
Solenoid valves above 2”
and Isolation valves up to 3” 825 x 495mm 450mm
Measurement are taken from the top of boxes. Covers shall be secured by stainless steel
(A4-70) bolts.
Please note- Installation of plastic valve boxes in Paved areas and Sikkas are not allowed.
All the valve chambers/pullboxes in paved areas and sikkas shall be in RCC and with heavy
duty ductile iron manhole covers.
21.2.4 WATER METERS & STRAINERS
21.2.4.1 BASKET STRAINER
Ductile iron basket strainer with bolted cover, inlet and outlet to be flanged and drilled to PN
16. The strainer should be stainless steel with 1/8 inch. perforations. Working pressure is 150
psi. All bolts and nuts to be stainless steel grade 316/A4-70. The basket strainer shall be
coated internally and externally with coal tar epoxy 300 DFT micron.
21.2.4.2 BRONZE STRAINER
For sizes 2" and below, "Y" type threaded end bronze strainers should be used for protecting
the performance of pipeline equipment by Removal of debris from the water.
The strainer should PN16 rating with Bronze body material and screen should be of Stainless
steel 316.
21.2.4.3 WATER METER
Water Meters should be horizontal Woltman-type meter designed for installation where
occasional low and moderate to high sustained flows are demanded. Accuracy should be
maintained in both forward and reverse flow directions.
May 2017 Page 21/19

Water meter should comply with with all relevant international quality standards, substantially
exceeding ISO4064 BS5728 Class B specifications for forward flow installations in horizontal,
vertical and inclined pipelines.
The meter should have Robust shroud and copper can register for long life and clear
readability, optimum accuracy. The Meter should given reading in cubic meter and/or US
gallons.
The meter shall be suitable for installation in horizontal, inclined or vertical lines.
The meter to be suitable for use up to 120° F (50°C) and working pressures up to 230 psi (16
Bar). The meter will perform with accuracy registration of 100% ± 2% within normal flow*. The
Meter should be certified by manufacturer in factory for both pressure loss and accuracy tests
before shipment. No adjustments need to be made before installation.
The main case to be of cast iron with raised characters showing size and direction of
flow. Meter body and cover are epoxy powder coated for protection in all environments.
Thrust pads and stub spindles are manufactured in tungsten carbide and jewelled rotor
bearings are used for maximum wear life.
The measuring element assembly should consist of the rotor, straightening vanes, accuracy
regulator, spindles and gears. The measuring element is attached to the underside of the
cover with three stainless steel screws and washers. The main case and cover are
assembled with an o-ring gasket and stainless steel nuts, bolts and washers. The
register/pulser assembly is secured to the cover with a lock wire and lead seal.
A in-line strainer should be installed proior to the meter to protect the rotor and help reduce
the effect of turbulence.
The meter should be capable of being easily fitted with pulser output feature on site; when-
ever required in future without disturbing the calibration seal or interrupting the water supply;
for providing pulser-out for automatic water reading through central control system. Pulse out-
put should be possible by two types of pulsers: opto-electronic and reed switch.
21.2.5 DRIP TUBES, EMITTERS
21.2.5.1 PRESSURE COMPENSATING EMITTERS
Emitters shall be constructed from durable black-heat resistant plastic. The emitters shall be
of barbed configuration which can be inserted easily in to Polyethylene tubing. Pressure
compensation shall be achieved by a flexible orifice located in resilient Silicone Elastomer
diaphragms. The orifice should be self-flushing type and shall clean itself during each
irrigation cycle at the start up and the shut down. The emitters should have manual flushing
capability also. The emitter exponent shall be 0.10 or less. The body and the diaphragm
should be resistant to high concentration of Chlorine, fertilizers and pesticides.
21.2.5.2 PRESSURE COMPENSATING DRIPPERLINE:
Irrigation equipment - Dripperline shall consists of linear low density Polyethylene tubing with
pressure compensating, self flushing type integral drip emitters. The tubing shall have an
minimum outside diameter (O.D.) 16mm and thickness of 1.1 mm + 0.05mm. Pipes for drip
lines shall be manufactured from low density polyethylene incorporating a minimum of 2.8%
carbon black, antioxidants in an amount not exceeding 0.5% and shall have a nominal
pressure PN 6.
A random samples of drip pipes shall be subjected to the Teepol crack resistance test. The
samples shall be immersed in a bath containing a solution of 10% Teepol and 90% water
maintained at 50 degrees C. The pipe should resist the solution without showing any fatigue
or crack for a period of 150 hours.
The test should be carried out in an independent laboratory within U.A.E.

May 2017 Page 21/20
All fittings for drip line shall be compression type.
The emitters must be pressure compensating according to ISO 9260 and emission rate of the
emitter shall remain constant at varying water pressure from 1bar to 4.5 bar. The flow path in
emitter must ensure turbulent flow and emitter must confirm to excellent pressure
compensation and self-cleaning/Flushing mechanism. The emitter must be clogging resisting
and the filtration requirement not more than 150 mesh. Coefficient of variation shall be less
than 5%. the flow of emitter must remain same/constant at temperatures varying from 0 to
60 deg. Celsius.
The product must have warranty against cracking and performance for 7 Years.
No. of dripline risers shall be as per Engineer’s approval. Separate dripline risers shall
be for each planter. Each tree in grass areas shall be provided with separate dripline
riser. Drip stakes shall be provided at each point of change in direction of drip line and
spacing between drip stakes shall not be more than 10.0 meters. Drip stakes shall be
provided at each point of change in direction of drip line and spacing between drip stakes
shall not be more than 10.0 meters.
The capacity and spacing of the inbuilt emitters in the dripperline shall be as follows:
For ground covers: Emitter discharge rate shall be 0.9 GPH and spacing between emitters
shall be 50 cm in dripperline and 50cm between dripperlines.
For seasonal flowers: Emitter discharge rate shall be 0.6 GPH and spacing between
emitters shall be 50cm in dripperline and 30cm between dripperlines.
For hedge: Emitter discharge rate shall be 0.6 GPH and spacing between emitters In
dripperline shall be 50 Cm.
For trees: A loop of dripperline (around tree) with 0.9 GPH in line emitter at every 30 cm
length of dripperline in a loop shall not be less than 3.2 metre.
For shrubs: 2 Nos in line PC emitters (each emitter 0.9 GPH) per plant shall be used for
shrubs if spacing between shrubs is less than or equal to 1.5 metre. A loop of dripperline with
3 Nos inline P.C. emitters (each emitter 0.9 GPH) per plant shall be used for shrubs (if
spacing between shrubs is more than 1.5 mtr).
For bougainvillea: 2 nos. in line p.c. emitters( each emitter 0.6 gph) per plant
21.2.5.3 SUBSURFACE DRIP SYSTEM FOR GRASS AREAS
21.2.5.3.1 Subsurface Drip Tubing:
Irrigation equipment- Subsurface Drip tubing shall consists of linear low density Polyethylene
tubing with pressure compensating, self flushing type integral drip emitters. The Tube shall be
suitable for subsurface installation in grass areas.
The drip tubing shall be a pre-bonded emitter type. The tubing shall have emitters spaced at
12 inches (30 cm) and in flow rates of 1.0 gallons per hour (GPH) with a coefficient of
variance (Cv) less than 0.05. The spacing between the drip tubing should not be more than
12"(30cm) .
Maximum length of run of the drip tubing (for relatively flat levels/grade) from drip line riser
point should not be more than 55 mtr.
Water distribution shall be via an integrated turbulent flow path emitter with dual discharge
May 2017 Page 21/21
ports on opposing sides of the tubing. The tubing shall consist of nominal-sized, linear, low-
density 5/8" (15,8mm) polyethylene with an outside diameter (O.D.) of approximately .710"
(18mm) and an inside diameter (I.D.) of approximately .620" (16mm). The emitters shall be
molded from virgin polyethylene impregnated with TREFLAN(R) to inhibit root intrusion. The
tubing shall be available in pressure-compensating type. The pressure-compensating type
shall incorporate a circular silicon rubber disk designed to flush at startup, shutdown and
during the irrigation cycle to inhibit debris collection.
The tubing shall have at least seven-year warranty for root-intrusion protection.
21.2.5.3.2 Automatic Flushing Valve:
The flushing valve shall be with inlet size minimum 1/2" MPT. The flushing valve shall be
entirely of non-corrosive plastics. Maximum Flow rate should be 15-20 gpm. Line Flushing
Valves should be used to provide a cleansing action in the sub-surface drip tubing each time
the zone is turned on. The Line Flushing Valve should have ability to dump water which
allows the velocity of water inside the drip tubing to increase momentarily during turn-on. This
action should move sediments out of the system through the Line Flushing Valve. Place a
Line Flushing Valve (one per 15 GPM of zone flow) as far away from the source as possible.
This should typically be somewhere along the exhaust header. Note: Where Center Feed
layouts are used, install one Line. Flushing Valve on each exhaust header.
Line Flushing Valves should be buried in a valve box with a gravel sump adequate to drain
approximately 1 gallon of water as shown on the details drawing. Installation of the Line
Flushing Valve should be in an inconspicuous area as far away from the source (solenoid
valve) as possible.
21.2.5.3.3 Air Vent/Vacuum Relief Valve:
Air/Vacuum Relief Valves should be provided for two reasons:
1. To freely allow air into a tubing after shutdown. This ensures a vacuum doesn’t draw debris
into the drip tubing.
2. To provide a means of releasing air from the drip tubing when the zone is turned on, thus
eliminating air pockets.
Air/Vacuum Relief Valves are installed at the highest point(s) of a subsurface drip-tubing
zone. Instillation of Air/Vacuum Relief Valves should ensure all rows of drip-tubing can take
advantage of the Air/Vacuum Relief Valve, install it on a line perpendicular to the dripline
rows. This may be an exhaust header, or a special lateral connecting all the rows of drip-
tubing such as going over a berm.
The air vent/vacuum relief valve shall be an O-ring seal type with inlet threads of 1/2" (16mm)
MIPT capable of venting air until 4 psi (0,27 Bar) is achieved at system startup, and vacuum
relief when 4 psi (0,27 Bar) is reached during system shutdown. The air vent/vacuum relief
valve shall be rated at a maximum operating pressure of 100 psi (6,8 Bar). The air/vacuum
relief valve body and shuttle shall be constructed of corrosive-proof engineering
thermoplastics. The seal shall be a rubber O-ring. Air/Vacuum Relief Valves should be
installed in a valve box with a gravel sump as per details drawings.
21.2.5.3.4 Check Valve:
On slopes in line spring check valves should be installed to avoid wet areas in the lowest
areas in that zone due to low line drainage.
The check valve shall be a preset, adjustable type with 1/2" (16mm) female slip inlet and
outlet capable of eliminating reverse water flow when the system is depressurized. The check
valve body shall be molded from polyvinyl chloride (PVC) capable of being solvent-welded to
May 2017 Page 21/22

any appropriate PVC pipe or fitting. The check valve seat shall be constructed of rubber. All
internal metal components shall be constructed of stainless steel. Opening pressure of the
check valve should be 5 psi (0,3 Bar) and be capable of maintaining elevation change up to
12' (3,6m).
21.2.5.3.5 Operation Indicator:
Provide at least one operation indicator per zone. The operation indicator shall include two
feet of 1/4" (6,4mm) blank tubing with a pre-installed barbed coupling. The operation
indicator's stem shall extend to 9" (229mm) with 10 psi (0,68 Bar) of working pressure.
21.2.6 PRESSURE COMPENSATING BUBBLERS (NOT APPLICABLE)
Bubblers shall be constructed from UL stabilized engineering grade plastic and rubber,
delivery shall be pressure compensating in the range of 2.00 to 5.00 bar, delivery shall be
umbrella pattern, flow shall be 1gpm. Inlet shall be ½ inch female threaded.
Stakes for bubblers shall be constructed from strong temperature resistant polypropylene
plastic construction with protective stop collar, length shall be 12 inches each side of inlet with
barbed side inlet suitable for class “C” polyethylene pipes, outlet shall be ½ inch external
male thread.
2 NOS. BUBBLERS SHALL BE USED FOR EACH PALM TREE, EACH 1 GPM
21.2.7 POP-UP SPRAYERS
The sprayers shall have a high level impact strength corrosion resistant body, stem and
nozzle. Pop - up height should be 4". The sprayer shall have a heavy-duty stainless steel
retraction spring and piston with slip clutch to facilitate nozzle positioning. The sprayer shall
incorporate a wiper seal to protect the internal mechanism against ingress of foreign material
and prevent pressure blow out and shall have an easily accessible under nozzle screen. The
wiper seal should be co-molded type that ensures flow-by of less than 0.10 US. GPM at low
pressure and complete sealing at pressure greater than 10 psi. The sprayer shall have
12mm (1/2") threaded inlet.
ALL SPRAYERS SHOULD BE PROVIDED WITH BUILT-IN SEAL-A-MATIC CHECK

VALVE AND IN STEM PRESSURE REGULATOR TO MAINTAIN CONSTANT OUTLET
PRESSURE OF 30 PSI.
The sprayer shall have the following performance specification at 2 bar operating pressure:
The nozzles shall have precipitation rates matched across sets and across patterns. The
standard nozzle shall be capable of covering 4,5 metre radius at 2.0 bar pressure.
Spacing for the sprayers with standard nozzle shall be 4 meters. For small areas sprayers
with low flow nozzles shall be used as shown on drawings.
Standard Sprayers shall have the following performance at 2.0 bar and 30° trajectory:
Type Radius (m) Flow l/s
Full Circle 4.5 0.23
Three Quarter 4.5 0.17
May 2017 Page 21/23

Half Circle 4.5 0.11
Quarter Circle 4.5 0.06
Low angle/low gallonage sprayers shall have the following performance at 2.0 Bar and 15°
trajectory:
Type Radius (m) Flow l/s
Full circle 3.0 0.10
Half 3.0 0.05
Quarter 3.0 0.03
All nozzles for standard and low angle shall be MPR. Sprayers / sprinklers should be
installed in such a way that water will not hit the stem of the palm trees.
Sprayers and sprinklers shall be installed 30cm away from heel kerb / edge of footpath.
21.2.8 ROTOR POP UP SPRINKLERS
Turbine or gear drive rotor pop up sprinklers, full and part circle operation with Memory-Arc to
automatically return nozzle stream to set arc. Part circle adjustment shall be from minimum
40 deg. to 350 degrees. All adjustments of the sprinklers shall be from the top.
The internal mechanism is water lubricated. Heavy duty plastic case with multi-function wiper
seal and heavy duty retraction stainless spring. All sprinklers should be provided with seal-A-
matic check valve. Bottom inlet to be 3/4" BSP female threaded. Pop up height to be not less
than 3 5/8". The nozzles of all the sprinklers shall be low pressure models for proper
performance even at low pressures.
The sprinkler shall approx. match the following performance specification at 3.0 bar operating
pressure:
A) Standard (25 deg Trajectory)
Type Radius (m) Flow (GPM)

Three Quarter Circle 12.0 4.4
Quarter circle 9.7 1.6
Spacing for these sprinklers shall not be more than 10.0 meters.
B) Low angle (15 deg Trajectory)
Type Radius (m) Flow (GPM)

Three Quarter Circle 6.5 2.46

May 2017 Page 21/24
Quarter circle 6.5 0.92
Spacing for these low angle sprinklers shall be not be more than 6.5 meters.
Sprinklers in tree areas should be with low trajectory angle.
21.2.9 PUMPS
The irrigation network is used for both irrigation and fire water supply. The main irrigation
pumps are to be switched off whenever a fire is detected.
Hydrostatic flow switches are to be installed at each fire hydrant connection chamber.
Whenever a fire hydrant is opened, the flow switches will send a signal to the main control
system to switch off the main irrigation pumps and close the solenoid valves. Irrigation pumps
to be started only after fire mode signal has been removed.
In order to achieve the above described function, a control system is to be installed consisting
of at least the following components:
1. Master control panel fixed inside the pumping station.
2. Hydrostatic flow switches at each fire hydrant connection chamber.

3. The option of having a common network between sensors up to the controller PLC to
indicate flow in any of the hydrants.
4. The option of having the interfacing relays inside the irrigation controllers, the pumping
station panel to read the generated fire alarm from various locations.
Contractor shall be responsible for:
1. Integrity of the system after installation of piping and equipment inside the pumping station.
2. Entire piping system shall be restrained and/or protected against unbalanced forces.
3. Stress analysis shall be carried out by specialist engineer to design appropriate supporting
system and to maintain loads on pipes and equipment within allowable limits.
21.2.9.1 MAIN IRRIGATION PUMPS
Centrifugal pumps shall be vertical, multistage, cast iron body and base. The pump section
(shaft, impellers, guide vanes and chambers) shall be of stainless steel. The mechanical shaft
seal shall have diamond polished Tungsten Carbide or Silicon Carbide seal faces and heat
resistant O-ring. Thrust bearing shall have ample capacity to carry the weight of all rotating
parts plus the hydraulic thrust of the impellers. Motors shall be closed coupled type.
Pumps shall be suitable for Treated Sewage/Brackish Water
The inlet and the outlet shall be flanged PN 16.
During normal operation system shall allow for 30-40m head pressure for each automatic
irrigation connection point for streets, open areas and lease lots.
Irrigation pumps to be automatically switched off at the time of fire.
Motors shall nominally 2900 RPM, TEFC Class F, manufactured generally in accordance with
DEWA regulations and electrical specifications. The power rating for the electric motor should
be 30% above the rated power shown in the manufacturer catalogue.
Supply and install packaged booster pump set for irrigation water supply, designed for the
total system capacity as shown in the pump schedule. The system shall be completely factory
May 2017 Page 21/25
assembled, tested and shipped to the job site as an integral unit ready to receive suction and
discharge piping and incoming electric power.
Out of the 4 duty pumps one will be of variable speed and control panel to be assembled
either by the pump manufacturer or by their local representative. Local assembling facility
should be minimum ISO9002 certified for manufacturing and servicing of packaged pump set
and variable speed drive unit.
Provide water pumps of type and size as indicated on the equipment schedules.
1. Pump shall be selected for non-overloading characteristics, and the contractor shall submit
performance curve on pumps proposed for installation. Select pumps to operate near their
point of peak efficiency, flexible coupled to an electric motor and mounted on common steel
base plate.
3. Pump shall be of single stage vertical mounting type to suit the specified capacity.
21.2.9.1.1 Material of Construction

Material of construction shall be in accordance with ASTM standard / relevant BS standards
Casing - Cast Iron
Impeller - Stainless Steel

Shaft - Stainless Steel
Seal type - Mechanical
21.2.9.1.2 Pump base

The pump set shall be mounted on the fabricated M.S channel base frame duly painted. The
base shall be sufficiently rigid to support the pump and motor without the use of additional
support or members.
21.2.9.1.3 Motor
The pump shall be connected to a totally enclosed fan ventilated motor with class F
insulation. Motor shall be in accordance with latest NEMA / BS standards and shall have
following characteristics.
Motor speed - 1500 RPM

Power supply - 225kw/400V/3Ph/50Hz
Each motor shall have a sufficient horsepower rating to operate the pump at any point on the
pump’s flow-head curve without over loading the name plate horsepower rating of the motor.
The motor shall be suitable for continuous duty and variation of + 5% in voltage.
21.2.9.1.4 Valves & Piping
Piping shall be steel Sch 80 epoxy coated, with isolating cast iron epoxy coated gate valve on
each pump suction and discharge, cast iron check valves on each pump discharge, strainer
on the suction of each pump, flexible connectors on suction and discharge of each pump.
Common header shall be of steel Sch 80 epoxy coated. Provide pressure gauge in suction
and discharge header.
21.2.9.1.5 Control System
21.2.9.1.5.1 General
Pump set to be suitable for 400V/3Ph/50Hz power supply and 240V/1Ph/50Hz control.
The control system shall enable the pumps to maintain a set point pressure with variable flow
rates utilizing pressure sensing to vary the pump speed to suit the flow.
May 2017 Page 21/26

The controller shall utilize a VFD frequency inverter to modulate the speed of VFD pump and
the number of pumps running to maintain a constant pressure in the reticulation. The
operation shall be controlled by a pressure transducer to determine the actual pressure and
compare the pressure with a reference pressure set in the controller.
The control shall be a purpose built microprocessor dedicated to pump control. PLC control
units shall not be considered.
When the system pressure drops below the System Cut In pressure the controller shall signal
the VFD to run. The first pump will ramp up in speed until the Set Point pressure is reached. If
one pump cannot satisfy the pressure requirement it will be placed on fixed speed and the
next pump will ramp up on the VFD and try to achieve the Set point pressure. This procedure
shall be repeated until the set point is reached or all pumps are running. The controller shall
then modulate the speed of the VFD pump to maintain this pressure.
The controller shall receive signal from the Fire pump control panel to alter set point to
desired level on the fire pump coming into operation. On completion of the fire pump
operation, the controller shall set the pressure setting back to the original set level.
On the sensing of no flow the controller shall check that:

The pump is at minimum frequency
The system is at or about the Set Point pressure
Once these criteria are satisfied then the pump shall shut down.
The Contractor shall provide the surge and stress analysis in order to determine
impact on pumps and piping system.
21.2.9.1.5.2 Electrical Installation
1. All electrical works must be installed to international standards and comply with regional
power authorities requirements. It shall be the contractors responsibility to obtain permits
and inspections from those authorities where required.
2. The Control Switchboard shall be located in a position protected from direct sunlight and
the elements.
3. All equipment mounted within the switchboard shall have all wiring numbered and
confirmed to an `AS BUILT’ Circuit Diagram.
4. The control power supply shall be 240V AC 50Hz with suitable protection to stop
unauthorized access to the high voltage areas.
5. All control wiring shall use multi-strand multi-cored shielded control cable of at least 1mm2.
6. Pressure input shall be via a pressure transducer. The controller shall be suitable for any
full scale pressure transducer that still satisfies the hydraulic requirements.
7. The switchboard shall have Din rail terminals located in the bottom half with the following
inputs/output sized for 2.5mm building wire with opto-isolation of the input voltages to the
main control board.
Pause switch input contacts

System fault output
System Paused output
8. All wiring shall be numbered and conform to the as built circuit diagrams.
9. The switchboard shall be manufactured from 2mm thick mild steel with exterior quality
powder coating applied to prepared surfaces. The Ingress protection shall be to IP54
minimum with removable filter pads for dust ingress protection.
May 2017 Page 21/27

21.2.9.1.5.3 Pump set Controls
MANUAL-OFF-AUTO switches shall be installed for each pump located on the front of the
switchboard with the pump number clearly labeled adjacent to this switch.
Provision shall be made for the control of pump operations as follows:-
MANUAL - run pump irrespective of all other commands
AUTO - Modulating control for the selected pump.
OFF - Selected pump remains isolated at all times
Selection of any of the above functions will not effect the operation of other pumps.
After restoration of power following a power failure the system shall power up to normal
operation with the system operating with the previously set parameters. Power up to
DEFAULT parameters shall not be acceptable.
Any failure of the VFD shall not preclude the MANUAL operation of the system.
The control of the pump set shall incorporate the following protection features.
For individual pumps-

thermal overload shut down
For pump system-

Low system pressure shutdown
High system pressure shutdown with programmable restart options
System pause activated by external input with both emergency and controlled pause options
High pressure limit which trips pumps at a controlled rate and decelerates the VFD at max to
obtain a lower pressure.
Individual protection for each pump with associated delay timer.
PID adjustment on the controller for reaction tuning
Selectable lead pump options with external lead pump selection or time based lead pump
rotation
3 set points
Optional pressure trips for external control of other devices.
The shutdown events must be resettable by any operator & a relay shall be available to drive
an indicator such as a dome light in case of a shutdown occurrence.
21.2.9.1.5.4 Data Log
The control system must log data for display on the screen. The items to be logged are:
Hours run per pump
Flow rate
Total flow
Fault history
Resetting of these items to zero shall be made from screen key presses.
21.2.9.1.5.5 Menu Structure
The controller shall have a nested menu structure that allows access to specific areas for site
tuning. The menus shall be in English text. Abbreviations shall not be accepted.
21.2.9.1.5.6 Ambient Requirements
All control equipment shall be rated to a minimum of 50 deg. C & 90% humidity without
causing any shutdown. The unit shall be cooled by means of an internal fan sized to maintain
May 2017 Page 21/28
lower than maximum temperatures within the unit. The control box shall be mounted under
cover away from any direct sunlight with access denied to unauthorized personnel.
The enclosure shall be rated to IP54 with forced cooling fans designed to handle heat
extraction of suitable capacity assuming a 3% VFD power loss. This calculation shall be
made with an ambient temperature of 46 deg.C. Calculations shall be provided if requested to
prove this capacity.
21.2.9.1.5.7 System Security
The control system shall have the feature of selective entry for personnel based on key press.
Sensitive areas of adjustment shall be accessed by a security code. All areas that would
effect the configuration of the system shall be security protected.
21.2.9.1.5.8 Outputs
The controller shall have 4 programmable outputs that can be selected to any of the functions
listed below but not limited to these options. They shall be rated to 10 amps 240VAC with
change over contacts.
Shutdown Fault
Low Pressure Fault
High Pressure Fault
High Pressure Alarm
Pump 1 Run
Pump 2 Run
Pump 3 Run
Pump 1 Shutdown
Pump 2 Shutdown
Pump 3 Shutdown
System Paused
Any pump shutdown
Any pump running
No Flow Shutdown
VFD Fault
Pressure Trip 1
Pressure Trip 2
21.2.9.1.5.9 Inputs
The controller shall have 4 fixed voltage free inputs and a minimum of 8 programmable
inputs. The programmable inputs shall have the following options:-VFD Fault
Set Point 2
Set Point 3
Soft Pause
Pump 1 Protection
Pump 2 Protection
Pump 3 Protection
Pump 1 Stop
Pump 2 Stop
Pump 3 Stop
Phase failure
Fire Mode
Pump 1 Manual Run
Pump 2 Manual Run
Pump 3 Manual Run
Cycle pumps
Shutdown No Flow
April 2017 Page 21/29

21.2.9.1.5.10 Telemetry
The controller shall be capable of communicating with an external telemetry system based on
digital Inputs and Outputs from a remote source.
21.2.9.1.5.11 Quality Requirements
The following documentation is required as a minimum.

Pump system Test Report showing testing of:
set point
loss of prime
alarm functions
system security
shutdown functions
phase failure test
21.2.9.1.5.12 Documentation
The contractor shall provide the following documentation prior to Practical Completion being
awarded:
- Instruction manual for the controller
- As-built drawings of the mechanical components in AutoCAD 2000 format copied to an
- IBM compatible 3.5” floppy disk
- A1 sized drawing of the as built pump station.
- Full set of circuit diagrams on AutoCAD 2000 format
- Bound copy of as built circuits with pumpstation showing all circuits, exterior
dimensions and components, detail of all components used within the switchboard by
Make & model.
- VFD instruction manual
21.2.9.1.5.13 Compliance Table

All items on this compliance table must be satisfied to accept the offer.
ITEM COMPLY
Control features Yes No
IP Compliance Yes No
Switchgear included Yes No
Pump protection Yes No
Input capacity Yes No
Output capacity Yes No
Set points – 3 off Yes No
Data log suitability Yes No
Switchgear standard Yes No
VFD type Yes No
Cooling capacity Yes No
Telemetry serial communications Yes No
TEMPERATURE RATING 40degC Yes No
OUTPUTS Yes No
Documentation Yes No
QA compliance Yes No
21.2.9.2 FIRE PUMPS
Centrifugal pumps shall be cast iron body and base. The pump section (shaft, impellers,
guide vanes and chambers) shall be of stainless steel. The mechanical shaft seal shall have
diamond polished Tungsten Carbide or Silicon Carbide seal faces and heat resistant O-ring.
Thrust bearing shall have ample capacity to carry the weight of all rotating parts plus the
hydraulic thrust of the impellers. Motors shall be closed coupled type.
May 2017 Page 21/30
Pumps shall be suitable for Treated Sewage/Brackish Water
The inlet and the outlet shall be flanged PN 16.

During operation at fire time duty of each fire pump shall be xx l/s at total head greater than
or equal to xx m.
main pumps (1 duty and 1 stand-by) should be installed.
Pump to be automatically switched on when any fire hydrant is in operation.
System shall allow for xx m head pressure and xx GPM flow for each fire hydrant while
operating one at the time of fire.
Fire pump shall be local Civil Defence approved and manufactured by an approved
manufacturer. Packaged fire pump set along with the control panel to be assembled in a
ISO9002 Certified facility within the United Arab Emirates.
Each pump shall have capacities as shown in pump schedule, adjusted as necessary to suit
the hydraulic calculation.
Electric fire pump shall be vertical centrifugal single stage or multistage construction and
Diesel driven pump shall be horizontal single stage or multistage construction to suit the
specified rating. The pumps shall be connected to the standpipe system. The suction supply
for the fire pump shall be from storage tank at a maximum pressure of 1.0 bar. The pump
casing shall be cast iron and rated to withstand at least 1.5 times the working pressure.
21.2.9.2.1 Material of Construction

Materials of construction shall be in accordance with ASTM standard /relevant BS standards
or NFPA 20.
Casing - Cast Iron

Impeller - Stainless steel
Shaft - Stainless steel
Shaft sleeve - Bronze
The casing will be of the end suction design made of cast iron, designed for 1720 kPa
hydraulic test pressure. The casing shall have tapped and plugged holes for priming, vent
and drain.
The impeller shall be designed to give the characteristics outlined under “Performance”. It
shall be of the enclosed type, vacuum cast in one piece. It shall be furnished all over, the
exterior being turned and the interior being furnished smooth and cleaned of all burrs,
trimmings and irregularities. The impeller will be dynamically balanced. It shall be held
securely to the shaft by a key of ample size and impeller nut.
A stuffing box shall be provided, designed with sufficient area for incorporation of mechanical
seals.
Pumps shall have balanced mechanical seals. Mechanical seals shall be with carbon rotating
ring, stainless steel spring, ceramic seat and flexible bellows and gaskets.
The pump shaft shall be one -piece finished and polished on all sections. The shaft shall be
of ample strength and rigidity and the shortest practicable distance between bearings shall be
used to keep deflection and vibration to a minimum.
The pump shall be fitted with grease lubricated ball bearing.
A flexible coupling shall be provided to connect the pump shaft to the motor shaft. The
coupling shall be of an all metal type with a flexible rubber insert. The entire rotating coupling
element shall be enclosed by a coupling guard.
May 2017 Page 21/31

The pump, motor and diesel engine shall be mounted on a groutable steel base plate with
integral drip channels incorporated on each side. The base shall be sufficiently rigid to
support the pump and motor without the use of additional supports or members.
21.2.9.2.2 Accessories
The fire pump shall include the following accessories:
- Discharge header Steel Sch 80 epoxy coated

- Isolating valves on suction and discharge of each pump
- Non return valves on discharge of each pump
- Air release valve to be provided on the stand pipe
- Discharge pressure gauge.
21.2.9.2.3 Electric motor drive
The electric motor shall be totally enclosed fan ventilated, wound for 380/415V/3Ph/50Hz
current. The motor shall be such capacity that 115% of full load ampere rating shall not be
exceeded at any condition of the pump load. Acceptable suppliers shall be: Brook Crompton
(UK), General Electric (USA), Schoch, US motors or equal.
Motor shall be IP55, class F insulated suitable for ambient temperature of 50 0C. Bearings
shall be anti friction ball or roller type.
21.2.9.2.4 Diesel engine drive
Diesel engine shall be provided with electric starting system. Engine shall be either radiator
cooled or heat exchanger type. In case of heat exchanger, the factory supplied heat
exchanger piping loop complete with required strainers, a pressure reducing valve and
bypass line shall be installed between the pump discharge head and engine heat exchanger
by the installing contractor. Each engine shall be furnished by a lead acid heavy duty starting
batteries, battery rack and cables, a flexible exhaust connector and industrial type silencer.
21.2.9.2.5 Control equipment
The fire pump control panel shall be completely assembled, wired and tested by the control
manufacturer before shipment from the factory, and shall be labeled “Fire Pump Controller”.
The controller shall be located as close as practical and within sight of the motor, preferably
mounted on the pump skid. The controller shall be so located or protected that it will not be
damaged/effected by water escaping from the pump or connection. The controller shall be of
combined manual and automatic star delta type, and shall be complete with:
A. Star delta starter for main electric pump.

B. Star delta/DOL starter for jockey pump, if applicable.
C. Door interlocked isolator.
D. Triple pole thermal over load relay.
E. MCCB for main and jockey pump.
F. Terminal for pressure switch.
G. Terminal for float switch for dry run protection.
H. Low voltage supply for float switch.
I. Run Trip indication for main, jockey pump.
J. Hand-Off-Auto switches for main and jockey pump.
K. Main incoming Ammeter.
L. Panel alive lamp.
M. A/C control circuit healthy indication.
N. Delay timer to prevent motor from cycling.
ENGINE CONTROLS.
O. D/C control circuit healthy indication.
P. Run-Trip lamp for diesel engine.
May 2017 Page 21/32
Q Hand-Off-Auto switch for diesel engine.

R. Battery charger
S. Battery charger On-Off switch
T. Ammeter for battery charger.
U. High water temperature indication lamp.
V. Low oil pressure indication lamp.
W. Terminal for pressure switch.
All the above in IP55 enclosure.
21.2.9.2.6 General
Pump set with diesel and electric driven shall be complete with suction and discharge header,
pressure gauges, coupling guard and control panel.
Batteries shall furnished in a dry charge condition, with electrolyte liquid in a separate
container. Electrolyte shall be added and the battery given a conditioning charge at the time
that engine is put into service. Batteries shall be located so as to be readily accessible for
servicing and at least 300 mm above floor level.
All wiring between controller and building fire alarm system shall be carried by the contractor.
A wring diagram shall be provided inside of the control panel enclosure showing exact wiring
for the controller, including a legend of identifying number of individual components. All wiring
terminals shall be plainly marked to correspond with the diagram furnished.
Wiring elements of the controllers shall be designed on a continuous -duty basis. All wiring
leading from the panel to the engine and to the battery shall have adequate current carrying
capacity. Such wiring shall be protected against mechanical injury by conduit.
Prior to shipment, the pump set shall be thoroughly shop tested for leakage. Test pressure
shall be 1.5 times the working pressure.
Electric fire pumps shall be the lead fire pump. Diesel engine pump shall be backup fire pump
and shall only operate if the lead pump cannot maintain system pressure.
Pump and motor to be aligned by the pump supplier prior to commissioning using Laser
alignment equipment. Software generated alignment report to be submitted along with
commissioning report.
The pump driver all controls and necessary attachments specified herein shall be purchased
under a unit contract. Field wiring of fire alarm panels, installation and wiring of fuel piping,
wiring from the suction tank to the panel shall be provided by the contractor. The pump
manufacturer shall assume unit responsibility and shall provide the service of a qualified
engineer to supervise the installation and alignment of equipment. Field tests shall be
conducted in the field to satisfy Local Authorities having jurisdiction of satisfactory operation
of pump, driver and controller. The pump manufacturer’s engineer shall be at the job site
supervising the test. The control manufacturer shall have their representative at the job site to
train operators in the use of the controls.
21.2.9.3 SUMP PUMP
Sump pump is required for the Main Irrigation Pump Station, location and arrangement
should be as per details drawings.
The pump shall be of robust construction and suitable for pumping corrosive, treated effluent
with high sand content. It should operate at minimum 100mm depth of water. Pump body,
impeller as well as vital pump components to be of Stainless steel.
May 2017 Page 21/33

Capacity of these pump should be 130 m3/hr at 12 metre head. Delivery line of these pumps
to be connected to the nearest storm water Drainage manhole. This connection shall strictly
be as per the specifications & the requirements of Drainage & Irrigation department.
Float switch to be provided to operate these pumps automatically if the level of water inside
the filtration chambers comes up.
All switches and control devices related to these pumps to be fixed in the electric control
panel.
Drain line to be connected from fertilizer room to sump pump pit in pump room.
21.2.10 LAGOONS
21.2.10.1 General
The TSE generated from the STP is stored in the lagoons located in the green buffer zone.
The lagoons are not within the scope of work for this contract.
21.2.11 FILTERS
Automatic self-cleaning filters specifically designed for use with organic contaminants.
Cleaning shall be effected by a hydraulically powered suction scanner, automatically
activated when the differential pressure across the filter reaches an adjustable level,
nominally 5 psi.
The screen shall be stainless steel grade 316 L with 200 micron mesh size. Flushing line to
be connected to the soak pits or nearest storm water drainage manhole.
The control system shall feature a fail safe timer to prevent continuous flushing due to
malfunction.
The control System for the filters should be such that it will not flush the filters if the pumps
and/or irrigation system is not operating. Filters should flush; only during the operating hours
of the Irrigation System.
6 filters to be installed in pumping station, 4 duty and 2 standby. The capacity of each filter
should be minimum 3960 GPM.
All the filters shall have isolation valves in the suction as well as delivery side for easy
maintenance. The controller for the filters shall be equipped with timer and pressure
differential control unit. Controller will be fixed in the Electric control panel.
All nuts and bolts shall be stainless steel grade 316.
The filter body and internal parts including flanged connection shall be stainless steel.
Pressure gauges to be connected to suction and delivery side of each filter, pressure gauges
to be mounted in the Electric control panel in isolated compartment.
21.2.12 PRESSURE GAUGES
Pressure gauges for filtration chambers shall be stainless steel, direct reading, Glycerin
filled capable of 0-10 kg/cm2 register with 0.25 graduation. Gauge shall be of glass or
Plexiglas faced, drip-proof and minimum dia. of 50mm. Gauge cock shall be of same size as
pressure gauge and be fabricated from stainless steel.
21.2.13 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE
May 2017 Page 21/34

Warning tape shall be laid above main pipes. Tapes shall be durable and detectable by
Electro-Magnetic means using low output generator equipment. They shall remain legible
and color fast in all soil conditions at PH values of 2.5 to 11.0 inclusive.
The tapes shall be flexible and subject to the Engineer's approval. Width of the tape should
be at least 6"(150 mm.).
Tape shall be Orange color with Black text in Arabic and English as " CAUTION:
IRRIGATION PRESSURE MAIN BELOW ". The text on the tape shall be permanent ink
bonded to resist prolonged chemical attack by corrosive acids and alkaline with message
repeated at a maximum interval of two meters. The tapes shall be laid 300 mm above the
pipeline.
The tape shall be continuous over pipelines and at joints there should be a minimum of one
meter over lapping.
21.2.14 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
All electrical equipments shall be in accordance with DEWA regulations and electrical
specification. Enclosures shall be protected in accordance with IP55 for equipment installed
above grade and IP58 for equipment installed below grade.
Wiring to and from control panels shall be routed in pvc conduit below the ground. Above
grade conduit to be liquid tight flex, or galvanized steel, provision to be made for inspection
tee's and ells to facilitate removal in the future.
Name of approved manufacturers for electric components are as follow:
1. SIEMENS
2. LEGRAND
3. ABB
21.2.14.1 ELECTRICAL WIRE FOR SOLENOID VALVES AND SATELLITES
All electrical wire for underground use shall be single core solid "Underground Feeder" type
insulated with a flame-retardant thermoplastic compound, rated for 600 volts and direct burial.
The Contractor shall prepare a wire-sizing chart with effective lengths of each station and
common wires, which shall be submitted, for approval prior to commencement of work.
Cable markers shall be used for indicating valve number each cables at both ends as well as
at splices. Cables shall be laid in PVC conduits.
Two-way signal cables should be laid in separate conduits between irrigation Controller and
Main control panel for future use. Separate wire to be laid for each solenoid valve, and valve
combination to be arranged at the respective Irrigation Controller. Power cables for Irrigation
controllers shall be armoured cables without any conduit for it.
Two-way Signal wire between the Main Control Panel and the Irrigation controllers should be
double jacketed, two conductor cable intended for future central control system.
The cable manufacturer should certify that the insulated conductors have been tested for and
meet the requirements of U.L.
The two conductors shall be color coded with one conductor BLACK and the other RED. The
conductors shall be tin coated, soft drawn, annealed solid copper conforming to the
requirements of ASTM -33.
The cable shall be suitable for direct burial in the earth, whoever it is required to be installed
in ducts or conduits.
May 2017 Page 21/35

Pull boxes shall be provided at every place of change in direction of conduit piping, near to
solenoid valves. In any case spacing between adjacent pull boxes in a line shall not exceed
50 meters.
Size of the cable depends on the distance between the Main Control Panel and the field
Controllers and according voltage loss calculations.
Sizes of the conduits should be as follows:

1” up to 4 wires
1 1/2” up to 8 wires
2” up to 15 wires
3” up to 30 wires
4” more than 30 wires
Provide minimum one spare cable for every five cables.
Irrigation control cables shall be color coded as follows
1. Common wire ....................Black
2. Drip valve wire ………..….Blue

3. Bubbler valve wire …… Red
4. Spray valve wire … … Yellow
5. Sprinkler valve wire … … Orange
6. Spare wire……………… White
SEPARATE PULL BOXES SHOULD BE USED FOR POWER CABLES AND MAXI COM
SIGNAL CABLES.
21.2.14.2 WIRE CONNECTORS
All wire connections at electric remote control valves and all splices of wire in the field shall
be made using wire connectors. The wire connectors shall be specifically designed to ensure
waterproof underground wire connections. The connectors shall be under-writers laboratories
listed water-resistant wire connectors, rated 600 volts for PVC insulated copper wire with
insulation temperature rating of 105 degree C.
The connector shall be insulated with color coded, pliable, vinyl skirt. They shall feature alive
spring which assures a tight grip even on small wire combinations.
All wire connections to be arranged in plastic pull boxes at fixed interval distances of max.
100 meters and/or at any change of direction.
All valve combinations shall be arranged at the controller.
21.2.14.3 ELECTRIC PRESSURE SWITCHES
Pressure switches shall be fabricated from die cast aluminum per ASTM B-85 and designed
to meet IP65 specifications. Transducers shall be fabricated from brass and buna N.
The pressure switches shall incorporate an alternating fulcrum balance plate allowing
independent adjustment of both set and reset point over the full range.
May 2017 Page 21/36

Both set and reset points shall be adjustable 1.40 to 14 bar, having a minimum deadband
range less than or equal to 1.40 bar. Repeatability shall be +/-0.5% to 2% of full scale.
Switches shall be vibration resistant and shall have front access to electrical connections and
adjustment nuts.
21.2.14.4 FLOW SENSING AND CONTROL SYSTEM
Flow sensing and control system to sense the flow data and display that data as both flow
rate and volume on digital indicator.
Flow sensing and control system to sense the flow data and display that data as both flow
rate and volume (in US gallons) on digital indicator.
Sensor should be Flanged Electro-magnetic type as specified below.
Digital Indicator displays for both flow rate and total volume to be provided and to be mounted
inside the panel. The digital indicator unit should be powered with external 220 volts AC
power supply and rechargeable Lithium battery. The unit can run of internal or external power
and should have automatic changeover switch which is activated during a power failure. The
battery will be automatically recharged during normal mains operation.
Flow sensing and control system should sense high flow rate (above the max. flow rate for
any combination of valves) and close the butterfly valve in filtration chamber.
21.2.14.4.1 ELECTROMAGNETIC FLOWMETER FOR TREATED SEWAGE EFFLUENT (TSE).
1. General
Flowmeter shall comprise of a flow sensor and a transmitter unit. The Transmitter and
Display unit shall be remotely mounted in a dedicated Control Panel. The flowmeter shall be
microprocessor based, modular design. Total measuring system shall be suitable for a
minimum ambient temperature of +60º C. Each meter shall be provided with the validation on
site without removing the sensor. Flowmeter processor unit must be digital to reduce noise
level. All inputs, outputs and power supply shall be galvanically isolated. Overall accuracy
should be +/- 0.5% and repeatability shall be 0.1% or +/- 0.5 mm/s (or = of reading).
Each unit shall have electromagnetic compatibility with more than 10 V/m and shall withstand
an isolation test up to 1600 V for 2 sec. min. Complete flowmeter should have good
resistance to shock and vibration. It should withstand acceleration of 2g/2h per day, 10-100
Hz.
2. Sensor
Submersible, flanged process connection of carbon steel material with zink aluminium alloy
coating rated suitably for TSE application. Metering tube shall be at least SS 304. Each
sensor should have 2 measuring electrodes, 1 empty pipe detection electrode and 1
reference electrode. It is essential to have additional empty pipe detection electrode for
proper detection of pipe condition. Electrodes material shall be stainless steel SS 316.
Sensor housing material should be powder coated die-cast aluminium. Sensor lining shall be
polyeurethane, abrasive resistant, suitable for TSE & potable water. Each sensor shall be
protected to IP 67 or IP 68 as required. If the sensor is installed in a flow chamber sensor
must be IP 68. Also, IP 68 protection shall be from the manufacturer, without using any
external kit or gell locally. The connection cable between the sensor and transmitter should
be original and fitted and potted from manufacturer. The coil cable shall be 2x0.75 mm2 PVC
braided copper shield and the signal cable shall be 3x0.38 mm2 PVC braided copper shield.
In case of non conductive pipe materials grounding rings shall be used for proper grounding
or complete meter must be isolated.
3. Transmitter.
May 2017 Page 21/37

The transmitter must be microprocessor based remote wall mounting type. It shall have
modular design and field configurable by its built-in buttons via matrix. Transmitter housing
shall be robust powder coated diecast aluminium construction with IP 67 protection. It is
essential that the transmitter is of modular design for ease of maintenance and future
expendability. In case of any fault in the transmitter one should be able to change individual
modules. The flow meter shall have 4-20mA DC (into a minimum 1,000-Ohm load) HART
and Pulse (frequency) analog output suitable and compatible with DFC SCADA system.
Relay output – 8SPDT contacts rated 8A at 250VAC.
It should have 2-line, 16-character LCD display for flow rate and totalized flow indication with
LED back lighting. Transmitter should be configurable for error messages, empty pipe
detection, flow direction etc.
The sensor and transmitter shall be connected with 10m cable from the manufacturer. The
coil cable shall be 2x0.75 mm2 PVC braided copper shield and the signal cable shall be
3x0.38 mm2 PVC braided copper shield. The meter should be able to operate at the voltage
range of 100-260 VAC, 45-65 Hz supply.
Digital indicator displays for both flow rate and total volume to be provided and to be mounted
inside the panel. The digital indicator unit should be powered with external 220 / 230 volts
AC power supply and rechargeable lithium battery, which can operate continuously for five
hours. The unit can run of internal or external power and should have automatic changeover
switch which is activated during a power failure. The battery will be automatically recharged
during normal mains operation.
Flow sensing and control system should sense high flow rate (above the max. flow rate for
any combination of valves).
4. Other Requirements.
Factory calibration shall be provided with a Flowmeter.
Installation of all equipment and components shall be in accordance with approved shop
drawings and installation instructions furnished by the equipment manufactures.
The Flow transmitter, controller and indicator to be installed remotely for easy access and
maintenance. Sunshade protection to be for all equipment if required.
Suitable connections shall be provided and allowed for future interface with a general DFC
SCADA monitoring system.
Recommended manufacturers: Krohne, Endress+Hauser, Sparling, Foxboro, Schlumberger

or equal approved.
21.2.14.4.2 FLOW SWITCHES
Flow switches are to be used to sense flow through hydrants.
Flow switches should be suitable for a maximum operating pressure of 10 barg and a
temperature range from 0°C - 60°C.
Flow switch should have a relay output which will give a signal to the programmable Logic
Controller (PLC) of the irrigation/fire pump control panel system.
Flow switch should be compatible with the pump control system.
21.2.15 SYSTEM CONTROLLING EQUIPMENT
21.2.15.1 ELECTRICAL CONTROL PANEL

May 2017 Page 21/38
ALL CONTROL PANELS SHOULD BE ASSEMBLED BY ONE OF THE FOLLOWING

APPROVED COMPANIES:
1 - BLACKBURN STERLING.
2 - SCIENTECHNIC.
3 - BIN GHALIB.
4 - ABB.
5 - DANWAY
6 – AL GHANDI SWITCHGEAR INDUSTRY
A - MAIN CONTROL PANELS
Electrical control panels for this project shall be constructed of mild steel sheet enclosures
with stainless steel 316 lock and hinges front opening door having a protection range not
lower than IP 65 according to IEC and to be class 3. The panel shall have provision for
connecting to generator.
The Control Panel For Filtration Chamber shall be Form 2 and that for pumping
station, Class 3 ( Form 4 ) and all the control panels to be fixed in GRP kiosk on
concrete base (300 mm above ground level)
The panels to be fixed above the filtration chamber/pump room as per the Engineer’s
approval and shall include the followings:
1- IRRIGATION PUMP CONTROL SYSTEM

2- FLOW METER DISPLAYS.
3- SUMP PUMP CONTROL SYSTEM
4- EXHAUST FAN CONTROL.
5- BUTTERFLY VALVES CONTROL GEAR.
6- LIGHTING SYSTEM
Panel shall have main circuit breaker for the power main and earth leakage protection. Each
power circuit should have circuit breaker, earth leakage protection and power indication lamp.
Each switch and light on the exterior of the panel shall be marked with an engraved plastic
name identifying each item. Truncking shall be used when wiring the panel. The panels shall
have serially numbered terminals for terminating all incoming and outgoing cables. Anti-
condensation heaters should provided inside the panel. The panel shall be installed above
Pump or filtration chamber. Pump or filtration system Control panels shall strictly be as per
DEWA and /or DM standard Specifications in all aspects and subject to the Engineer’s
approval.
B - CONTROL PANEL FOR FERTILIZER INJECTION UNIT
Same as above to accommodate the control system and injection pump switch gear.
21.2.15.2 IRRIGATION CONTROLLERS
The Irrigation controllers shall be solid state type and shall have 220 Volts power input and
26.5 Volts, 50 cycles.
If the input Voltage to the controller is other than 220 Volts AC, the Contractor must ensure
continuous regular Voltage to controllers equivalent to the input Voltage marked out on the
controllers. If Voltage fluctuations are noted, controllers must be equipped with automatic
voltage regulations.
May 2017 Page 21/39
The controllers shall have 24 stations as mentioned on drawings. The controller should be
weatherproof lockable cabinet with minimum one meter high stainless steel pedestal. The
pedestal to fixed on proper concrete base, 300 mm above ground level. All irrigation
Controller(s) shall be installed in GRP Kiosk enclosure.
The two way signal cables from the controllers shall be laid up to the Main electric control
panel for future use. The power supply for all Controllers on a pumping station / filtration
chamber should be taken from single source.
Power supply to the controllers should be by Armoured cables. No conduit is required for
these armoured power cables. Contractor to provide calculations for cable sizing for the
Engineer's approval. Size of the power cables should not be less than 2.5mm2 X 4 core.
Cables laid under ground should be tested in accordance to IEC standards and DEWA's
standards for insulation resistance, continuity etc. in presence of DM and the Engineer before
the backfilling of the cable trenches
The contractor has to check the number of electric valves connected to each station, if
number exceeds the manufacturer recommendation a multi-station relay has to be included
with the corresponding controller. Lightening protection shall be provided for all controllers.
21.2.15.3 FILTER CONTROLLER
Allow cascade flushing of filters if differential pressure exceeds 0.30 bar, or on command
from central controller. Flush time to be adjustable. Control panel to be provided with a flush
counter (resetable) and a selector switch to allow manual flushing, and/or cancelling each
automatic function.
Controller to be provided with circuits to flow switch mounted in the flush lines to detect any
flow of water after the flushing cycle has ceased, and linked to the alarm circuit, time delay
2.00 minutes. The controller will be mounted inside the electric control panel.
21.2.16 EXHAUST FAN
Extra heavy duty industrial type Aluminium body exhaust fan size 18" to be fixed in the
Pump/filtration chambers, minimum three nos. of 8” dia GRP vent pipes to be fixed in each
Pump/filtration chamber for circulation of the air in the chambers.
21.2.17 VALVE CHAMBER COVERS
The isolation valves shall be in R.C.C. chambers as shown in the detail drawings.
The Contractor has to propose a design for chambers to suit the site conditions. The covers
shall be double triangular heavy-duty ductile iron cover with clear opening 600x900 mm,
bitumen epoxy coated. The cover should be loosely coupled by stainless steel bolts and nuts.
Covers to be painted green and should as per DM standard. The word of "IRRIGATION" in
English and Arabic should be casted on the covers.
Valve chambers with depth more than 1.5 meters shall be provided with a heavy duty
Aluminium ladder.
21.2.18 FILTRATION CHAMBER
Chamber is required for filters arrangement flow sensors and Fertilizer injection
System.
The filtration chambers shall be in reinforced cement concrete (with Proper finishing including
painting and lights) as per detailed drawings and shall be as per DM general specifications.
May 2017 Page 21/40

The access cover for filtration chamber shall be minimum 1200x1400mm overall in two
pieces of Heavy duty aluminum checkered plate with stiffeners and lifting handles and
painted green. The cover should be lockable and easy to open and should be tight to prevent
dirt or soil into the chamber. The contractor has to propose a design for the chamber to suit
the site condition.
The filtration chambers shall be provided with two spare electrical sockets (Capacity 15 kW
each) for future use.
Contractor to provide GRP air vents as shown on the drawings
There should be two covers for as shown on drawings.
Flushing pipe line from Filters and discharge line of sump Pump to be ended separately ten
meters away of the chamber in 2m x 2m x 3m soak pit filled with gravel or to be connected to
the nearest storm water system as per Engineer’s approval
Soak away shall have heavy duty ductile iron cover 600x900mm.
Monitoring facility should be provided to warn against continuous flushing.
THE CONTRACTOR MUST PROVIDE THE ENGINEER WITH STRUCTURAL,

MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL SHOP DRAWINGS FOR APPROVAL. THESE
DRAWINGS MUST BE PRESENTED FOR APPROVAL UPON AWARD OF CONTRACT.
All the chambers shall be in reinforced concrete to the approval of Engineer.
21.2.19 CHAMBER IDENTIFICATION PLATE
Chamber Identification plate is to be made to sizes shown on drawing and shall be of

"Admiralty Brass" BS Code No.CZ III BS 2871. The plate to be 5 mm thick with two lags 150
mm long 20 mm wide by 5 mm thick welded at the back. The plate is to have engraving 2 mm
deep as shown on the drawings for each relevant chamber.
21.2.20 ELECTRICAL CONTROL PANEL
The electrical control panel shall be constructed of mild steel sheet enclosures with stainless
steel hinges and lock front opening door having a protection range not lower than IP 55
according to IEC and to be class 3. The panel shall have provision for connecting to
generator.
21.2.21 FILTRATION CHAMBER LIGHTING
The Contractor should provide single phase and three phase waterproof power sockets (one
each), and three fluorescent light for filtration chamber.
21.2.22 FERTILIZER INJECTION UNIT
The fertilizer/chemical injection unit shall comprise of 1000 litre rigid polypropylene make tank
(2 Nos.) with reinforced ribs mounted on a pedestal and a suitable dosing pump complete
with valves and fittings, filters and connecting pipes.
The elevated make up tank shall have level marks molded into the side of the tank. A second
outlet complete with stop-cock shall be provided in bottom of tank for draining and washing
May 2017 Page 21/41

out. An agitator shall be provided to ensure that there is no separation of liquids. The agitator
unit shall be removable to allow access for cleaning the tank.
The dosing pump shall be constructed of corrosion resistant material, close coupled to a
suitable splash proof electric motor. The unit shall have an operating head of 70m over the
full flow range. The injection rate shall be set manually to required flow.
The Fertilizer tank should be fixed to ground using stainless steel straps and nut/bolts
(grade 316) which will keep the tank at its place in case of flooding.
21.2.23 DUCTING
uPVC ducts shall be class B to BS3506. Asbestos cement ducts shall be class 12, to ISO-
R-160 made with sulfate resistant cement bitumen coated from outside and shall be pressure
tested.
Duct markers shall be used and should be aluminium and shall clearly indicated the name in
Arabic and English: IRR ".
21.3 IRRIGATION SYSTEM, EXECUTION
21.3.1 EXCAVATION AND BACK-FILLING
Prior to trenching all services crossing or running close to the line of the trench shall be
identified and exposed. In addition the line of the trench shall be swept using an approved
detection device, capable of detecting both live and 'dead' cables.
Trenches shall be made as narrow as practicable, but not less than the pipe diameter plus
300mm, and shall provide sufficient room for laying jointing and testing. The width of the
trench at the crown of the pipe shall not exceed the pipe diameter plus 600mm. Sheeting,
bracing and shoring shall be used to provide for the safety of all personnel for all trenches.
The trench bottom shall be composed of stable uniform sand with no protuberances that
might cause point loading of the pipe. The trench formation shall be trimmed to an even
finish which will provide continuous support for the pipe. Additional excavation shall be
carried out at the position of the pipe socket to ensure proper joint assembly and pipe
support.
If the existing formation is unsuitable for direct laying, the pipes shall be laid on a bed of
imported sand 100 mm thick (minimum). This sand may be sourced from sieved excavated
material, but should not contain any particles larger than 5 mm, and should have good self
compacting properties.
De-watering shall be provided to remove any surface or ground water entering the
excavations. Ground water level shall be maintained at least 100 mm below the bottom of
each excavation.
The trench should not be excavated more than 3 days production rate in front of pipe laying.
Pipes shall be center loaded leaving joints exposed within three days of laying. Initial back-fill
shall be by hand in 300 mm lifts, and carried out in such a manner as to ensure adequate
support under the pipe and distributed evenly to ensure there are no voids under or to the
side of the pipe.
May 2017 Page 21/42

Back-fill material shall be sand and shall be compacted by water tamping once the level of
back-fill reaches the crown of the pipe.
For pipe sizes 4" ( dia ) and above , back-fill material shall be deposited in 300 mm lifts in
general areas and compacted to relative degree of compaction of 95% ( by approved method
)and tested by large pouring method. In paved areas layers shall be 150 mm and back-fill
shall be compacted layer by layer to reach relative degree of compaction of 95% to DM
roads department approval. Mechanical compactors shall not be used until there is a
minimum of 300 mm above the crown of the pipe.
Back-fill material shall be sand and shall not contain any particles larger than 25 mm for the
first 100 mm above the pipe; thereafter back-fill material shall contain no particles larger than
50 mm.
Whenever ambient temperatures exceed 35 degrees centigrade, center loading for PVC
pipes greater than 3" shall only be carried out in the early morning, or shall alternatively be
preceded by cooling of the pipe string by application of water.
For pipe sizes of 3" and below compaction as mentioned is not required.
21.3.2 PVC PIPE INSTALLATIONS
PVC pipes shall be stored on site in a covered pipe store. Pipe stacks shall not be greater
than seven layers or two meters high. Pipes shall be shielded from the sun at all times and
shall be placed on a sand bed, or on supports at least 75 mm wide and placed not greater
than 1.50 m apart; side supports shall be similarly constructed and placed not greater than
3.00 m apart. The pipe store shall allow for circulation of air. Rubber sealing rings shall be
stored inside closed boxes in a shaded place, and shall on no account be exposed to sunlight
for more than a few hours.
Pipes shall be transported on the site on a flatbed trailer, and should never be dropped or
dragged along the ground.
Spigot ends of all pipe shall be chamfered to a depth of half the wall thickness at an angle of
15 degree. Pipes cut on site should be cut square to the pipe axis with a fine toothed saw. All
swarf and burrs should be removed from the pipe prior to assembly of joints. Pipe cutters
may be used for 1" pipe. Spigot insertion depth shall be measured and marked on all pipe
larger than 3" using indelible ink to allow checking at a later date.
Ring joints shall be made using an approved non ionic lubricant compatible with the sealing
ring. Pipes sized up to 8" may be jointed using a crowbar and a timber protection piece,
joints larger than 8" shall be assembled using a clamped lever device. Before back-filling
joints shall be checked to ensure that the spigot is inserted to at least 90% of the socket
depth in all circumstance.
Solvent welding shall be carried out by experienced fitters who fully understand the
technique, and have successfully made a solvent weld joint in the presence of, and to the
approval of the Engineer. Helpers brought up on site may only be allowed to make solvent
joints after inspection of their technique by the Engineer.
Solvent welded joints made on pipe 3" and above shall be preceded by lightly sanding both
surfaces to be jointed using a medium glass paper or clean emery cloth. Solvent "cleaner"
shall be applied to all mating surfaces using a dauber or brush (application using rags will not
be allowed). After ensuring that mating surfaces are clean and dry solvent cement shall be
applied in sufficient quantities to ensure bonding, but not in excessive quantities that will
leave appreciable residues inside the pipe.
Brush size shall be 3/8" round for 1" pipe, 1" flat for 1-1/2" pipe and 2" flat for larger pipes.
Solvent cement should be applied by two people simultaneously for pipe 3" and above.
Immediately after application of solvent cement pipes shall be pushed together in a smooth
continue motion, that ensures that the spigot is at least 90% inserted into the socket, the joint
May 2017 Page 21/43
shall be held for a minimum of 20 seconds after insertion, and then surplus cement shall be
cleaned from the outside of the pipe using a rag or paper. Solvent cement and cleaner shall
be provided in tins with brush or dauber fixed to the lid of the tin. The lids shall be firmly
closed at all times except when the joint is being made. Any tins of solvent cement that
become viscous or hardens shall be disregarded.
On no account shall brushes on which solvent cement has hardened be used for making
joints. All fitters involved in solvent cement jointing shall be provided with safety gloves that
prevent solvent touching the skin, gloves shall be kept in good condition and shall be
replaced periodically.
Jointing shall not be carried out in windy conditions (wind speeds greater than 18 km/hour).
All lines shall be capped at the end of the days work.
uPVC mains with sizes 8" and above shall have minimum cover of of 1.2 mete over the top
of the pipe. Mainline sizes 6" and below should have minimum cover of 1.0 meter. Pipes
should be laid in such a way it should have minimum clear space as per DM standards &
requirements from other services and trees.
Please note that uPVC lateral lines should have minimum cover of 60 cm over the crown of
the pipe. laterals should be laid in such a way it should have minimum clear space as per DM
standards & requirements from other services.
Minimum distance of uPVC Lateral lines for drip and bubblers system from the centre
line of trees shall be as follows.
Palm Trees -------------------------------------------------------2.0 metre.
Trees----------------------------------------------------------------1.5 metre.
Shrubs------------------------------------------------------------- 1.0 metre.
21.3.3 DRIP LINE PIPE
Drip line pipe shall be installed above ground as shown on the drawings and shall be
anchored to the ground with staple stake at every 10m.
21.3.4 VALVES
Butterfly valves, Gate valves, air valves and solenoid valves shall be installed as shown on
the drawings. Installation shall be neat tidy. Valve boxes shall be installed level and aligned
with the pavement.
Cover of the valve chambers and valve boxes shall be level and aligned with pavement as
instructed by the Engineer.
21.3.5 IRRIGATION EQUIPMENT
Equipment shall generally be installed to achieve optimal irrigation efficiency and to

accommodate the requirements of the landscaping. All irrigation equipment such as spray
heads and emitters shall be installed only after all the laterals and risers are flushed
thoroughly. The half circle spray heads should be installed at least 50 cm away from
kerb stone.
21.3.6 IRRIGATION CONTROL EQUIPMENT
The Contractor has to follow strictly the instruction of the suppliers and provide the Engineer
with all technical information related to this equipment.
21.3.7 TESTING
May 2017 Page 21/44
21.3.7.1 PIPELINE PRESSURE TEST
The length of test section shall be maximum 500 m or as directed by the Irrigation Engineer.
The pipe length to be tested may be blanked off using a blank iron or steel flange previously
drilled and tapped for test equipment connection and strutted as necessary against end
thrust. The blank flange may be attached to the pipeline by a V.J. flange adopter or similar
fitting.
Testing should not be carried out against closed valves. All charging and testing should
preferably be carried out from lowest point of the under test section and all testing equipment
should be located at this point.
The pressure gauge also should be located at the lowest point or adjustment must be made
for the level of the pressure gauge relative to the pipes location.
Prior to testing, care should be taken to ensure that all anchor blocks have attained adequate
maturity and that any solvent welded joints included in the pipe system have developed full
strength. Correct support and anchorage of any above ground sections of the pipeline is also
necessary. Underground pipelines should be back-filled, taking particular care to consolidate
around lengths which may have been deflected to negotiate curves.
All joints should be left exposed until testing is completed.
The main pipe should be charged slowly, preferably from the lowest point with any air cock in
the open position. They should be closed in sequence from the lowest point only when water
visibly free from aeration is being discharged through them.
Satisfactorily charged, the main should be allowed to stand overnight to allow any residual air
to settle-out. Reventing is then necessary and any water deficiency should be made-up.
Pressure testing can then begin by pumping slowly until it reaches to 9 bar. This pressure
shall be kept for 24 hours.
A permissible water loss of 3 liters per 1000m length per 25 mm nominal bore per 24 hours
shall be considered reasonable for PVC pipe.
For AC pipes the pressure test should be according the manufacturer's recommendation.
21.3.7.2 PAINTING
Dry film thickness (DFT) of all painted valves and spool pieces shall be measured on delivery
to site. DFT shall be the average of no less than three measurements, with no one
measurement less than 75% of nominal average DFT. Holiday tests shall be carried out on
internal and external surfaces on delivery, and also on external surfaces prior to back filling.
21.3.8 ROAD CROSSINGS
All crossings across major roads/dual carriageways and U-turns shall be either
through ducts or no dig method.
Where it is necessary to cross roads in order to complete the work, the Contractor should first
obtain N.O.C. from service companies and submit where appropriate for road cutting to DM's
road Department. The Contractor should follow strictly DM's regulations. Ducts to laid at least
100 cm below tarmac surface.
Road cutting will only be permitted if it can be proved that all forms of non destruptive method
of crossing is possible. In the event of road cutting is permitted, the reinstatement of wearing
course shall be extended to 15m from each side of the disturbed edge of trench.
May 2017 Page 21/45

Traffic diversions shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements and
approval of Engineer, Roads & Transport Authority Roads Department & Dubai Traffic
Police. If trench is left open overnight, proper lights & caution lights shall be provided.
Trenches to be back filled with fine gravel around ducts to minimum depth of 50 cm.
Remaining depth to be back filled with 15 cm thick layers of Subkha or sub grade material
with minimum 30% CBR properly compacted & tested by approved Independent Laboratory.
Asphalt re-instatement shall be as specified by the Municipality Roads Department. Sketches

on traffic diversion shall be provided including road signs to be used and distances between
such signs.
Only a RTA Roads Department approved sub-Contractor shall be permitted to carry out Road
reinstatement works (sub-base, base, wet-mix, asphalt, road marking etc.) and non
destruptive crossing works such as the thrust boring, directional drilling etc.
All ducts should be at least 50 mm larger than pipe size.
Road crossings for the main and lateral pipes or cables should be carried out preferably by
horizontal drilling. Wherever it becomes impossible to drill because of existing services or any
other reasons acceptable by Irrigation Engineer, the road cutting shall be done as specified
above.
Any tiled area damaged during construction, drilling or road cutting should be reinstated.
Separate ducts shall be used for irrigation pipes, electrical cables, control wires and maxi-
com signal wire.
21.3.9 THRUST BLOCKS
At each bend, diversion or at the end of pipeline, a thrust block shall be provided. Heavy duty
polyethylene sheet shall be used to wrap the pipe at the point of contact between pipeline
fittings and the thrust block. Design of the thrust blocks shall be done by the Contractor and
to be approved by the Engineer.
21.3.10 ELECTRICAL CODES
All the electrical installations shall operate at a system voltage of 380 volts AC three phase
four wire 50 cycles.
The entire works shall be carried out in strict accordance with this specification and
instruction as issued by the Dubai Electricity and Water Authority.
21.3.11 ELECTRICAL TESTS
Each electrical equipment, cable and complete system shall be thoroughly inspected and
tested before finally placing in service under the full responsibility of the Contractor. All tests
shall be made in compliance with respective regulations, recommendations and standards.
Any modifications or repairs deemed necessary upon completion of the tests shall be
executed at the Contractor's expenses. Further tests shall be carried out on any modified or
repaired equipment until it is certified trouble free and acceptable for its intended service. All
testing shall be demonstrated to the Engineer in a manner to be agreed later.
21.3.12 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
All electrical equipment under these contract documents shall have passed adequate routine
May 2017 Page 21/46
factory tests. Field tests shall be made by qualified personnel, approved by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall furnish all apparatus, material, labour and facilities for performing the
required tests. Unless otherwise specified the individual electrical equipment shall undergo
the following tests in accordance with the IEC recommendations or other approved
standards.
In Workshop:
- High voltage test
- Check on mechanical function
- Pre-test of functional sequences
At Site:
- Visual inspection
- Insulation test (megger test)
- Check of functional sequences
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer acceptance test certificates of all tests carried out
in his workshop including all measuring data and subsequent evaluation.
The following tests are to be carried out for all cables as a minimum:
- Resistance measurements
- Insulation test with specified AC power frequency test voltage
- Insulation resistance measurement of every individual cable length at site
- Electrical continuity test for all controls.
The following test shall be carried out upon completion of the earthing system:
- Measurement of the conductance of the earthing wires

- Measurement of the intermediate resistance of the earthing electrodes
The Contractor shall provide at his expense the necessary qualified personnel and measuring
instruments of the above measurements.
21.3.13 CONTROL PANEL INSTALLATIONS
Panels shall be installed onto concrete bases (300mm above ground level). Control wire shall
be color coded, and provided with tags. Control cable shall be bundles and tied with a plastic
cable tie at least every 5 meters, installation of cable bundles in conduit shall be carried out in
such a way as to preclude the possibility of stretching the cable, or damaging the insulation.
All cable splices shall be waterproof, and made inside valve or conduit boxes, leaving at least
one meter of spare cable neatly coiled at each joint, and bend.
Panels shall be individually earthed by an approved copper clad grounding rod minimum
length 15 mm x 3 meter rod driven down into the water table and connected to the controller
by a brass clamp and a 4 mm2 grounding wire as per DEWA and engineer approval.
All stages of the control system installation shall be supervised by a factory-trained engineer,
recommended by the manufacturer who has previously been in charge of all aspects of
installation of a similar control system and approved by the engineer.
21.3.14 CONTROLLER INSTALLATIONS
The field satellite controllers shall be installed near the Pump/Filtration Chamber. Controller
shall be installed on the concrete bases (300mm above ground level) and shall be in pedestal
enclosure as specified, control wire shall be color coded, and provided with tags.
May 2017 Page 21/47

Control cable shall be bundles and tied with a plastic cable tie at least every 5 meters,
installation of cable bundles in conduit shall be carried out in such a way as to preclude the
possibility of stretching the cable, or damaging the insulation.
All cable splices shall be waterproof, and made inside valve or conduit boxes, leaving at least
one meter of spare cable neatly coiled at each joint, and bend.
Controllers shall be individually earthed by an approved copper clad grounding rod minimum
length 15 mm x 3 meter rod driven down into the water table and connected to the controller
by a brass clamp and a 4 mm2 grounding wire. Decoders, encoders, and terminators shall
be installed in plastic valve boxes, and their function and reference number shall be clearly
indicated in indelible ink.
21.4 AUTOMATIC IRRIGATION SYSTEM, COMMISSIONING
21.4.1 FLUSHING
See section 8.3.
21.4.2 FIELDWORK
Commissioning of fieldwork and equipment shall include all works required to bring the
system into service, and to make sure that it is operating efficiently, and shall include but not
be limited by the following:-
1. Adjust valve outlet pressure +/- 10% of nominal.
2. Measure head loss from first to last sprayer in up to 50 different cases.
3. Adjust sprayer to ensure spray onto pavement and paths is minimized. Replacing any
spray nozzles that have uPVC burrs, or sand lodged inside. Adjust spray patterns to
ensure optimal coverage.
4. Ensure that all sprayers and valve boxes are flush with the finish grade.
5. Replacing any clogged or partially clogged emitters(delivering less than 50% of nominal
flow) or any emitter overflowing by more than 50% (squirting). Carrying out emission
uniformity test involving at least 40 emitters on up to 10 valves, as directed by the
Engineer.
6. Controllers shall be adjusted to give an optimal flow regime, generally in accordance with
the drawings and as instructed by the Engineer. Valves sequence may be modified to
ensure that valves operate in a logical sequence to facilitate maintenance operations.
7. Irrigation cycles for sprinklers and sprayers should be programmed during night time and
early morning (from 12 mid night up to 5 am).
A full cycle shall be run four times, and total system flow rates shall be recorded, and stations
shall be adjusted in accordance with the instructions of the Engineer, base on the results of
these trials.
Trials shall only be carried out after all valve's pressure have been adjusted. During these
trials main line head losses shall be verified by installing pressure recorder at the start and
the end of the main line.
21.4.3 IRRIGATION CONTROL SYSTEM
May 2017 Page 21/48

Three standard irrigation schedules shall be developed in accordance with the requirements
of the Engineer, and tested per controller schedule as above. Each particular function of the
system shall be demonstrated in accordance with an approved commissioning procedure
developed by the Contractor.
21.4.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Operational and maintenance manuals shall be prepared and submitted for approval in draft
form prior to commencement of commissioning. Manuals shall contain comprehensive
operational schedules, recommended spare parts list, manufacturers' operating data,
Catalogues and exploded parts diagrams where applicable for the entire irrigation scheme.
The materials used for the system shall be listed in the manual.
Manuals shall be revised in accordance with Engineers instructions, and reflect, and record
the results of the commissioning procedures described above. Three bound copies of the
manual shall be delivered to the Engineer prior to the date of substantial completion
certificate issuing.
21.4.5 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
The Contractor must submit As-Built drawings for all works included in this contract.
Completion certificate will not be issued unless the contractor submits the As-Built drawings.
Three complete set of "As Built" drawings along with a negative and all diskettes should be
submitted before handing over of the project.
21.5 IRRIGATION SYSTEM, CIVIL WORKS
The civil works of the project shall be carried out by Main contractor or an approved
sub-contractor as per general specifications of Dubai Municipality and subject to
approval of the Engineer.
21.5.1 EARTHWORK AND EXCAVATION
21.5.1.1 PRE-EXCAVATION
a) Excavation site shall be surrounded by new painted fence of corrugated galvanized or

plywood sheets. Fence sides shall be properly supported, such supports shall not project
outside the site.
b) Contractor shall check with all the concerned Service Authorities for any existing buried
plants inside the excavation site. Contractor shall be responsible for any damages of
service plants caused by excavation.
c) Ground levels shall be agreed at suitable intervals with the Engineer.
d) Top soil and other surfacing materials shall be stopped and stored separately from the
subsoil. Subsequent spreading of top soil shall be as directed on site.
21.5.1.2 All excavated material shall be deposited so that it will cause as little damage and
inconvenience as possible. Different classes of material shall be handled and deposited
separately.
21.5.1.3 Excavated material for use as back-fill shall be as approved, and shall be kept in a suitable
safe place and surrounded by a suitable fence as directed by the Engineer.
21.5.1.4 Where ordered if necessary for reasons of limited access or any other reason, excavation
shall be carried by hand.
May 2017 Page 21/49

21.5.1.5 All excavation shall be kept free of water. In addition, precautions shall be taken to prevent
floatation of partly built structures, completed structures to be filled on commissioning of the
works and unback-filled pipelines. All necessary precautions shall be taken to prevent any
adjacent ground from being adversely affected by loss of fines through any dewatering
process.
21.5.1.6 The sides and or the bottom of excavation shall be adequately supported.
21.5.1.7 Back-filling shall be carried using selected excavated materials and in layers not greater than
150 mm thick (compacted thickness) and compacted such that throughout each layer placed
the dry density is not less than 95% of the site dry density of the soil prior to excavation.
Back-filling shall be tested to ensure the specified compaction.
21.5.1.8 All surplus material shall be either spread on site or shall be removed and disposed off the
approved Municipality tips, immediately after excavation as directed by the Engineer.
21.5.1.9 In case of extra excavation deeper than the level required by the Engineer, Contractor shall
fill the same with selected well-compacted material or plain concrete as directed by the
Engineer.
21.5.1.10 Excavation to the required level shall be carried out by the contractor as part of the contract
regardless of the kind of soil strata or rock to be excavated.
21.5.1.11 Contractor shall bear the responsibilities and consequences of any damage caused by the
excavation to the adjacent structures, roads or plants.
21.5.1.12 Contractor shall take all the necessary precautions at the excavated sites to protect his own
staff, Engineer's representative, site visitors, pedestrians, traffic movement by supporting
excavation sides, providing proper guard rails fences, cones, warning tapes and traffic signs,
and by keeping 24 hrs. guard attendance to all excavated locations.
Contractor shall bear all the legal responsibilities in case of accidents caused by lack of
safety precautions.
21.5.2 CONCRETE
21.5.2.1 GENERAL
a) All materials forming the concrete mix shall be approved by the Engineer.
b) Complete detailed design of all the reinforced concrete structures shown on drawings
shall be carried out by the Contractor following the relevant British Standard. Drawings
and calculation shall be submitted to the Engineer and subject to his approval. However,
it shall be understood that the Engineer's approval of the design and calculation does not
release the Contractor from his responsibility in case of any structural failure due to
design faults.
c) The Contractor may use premixed concrete from an approved source.
d) Concrete used shall conform to the following:
GRADE
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
B C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NOMINAL MAX. 20 20
May 2017 Page 21/50
AGGREGATE SIZE mm
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3
CEMENT CONTENT kg/m of
FINISHED CONCRETE
MINIMUM 370 300
MAXIMUM 400 400
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MAX. WATER CEMENT RATIO 0.45 0.45
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2
MIN. MEAN CUBE STRENGTH N/mm 35 25
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
FINE AGG./TOTAL AGG.% MAX. 35 35
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
e) Immediately following the land excavation to formation level for floor where shown on the
drawing or as ordered by the Engineer, a sealing coat of 75 mm minimum thickness of
concrete grade "c" shall be placed on polyethylene sheet (1000 gauges) placed on the
surface of the formation a carefully spade finished to an even surface floors shall be laid
on the sealing coat as soon as may be practicable and if required by the Engineer, the
sealing coat shall be kept thoroughly damp by watering.
f) Unless tolerances for particular surfaces are specifically shown on drawings, they shall
be as follows:
1) FLOORS: The level of the surface at any point shall be plus or minus 5 mm of the level
desired from drawings.
2) WALLS: The position of the face at any point shall be within 10 mm of its position desired
from the drawings. There shall be no irregularity exceeding 3 mm in 3 meter template.
3) CURVED SURFACES: Shall be within plus or minus 2 mm of the level desired from the
drawings.
g) Concrete shall not be placed when the sheds temperature exceeds 40 degrees C.
The temperature of batched concrete at time of placing shall not exceed 30 degrees C.
21.5.2.2 MATERIALS
a) AGGREGATES:
Coarse aggregate shall consist of crushed stones free from salt and clay or any other
materials harmful to the concrete such as organic, coal, mica, gypsum and fines. In any case
the percentage of fines shall not exceed 1% of the dry weight.
Fine aggregate shall consist of Natural Sand with hard grains of any other similar inert
material. Sand shall be free from organic, salts, clay, mica and fossils. It shall also be sieved
and washed.
Percentage of Sulphate and Chloride in aggregates shall not exceed the figures listed in the
following table:
MATERIALS MAX. % OF DRY WEIGHT
Sulfate as SO3 0.04 %
Chloride as Na Cl 0.01 %
Chloride as Cl 0.06 %
May 2017 Page 21/51
Aggregates shall be well graded to the Engineer's approval.
b) CEMENT:
Cement shall be supplied from approved factories in closed bags. In case of bulk cement
supply, it shall be delivered using special containers for the same purpose. Cement shall
always be accompanied with its origin certificate showing its test results and date of
manufacture.
When stored on site, cement shall be kept in a dry place raised above the floor and not
touching the walls of the store. It shall not be allowed to use the cement which is more than 4
months old, nor that which has hardened in the form of grains regardless of its age.
Ordinary Portland Cement shall be used for all concrete works unless it is otherwise specified
in any of the contract documents.
c) WATER:
Water used for the concrete mix and aggregate washing and cleaning of formwork and curing
of casted concrete shall be a potable water. In any case it shall comply with the following
conditions:
1) Should be clean and free from oil, organic, metals, acids and bases.
2) Should not contain more than 600 mg/l of Chlorides or 500 mg/l of Sodium Sulphate.
3) PH should be between (7-9).
4) Should not contain more than 0.25% by weight of suspended solids.
In general, mixing water shall not contain any harmful materials which is sufficient to change
the concrete setting time by more than 25% or to decrease the concrete compressive
strength by more than 20% of that which is made of distilled water.
d) ADMIXTURES:
Concrete admixture shall be used in case it is specified in any of the contract documents. In
case the Contractor requires to use any of them (such as plasticizer and retarders), it shall be
subject to the Engineer's approval who might require a modified concrete mix design to suite
the used admixture.
e) REINFORCING STEEL:
Reinforcement shall be epoxy coated and free from rust or other extraneous matters. They
shall be cut and placed as detailed in the drawings and as approved by the Engineer.
21.5.3 CONCRETE MIXING
Concrete shall be mechanically mixed until getting a homogeneous viscosity and color mix.
Mixing time shall not be less than two minutes or twenty revolutions of the mixing machine or
which ever is greater. Mixing time is considered to start when all the contents of the concrete
mix including the mixing water are loaded inside the mixer. Concrete mix unloading shall be
carried out in such a way that will not cause separation of the mix contents.
21.5.4 CONCRETE TESTING
The Contractor shall make the standard concrete cube and test them as directed by the
engineer for all the structural concrete elements.
May 2017 Page 21/52

Number of cubes and method of their making and testing shall comply with the relevant
British Standard.
21.5.5 TRANSPORTATION
In case of pre-mixed concrete, the concrete shall only be transported to the casting site, using
special containers equipped for the same purpose to prevent the separation of the materials
forming the concrete mix.
21.5.6 CASTING OF THE CONCRETE
Concrete casting shall always be subject to the written approval of the Engineer on the
reinforcing steel and suitability of the concrete mold and formwork and supports.
Reinforcement and mold shall be sprayed with water prior to casting. It shall not be allowed
to cast the concrete which was mixed before more than 30 minutes unless plasticizing agents
are used, in such cases the time allowance shall be decided by the Engineer.
21.5.7 CONCRETE COMPACTION
All concrete works shall be compacted during casting using mechanical vibrator. Care shall
be taken so that the vibrator's rod does not touch the reinforcements or the mold. In any
case, the casted concrete which has started setting should not be distributed as a result of
casting or working nearby.
21.5.8 CURING OF THE CONCRETE
Exposed concrete surfaces shall be completely covered with polyethylene sheeting

immediately after placing and within two or three hours this shall be quickly replaced by wet
hessian covered with polyethylene. The hessians shall be wet damp continuously using
water for a period of at least 7 days or such period as the Engineer may direct. Approved
curing compounds may be applied earlier to supplement use of wet hessian and
polyethylene.
21.5.9 MOVEMENT AND CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
21.5.9.1 Movement joints or construction joints in concrete shall be provided as directed by the
Engineer.
21.5.9.2 Water Bars shall be manufactured of extruded PVC or of nitrile rubber. They shall be of the
types and general shape indicated on the drawings and shall have the minimum
characteristics:
3
DENSITY: 1300 kg/m
TENSILE STRENGTH (25 degree C): 13.7 N/mm2
ELONGATION AT BREAK (25 degree C): 285%
WEB THICKNESS: 10 mm
DIMENSION OF CENTRAL BULB: 18 mm
Water bars shall not be displaced during the placing of concrete which shall be fully
compacted around them. Jointing of water bars shall normally be carried out by clamping and
welding or adhesion and shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the
manufacturer. Water bars shall be arranged so that there is a minimum distance of 25 mm
from the water bars to the reinforcement.
21.5.9.3 Joint fillers shall be utilized as directed by the Engineer.

May 2017 Page 21/53
21.5.10 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE WORKS
21.5.10.1 Unless tolerances for particular surfaces are specifically shown on drawings, they shall be as
follows:
FLOORS: The level of the surface at any point shall be plus or minus 5 mm of the level
desired from drawings.
WALLS: The position of the face at any point shall be within 10 mm of its position desired
from the drawings. There shall be no irregularity exceed 3 mm in to 3 m template.
CURVED SURFACES: Shall be within plus or minus 2 mm of the level desired from the
drawings.
21.5.10.2 As directed by the Engineer, contractor shall repair or demolish and re-build the concrete
works which had any concrete quality or dimension or reinforcement or segregation defects,
or any other defects that the Engineer might decide they cause the concrete to be
unsatisfactory to its required purpose. In case of repair, its method and results shall be
subject to the Engineer's approval.
21.5.10.3 Where required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall fill cracks which have developed in
concrete structures using an approved resin based sealing compound. Method of injection
may include pressurized injection techniques.
21.5.11 FORM WORK AND SUPPORTS
21.5.11.1 Formwork shall be designed and constructed so that the concrete can be placed and
compacted without disturbing or displacing the reinforcement. It shall be firmly supported,
braced, guyed or tied back so that it is stable against vertical and horizontal formwork.
Internal spacers and ties shall be of approved types that do not produce holes completely
through the concrete. Joints in the formwork should be close fitting to prevent leakage.
The arrangement shall allow for removal of formwork from the sides and members without
disturbing soffit formwork. Rough faced formwork may be used for surfaces which are
normally never exposed to view.
Formwork shall be designed so that splays, fillets, chamfers and projection are cast as the
work proceeds. Unless specifically deleted all external angles on exposed concrete shall
have a 25mm x 25mm chamfer.
Before placing concrete all extraneous material shall be removed from the interior of the
formwork and the faces in contact with the concrete shall be wetted or treated with a non-
staining composition to prevent adhesion.
Concrete shall be placed in the formwork only after examination and approval of the formwork
by the Engineer.
21.5.11.2 Formwork shall not be struck until the structure has attained sufficient strength and in no case
less than the period given below:
BEAM SIDES, WALL, COLUMNS: 2 days

SOFFITS TO SLABS OR BEAMS
(props left under): 5 days
PROPS TO SLABS OR BEAMS: 10-14 days
May 2017 Page 21/54

21.5.11.3 CONCRETE SPACERS AND COVERING BLOCKS The minimum possible number of
concrete spacers and covering blocks which provides the concrete covers for the reinforcing
steel, shall be made of concrete which has same compressive strength of that to be casted.
21.6 SWEET SOIL FILLING, CONTOURING AND PLANTATION (NOT APPLICABLE)
21.6.1 SWEET SOIL FILLING.
For the planting areas, Contractor shall clear all rubbish and remove the existing topsoil and
dispose off as directed and prepare the area to receive sweet soil, in such a way that it will
below 60 cm than the proposed final level of landscape/existing and proposed footpath The
Contractor has to refer to the landscaping drawings. Levelling and contouring shall be done as
per the Landscape drawings and to the approval of the Engineer. The minimum acceptable
depth of sweet soil filling in proposed planting area is 50 CM. Sweet soil levels should be10
cm below the existing/proposed foothpaths and chamber levels
Contractor will remain responsible for maintaining the levels of sweet soil against wind erosion
till the final hand over of the project.
Contractor to make tree pits and fill them with fresh sweet soil. The size of tree pits to be as
follows:
Pits for Date Palms: 2m X 2m X 2m

Pits for Ornamental trees: 1.5m X 1.5m X1.5m
Pits for shrubs: 1m X 1m X 1m
THE EXISTING SWEET SOIL SHOULD NOT BE USED FOR FILLING THE TOP 50 CM
LAYER AND TREE PITS.
21.6.2 CONTOURING
The Contractor has to level the landscaped areas and bring it to the contours as shown in the
landscaping drawings. Contractor to make arrangements to prevent the loss/ drifting of soil
due to wind. Contractor will be responsible for maintaining the levels and contours of the
sweet soil till the Final Handing over of the project.
21.6.3 GRAVEL
21.6.3.1 WHITE GRAVEL
Gravel shall be white to light beige crushed gravel (to Engineer’s approval) size 10 - 20mm to
fill the areas as shown on the landscape drawings. The Depth of gravel mulch shall be at least
10 cm.
21.6.3.2 WADI GRAVEL
Wadi gravel shall be naturally occurring water rounded stones of approved origin. Stones
shall range from 50mm to 100mm diameter and shall be washed and free of sand, debris and
fine material. Color shall be brown.
21.6.4 GEOTEXTILE FILTER FABRIC
A layer of geotextile filter fabric is to be installed on prepared ground formation below the
gravel bed layer/ gravel mulch in tree areas and where directed by the Engineer. A minimum
of 300mm overlap shall be provided at junctions between strips and roll ends. The fabric shall
be secured by steel pegs at maximum 3m intervals prior to covering with gravel layer.
May 2017 Page 21/55

The geotextile filter fabric shall be U. V. resistant and resistant to all naturally occurring soil
acids and alkalis and be non degradable.
The fabric membrane shall be manufactured from bonded non-woven or woven continuous
filament synthetic fibers.
The fabric shall be pliable and strong enough not to be damaged during placement and
subsequent backfilling yet permeable without clogging by possible ingress of fine particles and
flying sand.
The geotextile filter fabric shall be approved by the Engineer. The fabric shall not be
punctured, torn or otherwise damaged in any way during installation.
21.6.5 MODIFICATION TO EXISTING CHAMBERS
The contractor shall modify the existing chambers in the proposed Landscape area (if
required) to the approval of the Engineer and the concerned service authorities in order to
match the proposed landscape levels.
The Contractor has to use cream white crushed gravel size 20mm to fill the areas as shown
on landscape drawings. Depth of filling with gravel shall be at least 10 cm. Gravel shall be
installed on Geotextile membrane.
21.7 ANCILLARY WORKS
21.7.1 PAVING DESCRIPTION
This works shall consists of covering certain areas (Top of filtration chamber and 1.0 meter
around and 0.6 metre wide strip by the side of road kerbs all around landscape areas) with
paving blocks and heel kerbs in accordance with specifications, the drawings and Engineer’s
instructions.
21.7.2 PAVING BLOCKS
Paving blocks and heel kerbs shall be as per D.M. Roads Department standard Specification.
Paving blocks type shall be matching type available in the vicinity and/or as approved by RTA
Roads Department Services Co-ordination office all as per RTA Roads standard
specification.
21.7.3 OVERALL REQUIREMENTS FOR PAVINGS BLOCKS
The materials, dimensions and tolerances, test for comprehensive strength, test for water
absorption and certificate of compliance for the paving blocks shall conform to the
requirements of Local Order of 44/90. Water absorption and abrasion resistance shall be
carried out in accordance with the requirements of particular specifications.
21.7.4 BLOCK LAYING REQUIREMENTS
21.7.4.1 LAYING COURSE
The laying course shall consists of sharp black sand containing not more than 3% silt and
clay by weight and not more than 10 % retained on 4mm sieve. The sand shall be obtained
from single source, allowed to drain before use and shall be covered with suitable sheetings
to minimize moisture changes. Permissible sulphate (as SO3) and chloride (as Cl) shall not
exceed 0.3% and 0.5% respectively (expressed as a percentage by weight.).
21.7.4.2 The profile of laying course before compaction shall be similar to that of finished surface.
During laying, the sand shall be in uniform moisture content and screened carefully.,
May 2017 Page 21/56

screened to form smooth compacted surface to receive the paving blocks. The maximum
deviation from design shall be 5 mm.
21.7.4.3 The edge restrained to the paved areas shall be laid in advance of the laying course and all
permanent obstacles within the area, such as manhole covers shall be adjusted to the correct
finished levels.
SURFACE COURSE
21.7.4.4 The paving blocks shall be laid on sand laying course in such a manner as not to disturb the
blocks already laid. Each block shall be placed firmly against its neighbour so that they fit
closely together. The joints between the blocks shall exceed 3 mm. Laying of paving blocks
shall commence at right angles to the main pavement axis starting at one end of the area.
The paving blocks shall be laid in a herringbone pattern unless otherwise shown on the
drawings or instructed by the Engineer at 45 deg angle to main pavement axis.
21.7.4.5 Where blocks do not fit the edge restraints or other obstructions such as manholes or
upstands the gaps shall be filled using cut blocks.
21.7.4.6 Blocks shall be cut only by using a mechanical block splitter.
21.7.4.7 Dimensional accuracy, uniformity of joint gaps alignment and squareness shall be checked
after laying the first three layers of the blocks and thereafter at regular intervals. If joints begin
to open, the blocks shall be knocked together using a hide mallet.
21.7.4.8 After every 20 sq. m or such areas that has been agreed with the Engineer, has been laid the
blocks shall be compacted to the required levels using plate vibrator.
2
21.7.4.9 The plate vibrator shall have a plate area of 0.2 to 0.35 m . and have compaction force of 12-
24 kN and a frequency of approx. 75 to 100 Hz.
21.7.4.10 A minimum of two passes of plate vibrator shall be made in each direction i. e. at 90 deg to
each other. Vibration shall continue until no further compaction of sand layer is apparent. The
laying course shall have compacted thickness of 50 mm. Fine dry sand with particle size of
0.3 mm shall be then brushed over paving. And further passes of plate vibrator shall be made
in each direction, until sand is no longer absorbed in the joints.
21.7.4.11 The plate vibrator shall not pass closer than 1 mtr to a temporarily unrestrained edge during
laying.
21.7.4.12 No paving shall be left uncompacted overnight except for the 1mtr strip at the temporarily
unrestrained edge.
21.7.4.13 On compaction the finished surface level shall be within 5 mm of the design level and
maximum deviation within the compacted surface, measured by 3 mtr straight edge shall not
exceed 3mm. The level of any two adjacent blocks shall not differ more than 3 mm. Any
areas of paving which do not comply with these tolerances shall be removed. The sand laying
course adjusted and paving blocks re-laid to the correct levels.
21.7.5 KERBS DESCRIPTION
21.7.5.1 This work shall consist of the construction of kerbs in accordance with specifications and in
conformity with the lines grades and typical sections shown on the drawings or established by
the Engineer. These specifications refer to the following types of precast kerbs to be
constructed: Non mountable Kerbs, Dropped kerbs, Heel kerbs, Quadrants and Flush kerbs.
All kerbs and edgings shall be hydraulically pressed and shall comply with the requirements
May 2017 Page 21/57
of BS7263 Part 1. They shall be uniform in colour, free from cracks, flaws or other defects
and they shall have well defined arises.
21.7.6 MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURE OF KERBS
21.7.6.1 Materials shall confirm to the requirements specified in part 4 “concrete” of the specifications
and as specified here in.
21.7.6.2 As per D.M. Roads Department standard specification.

3
The Kerbs shall be prepared with a concrete mixture containing not less than 400 kg/m of
sulphate resisting Portland Cement. The aggregate shall meet the requirements of the
general Specifications and confirm to the required gradation.
21.7.7 GEOTEXTILE FILTER FABRIC
21.7.7.1 A Layer of geotextile filter fabric is to be installed on prepared ground formation below the
gravel bed layer/gravel mulch in areas shown on contract drawings and where directed by the
Engineer. A minimum of 300mm overlap shall be provided at junctions between strips and roll
ends. The fabric shall be secured by steel pegs at maximum 3m intervals prior to covering
with gravel layer.
The geotextile filter fabric shall be U.V resistant and resistant to all naturally occurring soil
acids and alkalis and be non degradable.
The fabric membrane shall be manufactured from bonded non-woven or woven continuous
filament synthetic fibers.
The fabric shall be pliable and strong enough not to be damaged during placement and
subsequent backfilling yet permeable without clogging by possible ingress of fine particles
and flying sand.
The geotextile filter fabric shall be approved by the Engineer. The fabric shall not be
punctured, torn or otherwise damaged in any way during installation.
May 2017 Page 21/58

ANNEX – I
PARTICULAR SPECIFICATION AND AMENDMENTS TO

ADMINISTRATIVE ORDER NO. 16 AND 22
APPLICABLE FOR DRAINAGE PROJECTS -
(CONTRACTOR TO OBTAIN SUBJECT SPECIFICATIONS & AMMENDMENTS FROM DM)
May 2017 Page 21/59

Roads & Transport Authority 1048/2 ط:عورﺷﻣﻟا 2020 وﺑﺳﻛا ضرﻌﻣﻟ قرطﻟا ﺔﻛﺑﺷ رﯾوطﺗ

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Roads & Transport Authority 1048/2 ط:عورﺷﻣﻟا 2020 وﺑﺳﻛا ضرﻌﻣﻟ قرطﻟا ﺔﻛﺑﺷ رﯾوطﺗ

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ROADS & TRANSPORT AUTHORITY

VOLUME 2 – Part III

DUBAI MUNICIPALITY DRAINAGE

Roads & Transport Authority

RTA May 2017

Volume 1 - Tenderer & Contract Conditions

Volume 2 – Part I - General Specifications

Volume 2 – Part II A - Particular Specifications

Volume 2 – Part II B - Particular Specifications

Volume 2 – Part II C - Particular Specifications

Volume 2 – Part III - Dubai Sewerage and Drainage Master Plan

Volume 2 – Part IV - Appendix to Dubai Sewerage and Drainage

Volume 3 - Bill of Quantities

Volume 4 - Tender and Contract Drawings

Volume 5 - Soil Investigation Report

May 2017 Tender Documents Page i

Volume 2 – PART III

1.0 GENERAL 1/1

1.1 GENERAL INFORMATION 1/1

1.2 SITE OFFICE FOR ENGINEER’S REPRESENTATIVE 1/4

1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1/11

May 2017 Tender Documents Page ii

1.3.14 Keeping the Works Free from Water 1/15

2.1 CLEARING & GRUBBING 2/1

2.2 REMOVAL OF STRUCTURES AND OBSTRUCTIONS 2/1

2.3 STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION 2/2

2.4 BACKFILLING EXCAVATIONS 2/13

May 2017 Tender Documents Page iii

2.5 PROTECTION OF EXISTING SERVICES AND REINSTATEMENT 2/16

3.0 CONCRETE WORKS

3.1 GENERAL 3/1

3.2 MATERIALS 3/1

3.3 MIXING AND TESTING 3/10

3.4 TRANSPORTING AND PLACING CONCRETE 3/16

3.5 COMPACTING CONCRETE 3/18

May 2017 Tender Documents Page iv

3.6 CURING OF CONCRETE 3/19

3.7 JOINTS IN CONCRETE 3/19

3.8 INSPECTION OF CONCRETE 3/22

3.9 FAULTY CONCRETE WORK 3/22

3.10 REPAIRS TO CONCRETE 3/22

3.11 SUPERVISION OF CONCRETE WORK 3/22

3.12 FINISHING OF CONCRETE 3/23

3.13 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF FORMWORK 3/23

3.14 READY MIXED CONCRETE 3/26

3.15 REINFORCEMENT STEEL 3/27

3.16 PRECAST CONCRETE KERBS, EDGINGS & QUADRANTS 3/30

3.17 IN-SITU CONCRETE EDGING 3/31

4.0 PIPES, PIPEWORK, MANHOLES AND CHAMBERS

May 2017 Tender Documents Page v

4.1 PIPE MATERIALS 4/1

4.2 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF PIPES 4/11

4.3 GRANULAR MATERIAL FOR PIPE BEDDING 4/13

4.4 CONVENTIONAL (OPEN TRENCH) PIPELINE CONSTRUCTION 4/14

May 2017 Tender Documents Page vi

4.4.12 Protection of Pipelines and Pipeline Component 4/24

4.5 PIPEWORK WITHIN STRUCTURES 4/27

4.6 MANHOLES, CHAMBERS, AND SPECIAL STRUCTURES 4/28

4.7 DUBAI MUNICIPALITY STANDARDS FOR COVERS AND GRATINGS 4/33

5.0 BRICKWORK AND BLOCKWORK

5.1 MATERIALS 5/1

5.2 CONSTRUCTION 5/2

6.0 INSPECTION AND TESTING OF PIPELINES AND STRUCTURES